Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutBID - 7426 TRANSFORT MAINTENANCE FACILITY EXPANSION (3)SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR TRANSFORT MAINTENANCE FACILITY EXPANSION BID NO. 7426 PURCHASING DIVISION 215 NORTH MASON STREET, 2ND FLOOR, FORT COLLINS SEPTEMBER 7, 2012 – 3:00 P.M. (OUR CLOCK) Financial Services Purchasing Division 215 N. Mason St. 2nd Floor PO Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 970.221.6775 970.221.6707 fcgov.com/purchasing CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Pages BID INFORMATION 00020 Notice Inviting Bids 00020-1 - 00020-2 00100 Instruction to Bidders 00100-1 - 00100-9 00300 Bid Form 00300-1 - 00300-3 00400 Supplements to Bid Forms 00400-1 00410 Bid Bond 00410-1 - 00410-2 00420 Statements of Bidders Qualifications 00420-1 - 00420-3 00430 Schedule of Major Subcontractors 00430-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 00500 Agreement Forms 00500-1 00510 Notice of Award 00510-0 00520 Agreement 00520-1 - 00520-6 00530 Notice to Proceed 00530-1 00600 Bonds and Certificates 00600-1 00610 Performance Bond 00610-1 - 00610-2 00615 Payment Bond 00615-1 - 00615-2 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00630-1 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00635-1 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00640-1 00650 Lien Waiver Release (Contractor) 00650-1 - 00650-2 00660 Consent of Surety 00660-1 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate 00670-1 - 00670-2 CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00700 General Conditions 00700-1 - 00700-34 Exhibit GC-A GC-A1 - GC-A2 00800 Supplementary Conditions 00800-1 - 00800-2 Federal Requirements Davis Bacon Wage Rates 00900 Addenda, Modifications, and Payment 00900-1 00950 Contract Change Order 00950-1 - 00950-2 00960 Application for Payment 00960-1 - 00960-4 SPECIFICATIONS SOILS REPORT SECTION 00020 INVITATION TO BID SECTION 00020 INVITATION TO BID Date: August 15, 2012 Sealed Bids will be received by the City of Fort Collins (hereinafter referred to as OWNER), at the office of the Purchasing Division, 3:00 P.M., our clock, on September 7, 2012, for the Transfort Maintenance Facility Expansion; BID NO. 7426. If delivered, they are to be delivered to 215 North Mason Street, 2nd Floor, Fort Collins, Colorado, 80524. If mailed, the mailing address is P. O. Box 580, Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580. At said place and time, and promptly thereafter, all Bids that have been duly received will be publicly opened and read aloud. The Contract Documents provide for the construction of Bid 7426. The Work of the construction of a 16,240 square feet addition to the existing Maintenance Facility, an approximately 65,620 square feet concrete driver training area and a 680 square feet addition to the Chassis Wash Facility, plus minor interior and exterior renovations to the Maintenance Facility, as well as related site work, landscaping and driveways. All Bids must be in accordance with the Contract Documents on file with the City of Fort Collins, 215 North Mason St., 2nd floor, Fort Collins, Colorado 80524. This is a Federal Transit Administration project and all bids must be in compliance with federal requirements, including conformance to Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise DBE goal for this project is 11%. A prebid conference and job walk with representatives of prospective Bidders will be held August 23, 2012 at 2:00 pm in the main conference room at the Transfort Maintenance Facility, 6750 Portner Road, Fort Collins. Prospective Bidders are invited to present their questions relative to this Bid proposal at this meeting. The Contract Documents and Construction Drawings may be examined online at:  City of Fort Collins BuySpeed: https://www.fcgov.com/eprocurement Bids will be received as set forth in the Bidding Documents. The Work is expected to be commenced within the time as required by Section 2.3 of General Conditions. Substantial Completion of the Work is required as specified in the Agreement. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond guaranteeing faithful performance and the payment of all bills and obligations arising from the performance of the Contract. No Bid may be withdrawn within a period of forty-five (45) days after the date fixed for opening Bids. The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any informalities and irregularities therein. Bid security in the amount of not less than 5% of the total Bid must accompany each Bid in the form specified in the Instructions to Bidders. Sales Prohibited/Conflict of Interest: No officer, employee, or member of City Council, shall have a financial interest in the sale to the City of any real or personal property, equipment, material, supplies or services where such officer or employee exercises directly or indirectly any decision- making authority concerning such sale or any supervisory authority over the services to be rendered. This rule also applies to subcontracts with the City. Soliciting or accepting any gift, gratuity favor, entertainment, kickback or any items of monetary value from any person who has or is seeking to do business with the City of Fort Collins is prohibited. City of Fort Collins James B. O'Neill, II, CPPO, FNIGP Purchasing & Risk Management Director SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.0 DEFINED TERMS Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract (No. 1910-8, 1990 ed.) have the meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid to OWNER, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a Bid to Bidder. The terms "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible and responsive Bidder to whom OWNER (on basis of OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). 2.0 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 2.1. Complete sets of Bidding Documents may be obtained as stated in the Invitation to Bid. No partial sets will be issued. The Bidding Documents may be examined at the locations identified in the Invitation to Bid. 2.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither OWNER nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 2.3. The submitted Bid proposal shall include Sections 00300, 00410, 00420, and 00430 fully executed. 2.4. OWNER and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 3.0 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 3.1 To demonstrate qualifications to perform the Work, each Bidder must submit at the time of the Bid opening, a written statement of qualifications including financial data, a summary of previous experience, previous commitments and evidence of authority to conduct business in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Each Bid must contain evidence of Bidder's qualification to do business in the state where the Project is located or covenant to obtain such qualification prior to award of the contract. The Statement of Qualifications shall be prepared on the form provided in Section 00420. 3.2. In accordance with Section 8-160 of the Code of the City of Fort Collins in determining whether a bidder is responsible, the following shall be considered: (1) The ability, capacity and skill of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the services required, (2) whether the bidder can perform the contract or provide the service promptly and within the time specified without delay or interference, (3) the character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience and efficiency of the bidder, (4) the quality of the bidder's performance of previous contracts or services, (5) the previous and existing compliance by the bidder with laws and ordinances relating to the contract or service, (6) the sufficiency of the financial resources and ability of the bidder to perform the contract or provide the service, (7) the quality, availability and adaptability of the materials and services to the particular use required, (8) the ability of the bidder to provide future maintenance and service for the use of the subject of the contract, and (9) any other circumstances which will affect the bidder's performance of the contract. 3.3. Each Bidder may be required to show that he has handled former Work so that no just claims are pending against such Work. No Bid will be accepted from a Bidder who is engaged on any other Work which would impair his ability to perform or finance this Work. 3.4 No Bidder shall be in default on the performance of any other contract with the City or in the payment of any taxes, licenses or other monies due to the City. 4.0 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 4.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to familiarize himself with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work, (c) familiarize himself with federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that may in any manner affect cost, progress or performance of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 4.2. Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for identification of: Subsurface and Physical Conditions SC-4.2. 4.3. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 5.0 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA. 5.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted in writing to the Engineer and the OWNER. Interpretation or clarifications considered necessary in response to such questions will be issued only by Addenda. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for opening of the Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 5.2. All questions concerning the scope of this project should be directed to the Engineer. Questions regarding submittal of bids should be directed to the City of Fort Collins' Purchasing Division. 5.3. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by OWNER or Engineer. 5.4. Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by the OWNER as having received the Bidding documents. 6.0 BID SECURITY 6.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to OWNER in the amount stated in the Invitation to Bid. The required security must be in the form of a certified or bank cashier's check payable to OWNER or a Bid Bond on the form enclosed herewith. The Bid Bond must be executed by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions for surety bonds. 6.2. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required contract security, whereupon Bid Security will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required contract security within 15 days of the Notice of Award, OWNER may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of that Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of other Bidders whom OWNER believes to have reasonable chance receiving the award may be retained by OWNER until the earlier of the seventh day after the effective date of the Agreement or the thirty-first day after the Bid Opening, whereupon Bid Security furnished by such Bidders will be returned. Bid Security with Bids which are not competitive will be returned within seven days after the Bid opening. 7.0 CONTRACT TIME. The number of days within which, or the date by which the Work is to be substantially complete and also completed and ready for Final Payment (the Contract Times) are set forth in the Agreement. 8.0 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement. 9.0 SUBSTITUTE ("OR EQUAL") MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if acceptable to Engineer, application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the "effective date of the Agreement". The procedure for submittal of any such application by CONTRACTOR and consideration by Engineer is set forth in the General Conditions which may be supplemented in the General Requirements. 10.0 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 10.1. Each Bidder shall submit at the Bid opening to OWNER a list of principal subcontractors he proposes to use in the Work. Refer to Section 00430 contained within these Documents. 10.2. If OWNER or Engineer after due investigation has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, either may, before the Notice of Award is given, request the apparent successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Bid price. If the apparent successful Bidder declines to make any substitution, OWNER may award the contract to the next lowest responsive and responsible Bidder that proposes to use acceptable subcontractors. Subcontractors, suppliers, other persons or organization listed and to whom OWNER or Engineer does not make written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER subject to revocation of such acceptance after the effective date of the Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 10.3. CONTRACTOR shall not be required to employ any subcontractor, supplier or other persons or organizations against whom he has reasonable objection. The use of subcontractors listed by the Bidder and accepted by OWNER prior to the Notice of Award will be required in the performance of the Work. 11.0 BID FORM. 11.1. A copy of the Bid Form is bound in the Contract Documents which may be retained by the Bidder. A separate unbound copy is enclosed for submission with the Bid. 11.2. Bid Forms must be complete in ink or typed. All lump sum prices on the form must be stated in words and numerals; in case of conflict, words will take precedence. Unit prices shall govern over extensions of sums. 11.3. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other appropriate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the corporate name. 11.4. Bids by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner, his title must appear under his signature and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. 11.5. Bids by joint venture shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture or by an authorized agent of each participant. The full name of each person or company interested in the Bid shall be listed on the Bid Form. 11.6. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda (the numbers of which must be filled in on the Bid Form). 11.7. No alterations in Bids, or in the printed forms therefore, by erasures, interpolations, or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by the Bidder; if initialed, OWNER may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so initialed. 11.8. The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall be shown. 12.0 BID PRICING. Bids must be priced as set forth in the Bid Schedule or Schedules. 13.0 SUBMISSION OF BIDS. 13.1. Bids shall be submitted at the time and place indicated in the Invitation to Bid and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope marked with the Project title, Bid No., and name and address of the Bidder and accompanied by the Bid Security, Bid Form, Bid Bond, Statement of Bidders Qualifications, and Schedule of Subcontractors as required in Section 00430. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face of it. 13.2. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Invitation to Bid, or any extension thereof made by addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. 13.3. Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, or facsimile Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 13.4. No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Multiple Bids under different names will not be accepted from one firm or association. 14.0 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS. 14.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in a manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids. 14.2. Bids may also be modified or withdrawn in person by the Bidder or an authorized representative provided he can prove his identity and authority at any time prior to the opening of Bids. 14.3. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. 15.0 OPENINGS OF BIDS. Bids will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly as indicated in the Invitation to Bid. An abstract of the amounts of the Base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available after the opening of Bids. 16.0 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE. All Bids shall remain open for forty-five (45) days after the day of the Bid Opening, but OWNER may, in his sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid Security prior to that date. 17.0 AWARD OF CONTRACT. 17.1. OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work, to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder, and the right to disregard all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, OWNER reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if OWNER believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by OWNER. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 17.2. In evaluating Bids, OWNER will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices and other data, as may be requested in the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award. 17.3. OWNER may consider the qualification and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations is submitted as requested by OWNER. OWNER also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award. 17.4. OWNER may conduct such investigations as OWNER deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of the Bidder's proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 17.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder whose evaluation by OWNER indicates to OWNER that the award will be in the best interest of the OWNER. Award shall be made on the evaluated lowest base bid excluding alternates. The basis for award shall be the lowest Bid total for the Schedule or, in the case of more than one schedule, for sum of all schedules. Only one contract will be awarded. 17.6. If the Contract is to be awarded, OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within forty-five (45) days after the date of the Bid opening. 18.0 CONTRACT SECURITY. The General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions set forth OWNER's requirements as to performance and other Bonds. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to the OWNER, it shall be accompanied by the required Contract Security. 19.0 SIGNING OF AGREEMENT. When OWNER gives a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement with all other written Contract Documents attached. Within fifteen (15) days thereafter, CONTRACTOR shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and attached documents to OWNER with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, OWNER hall deliver one fully signed counterpart to CONTRACTOR. Each counterpart is to be accompanied by a complete set of the Drawings with appropriate identification. 20.0 TAXES. OWNER is exempt from Colorado State Sales and Use Taxes on materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work. Said taxes shall not be included in the Contract Price. Reference is made to the General and Supplementary Conditions. 21.0 RETAINAGE. Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Agreement. 22.0 COLLUSIVE OR SHAM BIDS. Any Bid deemed by the City in its sole discretion to be a collusive or sham Bid will be rejected and reported to authorities as such. Your authorized signature of this Bid assures that such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid. 23.0 BID RESULTS. For information regarding results for individual Bids send a self-addressed, self-stamped envelope and a Bid tally will be mailed to you. Bid results will be posted in the Purchasing office seven (7) days after the Bid Opening. END OF SECTION SECTION 00300 BID FORM SECTION 00300 BID FORM PROJECT: 7426 Transfort Maintenace Facility Expansion Place: Date: 1. In compliance with your Invitation to Bid dated , 20 and subject to all conditions thereof, the undersigned a (Corporation, Limited Liability Company, Partnership, Joint Venture, or Sole Proprietor) authorized to do business in the State of Colorado hereby proposes to furnish and do everything required by the Contract Documents to which this refers for the construction of all items listed on the following Bid Schedule or Bid Schedules. 2. The undersigned Bidder does hereby declare and stipulate that this proposal is made in good faith, without collusion or connection with any other person or persons Bidding for the same Work, and that it is made in pursuance of and subject to all the terms and conditions of the Invitation to Bid and Instructions to Bidders, the Agreement, the detailed Specifications, and the Drawings pertaining to the Work to be done, all of which have been examined by the undersigned. 3. Accompanying this Bid is a certified or cashier's check or standard Bid bond in the sum of ($ ) in accordance with the Invitation To Bid and Instructions to Bidders. 4. The undersigned Bidder agrees to execute the Agreement and a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond for the amount of the total of this Bid within fifteen (15) calendar days from the date when the written notice of the award of the contract is delivered to him at the address given on this Bid. The name and address of the corporate surety with which the Bidder proposes to furnish the specified performance and payment Bonds is as follows: . 5. All the various phases of Work enumerated in the Contract Documents with their individual jobs and overhead, whether specifically mentioned, included by implication or appurtenant thereto, are to be performed by the CONTRACTOR under one of the items listed in the Bid Schedule, irrespective of whether it is named in said list. 6. Payment for Work performed will be in accordance with the Bid Schedule or Bid Schedules subject to changes as provided in the Contract Documents. 7. The undersigned Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of Addenda No. through . 8. BID SCHEDULE (Base Bid) LUMP SUM BASE BID $ IN WORDS: 9. PRICES The foregoing prices shall include all labor, materials, transportation, shoring, removal, dewatering, overhead, profit, insurance, etc., to cover the complete Work in place of the several kinds called for. Bidder acknowledges that the OWNER has the right to delete items in the Bid or change quantities at his sole discretion without affecting the Agreement or prices of any item so long as the deletion or change does not exceed twenty-five percent (25%) of the total Agreement Price. RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED: CONTRACTOR BY: Printed Date Title License Number (If Applicable) (Seal - if Bid is by corporation) Attest: Address Telephone Email SECTION 00400 SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS 00410 Bid Bond 00420 Statement of Bidder's Qualifications 00430 Schedule of Subcontractors SECTION 00410 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that we, the undersigned as Principal, and as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, Colorado, as OWNER, in the sum of $ for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, successors, and assigns. THE CONDITION of this obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the City of Fort Collins, Colorado the accompanying Bid and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a Construction Agreement for the construction of Fort Collins Project, . NOW THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a Contract in the form of Contract attached hereto (properly completed in accordance with said Bid) and shall furnish a BOND for his faithful performance of said Contract, and for payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect, it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its BOND shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the OWNER may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. Surety Companies executing bonds must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be accepted by the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seals this day of , 20__, and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers, the day and year first set forth above. PRINCIPAL SURETY Name: Address: By: By: Title: Title: ATTEST: By: (SEAL) (SEAL) SECTION 00420 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS All questions must be answered and the data given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires. 1. Name of Bidder: 2. Permanent main office address: 3. When organized: 4. If a corporation, where incorporated: 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name? 6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing the amount of each contract and the appropriate anticipated dates of completion.) 7. General character of Work performed by your company: 8. Have you ever failed to complete any Work awarded to you? If so, where and why? 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? 10. Are you debarred by any government agency? If yes list agency name. 11. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost of each, and the month and year completed, location and type of construction. 12. List your major equipment available for this contract. 13. Experience in construction Work similar in importance to this project: 14. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including officers: 15. Credit available: $ 16. Bank Reference: 17. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the OWNER? 18. Are you licensed as a General Contractor? If yes, in what city, county and state? What class, license and numbers? 19. Do you anticipate subcontracting Work under this Contract? If yes, what percent of total contract? And to whom? 20. Are any lawsuits pending against you or your firm at this time? IF yes, DETAIL 21. What are the limits of your public liability? DETAIL What company? 22. What are your company's bonding limitations? 23. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm or corporation to furnish any information requested by the OWNER in verification of the recital comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. Dated at ________________ this ______ day of __________________, 20__. Company: By: Printed: Title: State of County of being duly sworn deposes and says that he is of (Name) (Organization) and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this _______ day of____________, 20__. (Seal) Notary Public My commission expires: . SECTION 00430 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS List all subcontractors for the work items listed below and all subcontractors performing over 10% of the contract. ITEM SUBCONTRACTOR BUY AMERICA The contractor agrees to comply with 49 U.S.C. 5323(j) and 49 C.F.R. Part 661, which provide that Federal funds may not be obligated unless steel, iron, and manufactured products used in FTA-funded projects are produced in the United States, unless a waiver has been granted by FTA or the product is subject to a general waiver. General waivers are listed in 49 C.F.R. 661.7, and include final assembly in the United States for 15 passenger vans and 15 passenger wagons produced by Chrysler Corporation, and microcomputer equipment and software. Separate requirements for rolling stock are set out at 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(C) and 49 C.F.R. 661.11. Rolling stock must be assembled in the United States and have a 60 percent domestic content. A bidder or offeror must submit to the FTA recipient the appropriate Buy America certification (below) with all bids or offers on FTA-funded contracts, except those subject to a general waiver. Bids or offers that are not accompanied by a completed Buy America certification must be rejected as nonresponsive. This requirement does not apply to lower tier subcontractors. Certification requirement for procurement of steel, iron, or manufactured products Certificate of Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(1) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will meet the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(1) and the applicable regulations in 49 C.F.R. Part 661.5. Date _____________________________________________________________________ Signature _________________________________________________________________ Company Name ____________________________________________________________ Title _____________________________________________________________________ Certificate of Non-Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(1) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(1) and 49 C.F.R. 661.5, but it may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(A), 5323(j)(2)(B), or 5323(j)(2)(D), and 49 C.F.R. 661.7. Date _____________________________________________________________________ Signature _________________________________________________________________ Company Name ___________________________________________________________ Title _____________________________________________________________________ Certification requirement for procurement of buses, other rolling stock and associated equipment Certificate of Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(C). The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(C) and the regulations at 49 C.F.R. Part 661.11. Date __________________________________________________________________ Signature ______________________________________________________________ Company Name ________________________________________________________ Title __________________________________________________________________ Certificate of Non-Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(C) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(C) and 49 C.F.R. 661.11, but may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(A), 5323(j)(2)(B), or 5323(j)(2)(D), and 49 CFR 661.7. Date __________________________________________________________________ Signature ______________________________________________________________ Company Name ________________________________________________________ Title __________________________________________________________________ Certification Regarding Lobbying Certification for Contracts, Grants, Loans, and Cooperative Agreements Modifications have been made to the Clause pursuant to Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, P.L. 104-65 [to be codified at 2 U.S.C. § 1601, et seq.] - Lobbying Certification and Disclosure of Lobbying Activities for third party contractors are mandated by 31 U.S.C. 1352(b)(5), as amended by Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, and DOT implementing regulation, "New Restrictions on Lobbying," at 49 CFR § 20.110(d) - Language in Lobbying Certification is mandated by 49 CFR Part 19, Appendix A, Section 7, which provides that contractors file the certification required by 49 CFR Part 20, Appendix A. Modifications have been made to the Lobbying Certification pursuant to Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995. - Use of "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities," Standard Form-LLL set forth in Appendix B of 49 CFR Part 20, as amended by "Government wide Guidance For New Restrictions on Lobbying," 61 Fed. Reg. 1413 (1/19/96) is mandated by 49 CFR Part 20, Appendix A. Byrd Anti-Lobbying Amendment, 31 U.S.C. 1352, as amended by the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, P.L. 104-65 [to be codified at 2 U.S.C. § 1601, et seq.] - Contractors who apply or bid for an award of $100,000 or more shall file the certification required by 49 CFR part 20, "New Restrictions on Lobbying." Each tier certifies to the tier above that it will not and has not used Federal appropriated funds to pay any person or organization for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a member of Congress, officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with obtaining any Federal contract, grant or any other award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Each tier shall also disclose the name of any registrant under the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 who has made lobbying contacts on its behalf with non-Federal funds with respect to that Federal contract, grant or award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Such disclosures are forwarded from tier to tier up to the recipient. APPENDIX A, 49 CFR PART 20--CERTIFICATION REGARDING LOBBYING Certification for Contracts, Grants, Loans, and Cooperative Agreements (To be submitted with each bid or offer exceeding $100,000) The undersigned [Contractor] certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that: (1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of an agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. (2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for making lobbying contacts to an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form--LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying," in accordance with its instructions [as amended by "Government wide Guidance for New Restrictions on Lobbying," 61 Fed. Reg. 1413 (1/19/96). Note: Language in paragraph (2) herein has been modified in accordance with Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 (P.L. 104-65, to be codified at 2 U.S.C. 1601, et seq.)] (3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for all subawards at all tiers (including subcontracts, subgrants, and contracts under grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all subrecipients shall certify and disclose accordingly. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by 31, U.S.C. § 1352 (as amended by the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995). Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure. [Note: Pursuant to 31 U.S.C. § 1352(c)(1)-(2)(A), any person who makes a prohibited expenditure or fails to file or amend a required certification or disclosure form shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such expenditure or failure.] The Contractor, ___________________, certifies or affirms the truthfulness and accuracy of each statement of its certification and disclosure, if any. In addition, the Contractor understands and agrees that the provisions of 31 U.S.C. A 3801, et seq., apply to this certification and disclosure, if any. __________________________ Signature of Contractor's Authorized Official __________________________ Name and Title of Contractor's Authorized Official ___________________________ Date COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION BIDDERS LIST DATA and UNDERUTILIZED DBE (UDBE) BID CONDITIONS ASSURANCE Project #: Location: Prime Contractor Instructions: This form has two sections, both must be completed and submitted with your bid. Complete Section I to list all subcontract quotes received (non-DBE and DBE). Complete Section II to report only Underutilized DBE (UDBE) participation percentages which qualify under the contract goal specification for this project. Please review CDOT Form #715 instructions before completing Section II. Attach additional sheets as necessary. POLICY It is the policy of the Colorado Department of Transportation that underutilized disadvantaged business enterprises have equal opportunity to participate on projects financed with federal, state or local entity funds. Consistent with 49 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Part 26.11, the Bidders List data provided by the Contractors will provide CDOT as accurate data as possible about the universe of DBE and non-DBE firms actively seeking work on its highway construction contracts, for use in setting overall DBE goals. SECTION I: CDOT BIDDERS LIST INFORMATION (Non-DBEs and DBEs) 1) Are all subcontract bids (quotes) received by your firm for this project listed below? ❑ Yes ❑ No 2) If No, make certain any additional subcontract bidding information is submitted to the CDOT Business Programs Office before 4:00 pm on the day after bids are opened to ensure CDOT has the best data possible for setting future DBE goals (use the same table format as below): CDOT Business Programs Office 4201 E. Arkansas Ave., Room 200 Denver, Colorado 80222 FAX: 303-757-9019 EMAIL: eo@dot.state.co.us 3) The most recent CDOT Bidders List will be posted online at: www.dot.state.co.us/EEO/DBEProgramPage.htm Name of firm submitting Bid/Quote Certified DBE firm? Work item(s) description Firm being used? Yes No Yes No Maybe 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Page 1 of 2 Previous editions are obsolete and may not be used CDOT Form #714 4/08 Name of firm submitting Bid/Quote Certified DBE firm? Work item(s) description Firm being used? Yes No Yes No Maybe 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. SECTION II: UNDERUTILIZED DBE (UDBE) PARTICIPATION COMMITMENT 1) Total eligible Underutilized DBE (UDBE) percentage amount from Box A below: . % 2) Will your company’s Underutilized DBE (UDBE) participation commitment meet the contract goal? ❑ Yes ❑ No 3) List the UDBE firms, committed work items, and eligible UDBE percentage of your bid committed to each. UDBE Firm name Certification # Committed work item(s) % Commitment toward DBE Goal* 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. BOX A: TOTAL ELIGIBLE UDBE PERCENTAGE AMOUNT (Round to nearest hundredth) * Detailed instructions on how to calculate DBE commitment amounts are available on CDOT Form #715 and in the “Counting DBE Participation Toward Contract Goals and CDOT’s annual DBE goal” section of the “DBE – Definitions and Requirements” in the Standard Special Provisions. I understand that, if my company is determined to be the low bidder for the contract on this project, I must submit a completed CDOT Form #715 CERTIFICATION OF UNDERUTILIZED DBE PARTICIPATION for each firm listed in Section II of this form to the Transportation Department by 4:00 pm on the third work day after the day bids are opened. The actual amounts submitted on each CDOT Form #715 must equal or exceed the DBE percentage commitments documented on this form. In addition, if my company does not meet the DBE/UDBE goal for this project, I must submit a completed CDOT Form #718 DBE GOOD FAITH EFFORT DOCUMENTATION before 4:00 pm on the day after bids are opened. CDOT Form #715s submitted for firms not included on this form, OR for amounts exceeding those listed on this form, will be accepted but NOT counted as Good Faith Efforts. Only the efforts the contractor made prior to the bid opening will count as Good Faith Efforts. I understand my obligation to abide by the Policy stated above Section I. I shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, age, sex, national origin, or handicap in the bidding process or the performance of contracts. I DECLARE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY IN THE SECOND DEGREE, AND ANY OTHER APPLICABLE STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS, THAT THE STATEMENTS MADE IN THIS DOCUMENT ARE TRUE AND COMPLETE TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE. . % . % . % . % . % . % Company Name: Date: Company Officer Signature: Title: / / Page 2 of 2 Previous editions are obsolete and may not be used CDOT Form #714 4/08 Project No.: Project Code (SA#): COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION CERTIFICATE OF PROPOSED UNDERUTILIZED DBE (UDBE) PARTICIPATION Location: Form #: of Prime Contractor – Send completed/signed form to the Business Programs Office (instructions on second page). The “Eligible UDBE Amounts” submitted on this form must equal or exceed the commitment(s) documented on the CDOT Form 714 you submitted with your bid. For the complete list of certified DBE/UDBE firms and their DBE work codes go to http://www.dot.state.co.us/app_ucp/ NOTE: See 49 CFR part 26.55, and the “DBE - Definitions and Requirements” in the Standard Special Provisions, for further information concerning counting DBE participation of truckers, subcontractors, suppliers and service providers toward the project’s UDBE goal. PART 1a – TRUCKING CONTRACT If the UDBE is being used as a trucker for one or more “trucking” DBE work codes (25500, 25505 etc.) then: ƒ ACTUAL UDBE AMOUNT = Actual contract amount for the transportation services provided by the UDBE firm and any UDBE lessees. ƒ ELIGIBLE UDBE TRUCKING AMOUNT = [ (ACTUAL UDBE AMOUNT) – (Any non-UDBE lessee amounts in this contract)* ] * For work done on this UDBE contract with non-UDBE lessees, credit toward the project UDBE goal is given only for the broker fees or commissions the UDBE trucker receives for arranging the transportations services, because the services themselves are being performed by non-UDBEs. NAME OF UDBE FIRM CERTIFICATION # EXPIRATION DATE ELIGIBLE UDBE TRUCKING AMOUNT / / $ DBE WORK CODE NUMBER(S) THIS UDBE IS BEING USED FOR : Complete list of work codes is at http://www.dot.state.co.us/app_ucp/ PART 1b – SUBCONTRACT ƒ ELIGIBLE UDBE SUBCONTRACT AMOUNT = [ (Actual UDBE contract amount) – (Any non-UDBE lower tier amounts in this contract)* ] * Work that a UDBE subcontracts to a lower tier non-UDBE firm does not count toward the project UDBE goal. NAME OF UDBE FIRM CERTIFICATION # EXPIRATION DATE ELIGIBLE UDBE SUBCONTRACT AMOUNT / / $ DBE WORK CODE NUMBER(S) THIS UDBE IS BEING USED FOR : Complete list of work codes is at http://www.dot.state.co.us/app_ucp/ PART 1c – SUPPLY CONTRACT If the supplier is a UDBE with a “Type” field of “Manufacturer” for the item(s): ƒ ELIGIBLE UDBE SUPPLY AMOUNT = [ (Actual UDBE contract amount) X 100% ] If the supplier is a UDBE with a “Type” field of “Regular Dealer” for the item(s): ƒ ELIGIBLE UDBE SUPPLY AMOUNT = [ (Actual UDBE contract amount) X 60% ] NOTE: If the supplier is a UDBE with a “Type” field of “Broker” for the item(s) use PART 1d – BROKER / SERVICE CONTRACT. NAME OF UDBE FIRM CERTIFICATION # EXPIRATION DATE ELIGIBLE UDBE SUPPLY AMOUNT / / $ DBE WORK CODE NUMBER(S) THIS UDBE IS BEING USED FOR : Complete list of work codes is at http://www.dot.state.co.us/app_ucp/ PART 1d – BROKER / SERVICE CONTRACT If purchasing materials or supplies through a UDBE with a “Type” field of “Broker”, count only the amount of brokerage commission and/or delivery service fees included in the contract. Other examples of services to include in this section are bonding, brokering, consulting, security guards, and insurance etc. ƒ ELIGIBLE UDBE SERVICE FEE AMOUNT = Actual compensation retained by the UDBE broker/agent for services rendered* * The amounts that count toward UDBE goals are limited to the compensation retained by the UDBE broker/agent for services rendered, provided the fee/commission is determined by CDOT to be reasonable and not excessive as compared with fees customarily charged for similar services. NAME OF UDBE FIRM CERTIFICATION # EXPIRATION DATE ELIGIBLE UDBE SERVICE FEE AMOUNT / / $ DBE WORK CODE NUMBER(S) THIS UDBE IS BEING USED FOR : Complete list of work codes is at http://www.dot.state.co.us/app_ucp/ Original – Business Programs Office Previous editions may not be used CDOT Form 715 – Page 1 of 2 1/06 PART 2 – UDBE PARTICIPATION SUMMARY A) What is the total dollar value of this proposed trucking, subcontract, supply, OR broker/service contract that is eligible for counting toward contract goals? A = [ TOTAL FROM “ELIGIBLE” COLUMNS IN PART 1 ] NOTE: Provide in actual subcontractor dollars and not prime contract prices. A> $ B) What is the total dollar value of proposed subcontracts that are eligible for counting towards contract goals from prior sheets/forms? B> $ C) What is the accumulative value of proposed subcontracts that are eligible for counting towards contract goals? C = [ A + B ] C> $ D) What is the original contract bid total? D> $ E) What is the accumulative percent of contract bid total subcontracted to all underutilized DBEs? E = [ (C ÷ D) X 100 ] E> % PART 3 – UDBE CONFIRMATION I confirm that my company is participating in this contract as documented in the Prime Contractor’s commitment(s) in PART 1 of this form. Only the value of the work that my company is actually performing is being counted on this form. UDBE Firm Name: Date: / / UDBE Representative Signature and Title: PART 4 – PRIME CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION I certify that: • my company has met the contracted UDBE goals or has submitted a completed CDOT Form #718. • my company has accepted a proposal from the UDBE named above. • my company has notified the proposed UDBE of the contracted UDBE commitment. • my company has ensured that the proposed UDBE has signed PART 3 of this form. • my company's use of the proposed UDBE for the items of work listed above is a condition of the contract award. • my company will invite the proposed UDBE to attend the preconstruction conference. • my company will not use a substitute UDBE for the proposed UDBE's failure to perform under a fully executed subcontract, unless my company complies with the definitions and requirements section of the DBE Special Provisions. • I understand that failure to comply with the information shown on this form will be considered grounds for contract termination. I declare under penalty of perjury in the second degree, and any other applicable state or federal laws, that the statements made on this document are true and complete to the best of my knowledge. Prime Contractor Name: Date: / / Officer Signature and Title: FORM INSTRUCTIONS Prime Contractor: 1. An officer of the contractor(s) must complete this form. 2. Include only DBE firms which meet the underutilized criteria in the contract goal specification for this project (i.e., UDBE firms). 3. Complete only relevant section(s) for PART 1. 4. Ensure that the proposed UDBE has signed PART 3 of this form. 5. Complete ALL sections of PART 2 and PART 4. 6. Submit a separate CDOT Form #715 for EACH proposed UDBE. 7. Retain a photocopy for your records. 8. Send original to: Colorado Department of Transportation Business Programs Office 4201 E. Arkansas Ave. Denver, Colorado 80222 FAX: (303) 757-9019 Original – Business Programs Office Previous editions may not be used CDOT Form 715 – Page 2 of 2 1/06 SECTION 00500 AGREEMENT FORMS 00510 Notice of Award 00520 Agreement 00530 Notice to Proceed SECTION 00510 NOTICE OF AWARD DATE: TO: PROJECT: 7426 Transfort Maintenance Facility Expansion OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER") You are hereby notified that your Bid dated , 20 for the above project has been considered. You are the apparent successful Bidder and have been awarded an Agreement for 7426 Transfort Maintenance Facility Expansion. The Price of your Agreement is ($ ). Three (3) copies of each of the proposed Contract Documents (except Drawings) accompany this Notice of Award. Three (3) sets of the Drawings will be delivered separately or otherwise made available to you immediately. You must comply with the following conditions precedent within fifteen (15) days of the date of this Notice of Award, that is by , 20 . 1. You must deliver to the OWNER three (3) fully executed counterparts of the Agreement including all the Contract Documents. Each of the Contract Documents must bear your signature on the cover of the page. 2. You must deliver with the executed Agreement the Contract Security (Bonds) as specified in the Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions (Article 5.1) and Supplementary Conditions. Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle OWNER to consider your Bid abandoned, to annul this Notice of Award and to declare your Bid Security forfeited. Within ten (10) days after you comply with those conditions, OWNER will return to you one (1) fully-signed counterpart of the Agreement with the Contract Documents attached. City of Fort Collins OWNER By: James B. O’Neill, II, CPPO, FNIGP Director of Purchasing & Risk Management SECTION 00520 AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is dated as of the day of in the year of 20 and shall be effective on the date this AGREEMENT is signed by the City. The City of Fort Collins (hereinafter called OWNER) and (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR) OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: ARTICLE 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part is defined as the construction of the 7426 Transfort Maintenance Facility Expansion and is generally described in Section 01010. ARTICLE 2. ENGINEER The Project has been designed by Aller Lingle Massey. The City of Fort Collins Operation Services Project Manager, who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who will assume all duties and responsibilities and will have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 3. CONTRACT TIMES 3.1 The Work shall be Substantially Complete within three hundred(300) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the General Conditions and completed and ready for Final Payment and Acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions within thirty (30) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. 3.2. Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1. above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expenses and difficulties involved in proving in a legal preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as Liquidated damages for delay (but not as penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amounts set forth hereafter. 1) Substantial Completion: Five Hundred Dollars ($500.00) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the three hundred (300) calendar day period for Substantial Completion of the Work until the Work is Substantially Complete. 2) Final Acceptance: After Substantial Completion, zero Dollars ($0.00) for each calendar day or fraction thereof that expires after the thirty (30) calendar day period for Final Payment and Acceptance until the Work is ready for Final Payment and Acceptance. ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds as follows: Dollars ($ ), in accordance with Section 00300, attached and incorporated herein by this reference. ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1. PROGRESS PAYMENTS. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER, once each month during construction as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of values established in paragraph 2.6 of the General Conditions and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of units completed, and in accordance with the General Requirements concerning Unit Price Work. 5.1.1. Prior to Substantial Completion, Owner will be entitled to withhold as contract retainage five percent (5%) of each progress payment, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions. If , in the sole discretion of Owner, on recommendation of Engineer, Owner determines that the character and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to OWNER and ENGINEER, OWNER may determine that as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to them, there will be no additional retainage on account of Work completed in which case the remaining progress payments prior to Substantial Completion will be in an amount equal to 100% of the Work completed. 95% of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to OWNER as provided in paragraph 14.2 of the General Conditions) may be included in the application Section 00520 Page 3 for payment. 5.1.2. Upon Substantial Completion payment will be made in an amount sufficient, if necessary, to increase total payments to CONTRACTOR to 95% of the Contract Price, less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine or OWNER may withhold in accordance with paragraph 14.7 of the General Conditions or as provided by law. 5.2. FINAL PAYMENT. Upon Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 14.13 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 14.13. ARTICLE 6. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 6.1. CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and with all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. 6.2. CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are identified in the Supplementary Conditions as provided in paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions. 6.3. CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraph 6.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical condition at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.2 of the General Conditions; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 6.4. CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said Underground Facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said Underground Facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including specifically the provision of paragraph 4.3. of the General Conditions. 6.5. CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, tests, reports and data with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 6.6. CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR. ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7.1 The Contract Documents which comprise the entire Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work consist of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, those items included in the definition of “Contract Documents” in Article 1.10 of the General Conditions, and such other items as are referenced in this Article 7, all of which are incorporated herein by this reference. 7.2 Forms for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work and related actions in carrying out the terms of this Agreement are deemed Contract Documents and incorporated herein by this reference, and include, but are not limited to, the following: 7.2.1 Certificate of Substantial Completion 7.2.2 Certificate of Final Acceptance 7.2.3 Lien Waiver Releases 7.2.4 Consent of Surety 7.2.5 Application for Exemption Certificate 7.2.6 Application for Payment 7.3 Drawings, consisting of a cover sheet and sheets numbered as follows: GENERAL 1 SURVEY PLAT CIVIL C0.0 COVER SHEET C0.1 GENERAL NOTES C1.0 EXISTING & DEMOLITION PLAN C2.0 OVERALL UTILITY PLAN C3.0 HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN C3.14 CHASSIS WASH C4.0 GRADING & EROSION CONTROL PLAN C5.0 SITE DETAILS LANDSCAPE L1.0 LANDSCAPE PLAN L1.1 TREE MITIGATION PLAN SP1.0 SITE PLAN ARCHITECTURAL G0.1 REFERENCE PLAN G0.2 CODE PLAN D1.1 DEMOLITION PLAN A1.1 CHASSIS WASH/SERVICE PIT FLOOR PLAN A1.2 GARAGE ADDITION A2.1 ROOF PLANS A4.1 ELEVATIONS A5.1 CHASSIS WASH BUILDING SECTIONS A5.2 GARAGE SECTIONS A6.1 WALL SECTIONS A7.1 DETAILS, DOOR SCHEDULE & TYPLES A7.2 DETAILS A7.3 VEHICLE GATES STRUCTURAL S0.1 GENERAL NOTES S1.1 CHASSIS WASH EXP. S1.2 GARAGE ADDITION FOUNDATION PLAN S1.3 GARAGE ADDITION SLAB PLAN S1.3 GARAGE ADDITION FRAMING PLAN S5.1 FOUNDATION DETAILS S5.2 FRAMING DETAILS S5.3 FRAMING DETAILS MECHANICAL M1.0 MECHANICAL SITE PLAN M1.1 CHASSIS WASH/SERVICE PIT MECHANICAL PLAN M1.2 GARAGE ADDITION MECHANICAL PLAN M2.1 LEGEND, SCHEDULE & DETAILS ELECTRICAL E1.0 DETAILS E2.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E3.0 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM E4.0 GARAGE ADDITION ELECTRICAL PLAN E5.0 CHASSIS WASH/MAINTENANCE ELECTRICAL PLAN The Contract Drawings shall be stamped "Final for Construction" and dated. Any revisions made shall be clearly identified and dated. 7.4. Addenda Numbers to , inclusive. 7.5. The Contract Documents also include all written amendments and other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents pursuant to paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. 7.6. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed or incorporated by reference in this Article 7. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in paragraphs 3.5 and 3.6 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 8. MISCELLANEOUS 8.1. Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article I of the General Conditions shall have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 8.2. No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but not without limitations, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment no assignment will release or discharge that assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Document. 8.3. OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect to all covenants, Agreement and obligations contained in the Contract Document. OWNER: CITY OF FORT COLLINS CONTRACTOR: By: By: DARIN ATTEBERRY, CITY MANAGER By: JAMES B. O’NEILL II, CPPO, FNIGP PRINTED DIRECTOR OF PURCHASING AND RISK MANAGEMENT Title: Title: Date: Date: Attest: (CORPORATE SEAL) City Clerk Address for giving notices: P. O. Box 580 Fort Collins, CO 80522 Attest: Approved as to Form Address for giving notices: Assistant City Attorney License No.: SECTION 00530 NOTICE TO PROCEED Description of Work: To: This notice is to advise you: That the contract covering the above described Work has been fully executed by the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER. That the required CONTRACTOR's Performance Bond and Payment Bond have been received by the OWNER. That the OWNER has approved the said Contract Documents. Therefore, as the CONTRACTOR for the above described Work, you are hereby authorized and directed to proceed within ( ) calendar days from receipt of this notice as required by the Agreement. Dated this day of , 20 . The dates for Substantial Completion and Final Acceptance shall be , 20_ and , 20__, respectively. City of Fort Collins OWNER By: Title: ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of , 20__. CONTRACTOR: By: Title: SECTION 00600 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00610 Performance Bond 00615 Payment Bond 00630 Certificate of Insurance 00635 Certificate of Substantial Completion 00640 Certificate of Final Acceptance 00650 Lien Waiver Release (CONTRACTOR) 00660 Consent of Surety 00670 Application for Exemption Certificate SECTION 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (firm) (address) (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and (Firm) (Address) hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave, Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER", in the penal sum of ____________ in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the day of , 20 , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins Project, 7426 Transfort Maintenance Facility Expansion. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of said Agreement during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the OWNER, with or without Notice to the Surety and during the life of the guaranty period, and if the Principal shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such Agreement, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the OWNER from all cost and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the OWNER all outlay and expense which the OWNER may incur in making good any default then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this _____ day of _____ ____, 20__. IN PRESENCE OF: Principal (Title) (Title) (Corporate Seal) (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners _____________________________ By: _____________________________ By: IN PRESENCE OF: Surety _____________________________ By:_____________________________________ _____________________________ (Address) (Surety Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. SECTION 00615 PAYMENT BOND Bond No. KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (firm) (address) (an Individual), (a Partnership), (a Corporation), hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and (Firm) (Address) hereinafter referred to as "the Surety", are held and firmly bound unto the City of Fort Collins, 300 Laporte Ave., Fort Collins, Colorado 80522 a (Municipal Corporation) hereinafter referred to as "the OWNER", in the penal sum of in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that whereas the Principal entered into a certain Agreement with the OWNER, dated the day of , 20 , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the performance of The City of Fort Collins project, 7426 Transfort Maintenance Facility Expansion. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall make payment to all persons, firms, subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the Work provided for in such Agreement and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed, rented or used in connection with the construction of such Work, and all insurance premiums on said Work, and for all labor, performed in such Work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work to be performed thereunder or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond; and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Agreement or to the Work or to the Specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the Surety Company must be authorized to transact business in the State of Colorado and be acceptable to the OWNER. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in three (3) counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this day of , 20__. IN PRESENCE OF: Principal (Title) (Title) (Corporate Seal) (Address) IN PRESENCE OF: Other Partners _____________________________ By: _____________________________ By: IN PRESENCE OF: Surety _____________________________ By:_____________________________________ _____________________________ (Address) (Surety Seal) NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Agreement. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute Bond. SECTION 00630 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACTOR shall insert his own standard form for Certificate of Insurance. SECTION 00635 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION TO: CITY OF FORT COLLINS (OWNER) DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: PROJECT TITLE:7426 Transfort Maintenance Facility Addition PROJECT OR SPECIFIED PART SHALL LOCATION: Fort Collins, Colorado INCLUDE: OWNER: City of Fort Collins CONTRACTOR: CONTRACT DATE: The Work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER and the project or specified part of the project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ENGINEER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The CONTRACTOR accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. CONTRACTOR AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE The OWNER accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially complete and will assume full possession of the project or specified area of the project at 12:01 a.m., on . The responsibility for heat, utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth under "Remarks" below. CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO By: OWNER AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE DATE REMARKS: SECTION 00640 CERTIFICATE OF FINAL ACCEPTANCE , 20__ TO: Gentlemen: You are hereby notified that on the day of , 20__, the City of Fort Collins, Colorado, has accepted the Work completed by for the City of Fort Collins project, 7426 Transfort Maintenance Facility Expansion. A check is attached hereto in the amount of $ as Final Payment for all Work done, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents which are dated , 20 . In conformance with the Contract Documents for this project, your obligations and guarantees will continue for the specified time from the following date:____________ _, 20__. Sincerely, OWNER: City of Fort Collins By: Title: ATTEST: Title: SECTION 00650 LIEN WAIVER RELEASE (CONTRACTOR) TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (OWNER) FROM: (CONTRACTOR) PROJECT: 7426 Transfort Maintenance Facility Expansion 1. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges having received payment, except retainage from the OWNER for all work, labor, skill and material furnished, delivered and performed by the CONTRACTOR for the OWNER or for anyone in the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project. 2. In consideration of such payment and other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and adequacy of which are hereby acknowledged, the CONTRACTOR voluntarily waives all rights, claims and liens, including but not limited to, mechanic's liens, Miller Act claims (40 U.S.C.A. 270 a and b), stop notices, equitable liens and labor and material bond rights which the CONTRACTOR may now or may afterward have, claim or assert for all and any work, labor, skill or materials furnished, delivered or performed for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the above described project, against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns, against any fund of or in the possession or control of the OWNER, against the project or against all land and the buildings on and appurtenances to the land improved by the project. 3. The CONTRACTOR affirms that all work, labor and materials, furnished, delivered or performed to or for the construction, design, improvement, alteration, addition or repair of the project were furnished, delivered or performed by the CONTRACTOR or its agents, employees, and servants, or by and through the CONTRACTOR by various Subcontractors or materialmen or their agents, employees and servants and further affirms the same have been paid in full and have released in full any and all existing or possible future mechanic's liens or rights or claims against the project or any funds in the OWNER'S possession or control concerning the project or against the OWNER or its officers, agents, employees or assigns arising out of the project. 4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the lender, if any, and the Surety on the project against and from any claim hereinafter made by the CONTRACTOR'S Subcontractors, materialmen, employees, servants, agents or assigns against the project or against the OWNER or its officers, employees, agents or assigns arising out of the project for all loss, damage and costs, including reasonable attorneys fees, incurred as a result of such claims. 5. The parties acknowledge that the description of the project set forth above constitutes and adequate description of the property and improvements to which this Lien Waiver Release pertains. It is further acknowledged that this Lien Waiver Release is for the benefit of and may be relied upon by the OWNER, the lender, if any, and Surety on any labor and material bonds for the project. Signed this day of , 20__. CONTRACTOR: By: Title: ATTEST: Secretary STATE OF COLORADO ) )ss. COUNTY OF LARIMER ) Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 20__, by . Witness my hand and official seal. Notary Public My Commission Expires: SECTION 00660 CONSENT OF SURETY TO: City of Fort Collins, Colorado (hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER") CONTRACTOR: PROJECT: 7426 Transfort Maintenance Facility Expansion CONTRACT DATE: In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as indicated above, for . (Surety) on bond of hereby approves of the Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR, and agrees that Final Payment to the CONTRACTOR shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligations to the OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company's Bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this day of , 20____ . (Surety Company) By: ATTACH: Power of Attorney and Certificate of Authority of Attorney(s)-in-Fact. SECTION 00670 APPLICATION FOR EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE Special Notice Contractors who have completed this application in the past, please note the following changes in procedure: The Department will no longer issue individual Certificates of exemption to subcontractors. Only prime contractors will receive a Contractor’s Exemption Certificate on exempt projects. Upon receipt of the Certificate, the prime contractor should make a copy for each subcontractor involved in the project and complete it by filling in the subcontractor’s name and address and signing it. The original Certificate should always be retained by the prime contractor. Copies of all Certificates that the prime contractor issued to subcontractors should be kept at the prime contractor’s place of business for a minimum of three years and be available for inspection in the event of an audit. Once an 89# has been assigned to you, please use the next five numbers following it for any applications submitted for future projects. This should be your permanent number. For instance, if you were assigned 89-12345-0001, every application submitted thereafter should contain 89-12345 on the application. The succeeding numbers will be issued by the Department of Revenue. DO NOT enter what you believe to be the next in sequence as this may delay processing of your application. SECTION 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SECTION 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Conditions of the Contract These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Construction Contract (EJCDC General Conditions 1910-8, 1990 edition with City of Fort Collins modifications) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. SC-4.2 Subsurface and Physical Conditions: A. Add the following language to paragraph 4.2.1 of the General Conditions. 4.2.1.1.1 The following report(s) of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions at the site of the Work:  Geotechnical Investigation, by CTL Thompson, dated March 31, 2011, Project No. FC05169.001-125  Final Drainage Report, by Jim Sell Design, dated March 30, 2011, Project No.2598 Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in the geotechnical documents, but not upon nontechnical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or upon the completeness of any information in the report. B. 4.2.1.2.1 No drawing of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities referred to in Paragraph 4.3) which are at or contiguous to the site have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, except the following: None. SC-5.4.8 Limits of Liability A. Add the following language at the end of paragraph 5.4.8. The limits of liability for the insurance required by the paragraph numbers of the General Conditions listed below are as follows: 5.4.1 and 5.4.2 Coverage A - Statutory Limits Coverage B - $100,000/$100,000/$500,000 5.4.3 and 5.4.5 Commercial General Liability policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). This policy will include coverage for Explosion, Collapse, and Underground coverage unless waived by the Owner. 5.4.6 The Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance policy will have limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). 5.4.9 This policy will include completed operations coverage/product liability coverage with limits of $1,000,000 combined single limits (CSL). SC-6.4.2 Cement Restrictions Delete the complete paragraph SC-8.10 OWNER’s Project Manager A. Add the following language to ARTICLE 8: 8.10. The OWNER will provide a Project Manager. The CONTRACTOR shall direct all questions concerning Contract interpretation, Change Orders, and other requests for clarification or instruction to the Project Manager. 8.10.1 Authority: The Project Manager will be the OWNER's representative during the construction of the project. The Project Manager shall have the authority set forth in the OWNER's Capital Project Procedures Manual. The Project Manager shall have the authority to reject work and materials whenever such rejection may be necessary to ensure the proper performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10.2 Duties and Responsibilities: The Project Manager will make periodic visits to the project site to observe the progress and quality of the Work and to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall not be required to make comprehensive or continuous inspections to check the progress or quality of the Work. The Project Manager shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety precautions or programs in connection with the Work, or for any failure of the Contractor to comply with laws and regulation applicable to the performance or furnishing of the Work. Visits and observations made by the Project Manager shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligation to conduct comprehensive inspections of the Work, to furnish materials and perform acceptable Work, and to provide adequate safety precautions in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall at all times have access to the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities for such access so the Project Manager may perform his or her functions under the Contract Documents. 8.10.3 One or more Resident Construction Inspector(s) (RCI) may be assigned to assist the Project Manager in providing observation of the Work, to determine whether or not the Work is proceeding according to the construction documents. CONTRACTOR will receive written notification from the OWNER of any RCI assignments. The RCI shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, CONTRACTOR's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The RCI will not be responsible for CONTRACTOR's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The RCI's dealings in matters pertaining to the on-site work will be to keep the Project Manager properly apprised about such matters. 8.10.4 Communications: All instructions, approvals, and decisions of the Project Manager shall be in writing. The CONTRACTOR may not rely on instructions, approvals, or decisions of the Project Manager until the same are reduced to writing. SC-12.3 Add the following language to the end of paragraph 12.3. Contractor will include in the project schedule zero (0) days lost due to abnormal weather conditions. SC – FED Federal Requirements A. The clauses on the following pages are hereby added. SC – DB Davis Bacon Wage Rates A. The clauses on the following pages are hereby added. 0 FEDERAL TRANSIT ADMINISTRATION TABLE OF CONTENTS Federally Required and Other Model Contract Clauses 1. NO GOVERNMENT OBLIGATION TO THIRD PARTIES 1 2. PROGRAM FRAUD AND FALSE OR FRAUDULENT STATEMENTS AND RELATED ACTS 1 3. ACCESS TO RECORDS AND REPORTS 1 4. FEDERAL CHANGES 3 1. TERMINATION 3 2. CIVIL RIGHTS REQUIREMENTS 4 3. DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) 5 4. INCORPORATION OF FEDERAL TRANSIT ADMINISTRATION (FTA) TERMS 6 5. GOVERNMENT‐WIDE DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION (NONPROCUREMENT) 6 6. BUY AMERICA 7 7. BREACHES AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION 9 8. LOBBYING 9 9. CLEAN AIR 11 10. CLEAN WATER REQUIREMENTS 11 11. CARGO PREFERENCE REQUIREMENTS 11 12. FLY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS 12 13. DAVIS‐BACON AND COPELAND ANTI‐KICKBACK ACTS 12 14. CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT 19 15. BONDING REQUIREMENTS 20 16. SEISMIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 23 17. ENERGY CONSERVATION REQUIREMENTS 23 18. RECYCLED PRODUCTS 23 19. Conformance with ITS National Architecture 24 20. ADA Access 24 21. CITY OF FORT COLLINS BID PROTEST PROCEDURES 24 1. NO GOVERNMENT OBLIGATION TO THIRD PARTIES No Obligation by the Federal Government. (1) The Purchaser and Contractor acknowledge and agree that, notwithstanding any concurrence by the Federal Government in or approval of the solicitation or award of the underlying contract, absent the express written consent by the Federal Government, the Federal Government is not a party to this contract and shall not be subject to any obligations or liabilities to the Purchaser, Contractor, or any other party (whether or not a party to that contract) pertaining to any matter resulting from the underlying contract. (2) The Contractor agrees to include the above clause in each subcontract financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. It is further agreed that the clause shall not be modified, except to identify the subcontractor who will be subject to its provisions. 2. PROGRAM FRAUD AND FALSE OR FRAUDULENT STATEMENTS AND RELATED ACTS Program Fraud and False or Fraudulent Statements or Related Acts. (1) The Contractor acknowledges that the provisions of the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1986, as amended, 31 U.S.C. § 3801 et seq. and U.S. DOT regulations, "Program Fraud Civil Remedies," 49 C.F.R. Part 31, apply to its actions pertaining to this Project. Upon execution of the underlying contract, the Contractor certifies or affirms the truthfulness and accuracy of any statement it has made, it makes, it may make, or causes to be made, pertaining to the underlying contract or the FTA assisted project for which this contract work is being performed. In addition to other penalties that may be applicable, the Contractor further acknowledges that if it makes, or causes to be made, a false, fictitious, or fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification, the Federal Government reserves the right to impose the penalties of the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1986 on the Contractor to the extent the Federal Government deems appropriate. (2) The Contractor also acknowledges that if it makes, or causes to be made, a false, fictitious, or fraudulent claim, statement, submission, or certification to the Federal Government under a contract connected with a project that is financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance originally awarded by FTA under the authority of 49 U.S.C. § 5307, the Government reserves the right to impose the penalties of 18 U.S.C. § 1001 and 49 U.S.C. § 5307(n)(1) on the Contractor, to the extent the Federal Government deems appropriate. (3) The Contractor agrees to include the above two clauses in each subcontract financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. It is further agreed that the clauses shall not be modified, except to identify the subcontractor who will be subject to the provisions. 3. ACCESS TO RECORDS AND REPORTS Access to Records - The following access to records requirements apply to this Contract: A. Where the Purchaser is not a State but a local government and is the FTA Recipient or a subgrantee of the FTA Recipient in accordance with 49 C.F.R. 18.36(i), the Contractor agrees to provide the Purchaser, the FTA Administrator, the Comptroller General of the United States or any of their authorized representatives access to any books, documents, papers and records of the Contractor which are directly pertinent to this contract for the purposes of making audits, examinations, excerpts and transcriptions. Contractor also agrees, pursuant to 49 C.F.R. 633.17 to provide the FTA Administrator or his authorized representatives including any PMO Contractor access to Contractor's records and construction sites pertaining to a major capital project, defined at 49 U.S.C. 5302(a)1, which is receiving federal financial assistance through the programs described at 49 U.S.C. 5307, 5309 or 5311. B. The Contractor agrees to permit any of the foregoing parties to reproduce by any means whatsoever or to copy excerpts and transcriptions as reasonably needed. C. The Contractor agrees to maintain all books, records, accounts and reports required under this contract for a period of not less than three years after the date of termination or expiration of this contract, except in the event of litigation or settlement of claims arising from the performance of this contract, in which case Contractor agrees to maintain same until the Purchaser, the FTA Administrator, the Comptroller General, or any of their duly authorized representatives, have disposed of all such litigation, appeals, claims or exceptions related thereto. Reference 49 CFR 18.39(i)(11). D. FTA does not require the inclusion of these requirements in subcontracts. Requirements for Access to Records and Reports by Types of Contract Contract Characteristics Operationa l Service Contract Turnkey Constructio n Architectural Engineering Acquisitio n of Rolling Stock Professional Services I State Grantees a. Contracts below SAT ($100,000) b. Contracts above $100,000/Capital Projects None None unless1 non- competitive award Those imposed on state pass thru to Contractor None Yes, if non- competitive award or if funded thru2 5307/5309/5 311 None None unless 4. FEDERAL CHANGES Federal Changes - Contractor shall at all times comply with all applicable FTA regulations, policies, procedures and directives, including without limitation those listed directly or by reference in the Master Agreement between Purchaser and FTA, as they may be amended or promulgated from time to time during the term of this contract. Contractor's failure to so comply shall constitute a material breach of this contract. 1. TERMINATION a. Termination for Convenience (General Provision) The City may terminate this contract, in whole or in part, at any time by written notice to the Contractor when it is in the Government's best interest. The Contractor shall be paid its costs, including contract close-out costs, and profit on work performed up to the time of termination. The Contractor shall promptly submit its termination claim to the City to be paid the Contractor. If the Contractor has any property in its possession belonging to the City, the Contractor will account for the same, and dispose of it in the manner the City directs. b. Termination for Default [Breach or Cause] (General Provision) If the Contractor does not deliver supplies in accordance with the contract delivery schedule, or, if the contract is for services, the Contractor fails to perform in the manner called for in the contract, or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other provisions of the contract, the City may terminate this contract for default. Termination shall be effected by serving a notice of termination on the contractor setting forth the manner in which the Contractor is in default. The contractor will only be paid the contract price for supplies delivered and accepted, or services performed in accordance with the manner of performance set forth in the contract. If it is later determined by the City that the Contractor had an excusable reason for not performing, such as a strike, fire, or flood, events which are not the fault of or are beyond the control of the Contractor, the City, after setting up a new delivery of performance schedule, may allow the Contractor to continue work, or treat the termination as a termination for convenience. c. Opportunity to Cure (General Provision) The City in its sole discretion may, in the case of a termination for breach or default, allow the Contractor [an appropriately short period of time] in which to cure the defect. In such case, the notice of termination will state the time period in which cure is permitted and other appropriate conditions If Contractor fails to remedy to the City’s satisfaction the breach or default of any of the terms, covenants, or conditions of this Contract within [ten (10) days] after receipt by Contractor of written notice from the City setting forth the nature of said breach or default, the City shall have the right to terminate the Contract without any further obligation to Contractor. Any such termination for default shall not in any way operate to preclude the City from also pursuing all available remedies against Contractor and its sureties for said breach or default. d. Termination for Default (Construction) If the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the work or any separable part, with the diligence that will insure its completion within the time specified in this contract or any extension or fails to complete the work within this time, or if the Contractor fails to comply with any other provisions of this contract, the City may terminate this contract for default. The City shall terminate by delivering to the Contractor a Notice of Termination specifying the nature of the default. In this event, the Recipient may take over the work and compete it by contract or otherwise, and may take possession of and use any materials, appliances, and plant on the work site necessary for completing the work. The Contractor and its sureties shall be liable for any damage to the Recipient resulting from the Contractor's refusal or failure to complete the work within specified time, whether or not the Contractor's right to proceed with the work is terminated. This liability includes any increased costs incurred by the Recipient in completing the work. The Contractor's right to proceed shall not be terminated nor the Contractor charged with damages under this clause if- 1. The delay in completing the work arises from unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor. Examples of such causes include: acts of God, acts of the Recipient, acts of another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Recipient, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes; and 2. The contractor, within [10] days from the beginning of any delay, notifies the City in writing of the causes of delay. If in the judgment of the City, the delay is excusable, the time for completing the work shall be extended. The judgment of the City shall be final and conclusive on the parties, but subject to appeal under the Disputes clauses. If, after termination of the Contractor's right to proceed, it is determined that the Contractor was not in default, or that the delay was excusable, the rights and obligations of the parties will be the same as if the termination had been issued for the convenience of the Recipient. 2. CIVIL RIGHTS REQUIREMENTS Civil Rights - The following requirements apply to the underlying contract: (1) Nondiscrimination - In accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000d, section 303 of the Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 6102, section 202 of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, 42 U.S.C. § 12132, and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees that it will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, national origin, sex, age, or disability. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with applicable Federal implementing regulations and other implementing requirements FTA may issue. (2) Equal Employment Opportunity - The following equal employment opportunity requirements apply to the underlying contract: (a) Race, Color, Creed, National Origin, Sex - In accordance with Title VII of the Civil Rights Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 2000e, and Federal transit laws at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable equal employment opportunity requirements of U.S. Department of Labor (U.S. DOL) regulations, "Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor," 41 C.F.R. Parts 60 et seq., (which implement Executive Order No. 11246, "Equal Employment Opportunity," as amended by Executive Order No. 11375, "Amending Executive Order 11246 Relating to Equal Employment Opportunity," 42 U.S.C. § 2000e note), and with any applicable Federal statutes, executive orders, regulations, and Federal policies that may in the future affect construction activities undertaken in the course of the Project. The Contractor agrees to take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, creed, national origin, sex, or age. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. (b) Age - In accordance with section 4 of the Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1967, as amended, 29 U.S.C. § § 623 and Federal transit law at 49 U.S.C. § 5332, the Contractor agrees to refrain from discrimination against present and prospective employees for reason of age. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. (c) Disabilities - In accordance with section 102 of the Americans with Disabilities Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. § 12112, the Contractor agrees that it will comply with the requirements of U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission, "Regulations to Implement the Equal Employment Provisions of the Americans with Disabilities Act," 29 C.F.R. Part 1630, pertaining to employment of persons with disabilities. In addition, the Contractor agrees to comply with any implementing requirements FTA may issue. (3) The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA, modified only if necessary to identify the affected parties. 3. DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) a. This contract is subject to the requirements of Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 26, Participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in Department of Transportation Financial Assistance Programs. The national goal for participation of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) is 10%. The agency’s overall goal for DBE participation is 9.9 %. A separate contract goal of 11 % DBE participation has been established for this procurement. b. The contractor shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 49 CFR Part 26 in the award and administration of this DOT-assisted contract. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract, which may result in the termination of this contract or such other remedy as City of Fort Collins deems appropriate. Each subcontract the contractor signs with a subcontractor must include the assurance in this paragraph (see 49 CFR 26.13(b)). c. Bidders/offerors are required to document sufficient DBE participation to meet these goals or, alternatively, document adequate good faith efforts to do so, as provided for in 49 CFR 26.53. Award of this contract is conditioned on submission of the following concurrent with and accompanying sealed bid: 1. The names and addresses of DBE firms that will participate in this contract; 2. A description of the work each DBE will perform; 3. The dollar amount of the participation of each DBE firm participating; 4. Written documentation of the bidder/offeror’s commitment to use a DBE subcontractor whose participation it submits to meet the contract goal; 5. Written confirmation from the DBE that it is participating in the contract as provided in the prime contractor’s commitment; and 6. If the contract goal is not met, evidence of good faith efforts to do so. Bidders must present the information required above prior to contract award (see 49 CFR 26.53(3)). d. The contractor is required to pay its subcontractors performing work related to this contract for satisfactory performance of that work no later than 30 days after the contractor’s receipt of payment for that work from the City of Fort Collins. In addition, is required to return any retainage payments to those subcontractors within 30 days after incremental acceptance of the subcontractor’s work by the City of Fort Collins and contractor’s receipt of the partial retainage payment related to the subcontractor’s work. e. The contractor must promptly notify City of Fort Collins whenever a DBE subcontractor performing work related to this contract is terminated or fails to complete its work, and must make good faith efforts to engage another DBE subcontractor to perform at least the same amount of work. The contractor may not terminate any DBE subcontractor and perform that work through its own forces or those of an affiliate without prior written consent of City of Fort Collins. 4. INCORPORATION OF FEDERAL TRANSIT ADMINISTRATION (FTA) TERMS Incorporation of Federal Transit Administration (FTA) Terms - The preceding provisions include, in part, certain Standard Terms and Conditions required by DOT, whether or not expressly set forth in the preceding contract provisions. All contractual provisions required by DOT, as set forth in FTA Circular 4220.1E, are hereby incorporated by reference. Anything to the contrary herein notwithstanding, all FTA mandated terms shall be deemed to control in the event of a conflict with other provisions contained in this Agreement. The Contractor shall not perform any act, fail to perform any act, or refuse to comply with any (name of grantee) requests which would cause (name of grantee) to be in violation of the FTA terms and conditions. 5. GOVERNMENT-WIDE DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION (NONPROCUREMENT) Background and Applicability In conjunction with the Office of Management and Budget and other affected Federal agencies, DOT published an update to 49 CFR Part 29 on November 26, 2003. This government-wide regulation implements Executive Order 12549, Debarment and Suspension, Executive Order 12689, Debarment and Suspension, and 31 U.S.C. 6101 note (Section 2455, Public Law 103-355, 108 Stat. 3327). The provisions of Part 29 apply to all grantee contracts and subcontracts at any level expected to equal or exceed $25,000 as well as any contract or subcontract (at any level) for Federally required auditing services. 49 CFR 29.220(b). This represents a change from prior practice in that the dollar threshold for application of these rules has been lowered from $100,000 to $25,000. These are contracts and subcontracts referred to in the regulation as “covered transactions.” Grantees, contractors, and subcontractors (at any level) that enter into covered transactions are required to verify that the entity (as well as its principals and affiliates) they propose to contract or subcontract with is not excluded or disqualified. They do this by (a) Checking the Excluded Parties List System, (b) Collecting a certification from that person, or (c) Adding a clause or condition to the contract or subcontract. This represents a change from prior practice in that certification is still acceptable but is no longer required. 49 CFR 29.300. Grantees, contractors, and subcontractors who enter into covered transactions also must require the entities they contract with to comply with 49 CFR 29, subpart C and include this requirement in their own subsequent covered transactions (i.e., the requirement flows down to subcontracts at all levels). Clause Language The following clause language is suggested, not mandatory. It incorporates the optional method of verifying that contractors are not excluded or disqualified by certification. Suspension and Debarment This contract is a covered transaction for purposes of 49 CFR Part 29. As such, the contractor is required to verify that none of the contractor, its principals, as defined at 49 CFR 29.995, or affiliates, as defined at 49 CFR 29.905, are excluded or disqualified as defined at 49 CFR 29.940 and 29.945. The contractor is required to comply with 49 CFR 29, Subpart C and must include the requirement to comply with 49 CFR 29, Subpart C in any lower tier covered transaction it enters into. By signing and submitting its bid or proposal, the bidder or proposer certifies as follows: The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact relied upon by {insert agency name}. If it is later determined that the bidder or proposer knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to remedies available to {insert agency name}, the Federal Government may pursue available remedies, including but not limited to suspension and/or debarment. The bidder or proposer agrees to comply with the requirements of 49 CFR 29, Subpart C while this offer is valid and throughout the period of any contract that may arise from this offer. The bidder or proposer further agrees to include a provision requiring such compliance in its lower tier covered transactions. 6. BUY AMERICA The contractor agrees to comply with 49 U.S.C. 5323(j) and 49 C.F.R. Part 661, which provide that Federal funds may not be obligated unless steel, iron, and manufactured products used in FTA-funded projects are produced in the United States, unless a waiver has been granted by FTA or the product is subject to a general waiver. General waivers are listed in 49 C.F.R. 661.7, and include final assembly in the United States for 15 passenger vans and 15 passenger wagons produced by Chrysler Corporation, and microcomputer equipment and software. Separate requirements for rolling stock are set out at 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(C) and 49 C.F.R. 661.11. Rolling stock must be assembled in the United States and have a 60 percent domestic content. A bidder or offeror must submit to the FTA recipient the appropriate Buy America certification (below) with all bids or offers on FTA-funded contracts, except those subject to a general waiver. Bids or offers that are not accompanied by a completed Buy America certification must be rejected as nonresponsive. This requirement does not apply to lower tier subcontractors. Certification requirement for procurement of steel, iron, or manufactured products Certificate of Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(1) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will meet the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(1) and the applicable regulations in 49 C.F.R. Part 661.5. Date ___________________________________________________________________ Signature ________________________________________________________________ Company Name __________________________________________________________ Title ___________________________________________________________________ Certificate of Non-Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(1) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(1) and 49 C.F.R. 661.5, but it may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(A), 5323(j)(2)(B), or 5323(j)(2)(D), and 49 C.F.R. 661.7. Date ___________________________________________________________________ Signature _______________________________________________________________ Company Name __________________________________________________________ Title ___________________________________________________________________ Certification requirement for procurement of buses, other rolling stock and associated equipment Certificate of Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(C). The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it will comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(C) and the regulations at 49 C.F.R. Part 661.11. Date ___________________________________________________________________ Signature _______________________________________________________________ Company Name __________________________________________________________ Title ___________________________________________________________________ Certificate of Non-Compliance with 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(C) The bidder or offeror hereby certifies that it cannot comply with the requirements of 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(C) and 49 C.F.R. 661.11, but may qualify for an exception pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 5323(j)(2)(A), 5323(j)(2)(B), or 5323(j)(2)(D), and 49 CFR 661.7. Date ___________________________________________________________________ Signature _______________________________________________________________ Company Name __________________________________________________________ Title ___________________________________________________________________ 7. BREACHES AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION Disputes - Disputes arising in the performance of this Contract which are not resolved by agreement of the parties shall be decided in writing by the authorized representative of City's [title of employee]. This decision shall be final and conclusive unless within [ten (10)] days from the date of receipt of its copy, the Contractor mails or otherwise furnishes a written appeal to the [title of employee]. In connection with any such appeal, the Contractor shall be afforded an opportunity to be heard and to offer evidence in support of its position. The decision of the [title of employee] shall be binding upon the Contractor and the Contractor shall abide be the decision. Performance During Dispute - Unless otherwise directed by City, Contractor shall continue performance under this Contract while matters in dispute are being resolved. Claims for Damages - Should either party to the Contract suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any act or omission of the party or of any of his employees, agents or others for whose acts he is legally liable, a claim for damages therefor shall be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time after the first observance of such injury of damage. Remedies - Unless this contract provides otherwise, all claims, counterclaims, disputes and other matters in question between the City and the Contractor arising out of or relating to this agreement or its breach will be decided by arbitration if the parties mutually agree, or in a court of competent jurisdiction within the State in which the City is located. Rights and Remedies - The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. No action or failure to act by the City, (Architect) or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence in any breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 8. LOBBYING Modifications have been made to the Clause pursuant to Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, P.L. 104-65 [to be codified at 2 U.S.C. § 1601, et seq.] - Lobbying Certification and Disclosure of Lobbying Activities for third party contractors are mandated by 31 U.S.C. 1352(b)(5), as amended by Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, and DOT implementing regulation, "New Restrictions on Lobbying," at 49 CFR § 20.110(d) - Language in Lobbying Certification is mandated by 49 CFR Part 19, Appendix A, Section 7, which provides that contractors file the certification required by 49 CFR Part 20, Appendix A. Modifications have been made to the Lobbying Certification pursuant to Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995. - Use of "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities," Standard Form-LLL set forth in Appendix B of 49 CFR Part 20, as amended by "Government wide Guidance For New Restrictions on Lobbying," 61 Fed. Reg. 1413 (1/19/96) is mandated by 49 CFR Part 20, Appendix A. Byrd Anti-Lobbying Amendment, 31 U.S.C. 1352, as amended by the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995, P.L. 104-65 [to be codified at 2 U.S.C. § 1601, et seq.] - Contractors who apply or bid for an award of $100,000 or more shall file the certification required by 49 CFR part 20, "New Restrictions on Lobbying." Each tier certifies to the tier above that it will not and has not used Federal appropriated funds to pay any person or organization for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a member of Congress, officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with obtaining any Federal contract, grant or any other award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Each tier shall also disclose the name of any registrant under the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 who has made lobbying contacts on its behalf with non-Federal funds with respect to that Federal contract, grant or award covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. Such disclosures are forwarded from tier to tier up to the recipient. APPENDIX A, 49 CFR PART 20--CERTIFICATION REGARDING LOBBYING Certification for Contracts, Grants, Loans, and Cooperative Agreements (To be submitted with each bid or offer exceeding $100,000) The undersigned [Contractor] certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that: (1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of an agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. (2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for making lobbying contacts to an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-- LLL, "Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying," in accordance with its instructions [as amended by "Government wide Guidance for New Restrictions on Lobbying," 61 Fed. Reg. 1413 (1/19/96). Note: Language in paragraph (2) herein has been modified in accordance with Section 10 of the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995 (P.L. 104-65, to be codified at 2 U.S.C. 1601, et seq.)] (3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for all subawards at all tiers (including subcontracts, subgrants, and contracts under grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all subrecipients shall certify and disclose accordingly. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by 31, U.S.C. § 1352 (as amended by the Lobbying Disclosure Act of 1995). Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure. [Note: Pursuant to 31 U.S.C. § 1352(c)(1)-(2)(A), any person who makes a prohibited expenditure or fails to file or amend a required certification or disclosure form shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such expenditure or failure.] The Contractor, ___________________, certifies or affirms the truthfulness and accuracy of each statement of its certification and disclosure, if any. In addition, the Contractor understands and agrees that the provisions of 31 U.S.C. A 3801, et seq., apply to this certification and disclosure, if any. __________________________ Signature of Contractor's Authorized Official __________________________ Name and Title of Contractor's Authorized Official ___________________________ Date 9. CLEAN AIR Clean Air – (1) The Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. §§ 7401 et seq. The Contractor agrees to report each violation to the Purchaser and understands and agrees that the Purchaser will, in turn, report each violation as required to assure notification to FTA and the appropriate EPA Regional Office. (2) The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract exceeding $100,000 financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. 10. CLEAN WATER REQUIREMENTS Clean Water – (1) The Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued pursuant to the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, 33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq. The Contractor agrees to report each violation to the Purchaser and understands and agrees that the Purchaser will, in turn, report each violation as required to assure notification to FTA and the appropriate EPA Regional Office. (2) The Contractor also agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract exceeding $100,000 financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FTA. 11. CARGO PREFERENCE REQUIREMENTS Cargo Preference - Use of United States-Flag Vessels - The contractor agrees: a. to use privately owned United States-Flag commercial vessels to ship at least 50 percent of the gross tonnage (computed separately for dry bulk carriers, dry cargo liners, and tankers) involved, whenever shipping any equipment, material, or commodities pursuant to the underlying contract to the extent such vessels are available at fair and reasonable rates for United States-Flag commercial vessels; b. to furnish within 20 working days following the date of loading for shipments originating within the United States or within 30 working days following the date of leading for shipments originating outside the United States, a legible copy of a rated, "on-board" commercial ocean bill-of -lading in English for each shipment of cargo described in the preceding paragraph to the Division of National Cargo, Office of Market Development, Maritime Administration, Washington, DC 20590 and to the FTA recipient (through the contractor in the case of a subcontractor's bill-of- lading.) c. to include these requirements in all subcontracts issued pursuant to this contract when the subcontract may involve the transport of equipment, material, or commodities by ocean vessel. 12. FLY AMERICA REQUIREMENTS The Contractor agrees to comply with 49 U.S.C. 40118 (the “Fly America” Act) in accordance with the General Services Administration’s regulations at 41 CFR Part 301-10, which provide that recipients and subrecipients of Federal funds and their contractors are required to use U.S. Flag air carriers for U.S Government-financed international air travel and transportation of their personal effects or property, to the extent such service is available, unless travel by foreign air carrier is a matter of necessity, as defined by the Fly America Act. The Contractor shall submit, if a foreign air carrier was used, an appropriate certification or memorandum adequately explaining why service by a U.S. flag air carrier was not available or why it was necessary to use a foreign air carrier and shall, in any event, provide a certificate of compliance with the Fly America requirements. The Contractor agrees to include the requirements of this section in all subcontracts that may involve international air transportation. 13. DAVIS-BACON AND COPELAND ANTI-KICKBACK ACTS Background and Application The Davis-Bacon and Copeland Acts are codified at 40 USC 3141, et seq. and 18 USC 874. The Acts apply to grantee construction contracts and subcontracts that “at least partly are financed by a loan or grant from the Federal Government.” 40 USC 3145(a), 29 CFR 5.2(h), 49 CFR 18.36(i)(5). The Acts apply to any construction contract over $2,000. 40 USC 3142(a), 29 CFR 5.5(a). ‘Construction,’ for purposes of the Acts, includes “actual construction, alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating.” 29 CFR 5.5(a). The requirements of both Acts are incorporated into a single clause (see 29 CFR 3.11) enumerated at 29 CFR 5.5(a) and reproduced below. The clause language is drawn directly from 29 CFR 5.5(a) and any deviation from the model clause below should be coordinated with counsel to ensure the Acts’ requirements are satisfied. Clause Language Davis-Bacon and Copeland Anti-Kickback Acts (1) Minimum wages – (i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classifications and wage rates conformed under paragraph (1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (ii) (A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) Except with respect to helpers as defined as 29 CFR 5.2(n)(4), the work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination; and (4) With respect to helpers as defined in 29 CFR 5.2(n)(4), such a classification prevails in the area in which the work is performed. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis- Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. (v) (A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination with 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(v) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (2) Withholding – The City of Fort Collins shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, the City of Fort Collins may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. (3) Payrolls and basic records – (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (ii) (A) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the City of Fort Collins for transmission to the Federal Transit Administration. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under section 5.5(a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5. This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. (B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under section 5.5(a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5 and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section. (D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the Federal Transit Administration or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. (4) Apprentices and trainees – (i) Apprentices - Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division of the U.S. Department of Labor determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees - Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal employment opportunity - The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR part 30. (5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements - The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. (6) Subcontracts - The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the Federal Transit Administration may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. (7) Contract termination: debarment - A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. (8) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements - All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (9) Disputes concerning labor standards - Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. (10) Certification of eligibility – (i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. 14. CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT Background and Application The Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act is codified at 40 USC 3701, et seq. The Act applies to grantee contracts and subcontracts “financed at least in part by loans or grants from … the [Federal] Government.” 40 USC 3701(b)(1)(B)(iii) and (b)(2), 29 CFR 5.2(h), 49 CFR 18.36(i)(6). Although the original Act required its application in any construction contract over $2,000 or non-construction contract to which the Act applied over $2,500 (and language to that effect is still found in 49 CFR 18.36(i)(6)), the Act no longer applies to any “contract in an amount that is not greater than $100,000.” 40 USC 3701(b)(3) (A)(iii). The Act applies to construction contracts and, in very limited circumstances, non- construction projects that employ “laborers or mechanics on a public work.” These non- construction applications do not generally apply to transit procurements because transit procurements (to include rail cars and buses) are deemed “commercial items.” 40 USC 3707, 41 USC 403 (12). A grantee that contemplates entering into a contract to procure a developmental or unique item should consult counsel to determine if the Act applies to that procurement and that additional language required by 29 CFR 5.5(c) must be added to the basic clause below. The clause language is drawn directly from 29 CFR 5.5(b) and any deviation from the model clause below should be coordinated with counsel to ensure the Act’s requirements are satisfied. Clause Language Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards (1) Overtime requirements - No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages - In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore- shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages - The (write in the name of the grantee) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (2) of this section. (4) Subcontracts - The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this section. 15. BONDING REQUIREMENTS Applicability to Contracts For those construction or facility improvement contracts or subcontracts exceeding $100,000, FTA may accept the bonding policy and requirements of the recipient, provided that they meet the minimum requirements for construction contracts as follows: (a) A bid guarantee from each bidder equivalent to five (5) percent of the bid price. The "bid guarantees" shall consist of a firm commitment such as a bid bond, certifies check, or other negotiable instrument accompanying a bid as assurance that the bidder will, upon acceptance of his bid, execute such contractual documents as may be required within the time specified. (b) A performance bond on the part to the Contractor for 100 percent of the contract price. A "performance bond" is one executed in connection with a contract to secure fulfillment of all the contractor's obligations under such contract. (c) A payment bond on the part of the contractor for 100 percent of the contract price. A "payment bond" is one executed in connection with a contract to assure payment, as required by law, of all persons supplying labor and material in the execution of the work provided for in the contract. Payment bond amounts required from Contractors are as follows: 1. 50% of the contract price if the contract price is not more than $1 million; 2. 40% of the contract price if the contract price is more than $1 million but not more than $5 million; or 3. $2.5 million if the contract price is more than $5 million. (d) A cash deposit, certified check or other negotiable instrument may be accepted by a grantee in lieu of performance and payment bonds, provided the grantee has established a procedure to assure that the interest of FTA is adequately protected. An irrevocable letter of credit would also satisfy the requirement for a bond. Flow Down Bonding requirements flow down to the first tier contractors. Model Clauses/Language FTA does not prescribe specific wording to be included in third party contracts. FTA has prepared sample clauses as follows: Bid Bond Requirements (Construction) (a) Bid Security A Bid Bond must be issued by a fully qualified surety company acceptable to the City and listed as a company currently authorized under 31 CFR, Part 223 as possessing a Certificate of Authority as described thereunder. (b) Rights Reserved In submitting this Bid, it is understood and agreed by bidder that the right is reserved by the City to reject any and all bids, or part of any bid, and it is agreed that the Bid may not be withdrawn for a period of [ninety (90)] days subsequent to the opening of bids, without the written consent of the City. It is also understood and agreed that if the undersigned bidder should withdraw any part or all of his bid within [ninety (90)] days after the bid opening without the written consent of the City, shall refuse or be unable to enter into this Contract, as provided above, or refuse or be unable to furnish adequate and acceptable Performance Bonds and Labor and Material Payments Bonds, as provided above, or refuse or be unable to furnish adequate and acceptable insurance, as provided above, he shall forfeit his bid security to the extent of (Recipient's) damages occasioned by such withdrawal, or refusal, or inability to enter into an agreement, or provide adequate security therefore. It is further understood and agreed that to the extent the defaulting bidder's Bid Bond, Certified Check, Cashier's Check, Treasurer's Check, and/or Official Bank Check (excluding any income generated thereby which has been retained by the City as provided in [Item x "Bid Security" of the Instructions to Bidders]) shall prove inadequate to fully recompense the City for the damages occasioned by default, then the undersigned bidder agrees to indemnify the City and pay over to the City the difference between the bid security and (Recipient's) total damages, so as to make the City whole. The undersigned understands that any material alteration of any of the above or any of the material contained on this form, other than that requested, will render the bid unresponsive. Performance and Payment Bonding Requirements (Construction) The Contractor shall be required to obtain performance and payment bonds as follows: (a) Performance bonds 1. The penal amount of performance bonds shall be 100 percent of the original contract price, unless the the City determines that a lesser amount would be adequate for the protection of the City. 2. The City may require additional performance bond protection when a contract price is increased. The increase in protection shall generally equal 100 percent of the increase in contract price. The City may secure additional protection by directing the Contractor to increase the penal amount of the existing bond or to obtain an additional bond. (b) Payment bonds 1. The penal amount of the payment bonds shall equal: (i) Fifty percent of the contract price if the contract price is not more than $1 million. (ii) Forty percent of the contract price if the contract price is more than $1 million but not more than $5 million; or (iii) Two and one half million if the contract price is more than $5 million. 2. If the original contract price is $5 million or less, the City may require additional protection as required by subparagraph 1 if the contract price is increased. Performance and Payment Bonding Requirements (Non-Construction) The Contractor may be required to obtain performance and payment bonds when necessary to protect the (Recipient's) interest. (a) The following situations may warrant a performance bond: 1. City property or funds are to be provided to the contractor for use in performing the contract or as partial compensation (as in retention of salvaged material). 2. A contractor sells assets to or merges with another concern, and the City, after recognizing the latter concern as the successor in interest, desires assurance that it is financially capable. 3. Substantial progress payments are made before delivery of end items starts. 4. Contracts are for dismantling, demolition, or removal of improvements. (b) When it is determined that a performance bond is required, the Contractor shall be required to obtain performance bonds as follows: 1. The penal amount of performance bonds shall be 100 percent of the original contract price, unless the City determines that a lesser amount would be adequate for the protection of the City. 2. The City may require additional performance bond protection when a contract price is increased. The increase in protection shall generally equal 100 percent of the increase in contract price. The City may secure additional protection by directing the Contractor to increase the penal amount of the existing bond or to obtain an additional bond. (c) A payment bond is required only when a performance bond is required, and if the use of payment bond is in the (Recipient's) interest. (d) When it is determined that a payment bond is required, the Contractor shall be required to obtain payment bonds as follows: 1. The penal amount of payment bonds shall equal: (i) Fifty percent of the contract price if the contract price is not more than $1 million; (ii) Forty percent of the contract price if the contract price is more than $1 million but not more than $5 million; or (iii) Two and one half million if the contract price is increased. Advance Payment Bonding Requirements The Contractor may be required to obtain an advance payment bond if the contract contains an advance payment provision and a performance bond is not furnished. The City shall determine the amount of the advance payment bond necessary to protect the City. Patent Infringement Bonding Requirements (Patent Indemnity) The Contractor may be required to obtain a patent indemnity bond if a performance bond is not furnished and the financial responsibility of the Contractor is unknown or doubtful. The City shall determine the amount of the patent indemnity to protect the City. Warranty of the Work and Maintenance Bonds (a) The Contractor warrants to City, the Architect and/or Engineer that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract will be of highest quality and new unless otherwise specified by City, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All work not so conforming to these standards shall be considered defective. If required by the [Project Manager], the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. (b) The Work furnished must be of first quality and the workmanship must be the best obtainable in the various trades. The Work must be of safe, substantial and durable construction in all respects. The Contractor hereby guarantees the Work against defective materials or faulty workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year after Final Payment by City and shall replace or repair any defective materials or equipment or faulty workmanship during the period of the guarantee at no cost to City. As additional security for these guarantees, the Contractor shall, prior to the release of Final Payment [as provided in Item X below], furnish separate Maintenance (or Guarantee) Bonds in form acceptable to City written by the same corporate surety that provides the Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond for this Contract. These bonds shall secure the Contractor's obligation to replace or repair defective materials and faulty workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year after Final Payment and shall be written in an amount equal to ONE HUNDRED PERCENT (100%) of the CONTRACT SUM, as adjusted (if at all). 16. SEISMIC SAFETY REQUIREMENTS Seismic Safety - The contractor agrees that any new building or addition to an existing building will be designed and constructed in accordance with the standards for Seismic Safety required in Department of Transportation Seismic Safety Regulations 49 CFR Part 41 and will certify to compliance to the extent required by the regulation. The contractor also agrees to ensure that all work performed under this contract including work performed by a subcontractor is in compliance with the standards required by the Seismic Safety Regulations and the certification of compliance issued on the project. 17. ENERGY CONSERVATION REQUIREMENTS Energy Conservation - The contractor agrees to comply with mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the state energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act. 18. RECYCLED PRODUCTS Recovered Materials - The contractor agrees to comply with all the requirements of Section 6002 of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), as amended (42 U.S.C. 6962), including but not limited to the regulatory provisions of 40 CFR Part 247, and Executive Order 12873, as they apply to the procurement of the items designated in Subpart B of 40 CFR Part 247. 19. Conformance with ITS National Architecture To the extent applicable, the Contractor agrees to conform to the National Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS) Architecture and Standards as required by SAFETEA-LU § 5307(c), 23 U.S.C. § 512 note, and follow the provisions of FTA Notice, “FTA National ITS Architecture Policy on Transit Projects,” 66 Fed. Reg. 1455 et seq., January 8, 2001, and any other implementing directives FTA may issue at a later date, except to the extent FTA determines otherwise in writing. 20. ADA Access Accessibility. Facilities to be used in public transportation service must comply with 42 U.S.C. Sections 12101 et seq. and DOT regulations, “Transportation Services for Individuals with Disabilities (ADA),” 49 CFR Part 37; and Joint ATBCB/DOT regulations, “Americans with Disabilities (ADA) Accessibility Specifications for Transportation Vehicles,” 36 CFR Part 1192 and 49 CFR Part 38. Notably, DOT incorporated by reference the ATBCB’s “Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines” (ADAAG), revised July 2004, which include accessibility guidelines for buildings and facilities, and are incorporated into Appendix A to 49 CFR Part 37. DOT also added specific provisions to Appendix A modifying the ADAAG, with the result that buildings and facilities must comply with both the ADAAG and amendments thereto in Appendix A to 49 CFR Part 37. 21. CITY OF FORT COLLINS BID PROTEST PROCEDURES The City of Fort Collins has a protest procedure, covering any phase of solicitation or award, including but not limited to specification or award. The protest procedures are available from the Purchasing Department, City of Fort Collins, 215 N. Mason, Street, 2nd Floor, P. O. Box 580, Fort Collins, CO. 80522. You may also request a copy of the procedures by emailing: Purchasing@fcgov.com or calling 970-221-6775. DAVIS BACON WAGE RATES General Decision Number: CO120008 08/03/2012 CO8 Superseded General Decision Number: CO20100008 State: Colorado Construction Type: Building County: Larimer County in Colorado. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include residential construction consisting of single family homes and apartments up to and including 4 stories) Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/06/2012 1 01/13/2012 2 01/27/2012 3 02/24/2012 4 04/06/2012 5 05/18/2012 6 06/01/2012 7 07/27/2012 8 08/03/2012 ASBE0028-001 07/01/2010 Rates Fringes Asbestos Workers/Insulator (Includes application of all insulating materials, protective coverings, coatings and finishings to all types of mechanical systems) $ 30.23 11.53 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- CARP1001-001 05/01/2009 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Including Formbuilding and Metal Stud Work) $ 26.60 8.89 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ CARP1607-002 06/01/2011 Rates Fringes MILLWRIGHT $ 28.95 10.10 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ELEC0068-009 06/01/2011 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN (Including Low Voltage Wiring and Installation of Communications Systems, Security Systems, Telephones, and Temperature Controls) $ 31.60 12.57 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ELEV0025-002 01/01/2012 Rates Fringes Elevator Constructor $ 39.34 23.535 FOOTNOTE: a. Employer contributes 8% of basic hourly rate for over 5 years' service and 6% basic hourly rate for 6 months' to 5 years' service as Vacation Pay Credit. PAID HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Veterans Day; Thanksgiving Day; Friday after Thanksgiving Day; and Christmas Day. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ IRON0024-001 07/01/2011 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL $ 23.80 10.91 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* PAIN0930-001 07/01/2012 Rates Fringes GLAZIER $ 27.77 7.42 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ PLAS0577-001 08/01/2011 Rates Fringes Cement Mason/Concrete Finisher $ 23.00 10.75 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ PLUM0003-001 07/01/2012 Rates Fringes PLUMBER (Excluding HVAC work $ 33.18 11.44 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ PLUM0208-001 01/01/2012 Rates Fringes PIPEFITTER (Including HVAC pipe) $ 32.60 11.52 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ SHEE0009-001 01/01/2011 Rates Fringes Sheet metal worker (Includes HVAC duct and installation of HVAC Systems) $ 31.66 10.98 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ SUCO2001-015 12/20/2001 Rates Fringes LABORER Common $ 9.56 2.36 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is union or non-union. Union Identifiers An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" denotes that the union classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that classification. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011. The first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and the four-digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable , i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2011, following these characters is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate/collective bargaining agreement which would be July 1, 2011 in the above example. Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the rate. Non-Union Identifiers Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived from survey data by computing average rates and are not union rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may include both union and non-union data. Example: SULA2004-007 5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union rates, LA indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicates the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued as a General Wage Determination on that date. Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change until a new survey is conducted. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION SECTION 00900 ADDENDA, MODIFICATIONS AND PAYMENT 00950 Contract Change Order 00960 Application for Payment SECTION 00950 CHANGE ORDER NO. PROJECT TITLE: Transfort Maintenance Facility Expansion CONTRACTOR: PROJECT NUMBER: 7426 DESCRIPTION: 1. Reason for change: 2. Description of Change: 3. Change in Contract Cost: 4. Change in Contract Time: ORIGINAL CONTRACT COST $ .00 TOTAL APPROVED CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL PENDING CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL THIS CHANGE ORDER .00 TOTAL % OF THIS CHANGE ORDER % TOTAL C.O.% OF ORIGNINAL CONTRACT % ADJUSTED CONTRACT COST $ .00 (Assuming all change orders approved) ACCEPTED BY: DATE: Contractor's Representative ACCEPTED BY: DATE: Project Manager REVIEWED BY: DATE: Title: APPROVED BY: DATE: Title: APPROVED BY: DATE: Purchasing Agent over $30,000 cc: City Clerk Contractor Project File Architect Engineer Purchasing Section 00960 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 1 OF 4 OWNER: City of Fort Collins PROJECT: APPLICATION NUMBER: APPLICATION DATE: PERIOD BEGINNING: ENGINEER: CONTRACTOR: PERIOD ENDING: PROJECT NUMBER: CHANGE ORDERS Application is made for Payment as shown below in connection with Contract NUMBER DATE AMOUNT The present status of the account for this Contract is as follows: 1 2 Original Contract Amount: 3 Net Change by Change Order: Current contract Amount: $0.00 Total Completed and Stored to Date: Less Previous Applications: Amount Due this Application - Before Retainage: $0.00 Less Retainage: Net Change by Change Order $0.00 AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION: $0.00 CERTIFICATION: The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that all obligations of CONTRACTOR incurred in connection with the Work have been satisfied as required in Paragraph 14.3. of the General Conditions of the Contract. The above Amount Due This Application is requested by the CONTRACTOR. Date: By: Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is recommended by the ENGINEER. Date: By: Payment of the above Amount Due This Application has been reviewed by the OWNER'S Project Manager. Date: By: Payment of the above Amount Due This Application is approved by the OWNER. Date: By: CONTRACT AMOUNTS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 2 OF 4 Work Completed Work Completed Work Completed Stored Bid This Month Previous Periods To Date Materials Total Item This Earned Percent Number Description Quantity Units Unit Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period To Date Billed $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 CHANGE ORDERS APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PAGE 3 OF 4 Work Completed Work Completed Work Completed Stored Bid This Month Previous Periods To Date Materials Total Item This Earned Percent Number Description Quantity Units Unit Price Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Qty. Amount Period To Date Billed $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 TOTALS CHANGE ORDERS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 PROJECT TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 STORED MATERIALS SUMMARY PAGE 4 OF 4 On Hand Received Installed On Hand Item Invoice Previous This This This Number Number Description Application Period Period Application $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 TOTALS $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION CITY OF FORT COLLINS, COLORADO SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS PROJECT NO. 0843.10 August 2012 712 Whalers Way, Suite B-100 Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 Table of Contents - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Review TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01010 Summary of Work 01016 Green Building Requirements 01022 Unit Prices 01026 Application for Payment 01027 Change Order Procedures 01030 Alternates 01040 Coordination 01041 Superintendent 01045 Cutting and Patching 01046 Access to Site 01050 Field Engineering 01060 Regulatory Requirements 01070 Abbreviations 01200 Project Meetings 01310 Construction Schedules 01340 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 01370 Schedule of Values 01400 Quality Control 01410 Testing 01510 Temporary Utilities 01520 Construction Equipment and Aids 01530 Barriers and Enclosures 01540 Erosion and Sedimentation Control 01560 Temporary Controls 01580 Project Sign 01590 Field Offices and Sheds 01600 Material and Equipment 01700 Contract Close-Out 01710 Cleaning 01714 Construction Waste Management 01715 Waste Removal and Recycling 01720 Project Record Documents 01730 Operating and Maintenance Data 01740 Warranties and Bonds DIVISION 2 SITEWORK Section 02070 Selective Demolition 02100 Site Preparation 02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting 02225 Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting 02230 Drilled Piers 02515 Portland Cement and Concrete Paving 02580 Pavement Markings 02724 Storm Sewerage Systems 02831 Chain Link Fences and Gates DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03100 Concrete Formwork 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03450 Architectural Precast Concrete DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04100 Mortar and Masonry Grout 04220 Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 METALS Table of Contents - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Review DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL Section 15010 Mechanical Special Conditions 15050 Mechanical Materials and Methods 15250 Mechanical Systems Insulation 15300 Fire Protection Specifications 15440 Plumbing 15850 Heating and Ventilating 15950 Automatic Temperature Control 15990 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16010 General Electrical Requirements 16020 Electrical Submittals and Shop Drawings 16040 Secondary Electrical Service 16060 Grounding and Bonding 16073 Supports and Hangers 16075 Identification 16120 Wire and Cable – 600 Volt and Less 16130 Raceways and Boxes 16140 Wiring Devices 16145 Lighting Control Systems 16410 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 16442 Panelboards 16461 Dry Type Transformers 16491 Fuses 16511 Interior Lighting 16515 Solid State Luminaire Lighting 16521 Exterior Lighting DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. 01010 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT SITE A. Location: The site is located at the existing Transfort administration and maintenance facility at 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, Colorado. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK A. General: The work consists of the construction of a 16,300 sq. ft. Bus Storage Addition and 720 sq. ft. Chassis Wash Addition, complete with related sitework and driveways. 1. Phase 1 work shall include a portion of the new concrete circulation and training area apron, to the extent shown on the Drawings and as required to maintain vehicular circulation around the site and keep the existing north doors operational during construction. 2. Phase 2 work shall include the Bus Storage Addition and the balance of the concrete circulation and training apron. 3. The Chassis Wash addition can be constructed as part of either phase, at the Contractor's option. B. Unless otherwise provided, Contractor shall provide, at his expense, all materials, labor, equipment, tools, transportation and utilities, including cost of connection necessary for successful completion of the project. C. It is the intent of the Owner not to disturb the normal functions of the Transfort complex, its employees, vendors, visitors, contractors or related outside businesses during the work of this project. 1. Refer to Section 01046, Access to Site, for specific construction access, phasing and scheduling requirements. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for seeing that all contractors, subcontractors, suppliers and workmen associated with the project conduct themselves in a professional, respectful and businesslike manner while on the site. 1. Firearms, alcoholic beverages and controlled substances are not permitted on the premises. 2. Smoking or use of tobacco products shall only be allowed in designated areas, and is prohibited within any structure. 3. All workers shall refrain from the use of profane or abusive language and other forms of harassment on the site. 4. Other specific conditions of this Section shall be as arranged at the Pre-Construction Conference. Refer to Section 01046 for specific rights of the Owner's principal representa- tive. E. Related requirements or conditions specified elsewhere: 1. Division 0, Bidding Requirements. 2. Section 01022, Unit Prices. 3. Section 01046, Access to Site. 4. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements. 5. Section 01400, Quality Control: Quality control and workmanship standards. 6. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Quality of materials and equipment to be installed in the work. 01010 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.03 SUSTAINABILITY A. While the Project is not attempting LEED certification, it has been designed to meet similar sustainable design criteria. Refer to Section 01015 for requirements. B. Construction Waste Diversion: A construction waste diversion goal of 75% has been established for this Project. Construction waste materials shall be recycled as specified in Sections 01714, 01715 and herein as required to meet this goal, including but not limited to: 1. New construction waste materials. 2. Demolition waste materials. 3. New product shipping materials, cartons, pallets and other packaging. 1.04 SPECIAL SITE CONDITIONS A. The site is subject to the conditions of pending approval of the Major Amendment, to be granted by the City of Fort Collins for the specific purposes of this project. The Contractor shall acquire copies of these conditions and/or restrictions and will be responsible to maintain compliance of all Contractors and Subcontractors working on the site with such conditions and/or restrictions. 1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractor Qualifications: General Contractor shall be licensed by the City of Fort Collins (at the appropriate level), and shall have completed at least two (2) projects of similar type, size and complexity in the past five (5) years. B. Superintendent Qualifications: Refer to Section 01041. 1.06 FORM OF BID AND/OR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT A. The work of this Project shall be bid and construction contracts awarded on the following basis, unless otherwise modified in the General or Supplementary Conditions of the Contract: 1. Lump sum basis, including approved Alternates. 1.07 WORK BY OTHERS A. Owner shall furnish and install slow-fill compressed natural gas (CNG) fueling equipment and piping by separate contract. B. Owner shall furnish and install all telephone and data/communications equipment and wiring by separate contract, except for the empty conduit runs shown on the Drawings. C. Owner shall furnish and install all intercom system equipment and wiring by separate contract, except for the empty conduit runs shown on the Drawings. D. Owner shall furnish all security system cameras, monitors, recorders and other equipment and wiring by separate contract, except for the empty conduit runs shown on the Drawings. E. Owner shall furnish materials and apply painted striping and other pavement markings at the bus training area by separate contract. F. Owner shall provide any applicable project or building inspection services as required by Chapter 17 of the International Building code (IBC), current edition, by separate contract. The Architect and Engineers will not provide these services. END OF SECTION 01016 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01016 GREEN BUILDING GUIDELINES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. This Section includes general sustainable design and construction guidelines and procedures for LEED certification through the U.S. Green Building Council LEED Green Building Rating System will not be pursued for this Project. B. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01010, Summary of Work: Sustainability goals. 2. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Submittal requirements. 3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 4. Section 01715, Waste Removal and Recycling. 5. Respective Sections of Specifications: Specific requirements for design and performance criteria. 1.02 REFERENCES A. LEED reference standards, as specified in the LEED Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major Renovations, Version 3.0, are included in this Section by reference. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Certificates of Chain-of-Custody: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria". Certificates shall include evidence that mill is certified for chain-of-custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. B. LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design. LEED Version 3.0 (2009), Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major Renovations (LEED-NC). C. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured or assembled within a radius of 500 miles from the Project location. D. Regionally Extracted, Harvested, or Recovered Materials: Materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered and manufactured within a radius of 500 miles from the Project site. E. Recycled Content: Percentage by weight of constituents that have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre-industrial), or after consumer use (post-consumer). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS A. General: Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of post-industrial recycled content constitutes a minimum of 10 percent of the cost of materials used for the Project. 1. The cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing the weight of post-consumer recycled content in the item by the total weight of the item and multiplying by the cost of the item. 01016 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2. The cost of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of post-industrial recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing the weight of post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of post-industrial recycled content in the item by the total weight of the item and multiplying by the cost of the item. 3. Do not include mechanical and electrical components in the calculation. 4. Recycled content shall be defined according to the Federal Trade Commission's "Guide for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims", 16 CFR 260.7 (e). 2.02 REGIONAL MATERIALS A. Provide a minimum of 20 percent of building materials (by cost) that are regionally manufactured or assembled materials. B. Of the regionally manufactured materials specified above, provide at least 50 percent (by cost) that are regionally extracted, harvested, or recovered materials. 2.03 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS A. For interior applications use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content: 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L. 3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L. 4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. 5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. 6. Carpet and Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L. 7. VCT, Asphalt Tile, and Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. 8. Gypsum Wallboard and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 9. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. 10. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. 11. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 12. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 13. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L. 14. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L. 15. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 16. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 350 g/L. 17. ABS Welding Compounds: 400 g/L. 18. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 19. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 20. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L. 21. Sealants: 250 g/L. 22. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 23. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. B. For interior applications use paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content and the following chemical restrictions per Green Seal Standard GS-11: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 5. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 6. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight total aromatic compounds. 01016 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 7. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n- butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, or vinyl chloride. C. Do not use composite wood and agrifiber products that contain added urea-formaldehyde resin. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used. END OF SECTION 01022 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01022 UNIT PRICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section identifies each Unit Price by number, as referred from the Drawings and/or specific Sections of these Specifications, including but not limited to: 1. Division 2, Landscape Sections. 2. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting. 3. Section 02230, Drilled Piers. 4. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving. B. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Bidding Documents: Bid Form. 2. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Incorporation of Unit Prices into the Work. 3. Sections of the Specifications as referenced. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF UNIT PRICES A. The Contractor shall furnish the following Unit Prices for addition and/or deletion of bid items by the Owner. Unit Prices shall include all labor, materials, tools, equipment and supervision necessary for each item to be installed, and all mark-ups for the Contractor and Subcontractor, completely finished, operational and coordinated with related work. Unit Prices requested shall not be construed as all-inclusive, and the Owner reserves the right to add or delete from the project using these Unit Prices in any order or quantity. Base Bid shall include all items shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Item Description Unit 1. Overruns and underruns of ____" diameter drilled piers: L.F. 2. Seed mix: S.F. 3. Imported structural fill material, placed and rough graded: C.Y. 4. Reinforced ____" thick concrete paving for bus access drives and training area: S.Y. END OF SECTION 01026 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01026 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Submit Applications for Payment to Architect in accordance with the schedule established by the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Owner-Contractor Agreement: a. Lump sum and unit prices. b. Progress payments, retainages and final payment. c. Allowable progress payments for Contractor overhead, profit and Division 1 expenses. 2. Bid Form. 3. General and Supplementary Conditions: a. Retainages. b. Liquidated damages, if applicable. c. Partial release of lien affidavits. 4. Section 01370, Schedule of Values. 5. Section 01700, Contract Closeout. 6. Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Data. 1.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED A. Submit itemized Applications using standard City of Fort Collins forms, unless otherwise approved. B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet. Format, schedule, line items and values shall be those of the Schedule of Values accepted by Architect. C. Applications for payment shall include only that material, labor and/or stored material in place as of the date of Application. 1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT A. Application Form: 1. Form shall be completed and notarized by a Notary Public, state of Colorado. 2. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed prior to date of submittal of Application. Incomplete Application forms shall be returned to the Contractor and not processed. 3. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets. 4. Certification shall be executed with signature of a responsible officer of contract firm. B. Continuation Sheets: 1. Fill in total list of all schedule component items of work with item number and scheduled dollar value for each item. 2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored, as of date of Application. 3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of Application at the end of the continuation sheets. a. List by Change Order number and description, as for an original component item of work. 01026 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Retainage: The Owner shall withhold retainage from each progress payment, as stipulated in the General and Supplementary Conditions. Contractor shall reflect the amount retained on each Application for Payment. 1.04 RELATED SUBMITTALS REQUIRED WITH APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Partial Release of Liens Affidavit: Contractor shall submit a Partial Release of Liens Affidavit with each Application for Payment certifying payment to Subcontractors, material suppliers or other entities having provided labor, materials and equipment related to the Work covered by the previous Application for Payment, as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Prior to acceptance of Application for Progress Payments, Contractor shall show that project record drawings are current and up to date per Section 01720, as requested by the Architect or Owner. C. Prior to acceptance of Final Application for Payment, Contractor shall submit complete operating and maintenance manuals, including all warranties, for review and acceptance by the Architect and Owner. Refer to paragraph 1.06 below. 1.05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. When the Owner or the Architect requires substantiating data, Contractor shall submit suitable information with a cover letter identifying: 1. Project name, Application number and date. 2. Detailed list of enclosures. 3. Stored materials may be submitted for payment, provided they are stored on site, in the Subcontractor's insured facility, or in a bonded warehouse facility as of the date of Application. a. Submit item number and identification as shown on Application, description of specific material. b. Submit certificate of insurance indicating coverage of stored materials, if requested by the Owner. B. Submit one (1) copy of data for each copy of Application. 1.06 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Fill in Application form as specified for progress payments. B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as specified in Section 01700, Contract Close-Out. 1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Submit Applications for Payment to Architect within the time limitations and deadlines stipulated in the Agreement. B. Number: Four (4) copies of each Application, or as established at the Pre-Construction Conference. C. When Architect finds Application properly completed and correct, he will transmit Certificate for Payment to Owner within seven (7) calendar days. D. Final Certificate for Payment shall be processed only after operating and maintenance manuals have been received, reviewed and accepted by the Architect and Owner. END OF SECTION 01027 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01027 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall prepare and promptly implement Change Order procedures: 1. Provide full written data required to evaluate proposed changes in the Contract Sum or extensions of the Contract Time. 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time-and-material/force-account basis. 3. Maintain detailed records of weather-related delays to substantiate claims for additional time. B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization who is authorized to accept changes in the work. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Owner-Contractor Agreement and Conditions of the Contract: a. Methods of determining cost or credit to Owner resulting from changes in the work made on a time-and-material basis. b. Contractor's claims for additional costs. c. Allowable limits for Contractor's overhead and profit. d. Established unit prices. 2. Section 01026, Applications for Payment. 3. Section 01046, Access to Site: Designation of Owner's Principal Representative, authorized to execute change orders. 4. Section 01310, Construction Schedules. 5. Section 01370, Schedule of Values. 6. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Substitutions. 7. Section 01720, Project Record Documents. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Change Order: See General Conditions. B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions, AIA Document G710: A written order, instructions or interpretations signed by Architect making minor changes in the work not involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. C. Proposal Request, AIA Document G709: A written request by the Owner or Architect describing proposed changes in the work and requesting change order pricing from the Contractor, but not authorizing the work to be completed until approved in writing by the Owner. D. Construction Change Authorization, or standard City of Fort Collins form: A written order to the Contractor signed by Owner and Architect which amends the Contract Documents as described and authorizes Contractor to proceed with a change which affects the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, for inclusion in a subsequent Change Order. 1.03 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES A. Owner or Architect may initiate changes by submitting a Proposal Request to Contractor. Request will include: 1. Detailed description of the change, products and location of the change in the project. 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 01027 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3. The projected time span for making the change and a specific statement as to whether overtime work is or is not authorized. 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. 5. Such request is for information only and is not an instruction to execute the changes or to stop work in progress. B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to Architect containing: 1. Description of the proposed changes. 2. Statement of the reason for making the changes. 3. Statement of the affect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 4. Statement of the affect on the work of separate contractors. 5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time as appropriate. C. Changes in the work affecting construction cost and/or contract time shall not be started without a fully executed Change Order or other written authorization from the Owner and Architect, in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION A. In lieu of a Proposal Request, Architect may issue a Construction Change Authorization for Contractor to proceed with a change for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B. Authorization will describe changes in the work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change and will designate the method of determining any change in the Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time. C. Owner and Architect will sign and date the Construction Change Authorization as authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes. D. Contractor will sign and date the Construction Change Authorization to indicate agreement with the terms therein. 1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal and for each unit price which has not previously been established with sufficient substantiating data to allow Architect and Owner to evaluate the quotation. 1. Labor and equipment required. 2. Materials required: a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost. b. Quantities required. 3. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 4. Credit for work deleted from Contract similarly documented. 5. Overhead and profit. Refer to Supplemental Conditions of the Contract for established limits, if applicable. 6. Justification for any change in Contract Time. B. Support each claim for additional costs and for work done on a time-and-material/force-account basis, with documentation as required for a lump sum proposal plus additional information: 1. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work and date of the order. 2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom. 3. Time record, summary of hours worked and hourly rates paid. 4. Receipts and invoices for: a. Equipment used, listing dates and times of use. b. Products used, listing quantities. c. Subcontracts. C. Document requests for substitutions for products as specified in Section 01600. D. Support each claim for additional time due to weather-related delays with the following daily information: 1. Statement of the reason for requesting an extension to the Contract Time due to the 01027 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents weather, including the materials or trades affected and the adverse effects of the weather upon these items. 2. Weather conditions at the site of the project for each day requested. 3. Temperature in Fahrenheit at the site for each day requested. 4. Any additional information requested by the Owner. 1.06 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS A. Contractor shall prepare each Change Order, unless Owner or Architect is authorized to prepare Change Orders at the Pre-Construction Conference. B. Form: Change Order, standard City of Fort Collins form or Owner provided form. C. Change Order will describe changes in the work, both additions and deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change. D. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 1.07 LUMP SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either: 1. Architect's Proposal Request and Contractor's response as mutually agreed between Owner and Contractor; or 2. Contractor's proposal for a change as recommended by Architect. B. Owner and Architect will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes. C. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the terms therein. 1.08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either: 1. Architect's definition of the scope of the required changes. 2. Contractor's proposal for a change as recommended by Architect. 3. Survey of completed work. B. The amounts of the unit prices to be either: 1. Those stated in the Agreement. 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be determined prior to start of the work: 1. Owner and Architect will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes. 2. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the terms therein. D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work: 1. Architect or Owner will issue a Construction Change Authorization directing Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices and will cite the applicable unit prices. 2. At completion of the change, Architect will determine the cost of such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. a. Contractor shall submit documentation to establish the number of units of each item and any claims for a change in Contract Time. 3. Architect will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 4. Owner and Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their agreement with the terms therein. 01027 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.09 TIME AND MATERIAL/FORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER/CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION A. Architect and Owner will issue a Construction Change Authorization directing Contractor to proceed with the changes. B. At completion of the change, Contractor shall submit itemized accounting and supporting data as provided in paragraph 1.05, Documentation of Proposals and Claims. C. Architect will determine the allowable cost of such work as provided in General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. D. Architect and Owner will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. E. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their agreement therein. F. Owner must approve in writing and on a daily basis all time and material Change Orders. 1.10 CONTRACTOR OVERHEAD AND PROFIT A. General: Allowable limits to the Contractor's and Subcontractors' mark-ups on Change Orders shall be as established in the General Conditions of the Contract. 1.11 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS A. Periodically revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of work and to record the adjusted Contract Sum. B. Periodically revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time. 1. Revise subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by the changes. C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in Record Documents. END OF SECTION 01030 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01030 ALTERNATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. This section identifies each Alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the work only when that Alternate is made a part of the work by specific provisions in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to properly integrate the work under each Alternate for the complete construction required by the Contract Documents. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Bidding Documents: Method of quotation of the cost of each Alternate and the basis of the Owner's acceptance of Alternate. 2. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Incorporation of Alternates into the work. 3. Bid Form and Bid Schedule. 4. Sections of the Specifications as listed under the respective Alternates. Referenced Sections of Specifications stipulate pertinent requirements for products and methods to achieve the work stipulated under each Alternate. D. Alternates will be accepted as follows, unless otherwise modified by the General or Supplementary Conditions to the Contract. 1. Alternates will be accepted in any order. E. The Owner will consider the price quotation for each Alternate, in addition to the Base Bid, in determining the apparent Low Bidder, unless otherwise modified by the General or Supplementary Conditions to the Contract. Refer to Information for Bidders. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 (Add): B. Alternate No. 2 (Add): END OF SECTION 01040 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01040 COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall be responsible for the overall coordination of all civil, landscape, architectural, structural, plumbing, mechanical and electrical components and systems that are a part of this project. 1. Coordinate components and systems prior to purchasing or fabricating. 2. Coordinate materials, equipment and fixtures supplied by various trades for compatibility with the final installation. B. Coordinate all work included in the Construction Documents, including but not limited to the following construction trades: 1. Demolition. 2. Earthwork, excavation and grading. 3. Pier drilling. 4. On-site utilities, including utilities designed by other jurisdictions. 5. Portland cement and other hard surface pavements. 6. Landscaping and site irrigation systems. 7. Cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete. 8. Concrete unit masonry. 9. Structural steel and metalwork. 10. Building, roof and foundation insulation. 11. Roofing and flashings. 12. Doors, windows and glazing systems. 13. Painting and finishing. 14. Specialties and equipment. 15. Mechanical, plumbing and fire protection systems. 16. Electrical systems. C. Coordinate scheduling, submittals and work of the Drawings and various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. D. Coordinate and verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with the building utilities. Interruption of utility services shall be scheduled with and subject to the approval of the Owner seven (7) business days prior to the interruption. E. Coordinate utility locates and utility designs with the City of Fort Collins and other jurisdictions having authority over the project. Refer to Section 01060. F. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions: Contractor's Responsibilities. 2. Section 01010, Summary of Work. 3. Section 01050, Field Engineering. 4. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements. 5. Section 01310, Construction Schedules. 6. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment: Substitutions. 7. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry: General project coordination. 1.02 RELATED WORK BY OTHERS A. Coordinate as required with the Owner for related work, as shown on the Drawings or specified herein, to be performed by the Owner's own forces or by separate contract from this project. Refer to Section 01010. 01040 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.03 COORDINATION OF SCHEDULES A. Coordinate schedule of construction activity with the Owner's continued use of the facility and site. Refer to Section 01046, Access to Site. B. Coordinate schedule of construction activity with the Owner and other Contractors as necessary to facilitate the related work by others described above. 1.04 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. In addition to progress meetings specified in Section 01200, Contractor shall hold coordination meetings and pre-installation conferences with personnel and Subcontractors to assure coordination of work. 1.05 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. General: Schedule and coordinate all submittals specified in Section 01340 or other Sections. B. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installation, connection and start-up and controls for systems and equipment. C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, operating elements and the effect on work of other Sections. 1.06 COORDINATION OF SPACE A. Coordinate use of project space and sequence of installation of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on the Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts and conduits as closely as practicable, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance and for repairs. B. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. 1.07 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. B. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in Section 01700. C. After Owner's occupancy of premises, coordinate access to the site by various Sections for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents to minimize the disruption of Owner's activities. END OF SECTION 01041 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01041 SUPERINTENDENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, who shall be in attendance at the project site during performance of the work. B. Superintendent shall be on the jobsite to the minimum level specified herein, but in all cases whenever a Subcontractor is working on the project. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. 2. Section 01010, Summary of Work: Contractor Qualifications. 3. Section 01040, Coordination. 4. Section 01046, Access to Site. 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS A. Superintendent Qualification Requirements: Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent to supervise and coordinate all construction and jobsite administration tasks for the duration of the project. 1. Superintendent shall be a regular employee of the Contractor's firm, unless the use of a contract employee is approved and authorized by the Owner in writing. 2. Superintendent shall have a general knowledge of the building type and type of construction proposed for this project, and shall have successfully completed at least one (1) project of similar size and complexity in the past five (5) years, serving in a similar capacity. 3. Contractor shall submit a written resume, references for similar completed projects and other supporting documents with their bid to verify the qualifications of the person(s) to be employed as superintendent for this project. B. General Contractor Qualification Requirements: Refer to Section 01010, Summary of Work. 1.03 REQUIRED LEVEL OF SUPERVISION A. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite until Substantial Completion on a full-time basis. 1. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite whenever a Subcontractor is working on the project. 2. Superintendent shall be present during any municipal or utility inspection. 3. Superintendent shall be present at any scheduled or Owner- or Architect-requested meeting. B. Superintendent shall be present at the jobsite after Substantial Completion and through project close-out as follows: 1. Superintendent need not be on-site full time during this period, except as noted below. 2. Superintendent need not be present at the jobsite when any punchlist work is being completed. END OF SECTION 01045 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching of the work. Cutting and patching shall be as required to provide a complete and finished project. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment: Substitutions. 2. Section 02070, Selective Demolition. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of the project. 2. Building, fire, life safety or handicapped accessibility compliance of the project. 3. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. 4. Efficiency, maintenance or safety of any operational element. 5. Visual or aesthetic qualities of sight-exposed elements. B. Include in request: 1. Location and description of affected work. 2. Necessity for cutting or alteration. 3. Description of proposed work and products to be used. 4. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 5. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor, if any. 6. Date and time work will be executed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials used in cutting and patching shall be those required for, or to match, original construction. B. For any change in materials, submit request for substitution in accordance with Section 01600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Execute cutting, fitting and patching as required for a complete and finished project. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for cutting and patching as required for the completion of the work. No cutting shall be done without approval of the Architect or Owner as to location, method and extent of cutting. 2. Fit work tight to adjacent elements. Maintain integrity of wall, roof, ceiling or floor constructions and finishes. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. 3. Minimize extent of necessary cutting and patching. Thoroughly explore alternatives to cutting and patching. 4. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work. 01045 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 5. Provide openings in elements of the work for mechanical and electrical penetrations, work of other trades or Subcontractors. B. Cutting, patching and fitting shall be performed by personnel or subcontractors skilled in the particular trades or Sections of the work involved. C. Perform cutting by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work. D. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. END OF SECTION 01046 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01046 ACCESS TO SITE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 OWNER'S USE OF PREMISES A. Transfort shall fully occupy the existing facility, bus circulation areas, parking areas and grounds during construction of this project, except for specific areas designated strictly for use by the Contractor as specified in paragraph 1.02. B. It is the intent of the Owner that the Contractor not disturb the normal functions of the complex, employees, vendors, visitors, contractors or related outside businesses during the work of this project. Both Transfort and PSD buses will continue to use the site and facilities during construction of the Project. C. Refer to paragraph 1.04 below for special site restrictions. D. The Owner's principal representative on this project shall be Ron Kechter. Mr. Kechter shall be the only representative of the Owner with access to the site with or without the Contractor's knowledge, permission or guidance. E. Related conditions specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01010, Summary of Work. 2. Section 01040, Coordination. 3. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements. 4. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities. 5. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds. 1.02 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A. Contractor shall have access to the site of new construction as required for the successful completion of the project, as arranged at the Pre-Construction Conference. Construction shall be accomplished in two (2) phases: 1. Phase 1 work shall include a portion of the new concrete circulation and training area apron, to the extent shown on the Drawings and as required to maintain vehicular circulation around the site and keep the existing north doors operational during construction. 2. Phase 2 work shall include the Bus Storage Addition and the balance of the concrete circulation and training apron. 3. The Chassis Wash addition can be constructed as part of either phase, at the Contractor's option. B. Site area affected by construction access, construction activities, employee parking and material storage areas is to be minimized. 1. General limits of the site access are as shown on the site plan in the Drawings. Final limits shall be as determined at the Pre-Construction Conference. 2. Owner's access to non-affected areas of the site shall be maintained at all times. Employee parking areas will be maintained throughout the duration of the Project, as determined at the Pre-Construction Conference. 3. Full bus access and circulation around the site shall be maintained throughout the duration of the Project. 4. Contractor's employees and subcontractors shall not park on the public streets adjacent to the site. C. Access to areas of the existing facility affected by construction activities of the Project is to be minimized. 01046 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1. Schedules for construction activities within the existing facility shall be submitted to the Owner for approval a minimum of seven (7) days prior to beginning work. 2. Access to areas of new construction through the existing facility will not be allowed. 3. Contractor shall protect all existing exterior and interior materials and finishes as determined at the Pre-Construction Conference. Contractor shall repair or replace any existing materials or finishes damaged as a part of this work at no cost to the Owner, including damage to adjacent properties. 4. Contractor shall provide daily cleaning of the site and areas of the existing facility during the period of construction activity, as specified in Section 01710. D. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract stored on the site and for completed work. E. Noise Control: Refer to Section 01560, Temporary Controls. F. Dust and Erosion Control: Refer to Section 01560, Temporary Controls. G. Construction Hours: Refer to Section 01560, Temporary Controls. H. Toilet Facilities: Refer to Section 01510, Temporary Utilities. 1.03 CONSTRUCTION STAGING A. Contractor shall provide a staging and phasing plan for the Owner's review and approval at the Pre- Construction Conference, including: 1. Major materials to be stored on the site. 2. Major equipment to be used in the work, with the proposed placement of this equipment during different phases of construction. 3. Field offices, trailers and storage sheds, including those proposed by major Subcontractors. 4. Limits of temporary site fencing, including access points. 5. Proposed location for construction vehicle and employee parking. 6. Proposed phasing or sequencing of construction on the site. 7. Means and methods of maintaining Transfort access through the construction. 1.04 SPECIAL SITE RESTRICTIONS A. The site is subject to the conditions of approval of the Major Amendment, for the specific purposes of this project as described in Section 01010. The Contractor shall acquire copies of these conditions and/or restrictions and will be responsible to maintain compliance of all Contractors and Subcontractors working on the site with such conditions and/or restrictions. END OF SECTION 01050 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide and pay for field engineering services required for the proper execution of the work, including but not limited to: 1. Contractor will provide all required construction staking and field engineering, not itemized as provided by the Owner in paragraph 1.02. 2. Final completion survey, as specified herein. 3. Certification survey as may be required by applicable jurisdictions or utility providers. B. In addition to the specified surveys, Contractor shall provide any resurveying as may be necessary by field changes or redesign. C. Requirements for use of electronic documents. D. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01410, Testing. 2. Section 01720, Project Record Documents. 1.02 OWNER-FURNISHED INFORMATION A. Site Survey: Site survey prepared for the Owner by King Surveyors will be provided to the Contractor for his use on this project. 1. Such data is offered solely for reference and is not to be considered a part of the Con- tract Documents. The data contained in the document prepared for the Owner by the Engineer is believed to be reliable; however, the Architect and Owner do not guarantee its accuracy or completeness. B. Architectural Site Plan Drawing or Horizontal Control Plan prepared by the Architect/Engineer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ a Professional Engineer or Land Surveyor licensed in the state of Colorado and acceptable to the Owner and Architect. B. Documentation and Records: Surveyor or Engineer shall maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. On request of the Architect, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. 1. Enter all survey notes and construction stakeout cut notes into bound, hardcover field books. 2. All survey data developed by the Contractor in performing the work shall be available throughout the construction period. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Surveyor or Engineer: Submit name and address of Surveyor or Professional Engineer to be employed by the Contractor to Architect for approval before beginning work of this Section, if requested by the Owner or Architect. B. Completion Certificate: Upon completion of the work, submit to Architect a certificate signed by the Surveyor or Engineer certifying that elevations and locations are in conformance or non- conformance with Contract Documents. Refer to Section 01700, Contract Close-Out. C. Final Completion Survey: Upon completion of the work, submit to the Owner a Final Improvement Survey as specified below. 01050 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.05 USE OF ARCHITECT'S AND ENGINEER'S ELECTRONIC FILES A. General: Contractor and/or Surveyor may use the Architect's and Engineers' electronic CAD files for site and building layout, upon written request. B. Architect and Engineers will require a release form to be signed and returned prior to release of any electronic files, waiving liability for any use the Contractor or Surveyor makes of the electronic files. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. Reference Points: Immediately upon entering the project, Contractor shall locate and maintain benchmarks and all other grades, lines, levels and dimensions. Report any errors or inconsistencies to the Architect/Engineer before commencing work. B. Basis for Layout: Surveyor shall reference the Architectural Site Plan or other Horizontal Control Plan in the Drawings as the basis for the layout of the Project. Grading plans, utility plans, or other site-related Drawings shall not be used for basic building layout, other than for required coordination. C. Permanent Benchmarks: Surveyor or Engineer shall establish a minimum of two (2) permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 1. Benchmarks shall be referenced U.S.G.S. datum based on elevations above sea level if required by the Owner. D. Coordination: Surveyor shall contact all jurisdictions and/or utility providers for field locates and temporary markings of affected utility lines prior to beginning survey work. E. Batter Boards and Levels: Engineer or Surveyor shall stake out the building and sitework and provide rigidly set batter boards. Such batter boards shall continue in use free to all requiring them, but the Contractor shall remain responsible for their maintenance and accuracy. From permanent benchmarks the engineer or surveyor shall ascertain grades and levels to the building as needed. F. Preservation of Monuments and Stakes: Carefully preserve all monuments, benchmarks, property markers, reference points and stakes. In case of the destruction of these, the Contractor will be charged with expense of replacement and shall be responsible for any mistake or loss of time that may be caused. Permanent monuments or benchmarks which must be removed or disturbed shall be protected until properly referenced for relocation. Furnish materials and assistance for proper replacement of such monuments or benchmarks. G. Layout and Control: Surveyor or Engineer shall establish lines and levels, locate and layout by instrumentation and similar means the stakes for finish grading. He shall set control stakes and shall reset stakes as required during progress of the work. H. Construction Staking: Contractor shall provide construction stakes for the following: 1. Double offset stakes on building slab corners for horizontal and vertical alignment. 2. Sanitary and storm sewer lines as follows: The first 100' from any junction shall be stationed every 25'. From 100' on, stationing will be every 100'. Cut sheets shall be provided. Sewer services shall be staked with convenient offsets. 3. Water lines shall be staked on centerline at all fittings and angle points and any other points necessary for establishing the line. Water service will be staked with 5' offsets. 4. Any other stakes necessary for the correct alignment of building structures or components. 01050 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3.02 CERTIFICATION SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. Certification Survey: Upon completion of sitework, the Surveyor shall perform a certification survey as may be if required by the City of Fort Collins or other jurisdictions or utility providers, including submittal of properly formatted drawings or other documentation to these authorities. Submit three (3) copies to the Owner. Certification surveys may be required for, but are not limited to: 1. Storm drainage facilities, including detention pond construction. 2. Water line improvements. 3. Sanitary sewer line improvements. 3.03 FINAL COMPLETION SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A. Final Improvement Survey: Upon completion of the work, the surveyor or engineer shall perform a final improvement survey of the as-constructed conditions, including but not limited to, required reference points, above-ground structures and other improvements, below-ground structures and utilities, and final topography. Submit three (3) copies to the Owner. END OF SECTION 01060 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 APPROVAL AND RECOMMENDATION AGENCIES A. The City of Fort Collins has jurisdiction for review and approval of the project, including but not limited to, the following departments: 1. Planning and Zoning. 2. Building Inspection. 3. Engineering and Traffic Engineering. 4. Water/Wastewater Utility. 5. Stormwater Utility. 6. Electric Utility. 7. Natural Resources. B. Other entities having jurisdiction of this project, include but are not limited to: 1. State of Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT). 2. U. S. Federal Transit Administration (FTA). 3. Poudre Fire Authority. C. Codes which have been adopted by the City of Fort Collins applicable to the project include, but may not be limited to: 1. International Building Code, 2009 Edition with local amendments. 2. International Fire Code, 2009 Edition. 3. International Energy Conservation Code, 2009 Edition. 4. International Plumbing Code, 2009 Edition. 5. International Mechanical Code, 2009 Edition. 6. NFPA-1, Fire Code, Current Edition, where applicable. 7. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code, Current Edition, where applicable. 8. National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition. 9. ANSI A117.1, American National Standards Institute Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People, Current Edition. 10. Americans with Disabilities Act, provisions for accessibility by physically handicapped people, 1990. 11. Any other local, state or federal codes which are applicable. 12. In case of a conflict between referenced applicable codes, the one having the more stringent requirements shall govern. D. Related requirements or conditions specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01400, Quality Control: Quality control workmanship standards. 2. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Quality of materials and equipment to be installed in the work. 1.02 SERVICES AND UTILITIES A. Utility services are provided to the area of the project by the following jurisdictions: 1. Water: Fort Collins/Loveland Water District. 2. Sanitary Sewer: South Fort Collins Sanitation District. 3. Stormwater Drainage: City of Fort Collins. 4. Natural Gas: Xcel Energy. 5. Telephone: Qwest. 6. Cable Television: Comcast. 7. Electric: City of Fort Collins. 8. Fiber Optics: City of Fort Collins. 01060 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. Specific on- and off-site utility extensions and service lines are shown on the Drawings, except: 1. Natural gas. 2. Telephone. 3. Cable television. 4. Electrical primary service to location(s) of the transformer(s). C. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the work of these outside utility providers, as well as the coordination of these utilities with those shown on the Drawings. Refer to Section 01040. 1.03 COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAWS A. In addition to any applicable regulations referenced elsewhere, all Contractors shall strictly adhere to all applicable federal and state laws, orders, and all applicable standards, regulations, interpretations or guidelines issued pursuant thereto. Refer to the Contract Requirements. 1.04 HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBILITY A. Construction shall be in substantial compliance with the requirements of the American National Standards Institute Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People, ANSI A117.1, Current Edition, and the Americans with Disabilities Act, 1990. B. Refer to specific Sections of the Specifications for specific requirements relating to each section. 1.05 SAFETY OF LIFE, HEALTH AND PUBLIC WELFARE A. Contractor shall have sole responsibility for compliance on the job site with all applicable portions of the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) and compliance with the Equal Employment Opportunity Act (EEO). 1. Contractor shall fully comply with OSHA requirements for maintaining Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on the site. B. Protection of life, health and public welfare as it relates to construction of the project is the responsibility of the Contractor. The Owner will not provide observation, inspection, supervision or any comment on plans, procedures or actions employed at the project as they relate to safety of life, health or public welfare. If conditions are imposed by the Owner which interfere with or imply actions detrimental to safety, written notice shall be returned to the Contractor for action prior to affecting any unsafe conditions. C. The Architect shall not have control or charge of, and shall not be responsible for, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures for safety precautions and programs in connection with the work, for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, subcontractors or any other persons performing any of the work or for the failure of any of them to carry out the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. The Architect shall have no responsibility for the discovery, presence, handling, removal or disposal of or exposure of persons to hazardous materials in any form at the project site, including but not limited to asbestos, asbestos products, lead-based paint, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or other toxic substances. Refer also to Section 02080, Hazardous Material Removal. 1.06 LICENSES A. Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Contractor shall be responsible for meeting all contractor licensing requirements for the City of Fort Collins, including testing and fees as applicable. Contractor shall acquire and maintain all required licenses for the duration of the Project. 01060 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.07 PERMITS AND FEES A. General: Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Contractor shall be responsible for all permits, fees and inspections required by the regulatory agencies referenced above, including but not limited to: 1. Building permit fees. 2. Subcontractor fees. 3. Demolition permit fees. 4. Any other local or state permits or fees. 5. Right-of-way permit for work within a street, alley or other public right-of-way. 6. Street cut fees, if applicable. C. Tax Exempt Projects: The City of Fort Collins is a tax exempt entity, and therefore no sales or use taxes should be included in the Bid. D. The City of Fort Collins shall be responsible for the following permits, fees and inspections required by the regulatory agencies referenced above, including but not limited to: 1. Plan review fees, including fees assessed by Poudre Fire Authority. 2. Capital expansion fees, utility impact and plant investment fees, and other development fees. 3. Utility tap and meter fees. 4. Larimer County Health Department application and review fees. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring all building permits, inspections and any other permits required for the construction of this project. 1. The Drawings and Specifications shall be in the City of Fort Collins' review process during the bidding phase of the project. END OF SECTION 01070 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01070 ABBREVIATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Wherever used in these Specifications or on the Drawings, the following abbreviations shall have the meanings indicated: AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials AATCC American Association of Text (Broadloom) Chemists and Colorists ACEC American Council of Engineering Companies ADA Americans with Disabilities Act AGC Associated General Contractors AIA American Institute of Architects AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ANSI American National Standards Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Institute of America BIM Building Information Modeling CAD Computer-Assisted Drafting CDOT Colorado Department of Transportation CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission CRI Carpet and Rug Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standard EEI Edison Electric Institute EPA Environmental Protection Agency FDA U. S. Food and Drug Administration FS Federal Specifications FSC Forest Stewardship Council FTA U. S. Federal Transit Administration GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America HSA Historic Structure Assessment IBBM Iron Body, Bronze Mounted IBC International Building Code ICCEC International Code Council Electrical Code ICF Permanent Insulated Concrete Forming System IEBC International Existing Building Code IECC International Energy Conservation Code IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 01070 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IFC International Fire Code IIC Impact Isolation Class IMC International Mechanical Code IPC International Plumbing Code IRC International Residential Building Code ISA Institute Society of America IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council LEED Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design LTTR Long-Term Thermal Resistance (R-Value) MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association MCC Motor Control Center MCIP Motor Control Instrument Panel MERV Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets MSL Mean Sea Level MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturer's Association NBS National Bureau of Standards NEC National Electric Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council NFPA National Fire Protection Association NFoPA National Forest Products Association NOFMA Natural Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association NPT National Pipe Thread NRC Noise Reduction Coefficient (Absorption/Reflection) NRS Non-Rising Stem NWFA National Wood Flooring Association NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act PIMA Polyisocyanurate Insulation Manufacturer’s Association RPM Revolutions per minute SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District SDI Steel Deck Institute SHF State (of Colorado) Historical Fund SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. SPRI Single-Ply Roofing Institute STC Sound Transmission Class (Barrier to Penetration) TCA Tile Council of America UBC Uniform Building Code UCBC Uniform Code for Building Conservation UFC Uniform Fire Code UL Underwriter's Laboratories UMC Uniform Mechanical Code UPC Uniform Plumbing Code USDA U. S. Department of Agriculture USGBC U. S. Green Building Council END OF SECTION 01200 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Owner and Architect shall schedule and administer Pre-Bid and Pre-Construction Conferences. B. Contractor shall schedule and administer periodic O/A/C (Owner/Architect/Contractor) progress meetings and specially called meetings throughout progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings and conduct meetings. 2. Record the minutes, including significant proceedings and decisions. 3. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within five (5) days after each meeting to all participants in the meeting and parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. 4. Prepare and regularly update an "open items" list to document and track required decisions and pending changes. C. Contractor shall schedule and administer preinstallation conferences and other meetings with subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturer's technical representatives throughout progress of work. D. Representatives of contractors, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. E. Architect and Owner's representative will attend meetings to ascertain that work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and construction schedules. 1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner and Architect shall schedule and administer the Pre-Construction Conference within five (5) working days after the date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by the Owner. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's principal representative. 2. Architect and his professional consultants, as necessary. 3. Contractor's project manager and superintendent. 4. Major subcontractors. D. Agenda: 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors. b. Project construction schedules. c. Schedule of Values. d. Contractor's staging plan. 2. Construction Waste Management Plan. 3. Critical work sequencing. 4. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 5. Project coordination. a. Designation of responsible personnel. 6. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions. b. Proposal requests. c. Submittals, shop drawings and samples. d. Change Orders. e. Applications for Payment. 7. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 8. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 9. Use of premises: 01200 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents a. Field office, work and storage areas. b. Owner's use of site and grounds. 10. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids. 11. Temporary utilities. 12. Safety and first-aid procedures. 13. Security procedures and temporary site or building fencing and enclosures. 14. Housekeeping procedures. 15. Pending changes and substitutions by Change Order. 16. Installation of project sign. 1.03 O/A/C PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Contractor shall schedule and administer regular meetings as determined at the Pre-Construction Conference and specially called meetings as required by progress of the work. B. Location of the Meetings: As designated by Contractor and coordinated with the Owner's principal representative, normally the Contractor's field office. C. Attendance: 1. Contractor's project manager and on-site superintendent. 2. Owner's principal representative. 3. Architect and his professional consultants, as needed. 4. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda. 5. Others as appropriate. D. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 2. Field observations, problems and conflicts. 3. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 4. Compliance with Construction Waste Management Plan. 5. Revisions to the construction schedule. 6. Progress and schedule during succeeding work period. 7. Review submittal schedules and expedite as required. 8. Maintenance of quality standards. 9. Pending changes and substitutions, with review of the proposed changes for: a. Effect on construction schedule and completion date. b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. 10. Review of Contractor's application for progress/final payment. 11. Walk-through observation of the work in progress by the Owner's representative, Architect and his consultants, as necessary, and General Contractor. Subcontractors will only be involved in these walk-throughs as requested by the Owner or Architect. 1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Contractor shall schedule and administer pre-installation conferences and other meetings with subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturer's technical representatives throughout progress of the work. B. Attendance: 1. Contractor's project manager and on-site superintendent. 2. Architect or his professional consultants, as needed. 3. Structural Engineer for architectural precast concrete and structural steel erection. 4. Subcontractors as appropriate. 5. Suppliers as appropriate. 6. Manufacturer's technical representatives for roofing systems, and as appropriate. C. Suggested Agenda: As determined by Contractor. END OF SECTION 01310 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect and Owner estimated construction progress schedules for the work with subschedules of related activities which are essential to its progress. B. Submit revised progress schedules periodically. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. General and Supplementary Conditions, and Conditions of the Contract: Liquidated Damages. 2. Section 01027, Change Order Procedures: Requirements for documenting requests for time extensions due to weather. 3. Section 01040, Coordination. 4. Section 01200, Project Meetings. 5. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 6. Section 01700, Contract Close-Out. 1.02 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Type: Schedules will be computer generated, using "critical path" software subject to approval by the Owner and Architect. 1. Software shall indicate intermediate and final completion milestones. 2. Software shall indicate product data and shop drawing submittal dates, and indicate required ordering dates for long lead-time items. 3. Software shall be capable of automatically adjusting critical path entries. B. Prepare schedules in a continuous flow, both daily and weekly formats. 1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade, supplier or subcontractor. 2. Horizontal Time Scale: Identify the first workday of each week. 3. Minimum Size: 8-1/2" x 11". C. Format of Listing: Table of Contents of this project manual as a minimum. D. Format of Scheduling: Chronological order of the start of each item of work, using "critical path" method. E. Identification of Listings: By major Specification Section numbers as a minimum. 1. Listings shall be complete enough to include each item of work that is sizable enough to affect either the start of, or completion of, other areas of the work. 1.03 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Indicate the complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Indicate the dates for the beginning and completion of each major element of construction. 3. Indicate critical intermediate and final completion milestone dates. 4. Indicate product data and shop drawing submittal dates, and required ordering dates for long lead-time items. 5. Indicate substantial completion, punch list completion, final completion and contract close-out dates. 01310 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. Final Completion Schedule: Contractor shall update the latest progress schedule through contract close-out. C. Float Time: The Contractor and Owner hereby agree that "float" time designed into the schedule is an asset to the Project, and not for the exclusive use or benefit of the Contractor or the Owner, unless otherwise specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. D. Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to be a usurpation of the Contractor's authority and responsibility to plan and schedule the work as he sees fit, subject to all other requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.04 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial construction schedule within fifteen (15) days after Award of Contract. 1. Architect/Engineer and Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after receipt, if modifications are required. 2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy. B. Submit revised progress schedules with each Application for Payment indicating actual work progress in comparison to scheduled progress. C. Revised schedules shall be reviewed at each normally scheduled O/A/C progress meeting, as set forth in Section 01200. D. Submit final schedule with contract close-out documentation. E. Claims for Weather-Related Contract Time Extensions: Refer to Section 01027 and General and Supplementary Conditions. F. Claims for Other Delays: Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.05 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULES A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: 1. Jobsite file. 2. Owner's representative(s). 3. Architect. 4. Other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to the Contractor in writing any problems anticipated by the projections shown in the schedules. END OF SECTION 01340 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall coordinate and submit shop drawings, product data, samples and other submittals required by the Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall construct and maintain mock-ups and sample panels required by the Contract Documents. C. Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings and submittals prior to transmittal to the Architect and Owner. D. Requirements and restrictions on resubmittals. E. Requirements for paper and/or electronic submittals. F. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Conditions of the Contract: Definitions and additional responsibilities of parties. 2. Section 01040, Coordination. 3. Section 01200, Project Meetings. 4. Section 01310, Construction Schedules. 5. Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Controls: Submittal requirements. 6. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management: Submittal requirements. 7. Section 01720, Project Record Documents. 8. Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings: Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner, with sufficient detail and completeness to clearly illustrate all conditions of the specific installation. 1. Details shall be identified by reference to sheet and detail, schedule or room numbers shown on Contract Drawings. 2. Shop drawings shall be returned unreviewed if, in the opinion of the Architect or consultants, the drawings lack sufficient completeness or clarity to allow their review. B. Sheet Size: All shop drawings shall be 8-1/2" x 11", 11" x 17" or 24" x 36", except as restricted in paragraph 1.07 for electronic submittals. C. Quantity and Format: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, provide four (4) reproducible and three (3) prints or copies, including one (1) set for the Owner's records. D. Cover Sheet: Each copy shall contain the Shop Drawing Identification Form, located at the end of this Section. E. Electronic Submittals: Refer to paragraphs 1.07 and 1.08 below. 1.03 PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. B. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: 1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to the work. 2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the work. C. Quantity and Format: Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, provide four (4) complete sets. 01340 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents D. Electronic Submittals: Refer to paragraph 1.07 below. 1.04 SAMPLES A. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product with integral related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, textures and pattern. B. Contractor shall coordinate and submit all samples requiring finish, texture or color selection by the Architect so that these materials may be reviewed by the Architect as a complete package. The Architect reserves the right to withhold finish and color selections until all such samples have been submitted. C. Sample Panels: Construct and maintain mock-ups and sample panels as required by specific Sections of these Specifications. D. Refer to paragraph 1.11 below for requirements related to return of approved samples. 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a log of shop drawing, product data and sample submittals, indicating schedules for submission and review of individual products or equipment. B. Contractor shall coordinate and make submittals promptly, in accordance with the approved submittal schedule. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall be responsible for delays in the work caused by the Contractor's failure to make submittals in a timely manner, the completeness and/or accuracy of such submittals, or failure to allow adequate time for review of submittals by the Architect or his professional consultants. C. Contractor shall review and approve shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission to Architect. Contractor shall determine and verify: 1. Quantities. 2. Field measurements and construction criteria. 3. Conformance with specified finishes and color selections. 4. Field construction criteria. 5. Catalog numbers and similar data. 6. Warranty coverages. 7. Conformance to requirements of Specifications. 8. Completeness of submittal and compliance with the requirements of this Section. D. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall coordinate submittals between related items of work prior to purchasing or fabricating. E. Review of shop drawings and submittals by the Architect/Engineer is only for general conformance with design intent of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for meeting all requirements of the Drawings and/or Specifications, whether noted in the Architect/Engineer review or not. 1. Contractor's review "stamp" language shall not waive or alter this responsibility. F. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at time of submission of any deviations in the submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor must submit in writing any requests for modifications to the Drawings and Specifications. Shop drawings submitted to the Architect/Engineer for this review do not constitute "in writing" unless it is noted that specific changes are being requested. Changes by means of shop drawings become the sole responsibility of the Contractor. G. Electronic Submittals: Refer to paragraphs 1.07 and 1.08 below. H. Begin no fabrication or work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect/Engineer approval. 01340 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.06 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make submittals promptly, in accordance with approved schedule and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work or in the work of any other Contractor. B. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings: As specified in paragraph 1.02.C. 2. Product Data: As specified in paragraph 1.03.C. 3. Samples: Submit one sample or set of samples of each item requested. 4. Construction Waste Management Plan: As specified in Section 01714. 5. The Architect reserves the right to withhold review and approval of submittals until all required copies have been furnished. C. Submittals shall contain the following information, to be completed on the attached Shop Drawing Identification Form: 1. Date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions. 2. Project title and number. 3. Names of: a. Contractor. b. Supplier or Subcontractor. 4. Field dimensions clearly identified as such. 5. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. 6. Applicable standards such as UL, ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. 7. Identification of any deviations from Contract Documents. 8. Certification signatures and Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents. D. Submittals for design/build systems, as specified in these Specifications or indicated on the Drawings, shall include the stamp and signature of the Professional Engineer registered in the State of Colorado who prepared the design and construction documents. 1.07 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTALS A. General: Contractor and/or Subcontractors may submit product data and shop drawings electronically to the Architect, upon written request. B. Electronic submittals shall conform to the same content, clarity, format, completeness and other requirements as specified above for paper submittals, except as follows: 1. Quantity: One (1) electronic submittal. 2. Sheet Size for Submittals: 24" x 48" maximum. 3. Clarity: Architect/Engineer reserves the right to reject electronic submittals if they are illegible when printed. C. Submittals requiring color and/or finish selections will not be accepted electronically. Separate color and/or finish samples or selection sheets shall be submitted separately from the electronic product data submittal. D. Contractor's Responsibility: Since scans of electronic shop drawings and product data submittals will only be made in black and white, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for ensuring that Architect/Engineer modifications are accurately translated into the fabrication and construction process. 1.08 USE OF ARCHITECT'S AND ENGINEER'S ELECTRONIC FILES A. General: Contractor and/or Subcontractors may use the Architect's and Engineers' electronic CAD files for preparation of shop drawing submittals, upon written request. B. Architect and Engineers will require a release form to be signed and returned prior to release of any electronic files, waiving liability for any use the Contractor or Subcontractor makes of the 01340 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents electronic files. C. Architect and Engineers will require payment of a flat service fee plus a use fee for each sheet of Drawings requested. Payment of fees are required prior to release of any electronic files. 1.09 ARCHITECT RESPONSIBILITIES A. Upon receipt, Architect shall evaluate submittals for completeness, conformance to requirements of the Specifications, and to verify that Contractor has reviewed and approved the submittal. If the Architect determines that the submittal is incomplete or has not been properly reviewed and approved by the Contractor, the submittal shall be returned to the Contractor without further review. Also refer to paragraph 1.05.C. B. Architect shall then distribute submittals to his professional consultants as applicable. C. Architect and consultants shall review submittals in a timely manner, in accordance with the requirements of General and Supplementary Conditions, but shall require a minimum of ten (10) working days for review. D. Architect's and Consultant's review shall be for general compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. This review shall not include: 1. Verification of field measurements. 2. Verification of quantities. 3. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). E. Architect shall return submittals to the Contractor, with stamp indicating approval, rejection, required revisions, or description of requirements for resubmittal, if applicable. 1. Architect shall not return more than two (2) copies of submittals to the Contractor. F. Unless the Architect and/or Consulting Engineer has required that a submittal be resubmitted, the Architect/Engineer shall review each product submittal or shop drawing only once. Also refer to paragraph 1.11 below. G. Architect shall retain one (1) copy of submittals for the Owner. 1.10 REQUIRED SHOP DRAWING, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLE SUBMISSIONS A. Provide complete information for products specified in individual Sections of these Specifications. 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. General: If, after initial review by the Architect or Consulting Engineer, a submittal is required to be resubmitted by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Architect/Engineer and resubmit until approved. Resubmittals may be required for the following reasons: 1. Incomplete or unclear submittals, or submittals which have not first been reviewed and approved by the Contractor. 2. Lack of required number of copies of product data or shop drawings. 3. Lack of Professional Engineer's stamp and signature where required for design/build systems. 4. Extent of the revisions necessary in the submittal to meet the design intent and to be properly reviewed. 5. Materials and/or fabrication details that do not meet the design or technical requirements of the specifications. 6. All color and/or finish selections have not been submitted as a complete package. B. Shop Drawing and Product Data: Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. Identify any revisions made. C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 01340 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.12 DISTRIBUTION REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall distribute reproductions of shop drawings and copies of product data which carry the Architect/Engineer stamp of review to: 1. Job site file. 2. Record Documents file. 3. Subcontractors. 4. Supplier or fabricator. B. Architect shall distribute returned copies of shop drawings and product data to: 1. Owner's representative. 2. Consultants, as applicable. 1.13 RETURN OF SUBMITTALS A. Samples: If samples submitted for approval in compliance with paragraph 1.04 above are to be returned, Contractor shall indicate this requirement with the sample submittal information. B. Upon approval of such sample(s), Contractor shall be responsible for picking them up at the Architect's office. If requested, the Architect shall arrange for shipping them back to the supplier or manufacturer, upon receipt of shipping fees in advance or upon receipt of the Contractor's shipping account number. < Shop Drawing Log on following page > 01340 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SHOP DRAWING IDENTIFICATION FORM DATE: PROJECT: ARCHITECT: Aller•Lingle•Massey Architects P.C. 712 Whalers Way, Suite B-100 Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 CONTRACTOR: Name: Address: Phone: SUPPLIER OR SUBCONTRACTOR: Name: Contact Person: Address: Phone: PRODUCT(S): SPEC. SECTION(S): CERTIFICATION OF REVIEW: I (We) hereby certify that the product or material covered by this submittal has been reviewed for compliance with the applicable Section(s) of these Specifications, as well as Section 01340, and is in compliance with all specified requirements, including warranty coverages. ______________________________________ _____________________________________ Contractor Signature Supplier/Subcontractor Signature *STAMP* END OF SECTION 01370-1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Architect a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the work. Upon request of the Architect, support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness. B. Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Conditions of the Contract. 2. Section 01026, Application for Payment. 1.02 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Schedule of Values shall be submitted to the Architect within fifteen (15) days of Award of Contract. B. Format: Contractor's standard forms or computer printouts. Identify schedule with: 1. Title of project and location. 2. Architect and project number. 3. Name and address of Contractor. 4. Contract designation. 5. Date of submission. C. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. 1. List separately the costs associated with the materials and labor for each component part of the work. D. Basis: At a minimum, the Table of Contents of this Project Manual shall be used as the format for listing component items. Contractor may include additional listings at their option. 1. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major section of the Specifications. 2. Contractor’s overhead and profit shall be listed as a separate line item. 3. Contractor's contingency, if required by the General or Supplementary Conditions, shall be listed as a separate line item. 4. Mechanical and Electrical: Provide separate line items for rough-in and finish work for all plumbing, mechanical and electrical work. E. For each major line item, list subvalues of major products or operations under the item. F. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum. END OF SECTION 01410 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01410 TESTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Materials testing by an independent, approved testing laboratory including, but not limited to: 1. Concrete testing. 2. Compaction testing. 3. Structural concrete unit masonry testing. 4. Mortar and masonry grout testing. 5. Steel testing. 6. Roofing systems flood testing. 7. Fire sprinkler system testing. 8. Piping and pressurized systems testing. 9. Radio communication amplification testing. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting. 2. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 3. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4. Section 04100, Mortar and Masonry Grout. 5. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry. 6. Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection: Flood testing of roofing systems. 7. Division 15, Mechanical: Fire sprinkler system. 8. Division 16, Electrical. 1.02 WORK BY SEPARATE CONTRACT A. Owner shall provide any applicable project or building inspection services as required by Chapter 17 of the International Building Code (IBC), current edition, or the Uniform Building Code (UBC), current edition, by separate contract. The Architect and Engineers will not provide these services. Refer to Section 01010, Summary of Work, paragraph 1.06 Work by Others. 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Geotechnical Investigation Report by CTL Thompson dated March 31, 2011, is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between said borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect or upon request of the General Contractor. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom. 1.04 ACCESS TO SITE AND NOTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Testing laboratory will be allowed access to the site as required in the performance of their work. Contractor shall provide testing laboratory at least 48 hours notice prior to time testing is required prior to the next phase of work. 1.05 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Open-Hole Inspection: Soils Engineer shall perform an open-hole inspection for each section of building addition within the project to verify the findings of the above-referenced Geotechnical 01410 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents Investigation Report, prior to placement of any foundation structures, footings or piers. 1. Notify the Architect at the completion of excavation, prior to placement of any formwork. Contractor shall be responsible for notification of the Soils Engineer. 2. Do not proceed with formwork or foundation construction until results have been verified. B. Concrete: 1. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by an independent testing agent recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. 2. Submit proposed concrete mix design to inspection and testing firm and Architect/Engineer for review prior to commencement of work. 3. Test cylinders shall be taken and materials tested in accordance with requirements of Section 03300. 4. If tests indicate that materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner. C. Compaction at Foundations, Building Slabs and Utility Trenches: 1. Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an independent testing agent recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. 2. Notify the Architect at completion of each phase of excavation prior to placement of backfill of all foundations and utility trenches. 3. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing laboratory to perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work until results have been verified. 4. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner. D. Structural Concrete Unit Masonry Testing: 1. Inspection and testing of structural concrete unit masonry shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. 2. Test structural concrete unit masonry materials in accordance with the requirements of Section 04220. 3. If tests indicate that materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner. E. Mortar and Masonry Grout Testing: 1. Inspection and testing of mortar and masonry grout materials shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. 2. Submit proposed mortar and masonry grout mix designs to inspection and testing firm and Architect/Engineer for review prior to commencement of work. 3. Test cylinders shall be taken and materials tested in accordance with requirements of Section 04100 and other applicable Division 4 Masonry sections. 4. If tests indicate that materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Restoration and Preservation Projects: For historic restoration and preservation projects, take special care to match strength and material composition characteristics of the mortar proposed with strength of existing materials. F. Steel: 1. Inspection and testing of steel construction shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Structural Engineer and Owner. 2. Testing agency shall perform visual inspections of steel erection and connections, including but not limited to: general construction, field welds, bolts torque of high-strength bolts, headed anchor studs and deck welds. Refer to Structural Drawings for complete steel inspection table or schedule. (Refer to Section 05120 for required inspections and testing.) 3. Where visual inspection cannot determine adequacy, additional testing will be performed, including ultrasound and/or X-ray testing of welds. 01410 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 4. If testing indicates that materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to Owner. G. Contractor shall conduct the following tests as specified in Division 2, Sitework, Division 15, Mechanical, and/or required by local jurisdiction with authority over the installation and testing of utility systems. 1. Pipe alignment tests. 2. Sewer infiltration tests. 3. Sewer exfiltration or air tests. 4. Pressure and leakage tests. H. Flood Testing of Roofing Systems: Contractor shall test the weathertightness system(s) as specified in appropriate Division 7 sections. I. Automatic Fire Sprinkler System: Specified in Division 15. J. Radio Communication Amplification: 1. Inspection and testing of radio amplification will be performed by an independent testing agent recommended by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. 2. Tests shall be taken in accordance with requirements of Section 01060. Poudre Fire Authority or jurisdiction having authority over the project. 3. If tests indicate that radio systems utilized by the appropriate jurisdiction do not meet specified requirements, Owner shall provide radio amplification by separate contract. 1.06 TESTING FEES A. Fees for required materials testing will be paid for by the Owner as provided in the General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Fees for additional testing required due to improper performance of the work will be paid by the Contractor. 1.07 TESTING RESULTS A. Testing laboratory shall furnish copies of the required test results to the following: 1. Owner's representative. 2. Architect. 3. Structural Engineer for open-hole inspection, concrete, structural concrete unit masonry and steel testing. 4. Civil Engineer for compaction, Portland cement concrete paving and underground piping testing. 5. Mechanical Engineer for pressurized piping and fire sprinkler system testing. 6. Contractor. END OF SECTION 01510 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utility services required for construction. Remove upon completion of work. B. Furnish, install and maintain temporary sanitary facilities for use by construction personnel. Remove upon completion of work. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures. 3. Section 01560, Temporary Controls. 4. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds. 5. Sections 01710, Cleaning and 01715, Waste Removal and Recycling: Trash removal during construction. 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with the current editions of all applicable building codes. Refer to Section 01060. B. Comply with applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations. C. Comply with applicable utility company requirements. 1.03 UTILITY FEES A. Utility charges and expenses for temporary construction usage for the following shall be paid by the Owner, unless indicated otherwise: 1. Temporary electricity. 2. Temporary construction water. 3. Temporary heat and ventilation upon start-up of the building's permanent mechanical systems, when put into service during the construction period as specified in paragraph 2.03.C. B. Utility charges and expenses for temporary construction usage for the following shall be paid by the Contractor, unless indicated otherwise: 1. Temporary sanitary facilities. 2. Temporary local and long-distance telephone, including cellular. 3. Temporary heat and ventilation until start-up or use of the building's permanent mechanical systems, including the cost of fuel used during construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Materials for temporary construction uses may be new or used but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 01510 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING A. Contractor may utilize existing 120/240V power service in the existing facility. B. Install circuit and branch wiring with area distribution boxes located so that power and lighting is available throughout the construction area by the use of construction-type power cords. C. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not adequate for work and for areas accessible to the public. D. Security Lighting: Provide temporary security lighting for temporary, secure materials storage area, as may be required by the Owner’s or Contractor’s Builder’s Risk insurance. 2.03 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. Contractor shall provide and maintain, at his own expense, all temporary heating, including all fuel and required attendance necessary to protect and dry all work during cold weather. B. Provide adequate forced ventilation of enclosed areas for curing of installed materials, to disperse humidity and to prevent hazardous accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors or gases. 1. Portable heaters shall be standard approved units complete with controls. Do not store materials near sources of intense heat or open flame. C. Permanent building heating system may be used upon installation, testing and acceptance by the jurisdiction having authority over this area of the work, if allowed in Division 15, Mechanical. 1. The project shall be substantially enclosed and secured with the building's permanent glazing systems and either construction or permanent hardware. 2.04 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Contractor shall install and maintain a job telephone. Contractor shall pay all costs for installation, maintenance, removal and service charges for local calls. Toll charges shall be paid by the party who places the call. B. Telephones within the existing facility shall not be used by construction personnel during the construction period. 2.05 TEMPORARY WATER A. Contractor may utilize existing water service in the existing facility. 1. Contractor shall tap existing fire hydrant for construction water. Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring any necessary permit and installing temporary meter as required by the City of Fort Collins. B. Install branch piping with taps located so that water is available throughout the construction area by the use of 50' hoses. Protect piping and fittings against freezing. 2.07 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Contractor shall provide sanitary facilities for use by construction personnel in compliance with current laws and regulations. 1. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures in accordance with local governing health agencies. B. Toilet facilities within the existing facility shall not be used by construction personnel during the construction period. 01510 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION AND OPERATION A. General: Install and maintain temporary utility services in accordance with requirements of applicable federal, state and local codes and regulations, and applicable utility company requirements. B. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical. C. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service. D. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires. 3.02 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING UTILITY SERVICES A. Interruption of the existing building's utility services shall be scheduled with and subject to the approval of the Owner seven (7) business days prior to the interruption. 3.03 REMOVAL B. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when use is no longer required, or upon completion of the work. C. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. D. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary construction services to original or specified condition. 1. Prior to final inspection, remove temporary lamps and install new lamps in all lighting fixtures used during the construction period. 2. Prior to final inspection, clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters in all mechanical equipment used during the construction period. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated during the construction period without filters. END OF SECTION 01520 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01520 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AND AIDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish and maintain required construction equipment. B. Furnish, install and maintain required construction aids and remove upon completion of work. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01046, Access to Site. 2. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities. 3. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures. 4. Section 01560, Temporary Controls. 5. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Equipment and construction aids for temporary construction uses may be new, used or rental equipment, suitable for the intended purpose, but must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.02 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT A. Provide construction equipment required by specific Sections of the Specifications or as necessary to facilitate execution of the work, including but not limited to: 1. Miscellaneous hand tools. 2. Miscellaneous power tools. 3. Goggles, masks, hardhats and other personal safety equipment. 4. Cranes, forklifts and other material handling equipment. 5. Rolling or vibrating plate compactors. 6. Concrete batching and pumping trucks and equipment. 7. Concrete paving machines and curb and gutter extrusion equipment. 8. Excavators, graders, tractor and end loaders, scrapers, backhoes, trenchers and other heavy excavation and grading equipment. 9. Air compressors. 10. Portable electrical generators. 11. Mortar batching equipment. 12. Concrete slab floats and joint saws. 13. Drywall texturing equipment. 14. Paint spraying equipment. 15. Other equipment as required. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and temporary equipment required by personnel to facilitate execution of the work. Refer to respective Sections of the Specifications for the particular requirements of each trade, including but not limited to: 1. Scaffolding, staging, ladders and platforms. 01520 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2. Stairs, ramps, runways and guardrails. 3. Hoists, platform lifts and chutes. 4. Concrete curing and thermal protection blankets. 5. Drop cloths and other protective materials. 6. Portable space heaters. 7. Other facilities as required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Consult with Architect, review site conditions and other factors which affect construction procedures and construction aids, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by execution of the work. B. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Divisions 2 through 16. C. Relocate construction aids as required by progress of construction, by storage or work requirements and to accommodate legitimate requirements of other subcontractors employed at the site. 3.02 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials, equipment and services: 1. When construction needs can be met by use of the permanent construction; or 2. At completion of the project. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or by use of temporary facilities. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for construction aids. 2. Grade areas of site affected by temporary installations to required elevations and slopes and clean the area. C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified condition. END OF SECTION 01530 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 90% Review SECTION 01530 BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary construction barriers and enclosures. B. Furnish, erect, and maintain temporary site security fencing and gates. C. Furnish, erect and maintain temporary safety barricade fencing. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01046, Access to Site. 2. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities. 4. Section 01520, Construction Equipment and Aids. 5. Section 01560, Temporary Controls: Dust partitions. 6. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds. 7. Section 02100, Site Preparation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide and maintain for the duration of construction all scaffolds, tarpaulins, canopies, warning signs, steps, platforms, bridges, and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the work, in compliance with applicable safety and other regulations. B. Safety Barricade Fencing: Refer to paragraph 2.08 below. 2.02 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION A. Prior to commencing site work, erect and maintain protective fencing around existing trees and vegetation to remain as identified on the Drawings or as indicated by the Architect. 1. Approved Materials: Expanded plastic or chain link fencing. B. Individual trees shall have protective fencing erected beyond drip line to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner. C. Groups of trees and other vegetation shall have protective fencing erected around the entire group to the satisfaction of the Architect. D. Areas within protective fencing shall remain undisturbed and shall not be used for any purpose. E. Any trees damaged or scarred during construction shall be repaired immediately by an approved tree surgeon. Where separations expose or damage the root system of trees designated to remain, remedial measures shall be taken immediately at the direction of the Owner to ensure the health of the trees. Trees designated to remain but damaged beyond repair or which subsequently die shall be replaced with a similar size and species chosen by the Owner at the sole expense of the Contractor. 2.03 TEMPORARY SITE FENCING A. Prior to commencing work, Contractor shall erect and maintain construction fencing to enclose an area for ground level construction activity, storage and waste removal, as approved by the Owner. 1. Fencing Materials: Panelized, chain-link fencing with crossed X-type post supports, minimum 6'-0" high. 01530 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 90% Review 2. In lieu of temporary construction fencing, the Contractor may install the permanent perimeter chain link fencing as part of Phase 1 work. B. Provide vehicular and pedestrian access gates, with locks, as appropriate for construction access. 1. Furnish Owner's principal representative with keys to the lock of the primary access gate. C. Do not attach temporary fencing to any existing permanent construction, including buildings, trees, retaining walls, walks or pavements. D. Promptly remove temporary fencing materials upon completion of sitework, rough grading and asphalt paving and restore area to original condition. Contractor shall repair or replace any existing materials or equipment damaged as a part of this work at no cost to the Owner. 1. Fencing shall remain in place until building is secured. 2. Fencing shall be removed prior to finish grading, installation of underground sprinkler system and landscaping. 2.04 COLD-WEATHER CONSTRUCTION ENCLOSURES A. Construct temporary construction enclosures as required for cold-weather concrete, masonry, stucco and other exterior finish trades requiring temperature-controlled environments. 1. Frame enclosures of metal or wood, adequately sized and braced to resist anticipated wind and snow loads and to pose no threat of safety to workmen or the public. 2. Cover enclosure structure with minimum 6 mil translucent poly or other material allowing adequate light penetration to work areas. B. Promptly remove temporary construction enclosures upon completion of the work requiring temperature controls or when weather conditions allow. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS TEMPORARY WALL AND ROOF CLOSURES A. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure of exterior roof and walls for successive areas of the building as work progresses to provide acceptable working conditions, provide weather protection for materials, allowing for effective temporary heating and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 1. Provide temporary exterior doors with padlocks. 2. Enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials. 3. Provide enclosures for protection of areas designated for use by Owner during construction. Refer to Section 01046, Access to Site. 2.06 SAFETY BARRICADE FENCING A. Prior to commencing any sitework within any street, alley, public sidewalk or other right-of-way, if any, Contractor shall prepare and submit a traffic lane closure plan to the City of Fort Collins for approval. 1. Plan shall clearly indicate how both vehicular and pedestrian traffic shall be safely accommodated and maintained during construction. B. Prior to commencing such work, Contractor shall erect and maintain protective safety barricade fencing around the areas of work, as required by the approved plan. 1. Approved Materials: Expanded plastic fencing. 2. Color: Orange, or as approved by the governing agency with jurisdiction over this work. Refer to Section 01060. C. Provide adequate room within fenced enclosures for workers and construction activities. D. Maintain all required clearances for vehicular and/or pedestrian circulation within public rights-of- way that will be allowed during the construction period. Refer to Section 01046. E. Consult with the City of Fort Collins for any additional barricading or public safety requirements. 01530 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 90% Review F. Promptly remove temporary safety fencing upon completion of work and restore site area to original condition. Contractor shall repair or replace any existing materials or finishes damaged as a part of this work at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 01540 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01540 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and maintain erosion and sedimentation control materials and procedures. Remove upon completion of work. B. Design an erosion and sediment control plan in accordance with specified standards. Monitor compliance as required by applicable standards. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures. 3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 4. Section 01715, Waste Removal and Recycling. 5. Section 02100, Site Preparation. 6. Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting. 7. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting. 1.02 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN A. Erosion and Sediment Control Plan: Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall submit a draft Erosion and Sediment Control (E&SC) plan to the Architect and Owner, as submitted and approved by the City of Fort Collins. The E&SC plan shall contain the following required information: 1. Name of Contractor's personnel responsible for managing the E&SC plan. 2. Analysis of the erosion and sediment controls needed for the Project, including extent of controls, appropriate methods and construction phasing or sequencing of work. B. E&SC plan shall be designed in conformance with the U. S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 2003 Construction General Permit, Storm Water Management for Construction Activities, or local erosion and sedimentation control standards and codes, whichever is more stringent. The plan shall meet the following objectives: 1. Prevent loss of soil during construction by stormwater runoff and/or wind erosion, including protecting topsoil by stockpiling for reuse. 2. Prevent sedimentation of storm sewer or receiving streams. 3. Prevent polluting the air with dust and particulate matter. C. E&SC plan should include the following information: 1. Statement of erosion control and stormwater control objectives. 2. Comparison of post-development stormwater runoff conditions with pre-development conditions. 3. Description of all temporary and permanent erosion control and stormwater control measures implemented on the project site. 4. Description of the type and frequency of maintenance activities required for the chosen erosion control methods. D. Contractor shall submit copies of the E&SC plan for review by the Architect and Owner's Representative. Allow for at least ten (10) working days for review. Contractor shall make requested revisions and complete the approved E&SC plan. 1.03 ACCEPTABLE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES A. EPA Document 2003 Construction General Permit describes two types of measures that can be used to control sedimentation and erosion: 01540 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1. Stabilization measures include temporary seeding, permanent seeding and mulching. All of these measures are intended to stabilize the soil to prevent erosion. 2. Structural control measures are implemented to retain sediment after erosion has occurred. Structural control measures include earth dikes, silt fencing, sediment traps and sediment basins. 3. The application of these measures depends on the conditions at the specific site. If local provisions are substantially similar, they can be substituted for this standard if it is demonstrated that local provisions meet or exceed the EPA best management practices. B. Definitions: 1. Erosion is a combination of processes in which materials of the earth's surface are loosened, dissolved or worn away, and transported from one place to another by natural agents. 2. Sedimentation is the addition of soils to water bodies by natural and human-related activities. Sedimentation decreases water quality and accelerates the aging process of lakes, rivers and streams. 1.04 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL IMPLEMENTATION A. Distribution: Contractor shall distribute copies of the approved E&SC plan to the Superintendent, each affected Subcontractor, the Architect, the Civil Engineer and the Owner. One copy shall be posted at the jobsite at all times. B. Instruction: Contractor shall provide onsite instruction of appropriate erosion and sediment control measures to be implemented and maintained at appropriate stages of the work. C. Erosion and Sediment Control Plan Compliance: Contractor shall implement, maintain and monitor compliance with the approved E&SC plan. 1. Protect areas prone to erosion from construction activities and implement a soil stabilization plan in susceptible areas. D. Conditions in the field may warrant erosion control measures in addition to what is specified herein or shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall implement whatever measures are determined necessary, as directed by the City of Fort Collins. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Erosion and Sediment Control Materials: Refer to specific Division 2 Sections of these Specifications for silt fence and other required materials. B. Straw Bales: Standard 36" x 24" x 18" straw bales. C. Wattles: 8" diameter machine-produced tube filled with compacted rice straw in seamless flexible netting material, creating a densely filled fiber log. D. Riprap: Rock used for riprap shall be hard, durable, angular in shape and free from cracks, overburden, shale and organic matter. Thin, slab type stones, rounded stones and flaking rock shall not be used. Removed concrete may not be used for riprap. 1. Rock used for riprap shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.50. 2. The d50 for the riprap shall be equal to 9". The maximum stone size shall not be larger than the thickness of a riprap layer. Neither breadth nor thickness of a single stone shall be less than 1/3 of its length. E. Bedding material used shall be equivalent to Colorado Division of Highways Class A filter material (Section 703.09). 01540 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. No earth-disturbing activity outside the limits designated on the Drawings is permitted. B. All required perimeter silt and construction fencing shall be installed prior to any land disturbing activity (stockpiling, stripping, grading, etc.). All other required erosion control measures shall be installed at the appropriate time in the construction sequence as indicated in the approved E&SC plan, construction drawings and erosion control report. C. At all times during construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for preventing and controlling onsite erosion including keeping the property sufficiently watered so as to minimize wind blown sediment. The Contractor shall also be responsible for installing and maintaining all erosion control and mitigation facilities. D. Pre-disturbance vegetation shall be protected and retained wherever possible. Removal or disturbance of existing vegetation shall be limited to the areas required for immediate construction operations, and for the shortest practical period of time. E. Verify required locations of erosion and sedimentation controls with the E&SC plan and the Owner's principal representative before proceeding. 3.02 EXECUTION A. All soils exposed during land disturbing activity (stripping, grading, utility installations, stockpiling, filling, etc.) shall be kept in a roughened condition by ripping or disking along land contours until mulch, vegetation or other permanent erosion control best management practices are installed. No soils in areas outside the project street rights-of-way shall remain exposed by land disturbing activity for more than 30 days before required temporary or permanent erosion control (e.g. seed/mulch, landscaping, etc.) is installed, unless otherwise approved by the City of Fort Collins. B. In order to minimize erosion potential, all temporary (structural) erosion control measures shall: 1. Be inspected at a minimum of once every two (2) weeks and after each significant storm event and repaired or reconstructed as necessary in order to ensure the continued performance of their intended function. 2. Remain in place until such time as all the surrounding disturbed areas are sufficiently stabilized as determined by the Owner. 3. Be removed after the site has been sufficiently stabilized as determined by the Owner. C. No soil stockpile shall exceed 10' in height. All soil stockpiles shall be protected from sediment transport by surface roughening, watering and perimeter silt fencing. Any soil stockpile remaining after 30 days shall be seeded and mulched. D. Silt Fence: Set stakes, construct 4" wide x 4" deep trench upslope of stakes, install fabric to bottom of trench, backfill and compact excavated trench. Refer to the Drawings for appropriate details. E. Straw Bale Sediment Barrier: Straw bale sediment barriers will be installed after the initial grading of the site (in swales) and after the installation of storm pipes and inlets. Excavate 4" deep trench for the width of the inlet. Install straw bales in trench with ends tightly abutted. Stake each bale into the ground with two (2) wooden stakes. Refer to the Drawings for appropriate details. F. Wattle Sediment Barrier: Wattle sediment barriers will be installed after the initial grading of the site (in swales) and after the installation of storm pipes and inlets. Install wattles with ends tightly abutted. Stake each wattle into the ground with two (2) wooden stakes. Refer to the Drawings for appropriate details. G. Riprap: Riprap shall be installed after the initial grading of the site (in swales) and after the installation of storm pipes and inlets. Place 6" of bedding material underneath a minimum of 16" of Type L riprap (d50 = 9"). Cover riprap bed with 6" of soil cover consistent with the surrounding finished grade. Refer to the Drawings for appropriate details. 01540 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3.03 SITE CLEANING AND EXCESS MATERIAL DISPOSAL A. City of Fort Collins ordinances and Colorado Discharge Permit System (CDPS) requirements make it unlawful to discharge or allow the discharge of any pollutant or contaminated water from construction sites. Pollutants include, but are not limited to, discarded building materials, concrete truck washout, chemicals, oil and gas products, litter and sanitary waste. The Contractor shall at all times take whatever measures are necessary to assure the proper containment and disposal of pollutants on the site in accordance with any and all applicable local, state and federal regulations. B. A designated area shall be provided onsite for concrete truck chute washout. The area shall be constructed so as to contain washout material and located at least 50' away from any waterway during construction. Upon completion of construction activities, the concrete washout material will be removed and properly disposed of prior to the area being restored. C. The stormwater volume capacity of detention ponds or other stormwater management infrastructure will be restored and storm sewer inlets, catch basins and/or lines shall be cleaned upon completion of the project, before turning the maintenance over to the Owner. D. When temporary erosion control measures are removed, the Contractor shall be responsible for the clean up and removal of all sediment and debris from all drainage infrastructure and other public facilities. E. The Contractor shall immediately clean up any construction materials inadvertently deposited on existing streets, sidewalks or other public rights-of-way, and make sure streets and walkways are cleaned at the end of each working day. F. All retained sediments, particularly those on paved roadway surfaces, shall be removed and disposed of in a manner and location so as not to cause their release into any natural waterways, in accordance with local, state or federal regulations. END OF SECTION 01560 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01560 TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary facilities required for dust and pollution control. B. Implement and maintain temporary controls required for noise and construction work hours limitations. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01010, Summary of Work: Special site restrictions. 2. Section 01040, Coordination. 3. Section 01046, Access to Site. 4. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities. 5. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures: Cold-weather construction enclosures. 6. Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Materials for temporary controls may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.02 DUST CONTROL A. Furnish and maintain such facilities or procedures as may be necessary to prevent air-borne dust generated by the construction activities of this project from affecting either the Owner's use of this site or neighboring properties. Implementation of such requirements will be at the sole discretion of the Owner or the City of Fort Collins. B. Furnish materials, erect and maintain temporary dust partitions to seal portions of the building and equipment to remain in use during the construction period from affected areas of the project. 1. Partition Sheeting: Translucent or clear polyethylene sheets, 6-mil thickness minimum. C. Partitions shall be attached to the existing building so as not to damage or mar materials or finishes. D. Promptly remove temporary partitions upon completion of the work and restore materials and finishes to original condition. Contractor shall repair or replace any existing materials or finishes damaged as a part of this work at no cost to the Owner. 2.03 ENVIRONMENTALLY-SENSITIVE AREAS CONTROL A. Furnish and maintain such facilities as might be necessary to prevent disturbance of, or damage to, environmentally-sensitive areas, whether on the site of the project or offsite where such areas may be potentially affected by the construction of this project. B. Comply with any restrictions placed upon the approval of this project by the City of Fort Collins. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state or local restrictions or requirements. 01560 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.04 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent spilling or littering of water-polluting substances. Do not allow any foreign materials to be dumped into any portion of the sanitary sewer or storm drainage collection system or into any water runoff collection basin. The Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, equipment and materials necessary to remedy any such pollution as deemed appropriate by governing agencies with such jurisdiction. B. No burning of debris or any other air-polluting methods or equipment will be allowed. All motorized equipment shall be adjusted to minimize exhaust pollution. C. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Refer to Section 01540. D. Contractor shall prevent fumes from roofing materials and equipment from being drawn into the existing facility's air intake system. Equipment shutdowns shall be scheduled as specified in Section 01040. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Construction Work Hours: Construction activity will be limited to 7:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday during the construction period, except as limited in paragraphs 3.01.B. and 3.02. Sunday or holiday construction will not be allowed. B. Specific activities that may limit the Contractor's working hours, if applicable, shall be determined at the Pre-Construction Conference. 3.02 NOISE CONTROL A. Construction activities that generate noise in excess of 85 db shall be limited to hours as established at the Pre-Construction Conference. 1. Prohibited after 5:00 p.m. every weekday. 2. Prohibited on Saturdays, Sundays and holidays. END OF SECTION 01580 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01580 PROJECT SIGN PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Contractor shall prepare, erect and maintain one painted project sign. B. No other signs or advertisement will be allowed without the Owner's approval. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 09900, Painting. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: The project sign shall be constructed as detailed on the Drawings or attached hereto. B. Sign Material: 3/4" thick plywood, A/C, exterior APA, conforming to PS1 standards. 1. Size: Sign shall be cut from nominal 4'-0" x 8'-0" plywood sheet, as detailed on the attached drawing. C. Posts: 4" x 4" Hem-Fir or Douglas Fir, S4S, conforming to PS 20 standards. D. Paint: Refer to Section 09900 for materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Architect shall review signage copy for correctness and completeness prior to beginning work. 1. Special graphics or logo requirements will be furnished to the sign fabricator by the Owner and/or Architect. B. Project sign shall be erected within two (2) weeks of Notice to Proceed and shall remain on the project site until completion of the project. C. Location of the sign shall be as arranged at the Pre-Construction Conference. D. The project sign shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be promptly removed upon completion of the project. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Embed sign posts minimum 3'-0". END OF SECTION 01590 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01590 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary construction offices and secured storage facilities. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01046, Access to Site. 2. Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures. 3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management: Separation facilities for handling, recycling, salvage, reuse and return of materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. Contractor shall provide and maintain a secured, weathertight office for use by Contractor, Architect, consultants, Owner's representative and subcontractors. Building shall be the property of the Contractor and shall be promptly removed upon completion of the project. Location for the building shall be as arranged at the Pre-Construction Conference. 1. Structures shall be provided and maintained in good condition, as determined by the Owner's representative. 2. Signage and other advertising allowed on the structures shall be as determined at the Pre- Construction Conference. B. Minimum facilities shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Conference table and chairs for minimum eight (8) persons. 2. Bottled, chilled water dispenser and cups. 3. Plan rack or other facilities for storage of project record documents. 4. File cabinet or other facilities for storage of shop drawings, samples, color boards, installation instructions, materials data sheets, etc. 5. Adequate heat, air conditioning, ventilation and artificial lighting. 6. Other facilities as deemed appropriate or necessary by the Contractor. C. Facilities which may be paid for by the Owner as Division 1 expenses shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. 2.02 STORAGE SHEDS A. Contractor shall provide and maintain secured, weathertight storage sheds or enclosures for tools, materials and equipment requiring such conditions, with adequate heat and ventilation. Provide space for organized storage, and access and artificial lighting for inspection of stored materials. 1. Structures shall be provided and maintained in good condition, as determined by the Owner's representative. 2. Signage and other advertising allowed on the structure shall be as determined at the Pre- Construction Conference. B. Temporary Site Fencing: Refer to Section 01530. C. Security Lighting: Provide temporary security lighting for temporary, secure materials storage area, as may be required by the Owner's or Contractor's Builder's Risk insurance. Refer to Section 01510, Temporary Utilities. 01590 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.03 SEPARATION FACILITIES A. Contractor shall provide and secure a specific area to facilitate separations of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse and return, as specified in Section 01714. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean, and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Completely remove temporary facilities when use is no longer required, or upon completion of the work. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore permanent facilities used for temporary construction services to original or specified condition. END OF SECTION 01600 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Material and equipment incorporated into the work shall conform to applicable standards and manufacturer’s specifications, requirements and applicable recommendations. 1. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer. 2. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages to be interchangeable. c. Two (2) or more items of the same kind shall be identical by the same manufacturer. d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to, unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 3. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or specified. B. Provide specified maintenance materials, equipment and tools to the Owner at the completion of the project. C. Provide equipment or systems start-up, commissioning, field testing and operational testing, as specified in individual Sections. D. Requirements for substitutions and project options. E. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Conditions of the Contract. 2. Section 01010, Summary of the Work. 3. Section 01040, Coordination. 4. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 5. Section 01400, Quality Control. 6. Section 01710, Cleaning. 7. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management: Construction waste diversion requirements. 8. Section 01715, Waste Removal and Recycling. 9. Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Data. 10. Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical. 1.02 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, contractor shall obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including two (2) copies to the Architect. 1. Maintain one (1) set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Architect for further instructions. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. 01600 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure, unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition in manufacturer's original containers or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to assure that materials and equipment are in compliance with approved submittals, required quantities have been provided and that products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. C. Recycle shipping cartons, pallets and other packaging materials as required to meet project goal for construction waste diversion. Refer to Sections 01714 and 01715. 1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Preparation for Shipment: 1. Prepare in a manner to facilitate unloading and handling. 2. Provide skids, boxes, crates or other effective shipping devices to protect materials, fixtures or equipment against damage from rough handling, moisture, dust, excessive heat or cold. 3. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discoloration and other damage. 4. Apply grease packing or lubricating oil to all bearing and similar items. 5. Tag or mark each item as identified in the delivery schedule or on the shop drawings. Package or bundle items consisting of multiple similar pieces. Tag or mark the package or bundle. 6. Include complete packing lists or bills of material with each shipment. 7. Do not ship equipment requiring cranes or special equipment for unloading or handling without notice or until Contractor is prepared to receive and care for it properly. 8. Protect electrical equipment, controls and insulation from moisture or water damage. B. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weathertight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. C. Exterior Storage: 1. Store fabricated products above the ground on blocking or skids. Prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 2. Store wood and wood products above the ground on blocking or skids, and cover to protect from weather exposure. D. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions and free from damage or deterioration. E. Protection after Installation: 1. Protect materials, fixtures and equipment with original protective wrappings until Substantial Completion of the project, as specified in individual Sections, to include but not be limited to: a. Finish hardware items. 2. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed. 01600 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.05 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products List: 1. Within thirty (30) days after Award of Contract, submit to Architect a complete list of major products proposed to be used with the name of the manufacturer and the installing Subcontractor. B. Contractor's Options: 1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard. 2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select any one of the products or manufacturers named which complies with the specifications. 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and "or equal", Contractor shall submit a request for substitutions of any product or manufacturer not specifically named. When the phrase "equal approved prior to bidding" is used, consideration of equals will not be made after Bid Opening, except as allowed in paragraph 1.05.D. below. 4. Naming approved manufacturers does not relieve the Contractor from meeting all specification requirements. 5. For products specified by naming only one product and manufacturer, there is no option. For purposes of this project, these include, but may not be limited to: a. Finish hardware specified in Section 08700. b. HVAC and/or lighting controls, specified in Divisions 15 and 16. 6. Manufacturer's material or equipment listed in Schedules, Specifications or on the Drawings are types to be provided for establishment of size, capacity, grade and quality. If other acceptable manufacturers are used, cost of any change in construction required by their use shall be borne by the Contractor. C. Substitutions during Bidding: 1. For the period up to ten (10) working days before the Bid Date, Architect/ Engineer will consider written requests from Contractors for substitution of products. 2. Submit a separate request for each product supported with complete data with drawings and samples as appropriate, including: a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that specified. b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the substitution. c. Effect on the construction schedule. d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product specified. e. Any required license fees or royalties. f. Availability of maintenance service and source of replacement materials. 3. Architect and Owner's representative shall judge the acceptability of the proposed substitution and respond to the Contractor in writing by addenda, provided the request for substitution has been made in accordance with the requirements listed above. Requests made after this timeline will not be responded to by addenda; any use of these products will be at the sole risk of the Contractor. 4. Requests for substitutions received later than the deadline stipulated above will not be considered. D. Substitutions after Contract Award: Substitutions after contract award will only be allowed where the specified products are no longer available, or where lead times in fabrication and delivery will affect the construction schedule, unless otherwise allowed in the General and Supplementary Conditions. 1. Submit a separate request for each product supported with complete data with drawings and samples as appropriate, including: a. Written documentation from the subcontractor or supplier that all allowable, approved manufacturers of a specific product are no longer available, or that the use of such products will adversely affect the construction schedule. Also refer to 01600 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents subparagraph 1.05.E. below. b. All other data specified for substitution requests in paragraph 1.05.C. above. c. Additional cost of a specified material or the proposed substitution shall not be a criteria for reviewing a substitution after contract award. 2. Failure by the Contractor to submit product data and shop drawings for approval, or order materials or equipment in a timely manner will not be grounds for approving a substitution request under this paragraph. 3. Contractor shall use any approved equal material or equipment at no additional cost to the Owner if the material or equipment used in his Bid is unavailable or causes undue delay in fabrication or delivery, as approved by the Architect and Owner. E. Contractor's Representation: A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that the Contractor: 1. Has investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 2. Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified. 3. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the work and make such other changes as may be required to make the work complete in all respects. 4. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may subsequently become apparent. F. Architect and Owner will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness and notify Contractor in writing of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish to the Owner at the completion of the work all maintenance materials, equipment and tools specified in respective Sections of these Specifications. B. Materials specified for the Owner's maintenance stock shall not be used by the Contractor for replacement of defective or damaged materials during the course of construction or to remedy any defect in workmanship caused by the Contractor's own forces or his subcontractors. Maintenance materials may be used, with the written permission of the Owner, to replace materials damaged during construction as a result of vandalism or natural causes. C. Contractor shall certify in writing that all specified maintenance materials have been furnished and turned over to the Owner's representative or delivered to the location on the site directed by the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Use materials of commercial quality suitable for the anticipated service conditions. B. All materials and equipment to be installed in the permanent construction shall be new, unless otherwise permitted. C. Unless required otherwise, use components of standard sizes to assure future availability and permit field installation of repair parts. Make like parts of duplicate units interchangeable. 2.02 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE A. Workmanship and Materials: Design, fabricate and assemble equipment in accordance with the best engineering and shop practice. B. Lubrication: 1. Include lubrication systems which do not waste lubricants, require attention during startup or shutdown or more frequently than weekly during normal operation. 01600 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2. Furnish sufficient lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer to fill lubricant reservoirs and replace consumption during startup, testing and operation prior to the Owner's acceptance of the equipment. C. Drive Units: Refer to Division 15, Mechanical, and/or Division 16, Electrical. D. Anchor Bolts: 1. Furnish with each piece of equipment required to be anchored. 2. Minimum Diameter: 3/4", or as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Minimum Length: Provide for required embedment in structural concrete and extend through concrete base, 1-1/2" of grout, base plate and nuts. Concrete base will be 4" thick, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Include two (2) nuts with each bolt. 5. Deliver anchor bolts with templates or setting drawings in time for installation when structural concrete is placed. E. Equipment Bases: 1. Include a cast iron or welded base plate with each pump, compressor and similar equipment installed on concrete base, if applicable. 2. Design to support both the driven unit and its drive assembly on a single base plate. 3. Support all equipment to be set on floor with 4" minimum concrete base. 4. Include grout holes and provisions for anchor bolts. 5. Include raised lip all around and a threaded drain connection with base plates for pumps. F. Special Tools and Accessories: 1. Furnish all special tools, instruments and accessories required for proper maintenance. 2. Furnish such special devices as are required for proper lifting and handling. G. Shop Painting: Refer to Section 09900, Painting. 1. Protect iron and steel surfaces with paint or other protective coating applied in the shop. 2. Use coating good for anticipated useful life of equipment on surfaces inaccessible after assembly. 3. Finish exposed surfaces smooth, clean and filled to obtain uniform base for paint. 4. Apply one (1) or more shop coats of a primer capable of protecting surfaces to receive finish paint coats after installation. 5. Apply finish coats in the shop with a high-grade oil-resistant enamel on electric motors, speed reducers, starters and other self-contained or enclosed components. 6. Do not paint machined, polished or non-ferrous surfaces. Coat such surfaces with rust-preventive compound, Houghton Rust Veto 334, Rust-Oleum R-9 or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment with or under the guidance of qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary for proper results. B. Arrange work to facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement of equipment. Locate services requiring maintenance on valves and similar units in front of services requiring less maintenance. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other work. C. Locate operating and control equipment, dampers, valves, traps, clean-outs, motors, controllers, switchgears, drain points, maintenance items and devices for easy access. Install access panels where units are concealed by finished and similar work. D. Provide required clearances in front of, and around, equipment as necessary for access and ventilation. Comply with all applicable codes and safety regulations. 3.02 PLACING EQUIPMENT IN OPERATION A. Before starting up each system: 01600 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1. Check each piece of equipment for proper drive rotation, belt tension and any other condition which may cause damage to equipment or endanger personnel. 2. Clean, blow-out or flush lubricating oil, water systems and other pipelines. 3. Lubricate equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Test lubrication system safety interlocks and system performance. 5. Perform final alignment checks under observation of the Owner's principal representative and, where required, manufacturer's field representative. 6. Demonstrate that no abnormal stresses are transmitted to equipment from piping, ducts or other attachments. 7. Check anchor bolt tensions, grout and shims. Use calibrated torque wrenches for tightening anchor bolts. Do not overstress bolts. B. Place equipment into successful operation in accordance with the written instructions of the manufacturer or the instruction of the manufacturer's field representative, including required adjustment, tests and operation checks. 3.03 PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Tests may be required, whether or not specifically called for, to determine if equipment will perform as specified or guaranteed. Final acceptance of equipment, or Substantial Completion of that part of the work, is contingent upon acceptable test results. B. Do not conduct tests on equipment for which manufacturer's field service is specified, unless manufacturer's field representative is present and declares the equipment ready for test. C. Conduct tests as set forth in the Specifications, unless another manner of testing is approved. D. Equipment or systems that fail to satisfy the performance requirements shall be modified or replaced at Architect/Engineer's option. If modifications are allowed, make modifications necessary to produce an installation which will satisfy the performance requirements. Retest after modifications or equipment replacement is complete. Modifications, additional equipment, retesting and structural, piping or electrical modifications necessary to accommodate modified equipment or replacement equipment shall be made at no additional cost. 3.04 COMMISSIONING A. General: Commissioning of major building mechanical and electrical systems shall be provided by the Owner or by separate contract. Refer to Section 01810 and Divisions 15 and 16 for additional information. END OF SECTION 01700 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSE-OUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Comply with requirements stated in Conditions of the Contract and in Specifications for administrative procedures in closing out the work. B. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Conditions of the Contract: Fiscal provisions, legal submittals and additional administrative requirements. 2. Section 01026, Applications for Payment: Requirements for final payment. 3. Section 01050, Field Engineering: Surveying certificate and final completion survey. 4. Section 01310, Construction Schedules. 5. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Maintenance materials. 6. Section 01710, Cleaning. 7. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 8. Section 01720, Project Record Documents. 9. Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Data. 10. Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds. 11. Respective Sections of Specifications: Testing requirements and closeout submittals required of specific trades or subcontractors. 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Definition of Substantial Completion: Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. B. When Contractor considers that the work is substantially complete, he shall submit to the Architect: 1. Written notice that the work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. 2. "Punch list" of items to be completed or corrected, as determined by the Contractor prior to inspection by the Architect and/or Owner. 3. Temporary Certificate of Occupancy, or other evidence of acceptance by the building official or other authority with jurisdiction over the project. 4. Complete prefunctional checklist and function performance testing from commissioning documentation. C. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, Architect will make an inspection to determine the status of completion. D. Should Architect or Engineer determine that the work is not substantially complete: 1. Architect or Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons therefor. 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the work and send a second written notice of substantial completion to the Architect. 3. Architect or Engineer will reinspect the work, as appropriate. E. When Architect concurs that the work is substantially complete, he will: 1. Prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion on AIA form G704 or other Owner-provided form, accompanied by Architect's list of items to be completed or corrected. 2. Submit the Certificate to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. 01700 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.03 FINAL INSPECTION A. When Contractor considers the work is complete, he shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed, and that the work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 3. Corrective or incomplete work has been completed from punch lists provided at Substantial Completion. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the Owner's representative and are operational. 5. Roofing systems have been inspected by the manufacturer's technical representative and have been approved by such technical representative. 6. Final cleaning has been completed and project is ready for final inspection. 7. Final Certificate of Occupancy has been issued. 8. Completion of “flush-out” of building’s mechanical systems. B. Architect will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. C. Should Architect consider that the work is incomplete or defective: 1. Architect or Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work. 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send a second written certification to Architect that the work is complete. 3. Architect or Engineer will reinspect the work, as appropriate. D. When the Architect finds that the work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, he shall request the Contractor to prepare and deliver closeout submittals. E. Should Architect and/or Engineer perform reinspection due to failure of the work to comply with the claims of status of either Substantial or Final Completion made by the Contractor: 1. Owner will compensate Architect and/or Engineer for such additional services by change order to the A/E Agreement. 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment due the Contractor. 1.04 SYSTEMS TESTING A. Contractor shall conduct tests for operational systems and equipment as specified herein or as required by individual Sections, prior to Final Inspection. Testing of systems or equipment shall include but not be limited to: 1. Drainage and weathertightness of roofing systems. 2. Leak detection system of aboveground or belowground fuel tanks, or other sealed storage units. 3. Domestic water service, natural gas or other pressurized site utilities. 4. Site irrigation system. 5. Fire sprinkler system. 6. Fire alarm system. 7. Other systems as specified in Division 15, Mechanical, or Division 16, Electrical, or Section 01600, Material and Equipment. 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities: 1. Certificate of Occupancy. 2. Certificates of Inspection, including plumbing, mechanical, electrical and fire sprinkler systems. B. Final Completion Schedule: Refer to Section 01310. 01700 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Project Record Documents: Refer to Section 01720. D. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel: Refer to Section 01730. E. Warranties and Bonds: Refer to Section 01740. F. Keys and Keying Schedule: Refer to Section 08700, Finish Hardware. G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: General and Supplementary Conditions. H. Maintenance Materials: Evidence that all required maintenance materials have been furnished and stored as directed by the Owner. I. Test Results: Written approval from the testing agency for systems or equipment requiring final testing, as specified above. J. Surveying Certificate: Certification of accuracy of building layout, grading and drainage or ATLA survey, as referenced in Section 01050. K. Certifications: Written certifications of material or equipment compliance, as required by various Sections of the Specifications. 1.06 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Architect. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum: 1. The original Contract Sum, including accepted Bid Alternates. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: a. Previous Change Orders. b. Allowances. c. Unit prices. d. Deductions for uncorrected work. e. Penalties and bonuses. f. Deductions for liquidated damages. g. Deductions for reinspection payments. h. Other adjustments. 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 4. Previous payments. 5. Sum remaining due, including retainage. B. Contractor will prepare a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders. 1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the Conditions of the Contract and Section 01026, Applications for Payment. END OF SECTION 01710 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01710 CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Execute periodic cleaning during progress of the work. B. Execute final cleaning at completion of the work. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Conditions of the Contract. 2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 3. Section 01715, Waste Removal and Recycling. 4. Respective Sections of Specifications: Cleaning for specific products or work. 1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct cleaning operations to comply with applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and anti- pollution laws. B. Construction waste management shall be provided in accordance with the approved construction waste management plan specified in Section 01714. C. Disposal of waste materials, debris and rubbish shall be at a commercially-operated recycling center, legal dumpsite or landfill. Refer to Section 01715. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturers of the surface material to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the building, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from construction operations. 1. Contractor shall provide site cleaning at the end of each workday during progress of the work. 2. Building(s) and site shall be kept clean to the satisfaction of the Owner, including but not limited to: a. Removal of scrap lumber, plywood, gypsum wallboard and other waste construction materials. b. Removal of accumulations of sawdust, drywall compound, nails and other waste materials. c. Removal of cans, bottles and other rubbish. d. Removal of boxes, cartons, pallets and other construction packaging materials. 01710 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3. Stored materials that are to be used in the construction of the work are not subject to the provisions of this paragraph. 4. Refer to Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for site cleaning damages and other remedies available to the Owner. B. Maintain parking areas, access drives and city streets clean from mud and other debris. 3.02 CLEANING PRIOR TO PAINTING A. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as-needed basis until painting is finished. B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or freshly finished surfaces. C. Temporarily seal window and door openings prior to the start of finish painting to prevent windblown dust and other particulates from impairing wet or freshly finished surfaces. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Final cleaning shall be performed by personnel or subcontractors skilled in this work. B. In general, the extent of final cleaning shall be to remove grease, mastic and adhesives, dust and dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from site-exposed interior and exterior surfaces. C. Interior cleaning shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Wash and polish glass, glazing and mirrors. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine. 2. Damp mop all exposed concrete slabs. 3. Broom clean and dry vacuum all interior sealed concrete floor slabs to be left exposed. Apply specified finish/sealer. 4. Wash and wipe down exposed structural steel and ornamental metal surfaces. D. Exterior cleaning shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Wash down precast concrete surfaces, using water pressure within allowable limits of the manufacturer. 2. Power-wash or wash and wipe down exposed structural steel and ornamental metal surfaces. 3. Wash and wipe down doors and frames. 4. Wash and polish glass and glazing. 5. Wash and wipe down site furnishings, bicycle racks, pipe bollards, ornamental metal fencing and other site amenities. E. Site cleaning shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Broom clean and wash down all areas of exterior concrete flatwork. 2. Rake excess mulch and other debris from shrub beds and turf areas, as specified in Division 2. F. Ventilating Systems: 1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction. 2. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. G. Prior to final completion or Owner occupancy, Contractor shall conduct an inspection of the site, all site-exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all work areas to verify that work of the entire project is clean. END OF SECTION 01714 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01714 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. The City of Fort Collins has established that this project shall generate less waste and will recycle or salvage at least 75% (by weight) of construction, demolition and land clearing waste. The Contractor shall develop and implement a Construction Waste Management (CWM) plan that reduces waste in ordering, storing and installation, recommends recycling activities, identifies licensed haulers and processors of recycled materials, names materials subject to salvage and identify organizations that accept salvaged materials. The Contractor shall estimate costs for recycling, salvage and reuse on site and train all site workers on the CWM plan process and requirements. B. Administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Recycling non-hazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of non-hazardous demolition and construction waste. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01010, Summary of Work: Sustainability goals. 2. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Submittal requirements. 3. Section 01715, Waste Removal and Recycling. 4. Section 02070, Selective Demolition. 5. Section 02080, Hazardous Material Removal. 6. Respective Sections of Specifications: Specific requirements for construction waste management. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal offsite of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit one (1) electronic plan in PDF or Microsoft Word format within 14 days of date established for commencement of the work. B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit one (1) electronic copy of report, including the following information: 1. Material category. 2. Total quantity of waste in tons or cubic yards. 3. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged, reused or recycled) in tons or cubic yards. 4. Total quantity of waste recovered as a percentage of total waste. 01714 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit one (1) electronic copy of calculated end-of-project rates for salvage, recycling and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the work. D. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable or reusable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts and invoices. F. Landfill Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts and invoices. G. Final Report: Contractor shall submit a final report after all waste materials have been removed or reused on site and final cleaning has taken place. The report shall include information from the Waste Reduction Progress Reports and shall result in a total waste recovered (salvaged, reused or recycled) matching the goal established above. H. Submittal: Spreadsheet, updated monthly, tabulating total waste material, quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted. 1.04 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. Waste Management Plan: Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall submit a draft Construction Waste Management (CWM) plan to the Owner for review. The CWM plan shall contain the following required information: 1. Name of Contractor's personnel responsible for managing the CWM plan. 2. Analysis of the proposed jobsite waste to be generated, including types and approximate quantities or percentages. Offer options to reduce the waste generated, including ordering procedures, reducing damage to material during storage on site and during installation, and reducing packaging waste. Also offer options to reduce waste that must be disposed of in a hazardous waste facility. 3. Landfill Options: Name of the landfill(s) where trash will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fees, and the projected cost of disposing of all construction waste in the landfill(s). 4. Alternatives to Landfilling: A list of each material proposed to be salvaged, reused or recycled during the course of the Project and the estimated net cost savings or additional costs resulting from separating and recycling, reusing or salvaging (versus landfilling) each material. "Net" means that the following have been subtracted from the cost of separation and recycling: a. Revenue from the sale of recycled or salvaged materials, and b. Landfill tipping fees saved due to diversion of materials from the landfill. The list of these materials shall include, at a minimum, the following materials: 1) Cardboard. 2) Concrete. 3) Asphalt. 4) Wood, including dimensional, unpainted wood, plywood, OSB and particleboard. 5) Ferrous materials. 6) Non-ferrous metals, including copper, brass and aluminum. 7) Glass, including glass bottles from beverages. 8) HDPE and PET plastics, including beverage containers. 9) Concrete masonry units (CMU). 10) Gypsum wallboard products. 11) Polystyrene. 12) Newspaper. 13) Office and other white paper. 14) Drawings, engineering copies and blueprints. 01714 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 15) Packaging materials, including: a) Paper. b) Cardboard boxes. c) Wood pallets and crates. d) Plastic sheet and film. e) Polystyrene packaging. f) Glass. g) HPDE and PET plastics, including beverage containers. h) Plastic pails. 5. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Include the following: a. Total quantity of waste. b. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of collection containers for each type of waste. c. Revenue from salvaged materials. d. Revenue from recycled materials. e. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. f. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. g. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of waste. h. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan. 6. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which any materials identified above will be protected from contamination and describe the means to be employed in recycling the materials (separation requirements, containers, etc.) 7. Transportation: Describe the means of transportation of the recyclable materials, such as whether materials will be site-separated by the Contractor, hauled by the Contractor or specialty recycling firm, or collected by the designated facility. 8. Site Disposal: Burial or other disposal of material on site is prohibited. B. Contractor shall submit copies of the CWM plan for review by the Owner's Representative. Allow for at least two weeks for review. Contractor shall make requested revisions and complete the approved CWM plan. 1. Quantity of Draft Plan: One (1) electronic copy, unless other quantity is specified in Section 01340. 1.05 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Distribution: Contractor shall distribute copies of the approved CWM plan to the Superintendent, each Subcontractor, the Architect and the Owner. One copy shall be posted at the jobsite at all times. B. Instruction: Contractor shall provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling and recycling, salvage, reuse and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the work. C. Separation Facilities: Contractor shall lay out and label a specific area to facilitate separations of materials for potential recycling, salvage, reuse and return. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean, and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials. Also refer to Section 01715, Waste Removal and Recycling. D. Hazardous Wastes: Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored and disposed of according to local regulations. Refer to Section 02080, Hazardous Material Removal. E. Application for Progress Payments: Contractor shall submit with each Application for Progress Payment a summary of waste generated by the Project. The summary shall contain the following information. 1. Amount (in cubic yards) of material landfilled from the Project, the identity of the landfill, the total amount of tipping fees paid and the total disposal cost. 01714 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2. Amount (in cubic yards) of each material recycled, reused on the jobsite, salvaged or returned. Include the transportation cost, the amount of money paid or received for the recycled or salvaged material and the net total cost or savings of recycled or salvaged materials. F. Final Report: Contractor shall submit a final report when all waste material has been removed or reused on site and final cleaning has taken place. The report shall state what percentage (by weight) of construction, demolition and land clearing waste has been diverted from landfill disposal. Salvage may include donation of the material to charitable organizations if acceptable to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Contractor shall implement CWM plan as approved by the Owner. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. Also refer to Section 01715. B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring and reporting status of waste management work plan. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the project. 1. Distribute CWM plan to everyone concerned within three (3) days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. Also refer to Sections 01046 and 01560. 1. Designate and label specific areas on site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated and sold. 3.02 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from site and legally dispose of them as required by Section 01715. END OF SECTION 01715- 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01715 WASTE REMOVAL AND RECYCLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Furnish, maintain and service trash removal dumpsters and/or roll-offs. B. Furnish, maintain and service recycling containers for construction materials, packaging and waste products. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Conditions of the Contract. 2. Section 01010, Summary of Work: Project goal for construction waste diversion. 3. Section 01710, Cleaning. 4. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 5. Section 02070, Selective Demolition. 6. Section 02080, Hazardous Material Removal. 1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct disposal operations to comply with applicable codes, ordinances, regulations and anti- pollution laws. B. Construction waste management shall be provided in accordance with the approved construction waste management plan specified in Section 01714. C. Disposal of waste materials, debris and rubbish shall be at a commercially-operated recycling center, legal dumpsite or landfill. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for all dump fees and expenses associated with hauling materials to the landfill. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WASTE REMOVAL CONTAINERS A. Furnish and maintain recycling, trash and waste removal dumpsters and/or roll-off dumpsters for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish, in quantities sufficient for the Work. 1. Dumpsters shall be provided with tightly fitted covers to prevent debris from being blown out. 2. Roll-offs shall not be required to be covered, but shall be serviced frequently enough to prevent debris from accumulating and being blown out. B. Location of roll-offs and trash dumpsters shall be as arranged at the Pre-Construction Conference. 2.02 RECYCLED MATERIALS CONTAINERS A. General: Refer to Sections 01010 and/or 01714, for specified goal for construction waste diversion. B. Individual recycling containers shall be maintained for paper, corrugated cardboard, and co- mingled containers for glass, plastic, aluminum and steel, or as required to meet the Contractor's construction waste management plan. General contractor shall be responsible for ensuring proper separation of recycled materials and delivery to acceptable recycling centers. 01715- 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DISPOSAL OF WASTE AND RECYCLED MATERIALS A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from construction operations, as specified in Section 01710. B. Maintain parking areas, access drives and city streets clean from mud and other debris. C. Remove recycling, waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal commercial recycling centers, dump sites or landfills away from the site. END OF SECTION 01720 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall maintain at the site one (1) record copy of each of the following documents: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications or Project Manual. 3. Addenda. 4. Construction Waste Management Plan. 5. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 6. Architect field orders or written instructions. 7. Approved shop drawings, product data and samples. 8. Field test records. 9. Architect's and Engineers' field reports. 10. Caisson boring logs. B. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 2. Section 01410, Testing. 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Prior to beginning work, separate one (1) clean, complete set of project documents from construction sets and hold for record document purposes. The Architect and Owner will not furnish additional sets for the Contractor's use at the end of construction, unless compensated for by the Contractor. B. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files and rack for storage of documents. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Architect, Engineers and Owner's representative. 1.03 RECORDING REQUIREMENTS A. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. B. Drawings shall be legibly marked to record actual construction: 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finished first floor datum. 2. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface locations. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by field order or by Change Order. 6. Details not included in original Contract Documents. C. Specifications and Addenda shall be legibly marked to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by field order or by Change Order. 01720 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents D. Caisson Boring Logs: 1. Format: 24" x 36". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. At contract closeout, deliver all Record Documents to the Architect for the Owner. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter containing: 1. Date, project name and number. 2. Contractor's name and address. 3. Title and number of each Record Document. 4. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative. C. Submit one (1) copy of approved data in final form no later than fifteen (15) days after final inspection or acceptance, but prior to applying for final payment. D. As-Recorded Documents shall be submitted, reviewed and accepted by the Architect and Owner prior to the Final Application for Payment being processed. E. Architect shall prepare and furnish the Owner with one (1) set of reproducible Record Documents in accordance with the Contract requirements. END OF SECTION 01730 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's maintenance and operation of products, fixtures and equipment furnished for this Project. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent Sections of the Specifications. B. Instruct Owner's personnel in maintenance of products and in operation of equipment and systems. C. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 01340, Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. 3. Section 01700, Contract Close-Out. 4. Section 01720, Project Record Documents. 5. Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds. 6. Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical. 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. B. Format of Submittals: 1. Size: 8-1/2" x 11". 2. Paper: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly typewritten. 3. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b. Fold larger drawings to size of text pages. 4. Provide fly leaf for each separate product or each piece of operating equipment. a. Provide typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed tabs. 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List the following: a. Title of project. b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. C. Binders: 1. Commercial quality three-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers, ring size as required. 2. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related, consistent groupings. D. Number of Manuals Required: Three (3) copies of each complete manual, including all general information and plumbing, mechanical, electrical and fire sprinkler sections. 1.03 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Table of Contents for each volume arranged in sequential order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. 2. List of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 3. List with each product, name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor or installer. b. Maintenance contractor as appropriate. 01730 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents c. Identify the area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: Contractor shall mark or edit manufacturer's printed literature as to the specific items used in the Project. 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Note each sheet to: a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation. c. Delete references to inapplicable information. C. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide logical sequence of instruction for each procedure. E. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued indicating: 1. Proper procedures in the event of failure. 2. Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds. F. Copy of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each product or material. G. Color/Finish Schedules: 1. List of each color and finish selection for all exterior materials, including manufacturer and color/finish number. 2. List of each color and finish selection for all interior materials, including manufacturer and color/finish number. 1.04 GENERAL MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Provide complete information for products specified in individual Sections of these Specifications. 1.05 MANUALS FOR PLUMBING, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Content for each unit of equipment and system as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. 2. Operating Procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "troubleshooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication schedule, with list of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance. 01730 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 8. As-installed control diagrams by control manufacturer. 9. As-installed color-coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers with location and function of each valve. 11. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications. B. Content for each electric and electronic system as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. b. Engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panelboards. a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As-installed color-coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating Procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. 5. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "troubleshooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 8. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications. C. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of Owner's personnel. D. Provide complete information for products specified in: 1. Division 15, Plumbing and Mechanical Systems and Equipment. 2. Division 16, Electrical Systems and Equipment. 1.06 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form no later than fifteen (15) days after final inspection or acceptance, but prior to applying for final payment. B. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be submitted, reviewed and accepted by the Architect and Owner prior to the Final Application for Payment being processed. 1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems. B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. C. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. END OF SECTION 01740 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Contractor shall compile specified warranties and bonds and specified service and maintenance contracts. B. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. C. Submit to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner. D. Related requirements specified elsewhere: 1. Instructions to Bidders: Bid or Proposal Bond. 2. Conditions of the Contract: Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond. 3. Conditions of the Contract: General Warranty of Construction. 4. Section 01030, Alternates. 5. Section 01700, Contract Close-Out. 6. Section 01730, Operating and Maintenance Data. 7. Respective Sections of Specifications which specify the product. 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. General: Submit warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts as specified in respective Sections of Specifications. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, all warranties shall be written in the Owner's name, and shall be transferable to future Owner(s) for the duration of the warranty period. B. Assemble warranties, bonds and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors, bound with operating and maintenance data. Manuals are specified in Section 01730. C. Number of original signed copies required: Three (3) each, or as required by number of manuals specified in Section 01730. D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Firm with name of principal, address and telephone number. 3. Scope of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Conditions which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. E. Format of Submittals: 1. Format: Prepare in duplicate packets. 2. Size: 8-1/2" x 11" punched sheets for standard three-ring binder. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS A. Submit documents within twenty-five (25) days after inspection and acceptance for equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during progress of construction. 01740 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. Otherwise make submittals within twenty-five (25) days after date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. C. For items of work where acceptance is delayed materially beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.04 REQUIRED WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Bid or Proposal Bond: Refer to Instructions to Bidders. B. Performance and Payment Bond: Refer to Conditions of the Contract. C. General Warranty of Construction: Refer to Conditions of the Contract. Unless modified elsewhere, General Contractor shall warrant all construction materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) calendar year from the date of Substantial Completion. D. Extended Warranties: Certain portions of the Project may have warranty coverage requirements in excess of the general warranty stipulated herein, required by other Sections of these Specifications or by governing authorities. Examples of these extended warranties may include, but not be limited to, landscaping materials or pavement work performed in public streets. E. Warranties: Provide required warranties for products, materials and equipment covering defects in materials and workmanship for the time duration(s) specified in individual Sections. Where no specific warranty is mentioned, provide warranty coverages normally provided by the manufacturer for that product, but in no case less than one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, all warranties shall be written in the Owner's name. 2. All warranties shall be transferable to future Owner(s) for the duration of the warranty period. F. Provide warranties and/or bonds for products and services specified in individual Sections of these Specifications. 1. Warranties for individual materials or systems shall not be pro-rated, unless specifically allowed in individual sections of these Specifications. G. Maintenance Agreements: None required. However, all Contractors and Subcontractors shall be required to make service calls as requested by the Owner throughout the one-year general warranty period, at no additional expense to the Owner. H. Optional Bond(s): The Contractor shall retain the right to require Performance and/or Labor and Material Payment Bonds from any or all of his/her Subcontractors. The costs of such second or third tier bonds will not be paid for by the Owner. END OF SECTION DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. 02070 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 02070 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish equipment and labor to demolish and remove materials, equipment, fixtures, accessories and systems, including related utilities, to the extent shown on the Drawings or required for new construction. Selective demolition includes but is not limited to: 1. Demolition of portions of building structures as required for new construction. 2. Demolition of existing plumbing, mechanical, and/or electrical systems to the extent shown on the Drawings, or as required to make connections to new work. 3. Demolition of existing site improvements, pavements, fencing and landscaping as required for new construction. 4. Miscellaneous demolition work related to construction of the project, as indicated on the Drawings. B. General extent of demolition work is indicated on the Drawings. Work may include the removal and protection of existing materials or equipment to be relocated into the new construction or salvaged by the Owner, as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. C. After removal of demolition work, leave surfaces or substrates prepared for new materials, equipment, finishes or other construction as indicated on the Drawings. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01045, Cutting and Patching. 2. Section 01046, Access to Site. 3. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements. 4. Section 01520, Construction Equipment and Aids. 5. Section 01560, Temporary Controls. 6. Section 01710, Cleaning. 7. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 8. Section 01715, Waste Removal and Recycling. 9. Section 02080, Hazardous Material Removal. 10. Division 15, Mechanical: Demolition related to mechanical and plumbing systems. 11. Division 16, Electrical: Demolition related to electrical systems. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall contact local building and fire authorities to become familiar with local laws and regulations governing work of this Section. 1.03 COORDINATION AND PROTECTION A. Provide, erect and maintain barricades, lighting and guardrails as required by applicable regulatory requirements to protect occupants of the building, construction workers and the public. B. Protect and maintain plumbing, mechanical, natural gas and electrical services encountered during demolition that are to remain in use. C. Coordinate and pay for disconnecting, removing and capping any utility services encountered within areas of demolition. Notify the affected utility companies in advance and obtain approval prior to starting this work. Flag locations of disconnected services. Identify service lines and capping locations on Project Record Documents. 02070 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.04 ACCESS TO BUILDING AND SITE A. Refer to Section 01046, Access to Site, for required access to existing buildings and new work during construction. B. Plan, schedule and conduct selective demolition work in a manner that will minimize the disruption of the Owner's normal operations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DEMOLITION A. General: Furnish labor, equipment and materials as required to complete demolition as described in the Contract Documents. 2.02 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. General: Materials, fixtures and equipment to be removed from the demolished work may be salvaged by the Owner or salvaged for reuse in the new work, as scheduled below. Exact disposition of these materials will be determined at the Pre-Construction Conference. B. Coordinate building demolition with site demolition, as shown on the Site Demolition Plan. C. Owner shall remove fixtures and equipment from areas of demolition work prior to start of construction. D. Owner shall salvage the following materials, equipment and fixtures from the demolished work. Contractor shall deliver these items to a location as directed by the Owner. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E. Items to be salvaged from demolished work for relocation in new work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Existing overhead sectional door in east wall of Chassis Wash. 2. 3. 4. 5. F. Contractor may salvage remaining demolished material and equipment, unless specifically noted otherwise in this Section or on the Drawings. Immediately remove from the site. All other material shall be removed from the site and disposed of. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: Coordinate and execute demolition work in an orderly, neat and timely manner. The Owner shall fully occupy the existing facility, parking areas and grounds during construction of this project, except for specific areas designated strictly for use by the Contractor. Refer to Section 01046, Access to Site, for specific requirements. B. Ensure that all utilities and services to remain in use have been adequately marked and protected and will be maintained during construction. 02070 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Ensure that structures have been adequately supported and braced during removal of any structural system or component. Consult with the Architect/Engineer as needed before commencing work. D. Ensure that dustproof and weathertight enclosures have been erected. Cover and protect equipment and fixtures that cannot be removed from the area of demolition work. E. Ensure that hazardous material abatement, if applicable, has been completed in accordance with Section 02080. 3.02 DEMOLITION A. Perform selective demolition work in a systematic, orderly and careful manner. 1. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut concrete and masonry using power- driven masonry saw or hand tools. Do not use power-driven impact tools in buildings. 2. Locate demolition equipment throughout the structure to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors or framing. 3. Do not cut or alter any structural member without authorization of the Architect or Structural Engineer. Refer to Section 01045. B. General Contractor shall be responsible for removing and separating any materials, fixtures or equipment with hazardous material content, i.e. freon, mercury, sodium lamps, ballasts containing PCBs, etc. from the waste stream. Owner shall arrange for removal from the site and disposal by others. C. Verify and ensure required dimensions and tolerances for new construction. D. Restore adjacent areas and damaged areas as a result of fixed furnishings or equipment being removed to original condition. E. Leave surfaces or substrates prepared for new materials, equipment, finishes or other construction as indicated on the Drawings. 3.03 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Promptly remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from the building site. Use trash receptacles with tightly fitted covers as specified in Section 01715. Do not allow debris to be blown onto adjacent properties. B. Deliver materials to be salvaged by the Owner to a location as directed by the Owner. C. Deliver materials to be salvaged for reuse in the new work to a secure and weather-protected location until ready for refurbishing and reinstallation. D. Keep general construction site area reasonably clean, to the satisfaction of the Owner's principal representative. E. Transport and dispose of materials offsite in a legal manner. F. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on the project site. G. Recycling of Construction Waste: Contractor shall endeavor to recycle as much construction debris and waste materials as practicable, with a recycling goal as specified in Section 01715, Waste Removal and Recycling. END OF SECTION 02100 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 02100 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Overlot grading in preparation of building addition and sitework improvements. B. Stripping and stockpiling of topsoil, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Finish grading and placing of topsoil, unless arranged for otherwise. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 2. Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting. 3. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting. 4. Application Division 2 Landscaping Sections: Preparation of topsoil. 5. Applicable Sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical specifications. 1.02 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by CTL Thompson dated March 31, 2011, is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom. 1. In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow. B. The Contractor shall examine the site and the record of investigations and then determine for himself the character of materials to be encountered. Should subsurface conditions normally considered foreign to the locality or different than disclosed in test hole borings be encountered, the Contractor may apply for just compensation for additional expenses resulting from such conditions. C. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings. D. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified. Excavation and trenching includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or otherwise removed in performance of the work, regardless of the type, character, composition or condition thereof. Refer to Section 02225. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Right-of-Way Work Permit: Contractor shall obtain a right-of-way work permit for any trenching and utility work within a public street or other public right-of-way, as required by the City of Fort Collins. Refer to Section 01060. 1.04 PROTECTION A. Protect benchmarks and existing improvements to remain against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic. B. Protect existing trees to remain as specified in Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures. C. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in accordance with requirements of Section 01040, 01046 and 01060. Protect all utilities which are to remain. D. Notify Architect/Engineer of any unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue work in the area until Architect/Engineer provides notification to resume work. 02100 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Refer to applicable portions of Sections 02221 and/or 02225 for selected imported fill materials and reuse of existing on-site materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Obtain Right-of-Way Work Permit or any other approvals as required for work within a street or other public right-of-way. B. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and this Section. C. Clear and strip surface vegetation, sod and organic topsoil as required for grading or new construction in areas within sitework boundaries. The stripped topsoil shall be stored for later use in the site finish grading. 1. Extent of Stripping: As required for new construction, as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Topsoil shall not be stripped or existing vegetative cover disturbed in excess of these limits without written approval of the Architect/Engineer. 3.02 ROUGH GRADING, EXCAVATING AND COMPACTING A. Refer to applicable portions of Sections 02221 and/or 02225. 3.03 FINISH GRADING A. General: Provide finish grading and placing of topsoil unless arranged for otherwise. B. Bring subsoil to required levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradually and blend slopes into existing areas. Maintain tolerance within .10' of required subgrade, except under building slabs where final grades shall be within 1/2" of required elevation. C. Slope finish grade away from building minimum 1' in 10', unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, providing effective drainage of at least 1%, unless otherwise indicated. D. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 6" where topsoil is to be placed and compact as specified. Provide depth allowances for topsoil placement. E. Place and shape subgrade for landscape berms and other artificially created earthen features as shown on the Landscape Drawings. 3.04 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Place and spread topsoil with minimum depth of 6", using suitable stockpiled, onsite material, supplemented with imported material as required. B. Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather. C. Fine grade topsoil to within 1" of finish contours eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive drainage. Maintain levels, profiles and contours of subgrades to tie new work into existing. D. Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, debris and other foreign materials while spreading. E. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants and buildings to prevent compaction and damage which may be caused by grading equipment. 02100 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents F. Lightly compact placed topsoil and leave prepared for soil preparation and landscaping specified in other Sections of Division 2. 3.05 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified tolerances. B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, or where topsoil has been compacted in excess of the specified limits, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density prior to further construction. 3.06 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Remove and dispose of debris and excess materials off of Owner's property. END OF SECTION 02221 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Excavating, backfilling, grading and compacting of sitework for utility trenches and subsurface drainage systems. B. Cap off and seal discontinued utility services and remove portions of lines within excavated areas. C. Shore and brace excavations as required. D. Dewater excavations as necessary. E. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01046, Access to Site. 2. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements. 3. Section 01410, Testing. 4. Section 01510, Temporary Utilities. 5. Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 6. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 7. Section 02100, Site Preparation. 8. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting. 9. Section 02724, Storm Sewerage Systems. 10. Section 02740, Dry Utility Systems. 11. Applicable Sections of Division 2 Landscaping Sections: Finish grading and preparation of topsoil. 12. Applicable Sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. B. Soil Compaction Tests: 1. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99 - Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer and a 12-inch drop. a. Use method A, B, C or D, as appropriate, based on soil condition and judgment of the testing laboratory. b. Sample tests will be representative of materials to be placed. c. Determine and provide optimum density curve for each type of material encountered or utilized. d. Include Atterberg Limits, grain size determination and specific gravity. 2. ASTM D2049 - Test for Relative Density of Cohesion less soils. C. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to enable Architect/Engineer to determine compliance with the Specifications for imported materials from each proposed source or supplier. 1. Provide with this certificate a density test of a typical sample, in accordance with the following reference standards. a. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99. b. ASTM D2049. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Right-of-Way Work Permit: Contractor shall obtain a right-of-way work permit for any trenching and utility work within a public street or other public right-of-way, as required by the City of Fort 02221 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents Collins. Refer to Section 01060. 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by CTL Thompson dated March 31, 2011, is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom. 1. In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow. B. The Contractor shall examine the site and the record of investigations and then determine for himself the character of materials to be encountered. Should subsurface conditions normally considered foreign to the locality or different than disclosed in test hole borings be encountered, the Contractor may be compensated for additional expenses resulting from such conditions. C. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings. D. Underground Obstructions: Underground obstructions known to Architect/Engineer are shown on Drawings. However, locations shown may prove inaccurate and other obstructions not known to Architect/Engineer may be encountered. 1. Notify each utility owner and request that utilities be field located by surface reference at least 48 hours prior to trenching or excavation. 2. Expose and verify size, location and elevation of underground utilities and other obstructions where conflicts may exist sufficiently in advance to permit changes in the event of conflict. a. Notify Architect/Engineer in case of conflict. b. In case of conflict the proposed Work may be changed by the Architect/ Engineer. 3. Maintain, protect and support by shoring, bracing or other means existing utilities and appurtenances. 4. If Contractor elects to remove underground obstructions, the following conditions shall apply: a. Replace all other underground obstructions with new materials. b. Restore to original conditions or better. 5. Clean drainage culverts so they are free of sediment after construction. E. Exploratory Excavations: 1. Before commencing work, obtain information concerning location, type and extent of concealed existing utilities on the site and adjacent properties. Consult records and personnel of local utility companies, municipal utility departments and telephone/cable television companies. File appropriate Notice of Excavation with these agencies prior to commencing work. 2. Conduct exploratory excavations and pot-holing as required to confirm proposed pipeline corridors are clear prior to commencing construction. a. No excavation shall occur until utility locates have been provided by Utility Notification Center of Colorado, or local equivalent. b. No excavation shall occur outside the area covered by utility locates. c. Contractor shall acquire all necessary permits, excavate all materials to expose utilities, survey the location (horizontal and vertical) of the utilities, and backfill the excavation to existing grade lines with the excavated material or other approved materials. Contractor shall immediately notify verbally and in writing the Owner and Architect/Engineer if utilities are discovered that are not on the Drawings or in a position different from that shown on the topographic survey. d. Contractor shall use all necessary caution during this work. All damage to existing utility lines or adjacent facilities shall be repaired promptly at the Contractor’s expense, and in accordance with requirements of the damaged utility. F. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified. Excavation includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or otherwise removed in 02221 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents performance of the work, regardless of the type, character, composition or condition thereof. Refer to Section 02225. 1.06 PROTECTION A. Protect benchmarks and existing improvements to remain against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic. B. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in accordance with requirements of Sections 01040, 01046, 01060 and 01510. Protect all utilities which are to remain. C. Protect excavations by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning or other methods required to prevent cave-in or loose soil from falling into excavation. D. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including service utilities and pipe chases. E. Notify Architect/Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue work in affected area until notification to resume work. F. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundations from frost. G. Grade excavation top perimeter to prevent surface water runoff into excavation. 1.07 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING A. Notify the Architect/Engineer at completion of each phase of excavation prior to placement of formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Also notify the Architect/Engineer prior to placement of backfill of all foundations. Notification shall be at least 48 hours prior to proceeding with the next phase of work. B. Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect and Owner. Testing fees shall be paid in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions. 1. The Contractor will pay for costs of additional testing required due to improper performance of the work. C. Testing for Structural Excavations: Refer to Sections 01410 and 02225. D. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing laboratory to perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work until results have been verified. E. Compaction Tests: 1. Utility Trenches: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of one (1) test for each 100 ln. ft., or fraction thereof, of trench length, unless otherwise required by the Soils Report. 2. Concrete Flatwork: Refer to Section 02225. F. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 WARRANTIES A. Maintain all backfill and resurfacing in a satisfactory condition for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance by the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STABILIZATION MATERIAL A. Top 6" of Pipe Subgrade: Granular bedding material. B. Subgrade Below Top 6": Same as top 6", except that broken concrete and rock may be included in sizes permitting compaction as specified without discernible voids. 02221 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.02 BEDDING MATERIALS A. Concrete: Refer to Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1. Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28 days minimum. B. Granular Material: Angular or crushed, washed natural stone free of shale, clay, frozen materials and debris, graded in accordance with ANSI/ASTM C136 within the following limits: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1" 100 3/4" 90-100 3/8" 20-55 #4 0-10 #8 0-5 C. Select soil placed below an elevation 12" above top of pipe. 1. Trench backfill material free from rocks, clods and stones greater than 2" in any dimension; or 2. Granular material. 2.03 TRENCH BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Excavated or imported material free from frozen material, stumps, roots, brush, other organic matter, cinders, peat or other corrosive material, debris and rocks or stones greater than following dimensions: 1. 3" in any dimension for material placed within 1'-0" of finished surface. 2. 2" in any dimension for material placed within 1'-0" of pipe. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Silt Fence (Erosion Control): Woven filter fabric, type and size as required by the City of Fort Collins and/or the State of Colorado. Also refer to Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Obtain Right-Of-Way Work Permit or any other approvals as required for work within a street, alley or other public right-of-way. B. Schedule street and sidewalk cuts, trenching and utility line installation in accordance with the Owner's requirements for use of the facility and/or street. Refer to Section 01046. C. Silt Fence: Install silt fence fabric using wooden posts and straw bales or other required accessory erosion control materials where indicated on the Drainage and Erosion Control Plan, or as required by the authority with jurisdiction over the work of the Project. Maintain in place until such authority permits its removal. Also refer to Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. D. Contractor shall examine the subsurface soil conditions encountered prior to installation of any underground utility work and verify that materials specified for utility piping, joints, accessories and other materials are suitable for the soil conditions. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conditions which may adversely affect the successful installation or performance of the completed utility systems. Do not commence work until such conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. E. Verify that stockpiled on-site fill has been approved for reuse as backfill material. F. Ensure that trenches to be backfilled are free of debris, snow, ice or water and that ground surfaces are not frozen. 02221 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents G. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum. H. Ensure that subgrade surfaces have been compacted to density requirements for backfill material. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate subsoil as required for underground utility systems. B. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection, but not wider than necessary. 1. Minimize the size of cuts in street, alley or other public rights-of-way. C. Hand trim excavation and leave free of loose matter. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. 3.03 BACKFILLING A. Support pipe or conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill. B. Place pipe or conduit bedding and backfill in accordance with the requirements of the Drawings and this Section. C. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations. Do not backfill over porous, wet or spongy subgrade surfaces. Backfill as early as possible. D. Place and compact select fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 6" loose depth. E. Place and compact common fill material in continuous layers. F. Employ a placement method so as not to disturb or damage pipe. G. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. H. Remove surplus backfill materials. Leave stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. I. Tolerances: 1. Top Surfaces of Backfilling: +/- 0.1'. 3.04 COMPACTION A. Compact trench backfill to the following minimum densities, unless the following are superseded by the requirements of an appropriate governmental authority: 1. Areas Adjacent to Building Foundations: Minimum 95% of Standard Proctor Density (SPD) per ASTM D698-78, or as required in Section 02225, whichever is more stringent. 2. Building Slabs, Sidewalks, Bus Aprons and Roadways: Minimum 95% of SPD. 3. Lawn and Planted Areas: Minimum of 90% of SPD. 3.05 SURFACE RESTORATION A. Finish Grading: Refer to Section 02100. Fine grade all areas disturbed by the construction operations after completion of backfilling and compacting. Areas which are to receive pavements, surfacing, topsoil or landscaping shall be graded as required to allow installation of the specific surface treatment. Grade all other areas to match the existing ground line. B. Surface Improvement Repair and Replacement: Replace and repair any surface improvements damaged or removed. C. Refer to Section 02100 for placing topsoil, and other Division 2 sections for soil amendment and installation of seed, sod or other landscaping materials. END OF SECTION 02225 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 02225 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Excavating, backfilling, grading and compacting of site work related to building structures. B. Prepare subgrade for building slabs, sidewalks, site pavements and other improvements. C. Shore and brace excavations as required. D. Shore and underpin foundations of existing structures adjacent to new excavations as required. E. Dewater excavations as necessary. F. Overexcavate existing native soils below new concrete foundation structures and/or slabs-on- grade, remove from the site (or waste on site), and replace with new compacted structural fill material. G. Overexcavate existing native soils below new concrete foundation structures and/or slabs-on- grade, recondition, recompact and replace in overexcavated area. H. Finish grading and place topsoil adjacent to structures and other areas of the site disturbed by construction activities, unless arranged for otherwise. I. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01030, Alternates: Overexcavating and remove existing soils and replace with imported structural fill. 2. Section 01046, Access to Site. 3. Section 01410, Testing: Soils Report. 4. Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. 5. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 6. Section 02080, Hazardous Material Removal. 7. Section 02100, Site Preparation: Finish Grading. 8. Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting. 9. Section 02230, Drilled Piers. 10. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Scarifying and compacting subgrade below pavements. 11. Applicable Division 2 Landscaping Sections: Preparation of topsoil. 12. Applicable Sections of Division 15, Mechanical, and Division 16, Electrical Specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. B. Soil Compaction Tests: 1. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99: Standard Method of Test for Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a 5.5 lb. Rammer and a 12 inch drop. a. Use method A, B, C or D, as appropriate, based on soil condition and judgment of the testing laboratory. b. Sample tests will be representative of materials to be placed. c. Determine and provide optimum density curve for each type of material encountered or utilized. d. Include Atterberg Limits, grain size determination and specific gravity. 2. ASTM D2049: Test for Relative Density of Cohesion less soils. C. Test Certificates: Submit test certificates to enable Architect/Engineer to determine compliance with the Specifications for imported materials from each proposed source of supplier. 02225 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1. Provide with this certificate a density test of a typical sample, in accordance with the following reference standards. a. ASTM D698 or AASHTO T99. b. ASTM D2049. D. Underpinning of Existing Structures: Contractor shall be solely responsible for design of shoring and underpinning system as required to resist lateral earth pressure and surcharges due to traffic, storage of materials, adjacent structures and all other loads imposed on adjacent soil during construction. Type of system used must be compatible with the Drawings and acceptable to the Structural Engineer. 1.03 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report No. FC05169.001- 125 by CTL Thompson dated March 31, 2011 is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom. 1. In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow. B. The Contractor shall examine the site and the record of investigations and then determine for himself the character of materials to be encountered. Should subsurface conditions normally considered foreign to the locality or different than disclosed in test hole borings be encountered, the Contractor may be compensated for additional expenses resulting from such conditions. C. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings. D. Underground Obstructions: 1. Underground obstructions known to Architect/Engineer are shown on Drawings. However, locations shown may prove inaccurate and other obstructions not known to Architect/Engineer may be encountered. 2. Notify each utility owner and request that utilities be field located by surface reference using flags at least 48 hours prior to trenching or excavation. 3. Expose and verify size, location and elevation of underground utilities and other obstructions where conflicts might exist sufficiently in advance to permit changes in the event of conflict. a. Notify Architect/Engineer in case of conflict. b. In case of conflict the proposed Work may be changed by the Architect/Engineer. 4. Maintain, protect and support by shoring, bracing or other means existing utilities and appurtenances. 5. If Contractor elects to remove underground obstructions, the following conditions shall apply: a. Replace all other underground obstructions with new materials. b. Restore to original conditions or better. E. Classification of Excavated Material: Excavated materials will not be classified. Excavation includes the removal and subsequent handling of all materials excavated or otherwise removed in performance of the work, regardless of the type, character, composition or condition thereof. Refer to paragraph 3.01.A. 1.04 PROTECTION A. Protect benchmarks and existing improvements to remain against damage from equipment and vehicular traffic. B. Protect existing trees to remain as specified in Section 01530, Barriers and Enclosures. Take all necessary care to prevent compaction of existing soil within the drip line of existing trees to remain. C. Verify all utilities with appropriate authorities before proceeding with work, in accordance with requirements of Sections 01040, 01046 and 01060. Protect all utilities which are to remain. 02225 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents D. Protect excavations by shoring or bracing as required to maintain banks of excavation in safe and stable condition and to protect adjacent existing and new construction. E. Provide suitable protection against bodily injury in accordance with applicable codes and governing authorities. F. Underpin or otherwise support adjacent structures, service lines and pipe chases which may be damaged by excavation work. G. Protect bottom of excavations and soil around and beneath foundations from frost. H. Notify Architect/Engineer of any unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue work in the area until Architect/Engineer provides notification to resume work. I. Underpinning of Existing Structures: Where underpinning of existing structures is required, Contractor shall thoroughly document the existing conditions with photographs and written reports prior to starting construction, and on a daily basis during the underpinning work. 1.05 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING A. Notify the Architect/Engineer at completion of each phase of excavation prior to placement of formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Also notify the Architect/Engineer prior to placement of backfill of all foundations. Notification shall be at least 48 hours prior to proceeding with the next phase of work. B. Testing of compacted fill materials shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect and Owner. Testing fees shall be paid in accordance with the General and Supplementary Conditions. 1. The Contractor will pay for costs of additional testing required due to improper performance of the work. C. Soils Engineer shall make an open-hole inspection of the excavation for each building prior to the placement of formwork, concrete appurtenances or other materials. Soils Engineer shall also inspect structural backfill for building foundations prior to forming of footings or grade beams, if not supported on undisturbed soil. D. When work of this Section or portions of work are completed, notify the testing laboratory to perform density test. Do not proceed with additional portions of work until results have been verified. E. Compaction Tests: 1. Concrete Flatwork: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of one (1) test for each 5,000 sq. ft., or portion thereof, of surface area for interior or exterior concrete slabs-on-grade, sidewalks, aprons, or other flatwork, unless otherwise modified by the Soils Report. 2. Foundation Walls: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of one (1) test for each 100 lin. ft., or portion thereof, of building perimeter for compaction adjacent to building foundation walls, unless otherwise modified by the Soils Report. 3. Isolated Pad Footings: Tests of compacted backfill materials shall be taken at the rate of one (1) test under each group of four (4) pad footings, but not to exceed an area of 1,000 sq. ft. 4. Utility Trenches: Refer to Section 02221. F. If tests indicate that compacted materials do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Maintain and repair backfill, fill compaction and embankment settlement and make necessary repairs to pavement, sidewalks or other structures which may be damaged as a result of settlement for a period of one (1) year after Substantial Completion and acceptance of the work. 02225 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SELECTED FILL MATERIALS A. General: Use onsite or imported soil approved by the Soils Engineer for rough fill and for backfill against the outside of foundation walls except as specified below. Material shall be clean, compactable earth, free of frozen material, debris, deleterious or organic substances or large rocks. B. Structural Fill: On-site natural soils, devoid of debris or imported granular materials approved by the Soils Engineer, mechanically compacted as specified below and extended to original undisturbed soil. Use under floor slabs and exterior concrete where approved on-site material is available or where shown on the Drawings. 1. Material shall be uniformly graded of low permeability and a swell potential of less than 1%. C. Imported Structural Fill: Imported fill required to supplement acceptable on-site material shall be clean, devoid of debris and organic material, and shall conform to the following minimum specifications: 1. Class 6, roadbase conforming to Colorado Department of Transportation standards. 2. Gradation, conforming to ASTM C136: 3" 100% No. 4 Sieve 100% No. 200 Sieve 35% maximum 3. Liquid Limit: 30 maximum. 4. Plasticity Index: 15 maximum. 5. Group Index: 10 maximum. D. Imported Structural Fill: Where onsite material is expansive or otherwise unacceptable to the Soils Engineer for use as structural backfill, imported fill shall be Class 1 structural backfill or Class 7 roadbase, conforming to Colorado Department of Transportation standards. E. Existing On-site Fill: Existing on-site fill previously placed on the site in an uncontrolled manner to berms and landscape slopes. Considered unsuitable for support of foundations, wall backfill and slabs-on-grade. May be used as structural fill underneath exterior concrete flatwork or general overlot fill provided all debris, overside material (greater than 6”) and organic matter is removed. F. Native Sands: On-site excavated native granular materials generally usable for fills and embankment construction with drying, wetting or other reworking as necessary to obtain conformance to the Drawings and Specifications. May be used as structural fill beneath concrete floor slab or as wall backfill. The Soil Engineer must approve all materials before use. G. Bedrock: On-site sandstone and claystone bedrock, medium hard to very hard. Utilizing heavy duty excavation equipment should be anticipated when excavations extend into hard to very hard bedrock. May be placed in landscape areas. H. Coarse Granular Fill: Clean, crushed, non-porous rock, crushed or uncrushed gravel graded from 3/8" to 1-1/2". I. Fine Granular Fill: Natural or manufactured sand and pea gravel, clean and free of organic debris graded from 3/8" to No. 100 sieve. J. Topsoil: Refer to landscaping sections of Division 2. Topsoil stripped and stockpiled on-site may be used if it meets the requirements of these Sections. Topsoil shall consist of selectively excavated, loose, friable loam reasonably free of admixtures of subsoil, refuse, stumps, roots, rocks, brush, weeds or other material which would be detrimental to the proper development of vegetative growth. K. Unsuitable Materials: All material removed in stripping and all material containing perishable matter such as roots, sod, grass, decayed vegetable matter, debris or materials having unsatisfactory compaction characteristics shall be classified as unsuitable for use in the work. All excavation of unsuitable material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor. 02225 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1. Materials which are temporarily unusable due to excessive moisture or improper gradation will not be classified as unsuitable unless such material cannot be satisfactorily reclaimed by screening, manipulation, aerating or blending with other materials as determined by the Soils Engineer. L. Drainage Fill: Natural or crushed stone or gravel with 100% passing a 1" sieve and not more than 5% passing a No. 4 sieve. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Drainage Fabric: Mirafi 140 N filter fabric or equal. B. Silt Fence (Erosion Control): Woven filter fabric, type and size as required by the City of Fort Collins and/or the State of Colorado. Also refer to Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Classification of Excavation: The following definitions shall only apply when additional excavation is authorized by the Architect/Engineer and/or rock excavation is encountered. Do not proceed with the work until the material has been cross-sectioned and classified. 1. Earth Excavation: Removal and disposal of on-site soils and other materials indicated on the Drawings, and all other material as indicated by the subsurface soil data and not classified as rock excavation. 2. Rock Excavation: Removal and disposal of materials that cannot be excavated without drilling, blasting or ripping, or boulders larger than 1/2 cu. yd. in volume. B. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and this Section. If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section. 1. Ensure that modifications to the existing site irrigation system have been completed, or lines shut off or capped within the area of construction, prior to beginning work. C. Silt Fence: Install silt fence fabric using wooden posts and straw bales or other required accessory erosion control materials where indicated on the Drainage and Erosion Control Plan, or as required by the authority with jurisdiction over the work of the Project. Maintain in place until such authority permits its removal. Also refer to Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. D. Clear and strip surface vegetation, sod and organic topsoil for subgrades for areas within construction boundaries as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Architect/Engineer. The stripped topsoil shall be stored for later use in the site finish grading. Also refer to Section 02115. 1. Extent of Stripping: As required for new construction, as shown on the Drawings, or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Topsoil shall not be stripped or existing vegetative cover disturbed in excess of these limits without written approval of the Architect/Engineer. E. Contractor shall take all necessary safety precautions to ensure the safety of all workers and the public in and around excavations, including shoring, bracing and barricades. F. Brace and properly support all structural elements, including foundation walls, grade beams, and pier caps prior to beginning and continuously during backfilling and compacting operations. G. Soils Engineer: The Soils Engineer shall inspect the natural soil at the bottom of excavations for structures, prior to forming or placing foundations. Provide Engineer with 48 hours notice (exclusive of weekends and holidays) when the areas are expected to be ready for such inspections. 1. Do not prepare subgrade or place concrete until such inspection has taken place (or waived by Engineer) and resulting recommendations of Engineer have been carried out. 02225 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3.02 ROUGH GRADING A. Rough grade site to required levels, profiles, contours and elevations ready for finish grading and surface treatment. Maintain the following: 1. Planting Areas: 6" below finished grade elevation. 2. Concrete Sidewalks: 4" below finished grade elevation, unless granular backfill is specified below walks. 3. Building Slabs: 36" minimum below finished slab elevation, or as required by the Soils Report for the slab thickness and thickness of granular backfill specified. 4. Site Pavements: As required by the Soils Report for the slab thickness or overall pavement thickness specified. Refer to Sections 02513 and 02515. B. Prior to placing fill material over undisturbed subsoil, scarify surface to depth of 6", bring to 2% wet of optimum moisture and compact as follows: 1. Adjacent to Building Foundations: Minimum 95% of Standard Proctor Density at 2% wet of optimum moisture content ASTM D698-78. 2. Pavement Areas: 95% of SPD at 2% wet of OMC, ASTM D698-78. 3. Planting Areas: 90% of SPD at 2% wet of OMC, ASTM D698-78. C. Place fill in lifts of 6" to 8" maximum loose layers, bring to 2% wet of OMC and compact each layer as specified above. D. Stockpile existing topsoil and fill materials removed from excavation for reuse in final grading. E. Contractor shall take special care in rough grading and filling of site areas which can lead to non- uniform settling and compaction. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. General: 1. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered when establishing grade elevations. 2. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Architect/Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Architect/Engineer, shall be at the Contractor's expense. 3. Under footings, foundation walls, grade beams or other structural elements, fill unauthorized excavation by extending the indicated bottom elevation of the footing or base to the excavation bottom without altering required top elevation. 4. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified in paragraph 3.02.C. 5. All excavation adjacent to the existing historic building shall be by hand. B. Blasting: No blasting will be permitted as a part this Project without written authorization from the Owner's principal representative. C. Stability of Excavation: 1. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. 2. Ensure the stability of materials under foundation structures of existing buildings adjacent to new excavations. Shore and brace as required during excavation and maintain until new foundations or compacted backfill materials are in place. 3. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. 4. Verify that bottom of excavation for footings and foundations is on original undisturbed soil. If it is not, overexcavate and fill with approved structural fill material extending from original undisturbed soil to bottom of footings and foundations, compacting as specified in paragraph 3.06. 02225 - 7 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents D. Sheeting and Shoring: 1. Sheet, shore or brace banks and trenches not cut back to a stable slope as necessary to prevent sliding or caving to protect workmen and the work. 2. Design and build sheeting and shoring to withstand loads which might be caused by earth movement and pressure and to be rigid, maintaining its shape and position. 3. Support sheeting in excavation in a manner so as not to concentrate loads or horizontal thrusts on piping. Do not brace sheeting against the pipe. E. Dewatering: 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 2. Conduct dewatering operations in addition to good, positive drainage and eliminate standing water. Dewater excavations for concrete structures extending below ground water level by lowering and maintaining the water level beneath such excavations minimum 24". 3. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and adjacent foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 4. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 5. Keep excavations dry during subgrade preparation and continuously thereafter until the structure is built to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation or other cause will result. F. Material Storage: 1. Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials and topsoil until required for backfilling. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 2. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. 3. Stockpile materials away from sidewalks, streets and other public areas that are to remain accessible during construction. Maintain site access as required for workers and the Owner. Refer to Section 01046 for required site access. 4. Dispose of excess soil materials and waste materials as specified in paragraph 3.09. G. Excavation for Trenches: Refer to Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting. H. Weather Protection: 1. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35° F. 2. Do not backfill or construct fills or embankments during freezing weather. 3. Do not place backfill on frozen surfaces. 4. Do not place frozen materials, snow or ice in backfill, fill or embankment. 5. Do not deposit, stamp, roll or otherwise mechanically compact backfill in water. 3.04 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of +/- 0.10' and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction and inspection. B. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive concrete. C. Verify that bottom of excavation for footings and foundations is on original undisturbed soil. If it is not, overexcavate and fill with approved structural fill material extending from original undisturbed soil to bottom of footings and foundations, compacting as specified in paragraph 3.06. D. Do not interfere with normal 45° bearing splay of any foundation. 02225 - 8 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents E. Under building slabs, remove minimum 8" of existing material below finished slab elevation. Refer to paragraph 3.05 below for overexcavation of soils below slabs-on-grade. 3.05 OVEREXCAVATION OF EXISTING SOIL A. Existing fill and/or native soil material below concrete footings, foundation structures and/or slabs- on-grade shall be overexcavated and removed to a depth of 3 feet below the foundations or slabs, as recommended in the Soils Report. B. Where more than one (1) overexcavation and remediation method is allowed by the Soils Report, the Contractor shall have the option of which method to use. C. New structural fill material shall extend from the level of undisturbed soil to the bottom of the footings, foundation structures and/or slabs-on-grade, as directed by the Soils Report. D. Ensure that any new subdrainage system or materials as shown on the Drawings are properly placed prior to backfilling overexcavated area. 3.06 OVEREXCAVATION OF EXISTING SOIL A. Existing fill and/or native soil material below concrete footings, foundation structures and/or slabs- on-grade shall be overexcavated and removed to a depth of 3 feet below the foundations or slabs, as recommended in the Soils Report, unless a structural floor slab is designed and shown on the Drawings. Refer to the Structural Drawings. B. Excavated native material shall be reconditioned as directed in the Soils Report, replaced in the excavation and compacted as specified in this Section. C. Reconditioned existing and new structural fill material shall extend from the level of undisturbed soil to the bottom of the footings, foundation structures and/or slabs-on-grade, as directed by the Soils Report. D. Ensure that any new subdrainage system or materials as shown on the Drawings are properly placed prior to backfilling overexcavated area. 3.07 UNDERPINNING OF EXISTING FOUNDATION STRUCTURES A. Shoring: 1. Wherever shoring is required, locate the system to clear permanent construction and to permit forming and finishing of concrete surfaces. Provide shoring system adequately anchored and braced to resist anticipated earth and hydrostatic pressures. 2. Shoring systems retaining earth on which the support or stability of existing structures is dependent must be left in place at completion of work. 3. Continuously monitor deflections of shoring system, and measure at regular intervals. Notify Structural Engineer of any conditions which may require revisions to system. Remove shoring and underpinning systems as required after permanent structure is in place. Leave shoring in place where serving as outside wall form. B. Bracing: 1. Locate bracing to clear columns, floor framing construction, and other permanent work. If necessary to move a brace, install new bracing prior to removal of original brace. 2. Do not place bracing where it will be cast into or including in permanent concrete work, except as otherwise acceptable to the Architect/Structural Engineer. 3. Install internal bracing, if required, to prevent spreading or distortion to braced frames. 4. Maintain bracing until structural elements are rebraced by other bracing or until permanent construction is able to withstand anticipated lateral earth and hydrostatic pressures. 5. Remove sheeting, shoring and bracing in stages to avoid disturbance to underlying soils and damage to structures, pavements facilities, and utilities. 6. Repair or replace, as acceptable to Architect, adjacent work damaged or displaced through the installation or removal of shoring and bracing work. 02225 - 9 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3.08 BACKFILLING A. Do not start backfilling until services and dampproofing or waterproofing systems have been inspected. B. Ensure areas to be backfilled are free from debris, snow, ice and water and that ground surfaces are not in a frozen condition. C. Do not backfill over existing subgrade surfaces which are porous, wet or spongy. D. Compact existing subgrade surfaces if densities are not equal to that required for backfill materials. E. Cut out soft areas of existing subgrade, backfill with subsoil and compact to required density. F. Backfill areas to grades, contours, levels and elevations. Backfill systematically and as early as possible to allow maximum time for natural settlement and compaction. G. Place and compact fill materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8" loose depth. Use a method so as not to disturb or damage building drainage system. H. Where temporary unbalanced pressures are liable to develop on walls before floor slabs are placed, erect necessary shoring to counteract imbalance and leave in place until their removal is approved by Architect/Engineer. I. Maintain 2% wet of OMC of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. J. Backfill simultaneously on each side of foundation walls to equalize soil pressures. K. Utility Trench Backfill: Refer to Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting. L. Building Slab Backfill: Verify removal of existing material below slabs-on-grade, as specified in paragraph 3.02 above. 3.09 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION A. Structural Backfill below Footings and Foundations: On-site natural soils, devoid of debris, or imported, non-expansive granular materials approved by Soils Engineer, mechanically compacted to a minimum of 98% of SPD. B. Building Slabs: On-site natural soils or select granular non-expansive materials approved by the Soils Engineer to underside of stabilizing base course, mechanically compacted to a minimum of 95% of SPD. C. Backfill Around Structures: Mechanically compact to a minimum of 95% of SPD. D. Site Pavements and Sidewalks: Subsoil or approved fill to underside of stabilizing base course. Compact each layer of fill material at 2% wet of OMC to a minimum 95% of SPD per ASTM D698-78. E. Lawn and Landscaped Areas: Subsoil to top of subgrade elevation, compacted to 90% of SPD. F. Compaction Equipment: Use compaction equipment suitable for the types of soils and materials being compacted. 1. Sheepfoot Roller: If used provide with cleaner bars attached as to prevent the accumulation of materials between the tamper feet. 2. Rollers: Use rollers so designed that the effective weight can be increased as required to obtain specified compaction. 3. Vibrating plate compactors. G. Ponding or flooding is not allowed for any compaction. 3.10 FINISH GRADING A. Rough grade subsoil systematically to allow for a maximum amount of natural settlement and compaction. Eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, etc. in excess of 3" in size. Remove subsoil which has been contaminated with petroleum products. B. Bring subsoil to required levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradually and blend slopes into existing areas. Maintain tolerance within .10' of required subgrade, except under building slabs where final grades shall be within 1/2" of required elevation. C. Slope finish grade away from building minimum 5% for the first 10', unless indicated otherwise on 02225 - 10 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents the Drawings. D. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 6" where topsoil is to be placed and compact as specified. Provide depth allowances for topsoil placement. E. Place and shape subgrade for landscape berms and other artificially created earthen features as shown on the Drawings. 3.11 PLACING TOPSOIL A. General: Spreading of topsoil shall be the responsibility of this Section, unless provided by Section 02100, Site Preparation, or arranged for otherwise. B. Place and spread topsoil with minimum depth of 6", using suitable stockpiled, on-site material, supplemented with imported material as required. C. Use topsoil in relatively dry state. Place during dry weather. D. Fine grade topsoil to within 1" of finish contours unless otherwise required for areas receiving sod, mulch or other landscape treatment, eliminating rough and low areas to ensure positive drainage. Maintain levels, profiles and contours of subgrades to tie new work into existing. E. Remove stones, roots, grass, weeds, debris and other foreign materials while spreading. F. Manually spread topsoil around trees, plants and buildings to prevent compaction and damage which may be caused by grading equipment. G. Do not change elevation of finish grade around existing trees to remain more than 6" without specific approval of the Architect. H. Lightly compact placed topsoil and leave prepared for soil preparation and landscaping specified in other Sections of Division 2. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Compaction Control: Field tests shall be conducted to determine compliance of compaction methods with specified density in accordance with: 1. ASTM D2922 (AASHTO T238): Tests for Density of Soil and Soil - Aggregate In-Place by Nuclear Methods, or, 2. ASTM D1556 (AASHTO T191): Tests for Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand Cone Method. 3. ASTM D2167 (AASHTO T205): Tests for Density of Soil In-Place by Rubber-Balloon Method. B. Compaction shall be to the minimum densities specified in paragraph 3.06 above. C. Moisture Content: Compact soils within +/- 2% of optimum moisture. Add water, harrow, disc, blade or otherwise work material as required to insure uniform moisture content and adequate protection. 3.13 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded and rutted areas to specified tolerances until Substantial Completion and acceptance of the work of this Section by the Owner. B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, or where topsoil has been compacted in excess of the specified limits, scarify surface, reshape and compact to required density prior to further construction. 02225 - 11 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3.14 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Excess Fill: Remove and waste excess materials on site, as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. END OF SECTION 02230 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 02230 DRILLED PIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Drill pier shafts as indicated on the Drawings, including locations, diameters of shafts, top elevations, estimated lengths measured in feet from the top of pier, minimum penetration into bearing strata, minimum length and details of construction. Piers shall be drilled in locations as shown on the Drawings, including but not limited to: 1. Exterior grade beams and pilasters of structures. 2. Interior grade beams of structures. 3. Interior columns of structures. B. Furnish and place shaft liner materials, if specified. C. Furnish and place steel reinforcing materials. D. Furnish and place concrete for drilled piers. E. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Bid Form and Section 01022, Unit Prices. 2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 3. Section 01720, Project Record Documents: Caisson boring logs. 4. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting. 5. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing. 6. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. Perform all work in accordance with local and state ordinances and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Work of this Section shall be performed by a specialist in drilled pier construction. 1.03 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by CTL Thompson, dated March 31, 2011, is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom. The Contractor is to examine the site and the record of investigations and then determine for himself the character of materials to be encountered. B. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the Drawings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to the Architect/Engineer for review, showing locations and all details necessary for fabrication and placing of reinforcement, without reference to the Drawings. B. Boring Log: Submit sample form of caisson boring log, complying with requirements of Section 01720. 02230 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.05 SURVEY WORK A. General Contractor shall conduct the layout work for each pier to the lines and levels required before excavation. Record and maintain all information pertinent to each pier, cooperate with testing and inspection agencies to provide data for their reports and submit a report to the Architect/Engineer containing the following for each caisson: 1. Identification mark. 2. Diameter. 3. Actual centerline location. 4. Actual bottom and top elevations and top of bedrock elevation, including overrun or underrun. 5. Variation of shaft from plumb. 6. Description of soil materials. 7. Description, location and dimension of obstructions. 8. Description, diameter, and top and bottom elevations of temporary or permanent casings. 9. Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, loss of ground and means of control. 10. Size, number and position of reinforcing steel, including dowels. 11. Deviations from specified tolerances (shaft location and plumbness). 12. Water conditions during drilling and concrete placing. 13. Concrete placing method, including elevation of consolidation and delays. 14. Elevation of concrete during removal of casings. 15. Locations of construction joints. 16. Remarks, unusual conditions encountered and deviations from requirements. 17. Bottom and top elevations and top of bedrock. 18. Overrun or underrun. 1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Concrete testing will be performed as specified in Sections 01410 and 03300. B. The Owner shall employ a Soils Engineer to inspect the bearing material. If the bearing stratum at design depth is not suitable, the excavation shall be drilled deeper as directed by the Soils Engineer or the Architect/Engineer. Maximum length for any pier shall not exceed 30 pier diameters. Where the specified pier type would exceed this length, the pier shall be redrilled to the next larger diameter with 2' minimum additional penetration than the original pier type. Reinforce in accordance with the pier schedule for the larger diameter or with steel area of 0.005 times the gross pier area. C. Holes shall be inspected by the Architect/Engineer immediately prior to placing concrete. Notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours before drilling operations. D. Coordinate all testing operations and notify necessary parties as required so tests can be scheduled. 1.07 BASIS OF BID A. Lump sum bids shall be based on the number of piers, design lengths and diameters as shown on the Structural Drawings and/or specified herein. Actual lengths may vary according to the actual bedrock elevation and the bearing value of material encountered. Bids quoted shall include full compensation for labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for complete installation. B. Final payment will be based on actual lengths of various diameter piers, in place and accepted. Adjustment of the Contract Sum will be based on the net difference between the total footage of overruns and underruns. Total footage shall be determined by actual length of the concrete pier required to meet minimum total length and minimum penetration requirements. Minimum total length of piers shall be as noted on the Drawings and in the Soils Report. C. The Contractor shall quote in his Proposal the unit price per foot for overruns and underruns. Refer 02230 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents to Bid Form and Section 01022. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Materials and resulting concrete shall be as specified in Sections 03200 and 03300. 2.02 LINER MATERIAL A. General: Provide continuous, one-piece caisson liners of straight, smooth, spirally wound fibrous material, laminated with non water sensitive adhesives. 1. Sonotube Fibre Form "A" by Sonoco Products Co., Hartsville, SC, (800) 532-8248, and represented locally by RW Specialties, Inc., Henderson, CO, (800) 332-6682. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. General: Use equipment of sufficient size and capacity to excavate shafts to depths, diameters, sizes and penetrations indicated and within the specified tolerances. Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating condition and provide sufficient quantity of equipment to maintain the projected schedule of the work. B. General Contractor shall perform cutting, filling and compacting operations as required to provide access for drilling equipment and shall remove excess excavated material. C. If refusal is encountered before required length of penetration is attained, notify Architect/Engineer immediately. D. Oversize pier holes by not more than 1/2" on all sides of the shaft to accommodate insertion of liner. Clean shafts of all debris. E. Cut shear rings into sides of bedrock at quantities, intervals, locations and dimensions shown on the Drawings, if applicable. Clean shafts of all debris. 3.02 DEWATERING A. Place no concrete in more than 6" of water. Properly dewater hole if more than this is present. If water cannot be removed from excavation, halt drilling operations and notify the Soils Engineer. Concrete shall be placed under water using a "tremie" or other approved methods. 3.03 TEMPORARY SHAFT PROTECTION A. When required to prevent cave-ins, to dewater or for inspection of bearing surfaces, provide full length watertight steel casings of sufficient thickness to withstand compression, displacement and withdrawal stresses. Place in manner to form seal at bedrock when required to dewater hole. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Locate centerline of piers on centerline of bearing construction, unless otherwise shown. Do not exceed the following tolerances: 1. Centerline Location: 5% of actual diameter. 2. Variation to Plumb: 1-1/2% of total depth. 3. Area (at any Horizontal Plane): 5% of design area. 02230 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 4. Minimum Total Length: As indicated on Structural Drawings and in geotechnical report. 5. Minimum Penetration into Firm Bedrock: As scheduled on the Structural Drawings. B. If above tolerances are exceeded, provide additional or corrective construction acceptable to the Architect/Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL AND ANCHOR BOLTS A. Prior to placing concrete, furnish and install all reinforcing and dowels as shown on the Drawings. Install anchor bolts furnished by others. B. Design, fabrication and placement of reinforcing shall be as specified in Section 03200 and shown on the Drawings. C. Before placing, clean reinforcing of loose rust, scale, mud and other material which could affect bond. D. Place reinforcing accurately and symmetrically about axis of hole. Hold securely in place during concreting, using templates for dowels and anchor bolts. E. Cross-stake locations of all piers so that centerlines may be retained after drilling for use in placing dowels and anchor bolts. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Fill piers with concrete immediately after drilling and inspection. B. Pour concrete into clean, dry excavations by means that will ensure against segregation of the aggregates. Do not allow concrete to hit sides of excavation or reinforcement. Provide mechanical vibration for consolidation of at least the top 5' of each shaft. C. Piers shall be poured in one (1) continuous operation. If necessary to stop concreting, bring concrete to a true level surface inside the pier and install dowels of size and number as required by the Structural Engineer. D. Maintain vertical sides of shaft at top to prevent concrete from mushrooming. Use appropriate cylindrical forms if sides are not vertical. Provide protection around top of excavation to prevent entry of soil or other foreign matter until concrete has set. END OF SECTION 02515 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 02515 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install Portland cement concrete paving, extent as shown on the Drawings, unless furnished under Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. Work shall include but is not limited to: 1. Concrete driveways at bus access/circulation areas, complete with reinforcing. 2. Concrete curbs, gutters, valley pans, trickle channels, aprons and other exterior concrete work. B. All applicable portions of the following shall be considered as included with this Section: 1. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 2. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing. 3. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Scarify and compact subgrade under concrete paving, unless arranged for otherwise. D. Furnish and place granular sub-base under pavements and other flatwork, if specified. E. Finishing and application of integral surfacing as scheduled, curing and sealing of slabs and other flatwork. F. Furnishing and placing joint materials. G. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01410, Testing. 2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 3. Section 02225, Structural Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting. 4. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 1.02 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Data on subsurface conditions as described in the Soils Report by CTL Thompson dated March 31, 2011, is not intended as representation or warranty of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. Data is available for inspection at the office of the Architect. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom. 1. In the event alternate procedures are recommended in the Soils Report, request written authority from Architect/Engineer regarding which procedure to follow. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Standards and requirements specified under Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete, shall apply to this Section, except as otherwise modified. 2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. City of Fort Collins Standard Specifications for Streets and Roads are hereby incorporated into these Specifications in their entirety, unless modified by this Section. 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection and testing will be performed as specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS 02515 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents A. Mix Designs: Submittals shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Requirements for concreting in hot and cold weather and other environmental conditions shall be as specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to site in strongly tied bundles with metal tags corresponding to bar schedules and diagrams. Store on the site free of rust, scale, oil or other coating. Store bars off the ground and protect from moisture, dirt, oil or deleterious coatings. B. If concreting is delayed for any considerable period of time after reinforcing is in place, it shall be protected by suitable covering. C. Protect exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions by suitable covering. D. Store cement in watertight enclosures and protect against dampness, contamination and warehouse set. E. Stockpile aggregates to prevent excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or other sizes of aggregates. Use only one (1) supply source for each aggregate stockpile. F. Store admixtures to prevent contamination, evaporation or damage. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing or harmful temperature ranges. G. Allow a maximum of 90 minutes between the time water is added and the time the concrete is completely placed. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General: All materials shall be in conformance with the standard specifications of the City of Fort Collins. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150; normal, Type II. C. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33. D. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Clean, strong crushed gravel or stone conforming to ASTM C33. Gradation shall be as specified under concrete mixes. E. Water: Clean, fresh potable supply, free from oil, acid, alkali, organic materials or other deleterious substances. F. Admixtures: Use only when specified or approved by the Architect/Engineer. 1. Air-Entraining Agent: ASTM C260, manufactured by Master Builders MBVR, Sika AER, Grace Darex AEA, Protex or equal. 2. Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E. 3. Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B or D. 4. Water Reducer: ASTM C494, Type A, manufactured by Master Builders Pozzo-Lith, Grace WRDA, Protex PDA 25XL, Sika Plastocrete or equal. 5. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 6. Calcium Chloride, or admixtures containing calcium chloride, is specifically prohibited. 7. Color Additive: None. 8. Fiber Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200 and paragraph 3.05 of this Section. 02515 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Bars: ASTM A615-B2, 60 KSI grade, deformed billet steel bars, plain finish, as indicated on the Drawings. Bars shall be free of scale or other bond-reducing coatings. 1. Ties, stirrups and field bent bars, #3 or smaller may be ASTM A615, 40 KSI grade. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 or A497, plain type in flat sheets, plain finish, welded intersections, in sizes as indicated on the Drawings. Use of coiled rolls shall only be permitted when approved by the Engineer. C. Steel Wire: Provide plain cold-drawn wire conforming to ASTM A82. D. Fiber Reinforcing: Collated, fibrillated polypropylene fiber, Fiber Mesh I, Fiber Mesh, Inc., Chattanooga, TN, or equal. 2.03 FORMWORK AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Accessories shall be of suitable type conforming to ACI 315 and shall include spacers, chairs, tie bars, support bars and all other devices for properly assembling, placing and supporting reinforcement, weight of concrete and workmen without displacement of reinforcement. Wood, brick, block, concrete chips and other non-metallic devices are not acceptable. B. Curb and Gutter Sections: Forms for inflow and outflow curb and gutter sections, valley drain pans and other related work shall be formed with mechanical extrusion equipment, using the slip-form method, including curves and radii. 1. Vertical curbs may be formed with conventional materials. C. Exterior Concrete Flatwork: For concrete slab-on-grade use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. Concrete brickets for support of reinforcement for slabs-on-grade shall be at least 2" wide x 3" long and of proper height. D. Formwork: Matched, tight fitting and adequately stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of concrete. Also refer to Section 03100. E. Isolation Joint Filler: As specified in Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 2.04 HARDENING, SEALING AND FINISH MATERIALS A. General: Apply all hardening, sealing and finishing treatments in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to the Schedule in Section 03300 for specific applications. Supplier/Installer of slab finish materials shall certify that materials specified and/or furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications, for the following criteria: 1. Compatibility of finish material with concrete mix specified. 2. Compatibility of finish material with type and degree of weather exposure. 3. Compatibility of finish material with expected use. 4. Compatibility of finish material with expected exposure to chemical, acid, oil, fat or other deleterious material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. If rough grading, excavation, subgrade and backfill work has been performed by others, inspect the work for trueness of grades, compaction and depth of base material per Section 02225. Report any deficiencies or inconsistencies with the Drawings and Specifications to the Contractor. Ensure proper moisture content of subgrade just prior to placement of base course and concrete. Do not install concrete over soil or base which is unstable or frozen. Proceeding with installation of concrete work shall indicate acceptance of site conditions. 02515 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. Surfaces shall be true to line and grade and free from loose earth, frost, ice, mud and standing or running water. Protect bottom of excavation against freezing. Do not deposit concrete against frozen ground. C. Scarify subgrade where asphalt and/or concrete pavement is to be placed, to a depth of minimum 6" and compact to 95% SPD, ASTM D698-78 at 2% wet of optimum moisture content. Also refer to Section 02225. D. Notify any trades that may have items to be embedded in concrete or that may require openings in concrete. Coordinate work to avoid cutting of concrete and to avoid delays in the work. E. Make all preparations required for protection of concrete during placing and curing under detrimental weather conditions. F. Notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours prior to placing any concrete. Do not deposit any concrete before the Architect/Engineer has inspected reinforcement and other work in place and given permission to proceed. Such inspection and permission to proceed shall in no way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for proper placement of reinforcement and placing of concrete and of responsibility for adherence to other requirements of the Construction Documents. G. Form and install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, except as amended by this Section. Concrete formwork shall be as specified in Section 03100. 3.02 PLACING REINFORCING A. Reinforce concrete sections as indicated on the Drawings or as specified in Section 03200. Allow for minimum 1-1/2" concrete cover. 3.03 PLACING FIBER REINFORCING A. General: Place fiber reinforcing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 1. 1-1/2 lbs. per cu. yd., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. B. Fiber reinforcing shall be placed as scheduled in Section 03200. 3.04 FORMING JOINTS A. Control Joints at Concrete Drives, Aprons and Slabs: Formed or saw-cut to produce weakened joint minimum 1/4 of slab thickness. Place longitudinal and transverse joints spaced uniformly as shown on the Drawings. Joints shall be cut within 24 hours of pouring, at earliest point concrete is accessible without causing chipping at the control joints. Joints wider than 1/4" shall be cleaned and sealed before opening to traffic. B. Control Joints at Sidewalks, Curb and Gutter Sections and Flatwork: Same as specified for slabs, spacing as shown or noted on the Drawings, but in no case greater than the following: 1. Sidewalks: 6'-0" o.c. maximum along the length of the sidewalk. 2. Curb and Gutter: 10'-0" o.c. maximum. C. Isolation or Expansion Joints: Joints shall be full depth of slab, recessed 1/2" below finished concrete surface. Provide at all joints between slabs and vertical surfaces or as indicated on the Drawings. Place joint filler as specified in Section 03100 and leave joint recess clean to receive sealants specified in Section 07900. 3.05 DESIGN MIXES A. General: Concrete mixes shall be as itemized on the Drawings or specified herein or in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Concrete which does not meet the minimum requirements for strength at 28 days shall be reviewed and is subject to removal at the option of the Architect. 02515 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Proportion normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1. Concrete for all parts of the work shall be of the specified quality, capable of being placed without excessive segregation and, when hardened, of developing all characteristics required by these specifications and the contract documents. Proportion ingredients to produce a mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcements, by the methods of placing and consolidation employed on the work. D. Design mixes shall be made and reported by an approved testing laboratory for each class of concrete, at the Contractor's expense. E. Design mixes shall contain all admixtures required by these specifications and/or proposed by the Contractor to be used in concrete. F. Concrete Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200 and as specified herein. G. Concrete Testing: Refer to Section 03300. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE A. General: Place Portland cement concrete paving materials in accordance with the standard specifications of the City of Fort Collins. B. Bus Access and Drive Areas: Portland cement concrete pavements shall provide the following minimum thicknesses: 1. Bus Access/Circulation Areas: 9". C. Subgrade temperature shall be minimum 40° at 6" depth prior to pouring concrete. D. Place concrete, screed and wood float surfaces to a smooth and uniform finish free of open texturing and exposed aggregate. E. Where paved surfaces are adjacent to walks, make curbs and gutters integral with walks. Ensure that joints of curbs coincide with walk joints. Provide dummy joint at line between walks and curbs. F. Provide exposed surfaces of aprons, walks, curbs and gutters with broom finish, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. G. Apply curing compound as specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete, on finished surfaces immediately after placement. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 3.07 TOLERANCES A. Maintain the following tolerances for all concrete site work. Defective work shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense. 1. Variation from Plumb: a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum. b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum. 2. Variation in Thickness: 1/4" to 1/2" standard. 3. Variation in Grade: a. 0-10': 1/4" standard, 1/8" for slabs. b. 10-20': 3/8" standard, 1/4" for slabs. c. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, 3/8" for slabs. 4. Variation in Plan: a. 0-20': 1/2". b. 40' or more: 3/4" standard. 5. Variation in Eccentricity: 2% for footings. 6. Variation in Openings: a. Size: + 1/8". b. Location: 1/4". B. Exterior Slab Tolerances: 1/4" in 10'. 3.08 PROTECTION 02515 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. B. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of freshly placed concrete from vandalism, accidental damage by workmen or equipment, or damage resulting from subgrade settlement or subsequent construction traffic. Take adequate precautions to restrict traffic in the area of fresh concrete during the curing period. Damaged concrete shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the Owner's discretion. C. Comply with the requirements of ACI 305 when hot weather conditions exist. Temperature of concrete when placed shall be less than 90° F. When necessary to prevent premature drying, arrangements for installation of windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding or a wet covering of light color shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. D. Comply with the requirements of ACI 306 when cold weather conditions exist. When atmospheric temperature is 40° F and below, maintain concrete temperature at not less than 50° F for at least six (6) days. When necessary, make arrangements before concrete placing for heating, covering insulation or housing as required to maintain specified temperature and moisture conditions without injury due to concentration of heat. E. Maintain protective cover on concrete so that changes in temperatures of concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5° F in any one (1) hour or 50° F in any 24-hour period. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor shall verify all lines, levels and elevations of completed Portland Cement concrete sitework with requirements of the Drawings and approved field modifications prior to final inspection by the Architect/Engineer. B. Engineer shall provide a Certification Survey for the Owner of the as-built conditions, verifying compliance with the grading and drainage requirements of the Drawings and the City of Fort Collins, based upon survey data provided by the Contractor. C. Contractor shall correct all areas of the concrete sitework not in compliance with the Drawings or approved field modifications at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Remove and replace defective concrete not conforming to required line, detail and elevation as directed by the Architect/Engineer. E. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete, except upon express direction of the Architect. F. Concrete damaged after placement shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the Owner’s discretion. END OF SECTION 02580 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 02580 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish paints and apply pavement and traffic control markings in the types, designs and arrangements shown on the Drawings and as needed for a complete and proper installation, including but not limited to: 1. Fire lane and other safety-related striping. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements. 2. Section 09900, Painting. 3. Section 10430, Exterior Signage: Traffic, parking and directional signage. 1.02 RELATED WORK FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS A. Owner shall furnish materials and apply painted striping and other pavement markings at the bus training area by separate contract. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT): Standard Specifications. 2. U. S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration: Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. 3. City of Fort Collins Engineering Department: Design and Construction Standards. 4. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Contractor shall employ skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature identifying specifications and materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. B. Designs: Contractor shall verify compliance of designs with the jurisdiction with authority over this work prior to submittal. C. Certification: Submit manufacturer's written certification that paint materials being furnished conform to required standard specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT A. General: Furnish paint specifically formulated for use as pavement marking in automobile traffic areas. 1. Color for Fire Lane Striping/Curbs: "Red", or as required by the jurisdiction with authority over this work. 02580 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Traffic Paint by J. E. Bauer Company. 2. Traffic Paint by Tnemec. 3. Romark Traffic by Glidden-Durkee. 4. Manufacturers providing materials of same type, function, performance and quality are acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. B. Ensure that marking types shown on the Drawings or proposed by the Contractor meet the requirements of the jurisdiction with authority over this work prior to actual layout in the field. Refer to Section 01060, Regulatory Requirements. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Apply the striping and other markings in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations, using proper masking, stencils and application equipment recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the approved paint. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP A. Provide traffic cones, barricades and other devices needed to protect the paint until it is sufficiently dried and cured to withstand traffic. B. When paint is thoroughly dry, visually inspect the entire application and: 1. Touch up as required to provide clean, straight lines and surfaces throughout. 2. Using a permanently opaque paint identical in color to the surface on which the paint was applied, block out and eliminate all traces of splashed, tracked and/or spilled pavement marking paint from the background surface. C. Remove and replace/recoat any defective or damaged areas of pavement markings. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 PAVEMENT MARKINGS SCHEDULE A. Installation Schedule: Apply specified paint materials for pavement markings as shown on the Drawings, including but not limited to the following: 1. Bus training area striping and markings. 2. Roadway or drive aisle striping. 3. Fire lanes, loading zones and other safety-related striping. 4. Directional arrows and other visual warnings. 5. Miscellaneous striping and other markings as shown on the Drawings or required by the jurisdiction with authority over this work. END OF SECTION 02724 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 02724 STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install storm water sewer piping, including fittings, inlets, manhole covers, catch basins and other appurtenances as necessary for modifications to the existing and new extensions of the underground stormwater sewer service on-site. B. Furnish and install stone riprap, drain boards and other improvements at surface discharge of subgrade drainage piping. C. Provide all testing of piping systems specified herein and/or in Section 01410, or required by the City of Fort Collins. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01022, Unit Prices. 2. Section 01410, Testing: Testing of pressurized utilities. 3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 4. Section 01720, Project Record Documents. 5. Division 15, Mechanical: Underground or underslab storm piping within the building(s). 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Do not deviate from line or grade more than 1" for line and 1/4" for grade provided such deviation does not result in a level or reverse sloping invert. Measure for grade at the pipe invert, not at the top of the pipe. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature showing piping materials and all related fittings and appurtenances. B. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that products meet requirements of referenced specifications. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings on precast concrete inlets, gaskets, drainage basins and piping sections, if applicable. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not damage the pipe and fittings by impact, bending, compression or abrasion during handling and storage. Do not skid or roll pipe into pipe already on the ground. B. Store pipe on a flat surface which provides even support for the barrel with bell ends overhanging. C. Do not exceed maximum stacking heights listed in AWWA C600, Tables 1 and 2. D. Do not use pipe and fittings stored in direct sunlight for periods in excess of 18 months. E. Ship rubber gaskets in cartons and store in cool, dark, clean area away from grease, oil, ozone- producing electric motors, heat and the direct rays of the sun. F. Use only nylon-protected slings or bends to handle pipe. Do not use hooks or bare cables. G. Maintain lubricant in a sanitary condition during storage. 02724 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Protection: 1. Prevent foreign material from entering the pipe. 2. Do not place debris, tools, clothing or other materials in the pipe. 3. Whenever pipe laying is stopped, close the open end of the pipe with a plug, cap or end dam to prevent the entry of foreign material into the pipe. 4. Use effective measures to prevent the uplift or floating of the line prior to completion of the backfilling operation. B. Do not lay pipe in water or in unsuitable weather or trench conditions. However, rubber-gasketed joints may be completed when the water is no higher than the pipe invert and when the water is clear and the trench bottom is clean coarse gravel. Use extreme caution to ensure no gravel is in the joint. C. Do not install PVC piping when the ambient air temperature or the soil temperature is less than 32° F. 1.06 TESTING A. General: Test piping in accordance with the requirements specified herein and Section 01410, including: 1. Pipe alignment tests. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials as specified on the Drawings and/or meeting City of Fort Collins standards. B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP): Solid RCP conforming to ASTM C76, Class III strength class, sizes and locations as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Joints: Bell end with gaskets in conformance with ASTM C443 synthetic rubber or neoprene gasket material. C. Polyvinyl Chloride Pressure Pipe (PVC): Solid PVC piping conforming to AWWA C900, 150 psi pressure class (conforming to DR18), sizes and locations as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Joints: Bell end with gaskets. 2. Fittings: Mechanical joint fittings in conformance with ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110). 3. Closure Couplings: Cl l50, DR18, for C900 pipe, PVC ASTM D1789. 4. Approved Manufacturers: Johns-Manville, CertainTeed, North Star, Robyn Tech, or other manufacturers providing materials of same function, design and performance are acceptable. 2.02 JOINTS A. Mechanical and Push-On: Conform to ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111). 1. Gaskets: Synthetic rubber. 2. Lubricant: Furnished by pipe manufacturer. B. Flanged: Conform to ANSI A21.15 (AWWA C115). 1. Flanges: ANSI B16.1. 2. Drilling: 125 lbs., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Gaskets: AWWA C110, Appendix A, full-face red rubber, 1/8" thick. 02724 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.03 COUPLINGS A. Mechanical Couplings: Mechanical compression sleeve type. Omit pipe stop, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 1. Gaskets: Synthetic Rubber. 2. Dresser Style 38, Smith-Blair (Rockwell International) Type 411, Baker Series 400, or equal. B. Flanged Coupling Adapters: 1. 3" through 12": Dresser Style 127; Smith-Blair (Rockwell International) Type 912; or equal with locking pins, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 2. Over 12": Dresser Style 128; Smith-Blair (Rockwell International) Type 913, or equal. 3. Gaskets: Synthetic rubber. C. Transition Couplings: Dresser Style 162 or equal. D. Grooved-End Couplings: 1. Pipe Ends: Rigid groove sizes 3" through 24". 2. Couplings: Victaulic Style 31, 3" through 24". E. Wall Castings: Provide manufacturer's standard mechanical joint with waterstop and tapped holes. 1. Plug all holes with plastic plugs. 2.04 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS A. When jointing two (2) pipes of dissimilar material or two (2) pipes with different outside diameters, use the following: 1. Pipe sizes 15" or smaller: a. Can-Tex, C-T Adapters. b. Fernco, flexible couplings or reducing couplings. c. Jointers Inc., Carder coupling. d. Mission, bushing adapters. e. Nashua Pre-Cast Corp., Flex-O-Joint. f. Or equal. 2. In pipe sizes larger than 15", inside diameter wrap the joint with two (2) laps of rubber or vinyl and band each pipe with a stainless steel band. a. Lap joint downward at springline of pipe. b. Rubber or vinyl shall extend at least 6" on each pipe past the joint, minimum thickness 1/16" rubber or 32 oz. vinyl. B. Encase flexible couplings in a concrete collar a minimum of 6" thick and extending a minimum of 6" either side of the joint. 2.05 MANHOLE COVERS A. General: As shown on the Drawings. 2.06 PIPE COATINGS A. Underground or Submerged Locations: Bituminous type, 1 mil thickness minimum. 2.07 TRENCH BACKFILL MATERIAL A. General: Refer to Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting. 2.08 TRENCH OUTFALL MATERIAL A. Stone and Rip Rap Material: As shown on the Drawings. 02724 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.09 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Silt Fence (Erosion Control): Woven filter fabric, type and size as required by the City of Fort Collins and/or the State of Colorado. Also refer to Section 01540, Erosion and Sedimentation Control. B. Filter Fabric: Filter fabric for subsurface drainage systems shall be Mirifi 140N, manufactured by Mirifi Inc., or approved equal. C. Drain Boards: Drainage boards shall be Miri-Drain, manufactured by Mirifi Inc., or approved equal. 1. Drainage board shall be single-sided where used adjacent to walls or structures. Double sided board shall be used in non-supported applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Obtain Right-Of-Way Work Permit or any other approvals as required for work within a street, alley or other public right-of-way. B. Schedule street and sidewalk cuts, trenching and utility line installation in accordance with the Owner's requirements for use of the facility and/or street. Refer to Section 01046. C. Silt Fence: Install silt fence fabric using wooden posts and straw bales or other required accessory erosion control materials where indicated on the Drainage and Erosion Control Plan, or as required by the authority with jurisdiction over the work of the Project. Maintain in place until such authority permits its removal. Refer to Section 01540. D. Contractor shall examine the subsurface soil conditions encountered prior to installation of any underground utility work and verify that materials specified for utility piping, joints, accessories and other materials are suitable for the soil conditions. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conditions which may adversely affect the successful installation or performance of the completed utility systems. Do not commence work until such conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. E. Verify that stockpiled on-site fill has been approved for reuse as backfill material. F. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum. G. Excavate trenches in accordance with the requirements of Section 02221. H. Where connections are to be made to existing pipes or appurtenances, the exact location of which cannot be determined without exposing the existing pipe or appurtenance, excavate and expose the existing pipe or appurtenance and specify any necessary adjustments in line or grade of the proposed pipe to accomplish the connection. I. Examine all pipe and fittings for cracks, dents, abrasions or other flaws prior to installation. Mark rejected pipe and remove from the site. 3.02 TRENCHING AND EXCAVATION A. General: Refer to Section 02221, Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting. 3.03 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: Install storm water sewer service on-site, including piping, inlets, flanges, clean-outs, manholes and other appurtenances. 1. Coordinate piping layout, alignment and connections into the existing utilities with the Civil Drawings. 2. Refer to the Drawings for locations of subgrade drainage system around building foundations and beneath slabs-on-grade. B. General: Pipe laying shall be in conformance with the standards and recommendations of the City of Fort Collins and the pipe manufacturers. 02724 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Cutting the Pipe: 1. Cut the pipe square with saw or pipe cutters designed specifically for the material. 2. Bevel the end in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not bevel ends to be inserted in mechanical joints. 3. Locate a reference mark with a pencil or crayon to assure the spigot end is inserted to the recommended depth. 4. Remove burrs and wipe off all dust from the jointing surface. 5. Do not use mechanical methods for joining pipe which result in excessive force being applied during the insertion process. D. Laying the Pipe: 1. Begin pipe laying at the lowest point, unless otherwise approved by Engineer, and install the pipe with the spigot ends pointing in the direction of flow. 2. Lay pipe true to line and grade and join in such a manner that the offset of the inside of the pipe at any joint is held to a minimum at the invert. The maximum offset at the invert shall be 1% of the inside diameter or 3/8", whichever is smaller. 3. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, complete the joint in accordance with the applicable pipe material specification and adjust the pipe to the correct line and grade. Make adjustments by scraping away or filling pipe bedding under the body of the pipe and not by wedging or blocking up the bells. 4. Secure the pipe in place with the specified bedding tamped under and around the pipe except at the joints. Do not walk on small diameter pipe or otherwise disturb any conduit after the jointing has been completed. 5. If curved storm sewer lines are shown on the Drawings, such curves shall be made according to the manufacturer's written literature. E. Jointing the Pipe: 1. Remove all dirt and foreign material from the pipe ends, gaskets and gasket groove. 2. Apply lubricant furnished by the pipe manufacturer to the spigot end of the pipe. 3. Insert the spigot to the reference mark, according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Do not disturb previously installed joints during jointing operations. F. Service Connections: 1. Install "T" branches or "Y" branches for future service connections at locations designated by the Engineer. Verify that service connection locations have been marked prior to commencing construction of any segment of storm line. 2. Where an existing storm sewer is being replaced at the same alignment, locate and connect all existing services to a new storm sewer. 3. Install service connections on existing storm system using saddles securely fastened on the main. Cut a neat hole in the main by means of a tapping machine designed for such use. The finished connection shall be watertight, and there shall be no projections inside the storm main. 4. Incline the centerline of the branch upward at an angle of 45°. 5. Lay services for future service connections to 3' outside of curb and gutter and/or edge of roadway surface at a grade of 1/4" per foot unless otherwise instructed by Engineer. Minimum allowable grade shall be 1/8" per foot. 6. Install removable watertight plugs in each unused branch connection. 7. Mark the location of each branch with a 2" x 2" wooden marker extending from the branch vertically to within 1' of the ground surface. Anchor markers and maintain in a vertical position during backfilling. Record location of each marker on the Record Drawings. 3.04 CONSTRUCTION OF APPURTENANCES A. Install cleanouts and stubs at locations indicated on the Drawings. Insert removable watertight plugs in unused stubs and record location of cleanout or stub referenced to a minimum of two (2) permanent surface references. 02724 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3.05 INSTALLATION OF STORM DRAINAGE OUTFALL A. General: Install outfall materials and/or accessories as detailed on the Drawings or in accordance with City of Fort Collins standards. B. Install drain boards in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. C. Install outfall stone materials as detailed on the Drawings, using specified drainage filter fabric. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Each section of stormwater sewer shall meet the requirements of the following tests. Repair all defects as indicated as a result of the tests. Furnish all equipment, labor and incidentals necessary and conduct tests in the presence of appropriate representatives of the City of Fort Collins and/or the Engineer. Refer to Section 01410 for other requirements and testing fees. B. Alignment Tests: 1. Engineer may lamp each section of stormwater sewer between inlets or manholes to determine whether any displacement of the pipe has occurred. Provide suitable assistance to Engineer. 2. Repair poor alignment, displaced pipe or other defects discovered. 3.07 CLEANING A. Prior to substantial completion, remove all accumulated construction debris, rocks, gravel, sand, silt and other foreign material from the storm water sewer system. Use mechanical rodding or bucketing equipment as required. B. Upon final inspection, if any foreign matter is present in the system, flush and clean the sections of the line as required. END OF SECTION 02831 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 02831 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install vinyl-coated chain link fence sections, manually- and electrically-operated gates for exterior installations. B. Furnish and install uncoated chain link fence sections and gates for interior installations. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete piers at fence posts. 3. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals: Support post for gate fob operator and intercom systems. 1.02 RELATED WORK FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS A. Intercom: All components and wiring shall be furnished and installed by the City of Fort Collins by separate contract. B. Security Cameras: All components and wiring shall be furnished and installed by the City of Fort Collins by separate contract. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A-392: Zinc-coated chain link fence woven wire fabric. 2. ASTM F-668: Woven chain link fence fabric. 3. ASTM F-1234: Color-coated chain link fence framework. 4. ASTM F-626: Color-coated chain link fence fittings. 5. ASTM F-668: PVC coated chain link fence woven wire fabric. Zinc-coated chain link fence woven wire fabric. 6. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Installer: Installation shall be by skilled workmen specializing in the installation of the specified fence systems, with a minimum of 5 years successful experience in projects of similar size and complexity. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, specifications and shop drawings indicating materials, fabrication details, layout and configuration, anchorage and mounting details, hardware, controls and finishes. B. Samples: Submit 12" x 12" samples of manufacturer's full line of standard vinyl coating colors for selection by the Architect. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written 2-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship for all electrical gate components. 02831 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VINYL-COATED CHAIN LINK FENCING MATERIALS A. Fencing: Galvanized standard prefabricated chain link fencing system conforming to ASTM A392, with vinyl coating. 1. Woven Wire: Zinc-coated steel woven wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A116, Coating Class I. Woven wire fabric shall be 2" mesh, 9-gage, prior to vinyl coating. 2. Fittings: Zinc-coated to conform to the requirements of AASHTO M232. 3. Height of Sections: 6'-0" from finished grade. B. Gates: Match construction of fence sections, with 2" o.d. steel pipe frames. 1. Construction: Welded corners or assembled with corner fittings and 3/8" steel truss rods. 2. Provide horizontal 1-1/4" brace rail and 3/8" truss rod for gates 5' wide or greater. 3. Provide vertical 1-1/4" brace rail for gates 6' wide or wider, spacing not to exceed 5' centers. 4. Gate Size(s): a. Pedestrian/pass gates: None. b. Vehicular gates: 1) 12'-0" wide single swing type, at north side of driver training lot. 2) Southwest Drive: 30'-0" to 35'-0" double bi-parting electrically-operated gate. 3) Northwest Drive: 20'-0" to 25'-0" single electrically-operated gate. C. Fence/Gate Posts: Galvanized steel pipe conforming to ASTM A120 and AASHTO M111. 1. Line Posts: 2-1/2" o.d. steel pipe, Schedule 40. 2. Corner Posts, End Posts and Pass Gate Posts: 2-7/8" o.d. steel pipe, Schedule 40. 3. Vehicular Gate Posts: a. Up to 10'-0" Wide: 3-1/2" o.d. steel pipe, Schedule 40. b. 12'-0" to 35'-0" Wide: 8-5/8" o.d. steel pipe, Schedule 40. c. Post for Mounting Security Camera: 8-5/8" o.d. steel pipe, Schedule 40, 9'-0" high at north side of vehicle gate, as shown on the Drawings. 4. Sleeves: Manufacturer's recommended o.d. steel pipe, Schedule 40. 5. Mounting: Concrete set, minimum 2'-6" embedment. 6. Provide manufacturer's standard post caps. D. Fence/Gate Top Rail: 1-1/4" o.d. steel pipe, Schedule 40, galvanized. E. Bottom Tension Bar: 6-gage, galvanized. F. Gate Support Rail: As required for suspending specified gates, to be approved in shop drawings. G. Fittings, hardware and other appurtenances not specifically covered by these Specifications shall be standard commercial grade and in accordance with current standard practice. H. Extension Arms: None. I. Gate Hardware: Provide manufacturer's heavy-duty hardware: 1. Hinges: Sizes as recommended by manufacturer for gate size, frame and posts specified. 2. Hasp Latch: Manufacturer's standard fork-type with integral padlock hasp, operable from either side of gate. Padlocks furnished by the Owner. 3. Keepers: Manufacturer's standard mechanical keeper or floor bolt for each gate leaf. Secure free end of each gate when in full open position. 4. Electronically-Operated Gates: Provide all hardware necessary for a complete and operational installation. J. Vinyl Coating: Polyvinylchloride (PVC) compound, consisting of PVC resins, plasticizers and stabilizers, fused and thermally bonded to zinc-coated steel, minimum 7 mil thick, conforming to ASTM F-668. 1. Properties: a. Accelerated Aging: Minimum 2000 hrs. when tested in accordance with ASTM E- 1499. 02831 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents b. UV Resistance: Minimum 3000 hrs. when tested in accordance with ASTM D-1499. 2. Vinyl coating shall be fused and thermally bonded to all chain link fencing materials, components, accessories and hardware. 3. Color: Black. K. Gate operators shall be a Sentex SL 590 slide (1-1/2 hp, 208 volt/3-phase). Manufacturers providing operators of same design, function and performance are acceptable. Confirm any additional requirements. 1. Gate operators shall be compatible with Owner-supplied card readers and computer link back to the Dispatch Room in the main building. 2. Gates shall be manually operable from the inside. 3. Gate installers shall also install loop detectors inside and outside of the gates to allow for the automatic closure of the gates. 4. Gates shall be outfitted with external obstruction sensors such as photo eyes. L. Paint: Shop paint all posts, rails and other items not vinyl-coated with manufacturer's standard finish to match vinyl color specified. M. Controls for Electrically-Operated Gates: To be fob-controlled. Coordinate with Owner. N. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Anchor Fence Co., Baltimore, MD, (301) 633-6500. 2. Boundary Fence and Railing Systems Inc., Richmond Hill, NY, (800) 628-8928. 3. Cyclone Fence, Chicago, IL, (312) 646-6116. 4. Page Corporation, Monesson, PA. 5. Southeastern Wire, Tampa, FL, (800) 669-9473. 6. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are acceptable. 2.02 STANDARD CHAIN LINK FENCING MATERIALS A. Fencing: Galvanized standard prefabricated chain link fencing system conforming to ASTM A392. 1. Woven Wire: Zinc-coated steel woven wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A116, Coating Class I. Woven wire fabric shall be 2" mesh, 9-gage. 2. Fittings: Zinc-coated to conform to the requirements of AASHTO M232. 3. Height of Sections: 6'-0" from finished grade. 4. Twisted and barbed salvage top and bottom. B. Gates: Match construction of fence sections, with 2" o.d. steel pipe frames. 1. Construction: Welded corners or assembled with corner fittings and 3/8" steel truss rods. 2. Provide horizontal 1-1/4" brace rail and 3/8" truss rod for gates 5' wide or greater. 3. Provide vertical 1-1/4" brace rail for gates 6' wide or wider, spacing not to exceed 5' centers. 4. Size: 4'-0" wide x 6'-0" high, or as shown on the Drawings. C. Fence/Gate Posts: Galvanized steel pipe conforming to ASTM A120 and AASHTO M111. 1. Line Posts: 2-1/2" o.d. steel pipe, Schedule 40. 2. Corner Posts, End Posts and Pass Gate Posts: 2-7/8" o.d. steel pipe, Schedule 40. 3. Sleeves: Manufacturer's recommended o.d. steel pipe, Schedule 40. 4. Mounting: Concrete set, minimum 2'-6" embedment. 5. Provide manufacturer's standard post caps. D. Top Rail: 1-1/4" o.d. steel pipe, Schedule 40, galvanized. E. Bottom Tension Bar: 6-gage, galvanized. F. Fittings, hardware and other appurtenances not specifically covered by these Specifications shall be standard commercial grade and in accordance with current standard practice. G. Extension Arms: None. H. Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard-duty hardware: 1. Hinges: Sizes as recommended by manufacturer for gate size, frame and posts specified. 2. Hasp Latch: Manufacturer's standard fork-type with integral padlock hasp, operable from either side of gate. Padlocks furnished by the Owner. 02831 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3. Keepers: Manufacturer's standard mechanical keeper or floor bolt for each gate leaf. Secure free end of each gate when in full open position. I. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Anchor Fence Co., Baltimore, MD, (301) 633-6500. 2. Boundary Fence and Railing Systems Inc., Richmond Hill, NY, (800) 628-8928. 3. Cyclone Fence, Chicago, IL, (312) 646-6116. 4. Page Corporation, Monessen, PA. 5. Southeastern Wire, Tampa, FL, (800) 669-9473. 6. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are acceptable. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate fencing in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, in longest practical sections for ease of shipping, handling and installation as approved in shop drawing. B. Conform to State of Colorado Division of Highways chain link fencing specifications for fabrication, assembly and installation of fencing. C. Provide any accessories required but not itemized for a complete installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Installer to verify that concrete mounting surfaces have been prepared as per manufacturer's requirements. B. Supply embedded anchors and/or pipe sleeves to concrete contractor prior to pour. C. Measure and lay out complete fence line. Locate line posts at equal distance spacing, not exceeding 10' centers, or as shown on the Drawings. D. Use corner posts at positions where fence changes direction more than 10 degrees. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF FENCING A. General: Install fencing sections and gates in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions with manufacturer-supplied anchors and fasteners. B. Install posts plumb and in true alignment. 1. Minimum post hole diameter shall be three (3) times outside post diameter or 8", whichever is larger. 2. Minimum post hole depth below grade: a. Line Posts: 3'. b. Corner Posts, End Posts and Gate Posts: 3-1/2'. c. Vehicular Entrance Gate Posts: 5'. 3. Set posts 3" above bottom of hole. 4. Set post plumb to 1/4" in 10'-0". 5. Fill hole with concrete to 2" above grade. 6. Crown surface of concrete to slope away from posts. 7. Brace each gate and terminal post with a horizontal pipe brace and an adjustable truss extending to an adjacent line post. 8. Brace corner posts in both directions. 9. Where sleeves are specified, set posts in sleeves to proper alignment. Weld in place. C. Install fencing sections plumb, level and in true line. 1. Install top rails and tension wires before the fabric. 2. Install tension wires approximately 6" above grade and attach to each post and securely anchor to terminal or gate posts. 02831 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3. Position bottom of fabric approximately 2" above ground at each post. 4. Join ends of fabric by weaving with single strand of fabric wire to form continuous mesh pattern. 5. Attach fabric to line posts using wire ties or clips, spacing not to exceed 15" o.c. 6. Attach top edge of fabric to top rail using wire ties or clips, spacing not to exceed 24" o.c. 7. Attach bottom edge of fabric to bottom tension wire using wire ties or clips, spacing not to exceed 24" o.c. 8. Thread stretcher bar through fabric and anchor to the post at 15" centers by positive mechanical means. 9. Fasten barbed wire to each extension arm by internal clips or external fabric ties. D. Install gates with approved hardware. Lubricate hinges and adjust gate to swing freely and latch securely. 1. Tolerances: Gates shall be level to within 1/4" in 10'-0". E. Coordinate installation of specialty items with separate contractor as required for a complete and operational system. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Adjust brace rails and tension rods for rigid installation. B. Tighten hardware, fasteners and accessories. C. Protect vinyl coating during installation and upon completion. Contractor shall repair or replace materials where coating has been split, broken or damaged, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Electrically-Operated Gates: Test complete gate operation through minimum ten (10) complete cycles in the presence of the Owner's principal representative. Adjust any gate components as required for complete operation. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 EXTERIOR CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES A. Install vinyl-coated chain link fencing and gates, as shown on the Drawings, in the following locations: 1. Site perimeter. 2. Southwest and northwest entry driveways. 4.02 INTERIOR CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES A. Install uncoated chain link fencing and gates, as shown on the Drawings, in the following locations: 1. Garage storage enclosures. END OF SECTION DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. 03100 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment necessary for the complete construction of required formwork for cast-in-place concrete. B. Furnish and install prefabricated, premolded form materials, including but not limited to: 1. Round, tubular column forms. C. Furnish and install anchor bolts, connectors, embedded plates and other accessories required to be cast into concrete work. D. Furnish materials and equipment necessary to strip and remove formwork. E. Install embedded items furnished by other Sections. F. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting. 2. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Forming equipment. 3. Section 02230, Drilled Piers: Concrete formwork for piers. 4. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 5. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete: Forms for architectural precast concrete. 6. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 7. Division 16, Electrical: Requirements for shop drawings of conduit routing to be cast into concrete work. 1.02 RELATED WORK FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Embedded plates for precast concrete wall panel attachment shall be furnished by the precast fabricator and installed by the Contractor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete in Buildings", and ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork", unless otherwise shown. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Contractor shall be responsible for the design and engineering, construction and maintenance of formwork, as well as its adequacy and safety. C. Contractor shall design formwork for all loads and lateral pressures before and during placement of concrete. Maintain position and shape of formwork at all times. Provide positive means of adjustment for shores and forms which rest on compressible material. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, specifications and installation instructions for all void form, form-coating materials, manufactured form systems, form ties and accessories. 03100 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Fiber Forms: Store prefabricated fiber forms on site horizontally if length requires, supported along the entire length of the form and elevated a minimum 4" off of ground, completely covered with waterproof membrane including ends, and not stacked over 5'-0" high. If stored vertically, the ends shall be covered with waterproof membrane and elevated a minimum 4" off of ground. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK FOR EXPOSED CONCRETE A. Construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with prefabricated sections of metal- framed/plywood-faced, metal or plastic panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, solid exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. Do not use any forms having defects on contact surfaces. 1. Plywood forms are not acceptable. 2. Plywood for facing of metal framed formwork shall be sufficiently thick to withstand pressure of wet concrete without bow or deflection but shall not be less than 5/8" thick, complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1, "B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form, Class 1", or "B-B Exterior Type DFPA Plyform, Class 1". B. Chamfer exposed external corners and edges, using chamfer strips accurately fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight-edge joints. 1. Chamfer Size(s): As indicated on the Drawings, or 3/4" minimum. C. Refer to the Drawings for locations where special joints may be required. D. Arrangement for sheets or liner sheets shall be orderly and symmetrical. Form ties shall be spaced uniformly and aligned horizontally and vertically where locations are exposed to view in the completed project. 2.02 FORMWORK FOR UNEXPOSED CONCRETE A. Form concrete which will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, boards, metal or other acceptable material. Provide lumber that is dressed on at least two (2) edges and one (1) side for a tight fit. 1. Below-Grade Pier Forms: Sonotube Fibre Form "A" or equal, specified in paragraph 2.03 below. 2. Drilled Pier or Caisson Liners: Refer to Section 02230. B. Earthen or trenched forms shall not be used for vertical formwork. 2.03 ROUND TUBULAR FIBER FORMS A. General: Prefabricated round, one-piece tubular fiber forms for exposed, round cast-in-place concrete columns, formed from multiple layers of high quality fiber, spirally wound and laminated with non-water sensitive adhesives. B. Finish: 1. Coated form producing visible spiral seam, Sonotube Fibre Form "A" coated or equal. C. Size(s): Diameter and lengths as required to produce finished columns of the size(s) shown on the Drawings. D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Sonotube as manufactured by Sonoco Products Company, Hartsville, SC, (800) 532-8248, and represented locally by RW Specialties, Inc., Henderson, CO, (800) 332-6682. 2. Manufacturers providing form materials of same type, function, quality and performance are acceptable. 03100 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Premolded Joint Fillers: In joints caulked or sealed with silicone or thiokol-based compound, filler shall be non-bituminous, non-extruding, conforming to ASTM D1752. In all other joints, filler shall be bituminous type conforming to ASTM D1751. Filler shall be 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Non-Bituminous Filler: Sonoflex F by Sonneborne or equal. B. Premolded Fiberboard Joint Fillers (Bituminous-Type): Preformed rigid cane fiberboard material, impregnated with a durable asphaltic compound, conforming to AASHTO-M213. Fillers shall be 1/2" thick, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Bituminous Filler: Flexcell by Celotex or approved equal. C. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings or required by the work, provide minimum two (2) layers 15-lb. non-bituminous felt bond breaker. D. Column Isolation Joints: Joints around columns may be formed with minimum 30# non-bituminous building felt left in place with neatly trimmed top edge or approved joint filler material. E. Keyways: Provide nominal 1-1/2" deep keyways in all construction joints in walls, slabs and joints between walls and slabs, unless otherwise shown. F. Form Ties: Provide factory-fabricated break-back, removable, or snap-type form ties designed to prevent spalling concrete surfaces on removal and which will leave no metal within 1/2" of concrete surface. Use stainless steel, plastic-coated or hot-dipped galvanized at exposed concrete with cone-shaped tie heads, manufactured by Dayton, Gates, Heckman, Richmond or approved equal. G. Release Agent: Provide commercial formulated synthetic resin or oil-type form coating compounds that will not bond with or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent finish treatment of surfaces, manufactured by Protex Pro-Coat, Euclid Eucoslip, J & P Tex-Mastic or approved equal. 1. Contractor shall ensure that release agent is compatible with the finish requirements of concrete to be exposed to view. H. Metal Inserts: Provide adjustable wedge inserts of malleable cast iron complete with bolts, nuts, washers, 3/4" bolt size, unless otherwise shown, manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Gateway, Dayton or approved equal. I. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. Provide factory-made sections with curved, closed faces around drilled piers. Curved face radius shall match drilled pier radius. 1. Stay-in-place void forms shall degrade within three (3) months so the void form cannot impart upward load on the structure when the soil heaves. J. Embedded Connector Plates or Sleeves: Embedded plates, sleeves or other accessory items as shown on the Drawings and as coordinated with the approved precast concrete shop drawings. Plates connecting precast to cast-in-place concrete shall be furnished by the precast fabricator and installed by the Contractor. K. Embedded Plates, Sleeves and Anchor Bolts: Miscellaneous embedded items furnished by other Sections. Refer to the appropriate Section(s) in these Specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225. If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section. B. Expansion, Construction and Other Joints: Properly lay out work and make necessary preparations for construction of specified joints in cast-in-place concrete work. 03100 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1. Take special care to provide joints to allow for removal of sections of concrete foundations, walls or flatwork for future construction where shown on the Drawings. C. Ensure that connector plates, sleeves and other concrete accessories embedded in concrete are properly located, aligned and secured prior to placing concrete. 3.02 FABRICATION A. Construct forms complying with ACI 347 to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions as shown on the Drawings and as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Use selected material to obtain the required finishes. Concrete tolerances shall be as specified in Section 03300. B. Construct formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Provide formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt all joints and provide backup materials at joints as may be required to prevent leakage. Ensure that formwork is properly braced and tied. D. Provide openings in forms as required to accommodate other work. Accurately place and securely support all items required to be built into the forms. Size and locations of openings, recesses, chases and other built-in items shall be obtained from the Contractor or the trades involved. 3.03 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Prior to each use, coat contact surfaces of forms with release agent prior to placement of reinforcement, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not allow excess coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings which are affected by agent. Refer to Section 03300 for required concrete finishes. C. Ensure that all debris and frost has been removed from forms before placing concrete. D. Clean, repair and recoat surfaces of forms that are to be reused. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing materials will not be acceptable. E. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and tighten forms to close all joints. Align and secure all joints to avoid offsets. F. Place void form material to create a continuous void space under all grade beams; omit directly above caissons or footings. 3.04 ERECTION OF ROUND, TUBULAR FIBER FORMS A. General: Erect, brace and maintain prefabricated fiber forms in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Provide fiber forms in continuous, one-piece lengths for all project applications. C. Ensure that cages of reinforcing steel have been properly fabricated and tied, inspected and approved before installing fiber forms. D. Drop fiber forms over reinforcing steel cage either manually, with block and tackle, or by crane, depending upon sizes and lengths. E. Take all necessary precautions to prevent damaging the interior surfaces of the forms. F. Brace fiber forms as recommended by the manufacturer and as required by job conditions before, during and after concrete placement. 3.05 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. Extend shoring from ground floor to underside of composite floor decking at upper level. B. Perform removal of shores in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to safely support the work until concrete has reached a 03100 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2,500 psi compressive strength. Obtain approval from the Structural Engineer for the proposed reshoring sequence. 3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete such as sides of grade beams, walls and similar parts of work may be removed 48 hours after placing concrete, providing concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by removal operations and providing that curing and protection operations are maintained. Refer to specific requirements for hot- and cold-weather concreting in Section 03300. B. Formwork for beam soffits, slabs and other parts that support the weight of concrete shall remain in place at least 14 days and until concrete has reached its specified 28-day strength. C. Whenever formwork is removed during the curing period, cure exposed concrete as specified in Section 03300. D. Prefabricated Fiber Forms: Remove forms as soon as possible after concrete has set, generally between 24 and 48 hours, but not exceeding 5 days, in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Take all necessary precautions not to mar concrete surfaces. 1. Forms for unexposed, below-grade piers need not be removed. Trim excess form material flush with top of pier, or finish grade for exterior locations. E. Contractor shall verify required tolerances specified in Section 03300 immediately after removal of forms. F. Carefully remove fins or other minor surface defects from concrete to remain exposed in the final construction, and leave surfaces prepared for sealers, paint, skim coats or other finishes. Repair minor imperfections as specified in Section 03300. END OF SECTION 03200 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish, bend and install all reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, ties and supports. B. Furnish and install fiber reinforcing materials. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting. 3. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 4. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 5. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete. 6. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ACI 318, "ACI Standard Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 2. ACI 315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". 3. ACI 301-72, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 4. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice". 5. CRSI "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars". 6. CRSI "Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports". 7. AWS D12.1, "Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction". 8. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. General: Fabricate and place reinforcing steel in accordance with the latest edition of ACI 315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", and as detailed on the Drawings. C. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Refer to Section 03300 for requirements. D. Contractor shall obtain specific approval from the Architect/Engineer for the following items: 1. Relocation of bars to an extent that causes placement tolerances to be violated. 2. Bar chairs and spacers. 3. Splices not shown on the Drawings and mechanical connectors. 4. Bending of reinforcement embedded in hardened concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for all reinforcing steel larger than #3 bars, indicating bending and cutting, preformed corners and intersections. Comply with ACI 315 showing bar schedules, stirrup or tie spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement and assemblies as required for the fabrication and placement of concrete reinforcement. Include all special reinforcement required and openings through concrete structures. Show all grade beam and wall reinforcement on elevations drawn at a scale of not less than 1/4" = 1'-0". 1. Shop drawing submittal may be waived for reinforcing bars small enough to be field bent, if requested by Contractor in writing and approved by Structural Engineer. Structural Engineer must observe reinforcement prior to concrete placement. 03200 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. Certificates: Furnish, prior to fabrication, certified mill test reports covering physical and chemical tests of reinforcing steel and post-tensioning strands, if requested by the Structural Engineer. 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Notify the Owner's testing and inspection agency and Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of closing of forms and/or placing concrete so that inspection of reinforcement in place can be made. Do not cover any reinforcement with formwork or concrete until reinforcement has been checked and approval given to proceed with formwork and/or concreting operations. B. Testing of reinforcing welds and splices will be as specified in Section 01410. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to site in strongly tied bundles with metal tags corresponding to bar schedules and diagrams. Store on the site free of rust, scale, oil or other coating. Store bars off the ground and protect from moisture, dirt, oil or deleterious coatings. B. If concreting is delayed for any considerable period of time after reinforcement is in place, it shall be protected by suitable covering. C. Protect exposed reinforcement intended for bonding with future extensions by suitable covering, if applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Bars: ASTM A615 or ASTM A706, 60 KSI, deformed billet steel bars, plain finish, as indicated on the Drawings. Bars shall be free of scale or other bond-reducing coatings. B. Ties, Stirrups and Field Bent Bars: #3 or smaller, may be ASTM A615, 40 KSI). C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 or A497, plain type in flat sheets, plain finish, welded intersections, in sizes as indicated on the Drawings. Use of coiled rolls shall only be permitted when approved by the Structural Engineer. D. Steel Wire: Provide plain cold-drawn wire conforming to ASTM A82. E. Fiber Reinforcing: Collated, fibrillated polypropylene fiber, Fiber Mesh I, Fiber Mesh, Inc., Chattanooga, TN, or equal. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessories shall be of suitable type conforming to ACI 315 and shall include spacers, chairs, tie bars, support bars and all other devices for properly assembling, placing and supporting reinforcement, weight of concrete and workmen without displacement of reinforcement. Wood, brick, block, concrete chips and other non-metallic devices are not acceptable. B. For concrete slab-on-grade use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. Concrete briquettes for support of reinforcement for slabs- on-grade shall be at least 2" wide x 3" long and of proper height. C. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are hot-dipped galvanized, plastic protected or stainless steel protected. D. Wire Ties: Wire for tying shall be annealed, cold-drawn wire of at least 16-gage. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions with fabrication tolerance complying with ACI 315. Cold bend bars in a manner which will not injure material. B. Straightening or rebending at site will not be permitted unless using ASTM A706, 60 KSI reinforcing. 03200 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Where reinforcing bars are shown field welded to structural steel, bars shall be furnished by rebar supplier and welded in place by structural steel erector. Reinforcing bars shown as shop welded to a steel fabricated assembly shall be furnished and welded in place by the structural steel fabricator. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225. If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to this requirement, advise Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section. 3.02 SPLICES A. Splices not shown on the Drawings must be approved by the Structural Engineer. B. Lapped splices shall be securely wired together. Minimum laps shall be in accordance with requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 301-72 and as shown on the Drawings. Offset vertical lap splices at least one bar diameter. C. Lapped splices for welded wire fabric shall be made so that overlap of outermost wires is not less than two (2) full mesh spaces. Lace splices together with 16-gage wire. 3.03 PLACING REINFORCING STEEL A. Prior to placing into position, thoroughly clean reinforcement of mill and excessive rust, scale, dust, mud, oil, ice and all other deleterious coating which may destroy or reduce bond. B. All reinforcing shall be placed in accordance with the Drawings and the "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures", ACI 315, ACI 301 and ACI 318. C. Accurately place and support reinforcing steel with chairs, bar supports, spacers or hangers as recommended by ACI detailing manual except in slab-on-grade work. Support bars in slabs-on- grade and footings with approved accessories. D. Place reinforcing bars to a tolerance of +/- 1/4", except that minimum spacings between bars shall be to a tolerance of +/- 1/4". Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduit or embedded items. The Structural Engineer's approval must be obtained prior to moving bars under these circumstances. E. Securely anchor and tie reinforcing bars and dowels prior to placing concrete. F. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverage for concrete protection shown on the Drawings and specified. Do not place reinforcement with additional concrete cover unless expressly approved by the Structural Engineer. G. Install dowels before any concrete is placed. Locate column dowels accurately with aid of template before concrete starts to set. H. Steel reinforcing bars shall run continuous through cold joints. 3.04 PLACING WELDED WIRE FABRIC A. Welded wire fabric shall be placed 2" below slab surface or as indicated on the Drawings and shall not be permitted to be placed on subgrade prior to concrete placement and hooked into position. Reinforcement shall be fully supported at required elevation prior to concrete placement. Use continuous chairs or support bars in structural slabs to maintain proper locations as shown on the Drawings. B. Install welded wire fabric using full sheets as large as possible. Lap adjoining pieces as specified herein. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 03200 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1. If use of coiled rolls is approved, unroll and allow rolls of welded wire fabric to relax prior to placement. 3.05 PLACING FIBER REINFORCING A. Place fiber reinforcing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 1. 1-1/2 lbs. per cu. yd., unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 SCHEDULE OF REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing materials shall be placed in quantities, sizes and spacing as shown on the Drawings and/or as scheduled herein: 1. Reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric shall be installed where shown or scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Fiber reinforcing shall be placed in all poured-in-place concrete flatwork, including exterior concrete bus drives and pavements, and curb and gutter sections, sidewalks, etc., regardless of whether these already are reinforced with steel or wire materials. 3. Fiber reinforcing is not required in footings, foundation walls, grade beams, piers and caissons. END OF SECTION 03300 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete for footings, foundations, grade beams, caissons and slabs-on-grade and any other concrete work required but not itemized. B. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete for thrust restraint, encasement or other work. C. Furnish and place granular sub-base under slabs-on-grade. D. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete curb and gutter sections, valley pans, catch basins, exterior concrete flatwork and other site concrete work, unless furnished and installed by Section 02515. E. Finishing and application of integral surfacing as scheduled, curing and sealing of slabs. F. Furnishing and placing joint materials. G. Furnish and install cast-in concrete accessories, unless arranged for otherwise. H. Apply cementitious smoothing and resurfacing coating for vertical surfaces where specified and/or indicated on the Drawings. I. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01410, Testing. 2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 3. Section 02225, Structural Excavation, Backfilling and Compacting. 4. Section 02230, Drilled Piers. 5. Section 02515, Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 6. Section 02831, Chain Link Fences and Gates. 7. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 8. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. 9. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete. 10. Section 05120, Structural Steel. 11. Section 06100, Rough Carpentry. 12. Section 07215, Foundation Insulation 13. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 14. Division 15, Mechanical. 15. Division 16, Electrical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". 3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforcing Concrete". 4. ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 5. ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting". 6. ACI 306, "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting". 7. ASTM C94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete". 8. ASTM C33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates". 9. ASTM C150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement". 10. ASTM C260, "Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete". 11. ASTM C494, "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete". 03300 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 12. ASTM C618, "Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete". 13. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Contractor shall have in place a quality assurance program to monitor the composition of the ready-mixed concrete provided for this project. The quality assurance program shall detail: 1. Quality and types of aggregates, cement, mineral admixtures, chemical admixtures and water. 2. Batching of these materials, including properties of the batched mix(es). 3. Delivery and placement requirements for the batched mix(es). 4. Regular contractor monitoring and testing of batched materials. C. Contractor shall maintain a copy of ACI SP-15, "Field Reference Manual" in the field office at all times. D. Contractor shall employ an experienced and competent foreman for all concrete work. The foreman shall be thoroughly familiar with all phases of concrete construction, including formwork. Upon request submit records of qualifications and experience of the foreman to the Architect. E. All concrete work which does not conform to specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes, shall be corrected or removed and replaced as directed by the Architect/Engineer, at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall also be responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected by or resulting from correction to concrete work and for any additional testing of work in place which may be required. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Design: Submit proposed mix design(s) in accordance with ACI 301 for approval by the Architect/Engineer. Submit written design mix reports for each class of concrete at least fifteen (15) days prior to start of work. Include the following in each report: 1. Project identification. 2. Concrete class. 3. Specified properties for concrete. 4. Source of concrete aggregate and cement. 5. Cement type and brand. 6. Manufacturer and brand name of admixtures. 7. Proportions of concrete mixed per cubic yard. 8. Required strength qualification data for each property specified for design mix in accordance with ACI 301. 9. Unit weight. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, color additives and concrete stains, sealers, hardener and finishing compounds. C. Contractor Quality Assurance Program: Submit for review by the Architect/Engineer in accordance with paragraph 1.02.B. D. Certificates: 1. Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates. 2. Certification of appropriate use for hardening and sealing products, as specified in paragraph 2.05. E. Contractor shall retain for Architect/Engineer’s review, if requested, all delivery tickets for each load delivered to the site. Tickets shall show truck number, concrete strength, cement brand and type, cement content, water content (also expressed as water/cement ratio), amount of course aggregate and fine aggregate, name and amount of admixture, number of yards delivered, time of arrival at site and mixing time. 03300 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.04 INSPECTION A. Provide free access for the Architect/Engineer to locations where concrete materials are stored, proportioned or mixed. Do not place concrete until forming and reinforcing for a given pour has been approved by the Architect/Engineer. B. Provide minimum 48 hours advance notice for inspection to the Architect/Engineer, but ensure that forming and reinforcing are substantially complete at the time of notification. 1.05 TESTING A. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by an independent testing agent approved by the Architect. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide free access to work and cooperate with the appointed firm. C. Submit proposed concrete mix design to the inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of work. D. Field Quality Control Testing: Perform sampling and testing for field quality control during the placement of concrete, as follows: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. 2. Slump: ASTM C143; one (1) test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, one (1) test each set of compressive test specimens, or when the indication of change requires. 4. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31; one (1) set of four (4) standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. 5. Cast and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens and field-cured test specimens as specified in ASTM C31. E. Compressive Strength Tests: 1. ASTM C39: One (1) set for each 50 cu. yds. or fraction thereof of each mix design placed in any one day, or for each 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; one (1) specimen tested at seven (7) days, two (2) specimens tested at 28 days, and one (1) specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. 2. When the frequency of testing will provide less than three (3) strength tests for a given mix design, conduct testing from at least five (5) randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than three (3) are used. 3. Testing for Drilled Pier Concrete: If more than one pier is cast from the same truckload, take one (1) set per truckload. If more than one truckload is placed in a pier, take one (1) set per pier. 4. Report test results in writing to the Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer, Contractor and ready-mix supplier on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, the name of contractor, name of the concrete supplier and truck number, name of the concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. 5. The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect/Engineer. The testing agency shall conduct tests to determine the strength and other characteristics of the in-place concrete by compression tests on cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42, by load testing specified in ACI 318 or other acceptable non-destructive testing methods, as directed. The Contractor shall pay for this additional testing. F. Slump Test: One (1) slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. 03300 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents G. Air Entrainment Test: One (1) air entrainment test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. H. Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40° F and below, and when 80° F and above and each time a set of compression test specimens are made. 1.06 EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTING A. Do not use concrete delivered to the final point of placement which has slump or total air content outside the specified values. B. Compressive strength tests for laboratory-cured cylinders will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive compressive strength tests results equal or exceed the 28-day design compressive strength of the type or class of concrete and no individual strength test falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi. C. If the compressive strength tests fail to meet the minimum requirements specified, the concrete represented by such tests will be considered deficient in strength and subject to additional testing as herein specified or removal and replacement of the concrete which the test represents. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store cement in watertight enclosures and protect against dampness, contamination and warehouse set. B. Stockpile aggregates to prevent excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or other sizes of aggregates. Use only one (1) supply source for each aggregate stockpile. C. Store admixtures to prevent contamination, evaporation or damage. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing or harmful temperature ranges. D. Allow a maximum of 90 minutes between the time water is added and the time the concrete is completely placed. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not place concrete during rain, sleet or snow, unless adequate protection is provided. Do not allow rainwater to increase the mixing water or damage the surface finish. B. Cold Weather Concreting: 1. Refer to ACI 306, "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting". 2. Temperature of concrete when placed shall not be less than the following: Minimum Concrete Temp. Degrees Air Temp. F Section with Least Dimension Degrees F Under 12" 12" and Over 30 to 45 60 50 0 to 30 65 55 Below 0 70 60 3. When placed, heated concrete shall not be warmer than 80° F. 4. Prior to placing concrete, all ice, snow, surface and subsurface frost shall be removed and the temperature of the surfaces to be in contact with the new concrete shall be raised above 35° F. 5. Protect the concrete from freezing during specified curing period. 6. Heated enclosures shall be strong and windproof to ensure adequate protection of corners, edges and thin sections. Do not permit heating units to locally heat or dry the concrete. Do not use combustion heaters during the first 24 hours, unless the concrete is protected from exposure to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide. 03300 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Hot Weather Concreting: 1. Refer to ACI 305, "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting". 2. Take precautions when the ambient air temperature is 90° F or above. Temperature of concrete when placed shall not exceed 85° F. 3. Cool forms and reinforcing to a maximum of 90° F by spraying with water prior to placing concrete. 4. Do not use cement that has reached a temperature of 270° F or more. 5. Do not place concrete when the evaporation rate (actual or anticipated) equals or exceeds 0.20 pounds per sq. ft. per hour. 6. Approved set-retarding and water-reducing admixtures may be used with the Archi- tect/Engineer's approval when ambient air temperature is 90° F or above to offset the accelerating effects of high temperatures. 1.09 WARRANTIES A. Provide Installer’s written warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, and subgrade failure for a period of one (1) year from final acceptance. Owner’s Representative shall determine needs for repairs or replacement, and his/her decision shall be final and obligatory upon the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II. Use only one (1) brand of cement in any individual structure. Provide 20% fly ash in Concrete mix per geotechnical report. B. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand conforming to ASTM C33. C. Coarse Aggregate for Normal Weight Concrete: Clean, strong crushed gravel or stone conforming to ASTM C33. Gradation shall be as specified under concrete mixes. D. Water: Clean, fresh potable supply, free from oil, acid, alkali, organic materials or other deleterious substances. E. Admixtures: Use only when specified or approved by the Architect/Engineer. 1. Air-Entraining Agent: ASTM C260, manufactured by Master Builders MBVR, Sika AER, Grace Darex AEA, Protex, or equal. 2. Non-Chloride Accelerator: ASTM C494, Type C or E. 3. Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B or D. 4. Water Reducer: ASTM C494, Type A, manufactured by Master Builders Pozzo-Lith, Grace WRDA, Protex PDA 25XL, Sika Plastocrete, or equal. 5. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F. 6. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride are specifically prohibited. 7. Color Additive: None. 8. Fiber Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200 and paragraph 3.02 of this Section. 2.02 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. Provide premixed, factory-packaged non-shrink, non-metallic grouting compounds specified in Section 05120. 2.03 CONCRETE BONDING AGENTS A. Provide an aqueous phase, film forming, freeze-thaw resistant compound suitable for brush or spray application, complying with Military Specification MIL-B-19235. 1. Chem Master Polyweld, Grace Daraweld-PBA, Larson Weldcrete, Euclid Eucoweld, Protex 03300 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents Proweld-D, or equal. B. Provide a two-component all-purpose epoxy bonding agent for structural repair or corrections. 1. Protex Probond ET-150, Sika Colma-Dur, or equal. 2.04 SMOOTHING AND RESURFACING COATING A. General: A blend of white and gray Portland cement, dry polymers and aggregates providing a smooth, textured patching material for thin, vertical surface repairs and coating applications. Product shall not contain gypsum. B. Compressive Strength: 800 psi at 1 day; 3,000 psi at 7 days; 4,000 psi at 28 days. C. Adhesion: Polymer modified for increased adhesion. D. Color: To match concrete. E. Approved Manufacturers: 1. 3-2-1 by U. S. Spec, Denver, CO, (303) 778-7227. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and performance are acceptable. 2.05 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES A. Expansion and Isolation Joint Fillers: Refer to Section 03100. B. Grade Beam Void Forms: Cardboard type, sizes as indicated on the Drawings, specified in Section 03100. C. Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Accessories: As indicated on the Drawings. D. Fiber Reinforcing: Polypropylene fiber reinforcing, specified in Section 03200. 2.06 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Provide moisture-retaining cover of waterproof sheet materials complying with ASTM C171, Type I or Type II, polyethylene sheeting complying with AASHO M-171, polyethylene coated burlap. - or, at Contractor's option - A. Provide membrane-forming curing compound conforming to ASTM C309, Type I, specified below. Where used, curing compound must be compatible with applied finishes. B. Refer to Section 09800, Special Coatings, for specific requirements for curing of cast-in-place concrete slabs to receive roll-on floor finish. 2.07 HARDENING, SEALING AND FINISH MATERIALS A. General: Apply all hardening, sealing and finishing treatments in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to the schedule below for applications. Supplier/Installer of slab finish materials shall certify that materials specified and/or furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications, for the following criteria: 1. Compatibility of finish material with concrete mix specified. 2. Compatibility of finish material with type and degree of weather exposure. 3. Compatibility of finish material with expected use of space. 4. Compatibility of finish material with expected exposure to chemical, acid, oil, fat or other deleterious material. B. Liquid Water-Based Lithium Silicate, Silane/Siloxane Sealer, Hardener, Densifier and Salt Barrier: LithiSeal ZLi-71 by Zerovac Technologies. No substitutions. VOC not to exceed 350 g/L. 1. Color: Clear. 2. Sealer shall be resistive to magnesium chloride. C. Liquid Acrylic-Based Curing, Sealing and Dustproofing: Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborne or equal. VOC not to exceed 350 g/L. 03300 - 7 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Zerovac Technology, LLC, Denver, CO, (303) 331-6181. 2. Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 835-3434. 3. Thoro System Products, Miami, FL, and represented locally by The Rio Grande Co., Denver, CO, (303) 825-2211. 4. L. M. Scofield Company, Los Angeles, CA, (800) 800-9900, represented locally by Conrep West, Englewood, CO, (303) 740-7787. 5. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, quality, appearance and performance are acceptable, except as limited above. 2.08 UNDER-SLAB MATERIALS A. Granular Sub-Base: 3/8" to 3/4" angular gravel or crushed rock, extent and thickness as shown on the Drawings or as required by the Soils Report. B. Vapor Barrier: Refer to Section 07190. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND COORDINATION A. Notify any trades that may have items to be recessed or embedded in concrete, or that may require openings in concrete, of placing schedule. Coordinate work to avoid cutting of concrete and to avoid delays in the work. B. Surfaces shall be true to line and grade and free from loose earth, frost, ice, mud and standing or running water. Protect bottom of excavation against freezing. Do not deposit concrete against frozen ground. C. Make all preparations required for protection of concrete during placing and curing under detrimental weather conditions. D. Notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours prior to placing of any concrete. Do not deposit any concrete before the Architect/Engineer has observed reinforcement and other work in place and given permission to proceed. Such inspection and permission to proceed shall in no way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for proper placement of reinforcement and placing of concrete and of responsibility for adherence to other requirements of the Construction Documents. E. Form and install concrete work in accordance with ACI 301, except as amended by this Section. Concrete formwork shall be as specified in Section 03100. F. Site preparation and compaction of existing and/or imported fill materials shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Soils Investigation Report and Section 02225. If the foundation structure design shown on the Drawings and/or specified will not strictly conform to this requirement, advise the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with work of this Section. G. Ensure that form inserts for all exposed edges and corners requiring chamfers are properly placed, as specified in Section 03100. H. Ensure that sleeves and other site items to be installed under concrete work are properly located and installed, as specified in other Sections. I. Smoothing and Resurfacing Coating: All surfaces in contact with coating shall be free of dirt, oil, grease, laitance and other contaminants. 3.02 DESIGN MIXES A. Concrete mixes shall be as itemized on the Structural Drawings or specified herein for specific locations. B. Concrete which does not meet the minimum requirements for strength at 28 days shall be reviewed and is subject to removal at the option of the Architect/Engineer. C. Proportion normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 211.1. Concrete for all parts of the 03300 - 8 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents work shall be of the specified quality, capable of being placed without excessive segregation and, when hardened, of developing all characteristics required by these Specifications and the Contract Documents. Proportion ingredients to produce a mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcements by the methods of placing and consolidation employed on the work. D. Design mixes shall be made and reported by an approved testing laboratory for each class of concrete, at the Contractor's expense. E. Design mixes shall contain all admixtures required by these specifications and/or proposed by the Contractor to be used in concrete. F. Proportion concrete design mixes so that compressive strength of laboratory-cured cylinders will be at least 15% greater than minimum specified strength. Refer to paragraph 1.05 for testing requirements. G. Color Additive(s): None. H. Concrete Mixes: Contractor shall submit proposed design mixes for each type of concrete required for the work for approval by the Structural Engineer. Structural requirements shall be as specified on the Structural Drawings. I. In lieu of designing new mixes for this project, existing mix designs meeting all requirements specified for each concrete mix and used successfully on previous projects under conditions similar to those anticipated on this project may be used, providing the following are submitted for the Architect/Engineer's approval for each class of concrete: 1. Reports of concrete mix design and test results. 2. Reports of sufficient consecutive sets of 7- and 28-day concrete strength test made during the last six (6) months and the calculations of standard deviation for these tests. 3. Reports of compliance tests of fine and coarse aggregates made during the last six (6) months. 4. Mix submittals and required statistical strengths shall be in accordance with ACI 301. J. Concrete Reinforcing: Refer to Section 03200. 3.03 CONCRETE BATCHING AND MIXING A. Ready-mixed batch plant equipment and facilities must comply with the requirements of ACI 614 and ASTM C94. The plant must have sufficient capacity to produce and deliver concrete of specified qualities in quantities required to meet the construction schedule. B. Site-mixed concrete will not be permitted. Measure, mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, except as specified herein. C. All concrete not placed within 90 minutes of initial contact of cement and water shall be rejected. D. Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump is prohibited. Obtain the Architect/Engineer's approval for any addition of water. Do not exceed the maximum permissible water/cement ratio or maximum slump under any circumstances. 3.04 PREPARATION OF INSERTS, EMBEDDED ITEMS AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduits, sleeves and other work to be embedded in and passing through concrete members. B. Coordinate work of other Sections and cooperate with trades involved in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts. C. Accurately position and securely fasten all anchor bolts, castings, steel shapes, conduit, sleeves, masonry anchorages and other materials to be embedded in the concrete. "Wet-stabbing" of anchor bolts is not allowed. 03300 - 9 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents D. Install conduits between reinforcing steel in walls, slabs or columns with reinforcing in both faces and below reinforcing in slabs with only one (1) layer of reinforcing steel. E. Embedments shall be clean when installed. Remove concrete spatter from all surfaces not in contact with concrete. 3.05 PLACING UNDER-SLAB MATERIALS A. Granular Sub-Base: Place a minimum of 12" Lime Stabilized Subgrade over 24" of Moisture Treated Subgrade. B. Vapor Barrier: Install underslab vapor barrier as specified in Section 07190. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE A. Transit-mixed concrete shall be truck-mixed in accordance with "Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete", ASTM C94-67. B. Concrete shall have a temperature of 70° F +/- 20° F at the time of placing, unless prior permission has been granted in writing by the Architect/Engineer to exceed these tolerances. C. Transport the concrete from mixer to final position as rapidly as practical without segregation, contamination or loss of material. Maximum not-to-exceed from introduction of water to placement of concrete is 90 minutes. Place concrete in forms with drop chutes, baffles or other methods which will prevent segregation. Comply with the requirements of ACI 614. 1. Contractor shall assess the placement requirements of the site, construction staging and other factors, and provide concrete pumping equipment for concrete placement as may be necessary, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Concrete foundation structures shall be placed on undisturbed, clean surfaces free from frost, ice, mud, standing or running water. E. Ensure that hardened concrete, wood chips, shavings and other debris have been removed from the interior of the forms and all hardened concrete and foreign materials have been removed from the inner surfaces of the mixing and conveying equipment. Forms shall be wetted, oiled or treated with an approved form-coating material prior to placing concrete. Reinforcement shall be cleaned, secured in position, inspected and approved by the Architect/Engineer before starting the pouring of concrete. F. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms as nearly as practical in its final position so as to avoid rehandling. Special care shall be exercised to prevent splashing the forms or reinforcement with concrete in advance of pouring. G. Place concrete in horizontal layers not more than 24" thick, unless otherwise required by specific conditions of the work, i.e., round, tubular fiber-formed columns. Place successive layers at such speed so that the preceding layer is still plastic. H. Immediately after depositing, the concrete shall be compacted to force out all air pockets, working the mixture into corners, around reinforcement and inserts to prevent the formation of voids. Consolidate concrete by vibration, spading or rodding. Do not over-vibrate or use vibrators to transport concrete. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther apart than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. 1. Mechanical vibrators need not be used for thrust restraints. 2. When vibrating is not practical, concrete shall be consolidated and all faces well spaced by continuous working with a suitable tool in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. 3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Complete finishing operation within 24 hours after stripping forms. Patch repairable defective areas immediately after form removal. 03300 - 10 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. Subgrade Surfaces: Rough form finish is acceptable on all subgrade surfaces, except as indicated otherwise. Patch all defective areas. C. Exposed Surfaces: Provide smooth rubbed finish on any formed surfaces exposed to view, including but not limited to the following: 1. Foundation walls or grade beams with 12" or more of exposed vertical surface shall receive rubbed finish. D. Strip forms while concrete is still green and steel trowel surfaces to a dense, hard finish with corners, intersections and terminations chamfered 1/2" and smooth. 1. Repair and patch all tie holes and defects with mortar. Remove all fins and projections. 2. Tops of walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed and floated to a texture consistent to that of formed surfaces. Final treatment of formed surfaces shall continue uniformly across unformed surfaces. 3. Strike chamfered edges and corners of exposed concrete clean, straight and true to line. E. Honeycombing or spillage through forms shall be repaired or replaced as specified below in this section. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF JOINTS A. Joint Materials: Refer to Section 03100, Concrete Formwork, and paragraph 2.05 of this Section. B. General: Locate and install construction joints which are not shown on the Drawings so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the structure. In general, locate near the middle of the span of slabs, beams and grade beams, unless a beam intersects a girder at this point. Obtain the Architect/Engineer's approval for joint locations. C. Pour floor slabs in pattern indicated on the Drawings. Form control joints and place expansion joints as indicated on the Drawings, but in no case exceed the following requirements: 1. Control joints shall be spaced at 15'-0" maximum intervals each way so as not to encompass an area to exceed 225 sq. ft., or other spacing and pattern(s) as shown on the Drawings, or as required by the Soils Report. 2. Place control joints at internal corners, columns or other points of natural weakness. D. Before depositing new concrete, remove all laitance and loose aggregates immediately before placing fresh concrete. Dampen but do not saturate the joint surface. At slabs and beams, apply a neat cement grout. E. Expansion or Isolation Joints: Where expansion joints are indicated on the Drawings, place filler strips to within 1/2" of finished surface. Joint recess shall be formed with a separate removable filler section to provide a clean, true recess to receive sealant as specified in Section 07900. F. Interior Construction and Control Joints: Keyed construction joints shall be formed with prefabricated joint materials and shall adhere to the control joint pattern shown. 1. Refer to the Drawings for special control joint patterns. G. Bond Breaker: Where shown on the Drawings, provide minimum two (2) layers 15# non-bituminous felt bond breaker between interior or exterior slabs-on-grade and vertical wall surfaces. H. Column Isolation Joints: Joints around columns may be formed with minimum 30# non-bituminous building felt left in place with neatly trimmed top edge or approved joint filler material. I. Exterior Slab, Curb and Gutter Control Joints: Tool or saw joints to a depth of one-fourth (1/4) the thickness of the slab, where indicated on the plans. Refer to Section 02515 for joint spacing in concrete curb and gutter, sidewalk and exterior flatwork sections. 3.09 FINISHING FLATWORK A. General: Verify all flatwork finishes with the Architect in the field prior to proceeding with this work. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when 03300 - 11 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Check and level surface plane to required tolerance. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed to view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when the surface produces a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate the concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10' when tested with a 10' straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor coverings system. D. Non-Slip Broom Finish: After completion of floated finish, draw a broom or a burlap belt transversely across the surface perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use broom finish after floating for surfaces to receive topping or cementitious finishes. Coordinate final texture with the Architect prior to application. E. Finishing Slabs at Floor Drains: Hold elevation of concrete slabs-on-grade around floor drains level to within 16" around each drain location, then shape surface to elevation of drains as shown on the Drawings. Refer to the Drawings for special sloped areas of concrete slabs-on-grade to floor or trench drains. F. Slab Finish Schedule: Refer to Part 4, Schedules, at the end of this Section. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Maintain the following tolerances for all cast-in-place concrete work. Defective work shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1. Variation from Plumb: a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum. b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum. 2. Variation in Thickness: 1/4" to 1/2" standard, 5% for footings. 3. Variation in Grade: a. 0-10': 1/4" standard, 1/8" for floor slabs. b. 10-20': 3/8" standard, 1/4" for floor slabs. c. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, 3/8" for floor slabs. 4. Variation in Plan: a. 0-20': 1/2". b. 40' or more: 3/4" standard, +1/2" for footings. 5. Variation in Eccentricity: 2% for footings. 6. Variation in Openings: a. Size: +1/8". b. Location: 1/4". B. Slab Tolerances: 1. Interior Floor Slabs: 1/8" in 10' maximum. 2. Exterior Sidewalks, Slabs and Ramps: 1/4" in 10' maximum. 3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. B. Refer to Section 03100 for stripping and removal of formwork after curing. 03300 - 12 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Start curing immediately after finishing. Cure for at least seven (7) days, not necessarily consecutive, during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above 50° F. Wood forms shall be kept wet. If forms are removed during curing period, an approved curing method must be started immediately. D. Cure slabs by approved moisture-retaining coverings, lapped and sealed, and kept continuously wet. Approved curing compounds may be used if compatible with specified finishes. Specific approval is required from the Architect/Engineer. Curing compounds shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of freshly placed concrete from vandalism, accidental damage by workmen or equipment, or damage resulting from subgrade settlement or subsequent construction traffic. Take adequate precautions to restrict traffic in the area of fresh concrete during the curing period. Damaged concrete shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the Owner's discretion. F. Comply with the requirements of ACI 305 when hot weather conditions exist. Temperature of concrete when placed shall be less than 90° F. When necessary to prevent premature drying, arrangements for installation of windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding or a wet covering of light color shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. G. Comply with the requirements of ACI 306 when cold weather conditions exist. When atmospheric temperature is 40° F and below, maintain concrete temperature at not less than 50° F for at least six (6) days. When necessary, make arrangements before concrete placing for heating, covering insulation or housing as required to maintain specified temperature and moisture conditions without injury due to concentration of heat. H. Maintain protective cover on concrete so that changes in temperatures of concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5° F in any one (1) hour or 50° F in any 24-hour period. 3.12 SEALING AND FINISH APPLICATIONS A. General: Consult with the manufacturer's representative prior to application. Follow the manufacturer's printed instructions for applying materials. B. Schedule of Exterior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete curing, sealing and hardening products for exterior concrete in accordance with the following schedule: 1. Concrete Slabs, Aprons and Curb and Gutter Sections: Kure-N-Seal. C. Schedule of Interior Hardening and Sealing Materials: Furnish and apply concrete curing, sealing and hardening products for interior floor slabs in accordance with the following schedule. Refer to paragraph 2.06 for certification of appropriate use. 1. Slabs to Receive No Flooring (Garage Areas): Damp cure and LithiSeal ZLi-71 sealer, hardener, densifier and salt barrier to create a tough, hard, deep gloss surface. D. Application Process: Apply curing, hardening and sealing products in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. E. Apply materials only after concrete surfaces are completely cured and dry. Follow the manufacturer's recommended application instructions, generally applying it in three (3) coats with ample drying time between coats. Remove surplus hardener after final application has dried. 3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE APPLICATIONS A. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on the Drawings or required by the work. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations. Comply with certified diagrams or templates of the manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. Items include but are not limited to: 1. Electrical transformers. Coordinate sizes of transformer bases and other equipment with the governmental agency or utility having jurisdiction. 2. Fuel dispensing equipment. 03300 - 13 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. Site Concrete Work: Provide miscellaneous site cast-in-place concrete items as detailed on the Drawings or specified herein, to include but not be limited to: 1. Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Specified in Section 02515. 2. Base and/or pier foundations for fencing and gates, pipe bollards and miscellaneous site furnishings. 3.14 APPLICATION OF SMOOTHING AND RESURFACING COATING A. General: Prepare surfaces to receive coating per manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. 1. Surfaces shall be free of dirt, oil, grease, laitance and other contaminants. 2. Remove unsound concrete to ensure a good bond. 3. Mechanically abrade smooth, dense surfaces to provide necessary bonding. 4. Moisten area prior to application. 5. Maintain contact areas between 40° F and 90° F prior to repair and during initial curing period. B. Mixing: Use a mechanical mixer with rotating blades on low rpm for 3-5 minutes to achieve desired consistency. C. Placing: Place material consistently without multiple layers, using a putty knife, trowel or sponge float. 1. Apply in applications from feather edge to 1/8" thickness. 2. For areas greater than 1/8" thick, apply U. S. Spec Quickset 20 to within 1/16" of final repair, then apply finish coat. D. Finishing: Follow standard ACI curing practices. 3.15 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Remove and replace defective concrete not conforming to required line, detail and elevation as directed by the Architect/Engineer. B. Repair or replace concrete not properly placed resulting in excessive honeycombing and other defects. Do not patch, repair or replace exposed architectural concrete, except upon express direction of the Architect. C. Concrete damaged after placement shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at the Owner's discretion. 3.16 PATCHING AND POINTING A. Patch and point all vertical and horizontal formed concrete surfaces where exposed to view, as defined herein. B. Fill holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after such work is in place. C. Mix, place and cure concrete to blend with in-place construction. D. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete the work. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Exposed cast-in-place concrete work shall be subject to evaluation to the satisfaction of the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Slab finishes. 2. Tolerances specified. 3. Wall and corner surfaces, including patching and pointing. 4. Joint materials and placement. B. Power wash, or clean by other acceptable means, all dampproofing or waterproofing overspray or other surface visual defect. 03300 - 14 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 EXTERIOR FLATWORK FINISHES A. Exterior Bus Circulation and Training Slabs and Aprons: Non-slip broom or sweat finish, with Kure- N-Seal sealer and dustproofer. 4.02 INTERIOR FLATWORK FINISHES A. Interior Floor Slabs: Troweled finish, with LithiSeal ZLi-71 sealer, hardener, densifier and salt barrier. END OF SECTION 03450 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and erect insulated and uninsulated architectural precast concrete wall panels, including grout or dry pack as necessary to complete all connections. B. Fabricate forms for precast wall panels. C. Provide all anchor bolts, inserts, embedded plates and other hardware or attachments cast into poured-in-place concrete or welded to supporting structural frame. These items will be installed by the Contractor to the layouts shown on the approved shop drawings. D. Furnish integral color, exposed aggregate and provide specialty finish for precast concrete units. E. Furnish and apply clear silicone-based water repellent sealer, unless provided by others. F. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01200, Project Meetings: Pre-installation conferences. 2. Section 01410, Testing. 3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 4. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing. 5. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 6. Section 04100, Mortar and Masonry Grout. 7. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ACI 318-71, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". 2. PCI MNL-117, "Manual for Quality Control for Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products". 3. PCI MNL-120 "Design Handbook on Precast and Prestressed Concrete". 4. PCI MNL-123, "Manual on Design of Connections for Precast and Prestressed Concrete". 5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A 36 Structural Steel. b. A 185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. c. A 416 Uncoated Seven-Wire Stress-Relieved Strand for Prestressed Concrete. d. A 615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. e. C 33 Concrete Aggregates. f. C 150 Portland Cement. g. A 386 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products. 6. AWS D12.1, "Recommended Practices for Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced Concrete Construction". 7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. 8. If the provisions of any of the referenced codes or standards are at variance with the requirements of this Section, the more stringent requirements shall govern. B. Wall Panels: Fabricators of the architectural precast work shall have a minimum of five (5) years successful experience and be normally engaged in work of this scope. Additionally, work of this Section shall only be performed by approved subcontractors subscribing to the plant certification program of the Precast Concrete Institute (PCI). The following fabricators are approved: 1. Stresscon Corp., Dacono, CO, (303) 659-6661. 03450 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2. Rocky Mountain Prestress, Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 480-1111. 3. Additional fabricators requesting approval must make application to the Architect/Engineer at ten (10) business days before bid opening. Fabrication plants shall not be located more than 200 miles from the project site, unless otherwise approved by the Owner and Structural Engineer. C. Erection shall be done by qualified masons having experience in the successful installation of architectural precast work. D. Welders Qualifications: AWS D1.1 qualified. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate and sand from one source and obtain admixtures from one source from a single manufacturer. 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA A. General: Design architectural precast concrete units in accordance with ACI 318. B. Design architectural concrete units under the direct supervision of a Colorado registered professional engineer fully experienced in design of precast concrete structural units. C. Design precast concrete units to support the calculated live and dead loads. Wall panels shall be designed for gravity, wind and seismic loads. The manufacturer shall also design and install any additional reinforcing required for transit and erection stresses. D. Design precast concrete units and component connections to withstand weight of and forces subjected to precast concrete units. Design to provide for anticipated building movement. Provide adjustment connections to accommodate misalignment of structure. E. Design precast concrete units and connections to accommodate, by means of expansion joints, movement in structure and between cladding elements and structure without permanent distortion, damage to components, wracking of joint connections or breakage of seals. F. Design precast concrete units to industry standards for dimensions, structural characteristics, etc., unless more stringent requirements are specified in this Section. G. Manufacture precast concrete units to ensure similarity of dimension and finish throughout. H. Submit to Architect/Engineer for review, deviation in design or dimensions required. I. Permissible Design Deviations: 1. Design deviations will be permitted only after the Architect/Engineer's approval of the manufacturer's proposed design, supported by complete design calculations and drawings prepared by a registered engineer. 2. Dead load of any design deviation shall not be greater than the weight of the materials indicated on the contract drawings. Effects of live, wind and seismic loads must be included in the design deviations. J. Addition Projects: Design intent is to match existing precast concrete wall panels in size, shape, details, exposed aggregate and finish, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 1.04 TESTING A. Fabricator shall be responsible for regular testing of concrete and maintaining records of all stressing and casting operations as required herein. Manufacturing and testing procedures shall be in general compliance with "PCI-MNL 117 Manual for Quality Control". 1. Additional tests of materials and equipment may be requested by the Architect/ Engineer. Provide all materials required for testing and allow reasonable access for inspectors. Any additional testing and/or inspection will be performed by an independent testing laboratory. B. Inspection and testing of concrete mix will be performed by independent testing agent as specified in Section 01410. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. C. Provide free access to work and cooperate with appointed firm. 03450 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents D. Submit proposed concrete mix design to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of work. E. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with requirements stated herein. F. Four (4) concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 100 or less cu. yds. of concrete. Compressive tests shall be conducted at seven (7) days; two at 28 days and one (1) shall be held and disposed of at the direction of the Architect/Engineer. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and erection drawings indicating the following: 1. All dimensions. 2. Location of each item in the completed structure. 3. Reinforcing steel and dowel details. 4. Concrete strength required at time of lifting and at 28 days. 5. Admixtures to be used. 6. Connection details. 7. Openings and miscellaneous hardware provided for other trades, if any. 8. Type of finish and location. 9. Identifying marks for each member. 10. Lifting hooks and/or handling points. 11. Sequence of erection and any special handling instruction or bracing required. B. Design Calculations: Provide three (3) copies of design calculations prepared by a registered Colorado engineer for reinforcing, hoisting and connection and anchorage devices, for Engineer's review. Review is for checking general compliance with Contract Documents and does not relieve manufacturer of structural responsibility. C. Samples: The fabricator shall prepare three (3) samples showing the color and textures of precast units for Architect's approval prior to fabrication of the units. Samples shall be at least 12" x 12" x 1" thick. 1. Additions and Renovation Projects: Architectural precast concrete wall panels shall match in color, exposed aggregate and texture the architectural precast used for the original building. D. Miscellaneous: Submit the following when requested by the Architect/Engineer prior to manufacturing precast items: 1. Certified mill tests of reinforcing steel proposed for use on this project. 2. Concrete mix design and test results at time of release and at 28 days for mix proposed for use on this project. 3. Calibration records for jacking equipment. E. Do not proceed with fabrication until shop drawings and design calculations have been reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer and Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible to check the erection shop drawings and to ensure their conformance with the overall building dimensions and to resolve any conflicts between the precast/pre-stressed concrete work, his work and that of other trades prior to his approval of the shop drawings. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle precast units in positions consistent with their shape and design. Lift and support only from support points indicated on approved shop drawings. B. Store and handle units in manner to prevent excessive stresses. Handle and install units in a manner ensuring proper safety and alignment. Where temporary bracing is required, it shall be maintained until there are adequate permanent connections. Temporary bracing shall not damage any part of the structure. C. Block and laterally brace precast units during transport and while stored onsite. Provide lateral bracing sufficient to prevent bowing and warping. 03450 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1. Blocking and Bracing: Clean, non-staining and that will not prevent uniform curing of exposed surfaces. D. Provide edges of units with adequate protection to prevent staining, chipping or spalling of concrete. Damaged units will be rejected. E. Repair any damage suffered during storage, transportation and erection to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Repairing procedures must result in the same fire rating as the original member. Clean units after erection when required to permit application of finishes. F. Precast concrete contractor shall be responsible for the design of all hooks, brackets and handling gear. Where the erection is by others, the method shall be that approved in writing by this contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE WALL PANELS A. General: Plant-cast precast concrete insulated and uninsulated wall panels, consisting of structural concrete exterior and interior faces with a core of rigid insulation. 1. Structural Type: Vertical load-bearing. 2. Thickness: As shown on the Drawings for different panel types. 3. Thermal Performance: R-value of approximately 8.0 (weighted average method). 4. Fire Rating: 2-hour minimum, tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 5. Acoustical Performance: STC rating of 52 minimum. B. Concrete Materials: All materials used shall comply with the requirements of the codes and standards listed herein, with the following limitations and exceptions: 1. Concrete for wall panels shall be made with stone aggregate. 2. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi minimum at 28 days. 3. Absorption, Cold Water Test: 5% maximum. 4. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, white and/or pigmented additives as required to achieve color match. 5. Aggregate: As required to achieve color match and specified strength. C. Finishes: Texture and color to match existing. 1. Exposed Aggregate: Exterior surfaces of wall panels shall have aggregate with a facing mortar to match the existing building panels. D. Insulated Core: Molded, expanded polystyrene or polyurethane insulation, as required for specified R-value. E. Reinforcing: Non-prestressed reinforcement shall consist of reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60, and welded wire mesh conforming to ASTM A185, except that column ties, beam stirrups and anchors welded to embedded plates shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 40. F. Cast-In Headers, Anchors, Plates, etc.: As required of stainless steel or galvanized steel. G. Clear Sealer: Clear, penetrating silicone-based water repellent sealer, breathable to allow moisture vapor transmission, specifically formulated for precast concrete and other dense vertical surfaces, Protex Silicone Seal or approved equal. H. Non-Shrink Grout: Provide premixed factory packaged non-metallic grouting compound. I. Joint Sealants: Non-staining polysulfide, silicone and polyurethane sealant, FS TT-S-00227, Type 1, self-leveling, or Type 2, non-sag, Class A. Color to match adjacent concrete. 1. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible with joint forming materials. J. Approved Precast Panel Type: Styrocore Insulated Wall Systems by Stresscon, as basis of design. K. Approved Fabricators: As specified in paragraph 1.02.C above. 03450 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.02 FORMWORK A. General: Forms for architectural precast concrete wall panels shall be fabricated by the precast fabricator, constructed of wood, metal or fiberglass as required to form panels of specified types, dimensions, thickness(es), section(s), details, finish, texture and color. 1. Forms fabricated for use in this project shall remain the property of the fabricator. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Produce precast concrete wall panels of the highest quality from approved concrete mix designs and in accordance with approved shop drawings. Any changes made in the approved mix design during production must be approved in advance by the Architect/Engineer. B. Insulated Precast Wall Panels: Fabricate insulated precast concrete sandwich panels in strict accordance with the approved fabricators' system specifications and recommendations. Provide solid reinforced panel edges, below-grade sections and parapet sections, including all embedded attachments and anchorages required for erection. C. Permissible Design Deviations: 1. Design deviations will be permitted only after the Architect/Engineer's approval of the manufacturer's proposed design, supported by complete design calculations and drawings prepared by a Colorado registered engineer. 2. Dead load of any design deviation shall not be greater than the weight of the materials indicated on the Drawings. Effects of live, wind and seismic loads must be included in the design deviations. D. Sizes shall be accurate with proper allowances for fitting to each other and to other building materials. All surfaces shall be true and straight-edged with a uniform finish on all exposed surfaces. E. Surfaces shall be dense and firm and shall withstand vigorous cleaning and scrubbing with a stiff fiber brush and diluted muriatic acid (5%) cleaning solution. F. Unformed surfaces (back surface of wall panels) shall be satisfactorily smooth so as to allow the panels to be used as a parapet surface for installation of the single-ply roof membrane without the use of a plywood liner, or to allow the installation of z-furring channels with the required flatness and flushness specified for gypsum wallboard finish systems. G. Provide 3/4" (or dimension to match existing) chamfers at all exposed edges and corners, as detailed on the Drawings and to match existing precast panels. H. Units with imperfections in exposed surfaces such as form joint lines, uneven color, honeycombing, cracks, etc. will not be acceptable. I. Placement of Reinforcement: 1. Provide minimum reinforcing protection in accordance with ACI 318. 2. Place one (1) #5 bar minimum with 2'-0" projection around all sides of openings. 3. Wire mesh reinforcement must lap on full mesh spacing at side and end laps and be wired together. 2.04 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES A. General: Dimensions of precast concrete wall panels shall be as shown on the Drawings. Products shall be fabricated and furnished to the following tolerances: 1. Bowing: a. Bowing: Length of bow/360 or 3/4" maximum. b. Differential Bowing, Two (2) Adjacent Members: 1/4". 2. Warpage: Maximum warpage of one (1) corner from the nearest corner, 1/16"/ft. to nearest corner. 3. Thickness: -1/8", + 1/4". 4. Squareness: 1/8" per 6 ft. or 1/4" maximum, whichever is greater. 03450 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 5. Dimensions: a. 10' or under: 1/8". b. 10' to 20': + 1/8", - 3/16". c. 20' to 30': + 1/8", - 1/4". d. Over 30': 1/4". 6. Weld Plates, Anchors and Inserts: Within 3/4" of centerline. 7. Blockouts and Reinforcement: Within 1/4" of the indicated position to meet structural requirements, otherwise 1/2". 8. Length and Width of Blockouts: 1/4". 2.05 FINISHES A. General: Architectural precast concrete units shall be fabricated in accordance with PCI-MNL 117. B. Facing mixes may not be used. The units must be consistent throughout their thickness, without cold joint separations or aggregate segregation or migration. C. Finishes shall be as specified by the Architect, and actual finishing techniques shall be developed by the fabricator so as to meet the architectural specifications. Appropriate samples shall be supplied for approval prior to any full scale production. D. Unformed surfaces shall be screeded to proper levels and finished according to use as follows: 1. Steel Trowel Finish: For all interior exposed surfaces of wall panels, beams and columns. Troweling shall produce a dense surface, uniform in texture and appearance. 2. Float Finish: For wall surfaces unexposed to view, or to receive insulation, furring or other finish material. Finish to a smooth, level surface. Refer to Paragraph 2.03, Fabrication, above. E. No chipped, cracked, warped or otherwise damaged members shall be installed. Before any members are shipped to the job site, notify the Architect and obtain approval for shipment. Damage may be repaired by the manufacturer and will be deemed acceptable if the structural adequacy and aesthetic appearance is not impaired, subject to Architect's approval. F. Openings, Holes, and Attachments: 1. Provide all openings and attachments for fixtures or equipment shown on the Drawings. 2. Other openings, inserts and fittings shall be located, furnished and installed by the trade requiring same after the precast products have been erected. Subject to approval of the Architect, precast products may be drilled or "shot", provided no contact is made with the reinforcing steel. Should spalling occur, it shall be repaired by the trade doing the drilling or shooting. Maintain minimum edge distances recommended by insert manufacturer. Any procedure which may alter manufacturer's warranty must be approved in writing by the precast fabricator. G. Labels: Each precast wall panel shall bear a two-hour label of the Underwriters Laboratories, if required. 2.06 PRIMER AND PAINT FOR STEEL CONNECTORS A. General: Concealed connectors for architectural precast concrete wall panels shall remain unfinished. Exposed connectors shall be field finished unless otherwise indicated. B. Shop Paint: Provide paint conforming to FS TT-P-636, manufacturer's standard red. Field touch-up paint shall be the same as shop paint. 1. Primer: Conform to FS TT-P-31, red. C. Asphaltic Paint: Provide an asphaltic base paint for all surfaces below grade and for all exterior members to be in contact with concrete, or as shown on the Drawings. 1. Sonneborn Hydrocide Semi-Mastic. 03450 - 7 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Contractor shall examine lines and levels of caissons, grade beams, foundation walls, beams, columns and support systems scheduled to receive architectural precast concrete wall panels prior to starting erection. Report in writing to Architect/Engineer any condition that may potentially affect proper installation. Do not commence work until such defects are corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of substrates. 1. Precast concrete contractor shall bring to the attention of the General Contractor any obvious weakness in the work supporting the structural precast concrete. 2. Do not erect units unless bearing surfaces are at proper elevations. Notify the Architect of any discrepancies. B. Field verify dimensions affecting the work of this Section prior to fabrication. C. Store, handle and protect architectural precast concrete on site as specified in paragraph 1.06 above. 1. Units shall be stored on planking and protected to prevent chipping, staining or weathering before installation in the work. Location of storage to be coordinated with the Owner. 2. Units that are stained, chipped or otherwise damaged during storage or installation shall be rejected. 3. Repair or replace damaged panels, at the sole discretion of the Architect/Engineer. 4. Lift or support members at points that are acceptable to the Manufacturer. D. Ensure that embedded plates, angles or other attachment devices supplied by other trades are properly located and installed. 3.02 COORDINATION BY CONTRACTOR A. Pre-Installation Conference: Refer to Section 01200. B. Access for Precast Concrete Erection Equipment: The General Contractor shall provide and maintain access and operating space for the equipment of the structural precast concrete contractor. Such access may consist of, but need not be limited to, roads, ramps and crossings capable of supporting cranes and trucks normal to erection operations of this type. Foundation and utility excavations shall be backfilled where necessary and in accordance with the schedule of erection mutually agreed on between this contractor and the precast concrete erection contractor. C. Coordination of Precast Concrete with Other Trades: The General Contractor shall acquaint other trades with the necessity of providing information required to locate openings, inserts and any other appurtenances required by these trades in the architectural precast concrete. D. Enclosure of Precast Concrete: General Contractor shall not enclose any of the precast concrete work until the alignment and connections have been approved by the Architect/Engineer. E. Work Supporting Architectural Precast Concrete: Anchor bolts, embedded plates and angles shall be supplied by the precast concrete contractor and installed by the General Contractor. 1. Tolerances in placing anchor bolts are: a. Alignments: 3/8". b. Level: 1/2". 3.03 ERECTION OF PRECAST CONCRETE WALL PANELS A. General: Installation of architectural precast concrete wall panels shall be performed by the Fabricator or a competent Erection Contractor who has experience in the erection of this type of material. Members shall be lifted by means of suitable lifting devices at points provided by the Fabricator. Erection procedures, temporary shoring and bracing, and inducted loads during erection shall comply with Manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Installer shall furnish all necessary hoisting equipment. 03450 - 8 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. Alignment: Members shall be properly aligned and leveled as required by the approved erection drawings. Erect units level, plumb, square and true within allowable tolerances. Variations between adjacent members shall be reasonably leveled out by jacking, loading, or any other feasible method as recommended by the Manufacturer and acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. C. Immediately after erection and alignment of the precast members, dry pack horizontal joints between precast wall panels and their supporting structure. Engineer's observation of connections is required prior to covering. D. Field Welding: Field welding shall be done by qualified welders, using equipment and materials compatible to the base metal. Methods shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1, D1.4, and D12.1. Securely fasten units in place by welding, locations and lengths as specified in the approved erection drawings. E. Grouting: Grout all joints at bearing locations of wall panels to provide continuous support, minimum 1" thick. 3.04 PANEL JOINT ALIGNMENT A. Members shall be properly aligned and leveled as required by the approved erection drawings. B. Maintain the following joint tolerances for erected precast concrete units: 1. Face Width of Joint: +/- 3/16". 2. Step in Face: Maximum 1/4". 3. Jog in Alignment of Edges: Maximum 1/4". 3.05 ANCHORAGE A. All units shall be secured to adjacent materials to prevent any movement of the units during setting. Field anchor bolts, stay bolts, ties, braces, rods, etc. required for fixing the units in place shall be furnished by this contractor. Drawings showing recommended anchorage plan shall be furnished by the precast concrete manufacturer. B. Securely fasten units in place by welding. Touch-up field welds. C. Apply mastic over all connections below finish grade. 3.06 JOINT TREATMENT A. Furnish and install joint materials and sealants, unless furnished by Section 07900. B. All vertical and horizontal joints between wall panels shall be caulked where exposed to view in the finished project. 3.07 CLEANING AND APPLICATION OF SEALER A. Clean weld marks or other marks, debris or dirt from exposed surfaces of units. Execute a final cleandown and remove dirt and stains that are a direct result of the erection process. B. Water Repellent Sealer: Apply two (2) coats of sealer, unless factory applied. 3.08 DAMAGE AND REPAIR A. Minor cracking, chips, and spalls less than 1/4" in any dimension which occur during transit, delivery, handling, storage, and installation will be permitted if they are not detrimental to the final appearance, in the sole opinion of the Architect. No unsightly imperfections or structural defects will be permitted unless satisfactorily repaired. B. Contractor shall ensure that due care is exercised by other trades and shall be responsible for any subsequent damage or soiling to the precast concrete units from these sources. END OF SECTION DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. 04100 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 04100 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install mortar, with integral water repellent, and grout materials for new concrete block masonry units. B. Furnish and install structural grout materials for new architectural precast concrete wall panels, unless furnished by others. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete. 3. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry. 4. Section 05120, Structural Steel: Non-shrink Structural Grout. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM, American Society of Testing and Materials. 2. ASTM C144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 3. ASTM C150, Portland Cement. 4. ASTM C207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 5. ASTM C270, Mortar Mix. 6. ASTM C476, Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry. 7. ASTM E514, Moisture Resistance in Masonry Assemblies. 8. PCA, current edition. 9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and specifications for each type of mortar specified, including certification that each type complies with the specifications. B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full range of mortar colors for selection by the Architect. C. Sample Panel: Refer to Section 04220 for sample panel requirements. 1.04 TESTING A. Inspection and testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Architect, conforming to ASTM E149, E514 and C270. Testing fees shall be paid as specified in the General and Supplementary Conditions. Test samples shall be taken at random to provide sampling over the course of work. Materials not conforming to these specifications shall be removed from the job and replaced. 1. Refer to Section 04220 for testing requirements. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature of mortar and grout between 70° F and 100° F. 04100 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. Contractor shall use only one (1) type mortar to ensure uniform color. Masonry cement is not permitted. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, natural. 1. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Use white and/or gray, as determined by mortar analysis and replication mix design. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S for new construction. 1. Restoration and Preservation Projects: ASTM C207, Type N, or as required by mortar analysis. C. Aggregate Sand: ASTM C144. 1. Restoration and Preservation Projects: Select source to match existing mortar to the extent possible. D. Coarse Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404, less than 3/8". E. Water: ASTM C270, clean and suitable for domestic consumption. F. Mortar Coloring: Integral mortar color by Solomon Colors, Springfield, IL, (800) 624-0261, or equal. 1. Architect to select color from manufacturer's full line of standard mortar colors. G. Admixtures: Pozzolan with approval; calcium chloride not permitted. H. Integral Water Repellent: Integral polymeric-based water repellent admixture, conforming to ASTM E514 and achieving an E (Excellent) rating, RainBlok for Mortar by ACM Chemistries, Inc., Norcross, GA, (877) 226-1766, or approved equal. 1. Integral water repellent shall be used in all exterior brick, concrete unit and/or stone masonry construction. 2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. Mortar Mixes for Structural Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S mortar with hydrated lime for all new masonry construction. Minimum compressive strength of 1,800 psi at 28 days, or as indicated on the Structural Drawings: 1. 1 part Portland Cement, Type 1. 2. 1/4 to 1/2 part hydrated lime. 3. 2-1/4 to 3-1/2 parts damp, loose sand. 4. Integral water repellent. 5. Mortar coloring. B. Mortar Mixes for Concrete Unit Masonry Veneer: ASTM C270, Type N mortar with hydrated lime for all new veneer masonry construction. Minimum compressive strength of 750 psi at 28 days, or as indicated on the Structural Drawings: C. Masonry Grout Mix: Minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days: 1. 1 part Portland cement, Type 1. 2. 2-1/4 to 3 parts damp, loose sand. 3. 1 to 2 parts coarse aggregate. 4. Pozzolan as per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Air entrainment shall be not more than 5% by volume. D. Mixtures may change as per manufacturer's recommendations to meet requirements. E. Non-Shrink Structural Grout: Refer to Section 05120. 04100 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Masonry installer shall examine the areas and conditions under which masonry is to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the masonry installer. 3.02 BATCH CONTROL A. Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight such that the required proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. B. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of five (5) minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Do not use mortar which has begun to set or if more than 2-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. Retemper mortar during 2-1/2 hour period as required to restore workability. 1. Ensure addition of integral water repellent for all exterior masonry construction, proportioned as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Colored Mortar: If colored mortar is specified in paragraph 2.01 above, mortar color shall be pre- blended, not field mixed. D. Use mortar within two (2) hours of mixing at temperatures over 80° F, and 2-1/2 hours at temperatures under 50° F. 3.03 JOINTS A. General: Lay coursed modular units with 3/8" joints, unless otherwise indicated, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. B. Bond Pattern and Joint Type: Refer to Section 04220. C. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. D. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of work. E. Point out or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work. F. Clean soiled surfaces using a non-acidic solution which will not harm adjacent surfaces. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. END OF SECTION 04220 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 04220 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install concrete unit masonry, in conjunction with architectural precast concrete wall panels, with integral water repellent, including units and special shapes, mortar, ties, anchors and accessories. B. Furnish and install concrete unit masonry horizontal joint and vertical reinforcing. C. Furnish and install flexible masonry flashings, cavity filter fabric, cavity filler, and create weepholes in composite wall construction. D. Install all bolts, nailing blocks, inserts, door frames, steel lintels, vents, conduits and other related work furnished by others to be built into concrete unit masonry. E. Furnish and install masonry grout for grouted cells of concrete unit masonry. F. Furnish test specimens and samples of materials to be built into work. G. Clean new and/or existing concrete unit masonry and remove surplus material and waste. H. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete. 3. Section 04100, Mortar. 4. Section 05120, Structural Steel. 5. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim. 6. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 7. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 8. Section 08331, Steel Sectional Overhead Doors. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM C90, Standard Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 2. ASTM C150, Portland Cement. 3. ASTM E514, Moisture Resistance in Masonry Assemblies. 4. ANSI A-41.1, Building Code Requirements for Masonry. 5. ACI 530.1, Standard Specification for Tolerances. 6. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) "Specification for the Design and Construction of Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry". 7. Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute. 8. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. 1.03 TESTING A. Test reports for each type of concrete masonry unit shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Testing is to be performed by an independent testing laboratory, in accordance with ASTM C140-63T and E514. Reports shall include the following: 1. Compressive strength. 2. Water absorption. 3. Complete identification of units, including size, grade and type. 04220 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. If results of test and/or inspections do not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents or are otherwise unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall proceed as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Additional costs resulting because of retesting, load testing, removal and replacement of masonry, damage to the work of other trades shall be borne by the Contractor. C. Structural Engineer shall have the right to order tests of any material entering into the masonry work or any other tests deemed necessary to determine whether materials and methods in use are such as to produce work of necessary quality, to order test under load of any portion of completed structure when conditions have been such as to leave doubt as to adequacy of the structure to serve purposes for which it is intended and to order change in proportions or material at Contractor's expense, if work of required quality cannot be obtained with materials and/or proportions furnished by the Contractor. D. Materials or proportions of materials entering into masonry walls shall not be changed, unless approved by the Structural Engineer. Materials from any new source or changes in proportions shall be subject to all required tests, which shall be made at the Contractor's expense. E. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Cooperate and provide every assistance to facilitate inspection and testing. 2. Furnish mix designs for mortar and grout prior to commencement of work, submit to the Architect mix designs and test results for each type of grout, all with materials and in proportions proposed to be used in the actual construction. No work shall commence until the mix designs have been reviewed and approved by the Structural Engineer. 3. Furnish materials and labor required to make and handle test specimens at the project site under proposed job conditions. 4. Furnish temporary facilities for field-cured specimens. 5. Advise testing agency sufficiently in advance of operation to allow for completion of quality tests. 1.04 CERTIFICATION A. Prior to delivery, furnish Architect with certificates, letters or test reports attesting compliance with the applicable specifications for the following: 1. Masonry units. 2. Mortar and grout materials. 3. Reinforcing steel. B. Prior to installation, provide Architect with certificates or other documentation attesting to date of block casting. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit samples of each specified masonry unit for approval before delivery to the site, unless only standard, plain concrete unit masonry is used. Samples shall include shapes, sizes and kinds in sufficient number to show full range of color and texture of each type of masonry unit specified. Final approval shall be by the Architect. B. Sample Panel: None required. C. Certificates: Submit certificates with test data or other supporting documentation attesting to test results and date of block casting, as specified above. D. Grout and Mortar Mixes: Submit proposed grout and mortar mix designs and methods. E. Masonry Preconstruction Prism Testing Results: 1. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, per ASTM C1314. 2. Current Prism Test: Prisms shall be ungrouted with only face shell bedding and capping. 3. Include mortar and grout proportions used in test specimens. 4. One set of five (5) prisms of each type of unit and each type of masonry assemblage shall be built and tested using the materials and proportions specified for the project. The average of the prisms shall exceed the specified 28-day strength (f’m). As an alternate, a prism test record consisting of at least 30 prism tests may be submitted to substantiate 04220 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents f’m. These prisms shall have been constructed under the observations of and have been constructed with similar materials to these specified for this Project. The average compressive strength of these tests shall exceed 1.33 f’m. 1.06 TESTING OF MORTAR AND GROUT A. Mortar: Make one (1) set of three (3) 2" x 4" cylinders for each type of mortar each day that mortar is laid. Break one (1) cylinder at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days. 1. Spread mortar on masonry units between 1/2" and 3/4" thick and allow to stand one (1) minute. 2. Remove mortar and place it in a 2" x 4" cylinder in two (2) layers, compressing mortar into cylinder using a flat-end stick or fingers. 3. Lightly tap mold on opposite sides, level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to laboratory. 4. Contractor’s Option: Contractor may substitute a prism test of in-place concrete unit masonry construction, in lieu of specified mortar testing, upon prior approval of the Architect/Engineer and Owner. B. Grout: Make one (1) set of three (3) 3" x 3" x 6" high specimens for each type of grout and type of wall where used each day grout is poured. Break one (1) specimen at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days. 1. On a flat non-absorbent base, form a space 3" x 3" x 6" high, using masonry units having same moisture condition as those being laid. 2. Line the space with permeable paper or porous separator so that water may pass through the liner into masonry units. 3. Thoroughly mix the grout to obtain fully representative mix and place into molds in two (2) layers. Puddle each layer with 1" x 2" stick to eliminate air bubbles. 4. Level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to the laboratory. C. After 48-hour set, remove molds, cap the specimens and place them in fog room until tested in damp condition, in accordance with ASTM C31. D. Test in accordance with ASTM C39. From each set of cylinders, break one (1) at seven (7) days and two (2) at 28 days. E. Reports shall include location and description of wall, dates, weather conditions, temperature of mortar and grout, description of mortar and grout mixes, description of masonry prisms, breaking stresses and nature of break. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site on platforms or pallets. Keep masonry units completely covered and free from frost, ice and snow. Handle masonry units carefully to avoid chipping, breakage, contact with soil or contaminating materials. Protect steel materials from moisture and keep free from rust or scale. Store mortar materials in dry place. Damaged materials shall not be used. B. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. Provide such protection without damaging completed work. C. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50° F prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of masonry work. B. During freezing or near-freezing weather, provide adequate equipment or cover to maintain a minimum temperature of 50° F and to protect masonry work completed or in progress. C. Protect partially completed masonry against weather when work is not in progress by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane. Extend membrane at least 2' down both 04220 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents sides of walls and anchor securely in place. D. Walls which may be exposed to high winds during erection shall be adequately braced until permanent support is provided at floor or roof level immediately above the story under construc- tion. E. Cold Weather Masonry Installation: 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. 2. Do not use antifreeze compounds, calcium chloride or substances containing calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 3. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. 4. Protect masonry being placed from wind with enclosures or shields when air temperature is below 32° F. 5. Do not heat water above 106° F. 6. When mortar or grout materials have been combined, temperature of the mixture shall not be less than 50° F nor more than 100° F. 7. Masonry materials shall be preconditioned and completed masonry protected as follows: a. When air temperature is below 40° F and above 32° F, heat mixing water. Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by means of waterproof covers. b. When air temperature is below 32° F and above 20° F, heat both sand and mixing water. Maintain a temperature of at least 40° F on both sides of walls by means of suitable covers or enclosures for 24 hours. c. When air temperature is 20° F and below, heat sand, mixing water and block and provide heated enclosures. A temperature of at least 40° F shall be maintained within enclosures for 48 hours. d. Periods required for protection and maintenance of specified temperatures may be reduced to 1/2 of those specified herein before if Type III Portland cement is used with the Engineer's approval. F. Hot Weather Masonry Installation: 1. During very hot weather and drying wind, the Architect may order very light fog spray of mortar bedding areas several times during the first 24 hours to prevent premature drying of mortar. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Plain Concrete Unit Masonry: ASTM C90, Grade N, minimum 1,900 psi light-weight, load-bearing units. 1. Size: Nominal 8" high x 16" long face dimension x 4" deep units, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Color: Natural. 3. Integral Water Repellent: Integral polymeric-based water repellent admixture, conforming to ASTM E514 and achieving an E (Excellent) rating, RainBlok by ACM Chemistries, Inc., Norcross, GA, (877) 226-1766, or approved equal. 4. Appearance: Units shall have smooth, dense, exposed surfaces free of cracks, chips or deleterious matter. B. Bond Beam Units: All bond beam units shall have knockout webs and open bottoms, except at masonry lintels over openings. Match unit sizes and appearances specified in paragraph 2.01. C. Lintel Units: All lintel units shall have solid bottoms, cast as U-shaped units in lengths as required for project conditions. Match unit sizes and appearances specified in paragraph 2.01. D. Tolerances: No overall dimension of width, height or length shall vary by more than 1/8" from the specified standard dimension. 04220 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents E. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Robinson Block Co., Colorado Springs, CO, (719) 390-5477, (800) 284-8037. 2. Basalite Concrete Products LLC, Denver, CO, (303) 292-2345. 3. Valley Block Co., Loveland, CO, (970) 667-4480. 4. Powers Masonry Supply, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 484-1292. 5. Trenwyth by Superlite Block, Phoenix, AZ, (800) 331-9823. 6. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, appearance, quality, performance and range of selection, including matching the selected product(s) specified above in the sole opinion of the Architect, are acceptable. 2.02 REINFORCING STEEL, ANCHORS AND TIES A. General: Corrosion-resistant metal meeting or exceeding applicable standards ASTM A153 and ASTM A116. B. Reinforcing Steel: Refer to Section 03200. C. Veneer and Horizontal Reinforcing Types: 1. Wire Mesh: Minimum 30-gage plain wire. Mesh shall be 1/2" width, 1" (25mm) less than width of masonry. 2. Truss- or Ladder-Type for Single Wythe Masonry: Prefabricated welded wire units, 2" wide x not less than 10'-0" long for 4" deep units, with matching corner and tee units. Wire shall be 9-gage, with single pair of deformed side rods and continuous plain diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. 3. Composite Wall Construction: Two-component, composite wall system consisting of truss type reinforcing specified above, with truss double eyes welded to trusses at 16" o.c. and separate double hook tabs for veneer wythe. D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc., Arlington Heights, IL, and distributed locally at Denver, CO, (303) 321- 1836. 2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc., Chicago, IL, (800) 621-4140. 3. Manufacturers providing products of same performance and function are acceptable. 2.03 MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Flexible Masonry Flashings: Non-reinforced homogenous, waterproof elastomeric sheeting, 20 mil minimum thickness. 1. Tensile Strength: 2200 psi minimum, ASTM D412. 2. Elongation: 250% minimum, ASTM D412. 3. Puncture Resistance: 200 lbs. minimum. 4. Flashing shall retain flexibility to a temperature of -20° F minimum. 5. Materials and adhesive shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. 6. Approved Manufacturer: Vi-Seal Plastic Flashing by AFCO Products, Inc., Somerville, MA, (800) 397-2687, or approved equal. B. Control Joints: Non-asphaltic-type foam backer rod by Celotex or equal. Thicknesses as shown on the Drawings. C. Weeps: Cotton sash cord or other prefabricated material intended to create weeps. 2.04 SEALER A. Integral Water Repellent: Specified in paragraph 2.01 above. 04220 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION, COORDINATION AND WORKMANSHIP A. Ensure items built-in by other trades for this work are properly located and sized. B. Establish all lines, levels and coursing. Protect from disturbance. Place concrete unit masonry in accordance with lines and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness. D. Chases and recesses shall be built in and not cut in. Provide not less than 16" of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. E. Unfinished masonry walls shall be stepped back for joining with new work. Do not tooth. F. Cutting and fitting of masonry, including that required to accommodate the work of other Sections, shall be done by masonry mechanics with masonry saws. 3.02 CURING OF MASONRY UNITS A. General: Concrete masonry units shall be cured for minimum of 28 days from the date of casting before being delivered to the site and installed in masonry walls. Consult with Rocky Mountain Masonry Institute as necessary. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF MASONRY FLASHINGS A. General: Install masonry flashings in locations specified herein as shown on the Drawings. Place flashings, filter fabric and other cavity drainage materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and as detailed on the Drawings. B. Cavity Filter Fabric and Drainage Course: Drape cavity filter fabric above weep level in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. Place cavity filler in filter fabric. C. Place weep holes through bottom course of single wythe veneer, single wythe structural, composite or cavity wall masonry construction as shown on the Drawings, but in no case to exceed 48" o.c. Form weep holes with specified cotton sash cord or other approved material, spaced as specified. Coordinate with Architect in the field as necessary. D. Composite Wall Construction: Extend flashings through concrete block masonry, roll up face of precast concrete back-up construction minimum 6" and bed into mortar joint of concrete block as shown on the Drawings. Lap end joints minimum 6" and seal watertight. Use flashing manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. Refer to Section 04100, Mortar, for installation and workmanship requirements for mortar and grout mixes. B. Ensure that concrete masonry units have properly cured prior to installation, as specified in 3.02 above. C. Masonry Veneer Composite Wall Reinforcement: Install ladder- or truss-type horizontal reinforcing and 2-piece composite adjustable tab reinforcing as specified in paragraph 3.07 below. D. Lay, level and align corner units first. Lay concrete unit masonry in running bond, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein. Course one (1) block unit and mortar joint to equal 8" vertically. Lay external and internal courses as shown on the Drawings. E. Lay first course of concrete unit masonry in full bed of mortar, except at locations of filled cores. Lay subsequent courses in face-shell mortar bedding properly jointed with other work. Fully mortar webs around each core to be grouted. Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections. F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper power tools to provide straight, true and unchipped edges. 04220 - 7 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents G. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. H. Where knock-out bond beams are specified, place wire mesh in joints below bond beam to stop flow of grout, except at reinforced vertical cells. I. Remove excess mortar and projections. Take care to prevent breaking block corners. Clean excess mortar from cores to be grouted. J. Tolerances: Maximum variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit: 1/8". K. Tooling and Joints: Refer to paragraph 3.06. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS A. Head joints shall be well buttered for thickness equal to face shell of unit and shall be shoved tightly so that mortar bonds well to both units. Do not slush head joints. B. Hollow Concrete Masonry Units: Lay with full mortar coverage over horizontal and vertical face shells. C. Starting Joint: Provide full mortar coverage on bed, except that area where grout occurs shall be kept free from mortar. D. Mortar protrusions extending more than 3/8" into cells or cavities to be reinforced and/or filled, or into air space for veneer masonry, shall be removed. E. Joint width shall be 3/8", unless otherwise shown. F. Non-Bearing Walls: Provide masonry bond at all corners. Except at bonded corners, walls shall be tied together with strips of wire mesh placed not more than 16" o.c. vertically. 3.06 TOOLING A. Exposed Joints: Tool joints as scheduled. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where required. 1. Interior Face of Exterior Walls: Tooled concave joints. B. Concealed Joints: Cut joints flush, unless otherwise shown. C. Joints to be covered with paint shall be filled flush and then sacked to produce dense surface without sheen. D. Joints which are not tight at the time of tooling shall be raked out, pointed and then tooled. E. Weeps: When mortar has reached proper consistency, remove cotton sash cord material to form smooth, dense weep holes. 3.07 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Reinforce all walls with continuous ladder- or truss-type horizontal joint reinforcement, unless specifically shown otherwise. Provide special shapes where shown on the Drawings. Lap reinforcement minimum 6" at splices. B. At each level, place reinforcement in bed joint between first and second course and then at regular intervals not exceeding 16" o.c. vertically. C. Place reinforcement so that longitudinal wires are located over face-shell mortar beds and are fully embedded in mortar for their entire length with minimum mortar cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. D. Composite Wall Reinforcing with Adjustable Tabs: Place truss reinforcing in structural concrete unit masonry wythe as specified above, and so that welded eyes project into wall cavity. Install double hook tabs in veneer wythe, interlocked in eyes. Ensure free vertical movement of tabs. 1. Composite Wall Veneer Course: Install ladder- or truss-type horizontal reinforcing in veneer course at 16" o.c., staggered 8" from adjustable structural wall reinforcing. E. Unless otherwise shown, provide reinforcement in first and second bed joints immediately above and below openings or recesses in walls. Reinforcement shall extend minimum 24" beyond end of sills or lintels or to end of panel if distance to end of panel is less than 24". F. Use only prefabricated "L" and "T" units at corners and intersections, respectively. 04220 - 8 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents G. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcement, unless shown on the Drawings. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCING BARS A. Reinforcing bars shall be straight, except for bends around corners and where bends or hooks are detailed. Bars partially embedded in masonry shall not be field-bent, except as shown on the Drawings or specifically permitted by the Structural Engineer. B. Bars shall be free of loose rust, mud, oil or other coatings that would destroy or reduce bond. C. Splices shall be made only at locations shown on the Drawings or where specifically permitted by the Structural Engineer. Bars shall be lapped as specified in the Structural Drawings and be separated by 1 bar diameter or wired together. D. Reinforcement shall be accurately placed into position indicated on the Drawings using reinforcing bar positioners and secured rigidly against displacement within a tolerance of 1/4". E. Vertical reinforcing shall have a minimum clearance of 1/2" from masonry and not less than 1 bar diameter between bars. F. Vertical reinforcing shall be placed in masonry cores as shown or specified on the Drawings, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. Load-bearing masonry walls, reinforcing bars spaced as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Cores in jambs of all door and window openings in load-bearing walls. 3. Cores below bearing of structural members, as indicated on the Drawings and specified in paragraph 3.01 above. G. Horizontal bars shall be placed in continuous masonry courses, consisting of bond-beam or through- block units and shall be solidly grouted in place. H. When foundation dowel does not line up with a vertical unit core, it shall not be sloped more than 1 horizontal in 6 vertical. Dowel shall be grouted into core in vertical alignment, even though it is in an adjacent cell to vertical wall reinforcing. 3.09 GROUTING OF MASONRY UNITS A. General: Grout cells of hollow concrete unit masonry where indicated on the Drawings or required by project conditions, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. All vertical cells to be reinforced as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. 2. All horizontal cells of bond beam or lintel beam units as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. 3. Shear Walls: All vertical cells in exterior and/or interior shear walls shall be grouted solid, whether reinforced or not. B. When laying masonry units, extreme care shall be taken to prevent excess mortar from squeezing out and falling into air space or cells to be grouted or sand-filled. Mortar which projects more than 3/8" into grout space shall be removed. C. Grout shall be puddled or vibrated in place. D. To control area to be grouted, use metal lath or masonry dam. Do not use paper or wood. E. Pour grout into horizontal members at maximum 48" o.c. F. Grouting of beams over openings shall be done in one (1) continuous operation. G. Vertical cells containing reinforcement and cells of walls scheduled to be filled shall be grouted solidly. Pours shall be stopped 1-1/2" below top of course, except at top of wall, to form a key at pour joints. Provide clean-out openings at bottom of each pour for inspection. H. Grouting Masonry of Hollow Units: Walls shall be erected and grouted in lifts not higher than 8'. Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment and shall have clear unobstructed cell area of at least 2" x 3". I. Grout Spaces Less Than 2" in Width: Walls shall be grouted in heights of less than 8" or six (6) times the grout joint thickness, whichever is less. Pour grout up to 1" from top of lower wythe. One (1) wythe of wall shall be laid up higher than the other, but not more than 16". Grout joint shall be at least 1" wide and shall be filled solidly with grout. 04220 - 9 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents J. Grout Spaces 2" or More in Width: Grout space must be cleaned and inspected before grouting. Wall shall be grouted in heights of 2' or less for spaces less than 4" wide and in heights of 4' or less for spaces 4" or wider. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF LINTELS A. General: Install loose lintels where shown on the Structural Drawings or required for a complete installation. B. Masonry Lintels: Provide masonry unit lintels where shown and whenever openings of more than 12" but less than 30" are shown without steel or other lintels. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels. 1. Unless otherwise shown, provide one (1) #5 reinforcing bar for each 4" of wall thickness. Fill lintel units solidly with grout. 2. Refer to the Structural Drawings for loose lintel schedule. C. Bearing: Unless otherwise shown, provide minimum bearing of 6" for openings less than 6'-0" wide and 8" for wider openings. D. Place control joint materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, recessed in joint for caulking as specified in Section 07900. 3.11 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Locate vertical control, expansion and isolation joints in concrete unit masonry as shown on the Drawings. Joints shall be continuous through depth of the masonry work, unless otherwise detailed. B. Maintain control joint voids clear of mortar, grout and debris. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking and sealants. C. Control Joint Spacing: Refer to the Drawings for joint locations. If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints maximum 20'-0" o.c. for unbroken lengths of concrete unit masonry, except as specified herein: 1. Locate joints at points of natural weakness in supporting structure, at wall openings and at control joints located in the floor slab when walls are supported on the slab. 2. Wall Openings: Where doors, windows, louvers or other wall openings in masonry occur, control joints shall be placed on one (1) side of openings less than 6'-0" wide, on both (2) sides of openings 6'-0" wide or greater, or at locations and spacings shown on the Drawings, but in no case less than 12'-0" o.c. 3. External Corners: Place control joints at maximum 4'-0" to 6'-0" from all bonded external corners. 4. Internal Corners: Form cold isolation joints at all internal corners. 5. Masonry Veneer: Provide at least one (1) control joint in each wall plane. 3.12 BUILT-IN WORK A. As work progresses, build-in hollow metal frames, signage, electrical and mechanical accessories, anchor bolts, plates, specialties and other items supplied by others. Place items plumb and true to line. 3.13 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit sleeves and other items as required. Cooperate fully with other Sections to ensure correct size, shape and location. B. Obtain Architect's approval prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on the Drawings or which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work. 04220 - 10 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. General: All new and/or existing concrete unit masonry, where exposed to view in the completed work, shall be thoroughly cleaned upon completion of the work. B. Adhere to the following procedures for cleaning concrete unit masonry. Never clean concrete unit masonry before mortar has set, minimum 14 days. 1. Dry clean wall with wood paddles or scrapers, removing large particles of mortar. 2. Presoak wall with clean water, scrub with a solution of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate and 1/3 cup household detergent to one gallon of water. Scrub with a stiff fiber brush only. 3. Thoroughly rinse with clean, low-pressure water immediately after scrubbing to remove all cleaning solution, dirt, and mortar crumbs. Water pressure shall not exceed 500 psi. C. Clean soiled surfaces exposed to view using a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. Leave surfaces prepared for further sealers or coatings, if specified. D. Remove and replace any chipped or broken concrete masonry units. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of masonry work. Point or replace defective mortar to match adjacent work. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Installation of masonry units, mortar and grout, special curing and workmanship of joints shall be in accordance with the standards approved in the sample panel. B. All concrete unit masonry units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that may interfere with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength or performance of the construction. C. Where masonry units are to be exposed in the completed construction, the face or faces that are exposed shall be free of chips, cracks or other imperfections to the satisfaction of the Architect, except that chips not larger than 1/4" will be considered acceptable. D. Contractor shall promptly remove any rejected masonry units or portions of the work and replace to match the quality of the approved sample panel. E. Special Inspection: None required. END OF SECTION DIVISION 5 - METALS Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. 05120 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish, fabricate and erect all structural steel framing, including columns, girders, beams, purlins, bridging, bracing and other framing members. B. Furnish and fabricate items to be embedded in concrete or masonry such as anchor bolts, angles or plates for attachment of structural steel and other work, except embedded items for attachment of precast concrete, which will be furnished by the precast manufacturer for installation by the General Contractor. C. Furnish, fabricate and install miscellaneous non-structural steel items, such as pipe bollards, unless furnished by Section 05999 or arranged for otherwise. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01200, Project Meetings: Pre-installation conferences. 2. Section 01410, Testing. 3. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 4. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcing. 5. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 6. Section 05200, Steel Joists and Joist Girders. 7. Section 05300, Metal Decking. 8. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals. 9. Section 09900, Painting. 1.02 RELATED WORK FURNISHED BY OTHERS A. Embedded steel items for attachment of precast concrete wall panels will be furnished by the precast fabricator and installed by the Contractor. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. AISC: Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. 2. AISC: Manual of Steel Construction. 3. AISC: Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, current edition, as amended below. a. Section 3.1: Revise the second paragraph to read: "The Contract Documents shall clearly show the work that is to be performed and shall give the following information with sufficient dimensions to accurately convey the quantity and nature of the structural steel to be fabricated." b. Section 3.2: Replace the entire section with the following: "Requirements for structural steel including dimensions, arrangement and details shall be shown in the overall contract document package. Fabricator shall be responsible for incorporating all such information from structural, architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings, as well as those of other disciplines." c. Section 3.5: Delete all text after the first sentence. 05120 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents d. Section 3.6: Replace the text of the entire section with the following: "When the fast-track project delivery system is selected, release of structural drawings shall constitute release for construction only, if specifically noted on the drawing. Drawings that indicate "not for construction" shall not be used for detailing." e. Section 4.2: 3rd paragraph: Eliminate the following: "When requested to do so by the Owner's Designated Representative for Design". f. Section 4.4: Revise 2nd sentence to read the following: "These drawings shall be returned in accordance with the schedule defined in Division 1 of the project specification. In the absence of this requirement, the Owner's Designated Representative for Design shall return submittals within 14 days of receipt from the Owner's Designated Representative for Design for Construction." g. Section 6.4.4: Page 33: Revise statement "For the purpose of inspection, camber shall be measured in the fabricator's shop in the unstressed condition", to read "camber specified on the drawings is intended to be camber at the time of erection with decking placed prior to placing concrete. Owner's Designated Representative for Construction shall submit methods for controlling deflections on beams with inadequate camber prior to placing concrete on deck." h. Section 6.5.3: Page 38: Revise definition to read "two mils" (0.05 mm). i. Section 7.10.3, Page 47: Refer to the design criteria in the general notes on the drawings for definition of the complete lateral load resisting system for the steel frame. The Contractor shall notify the Erector in accordance with Section 7.10 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges of all bracing requirements beyond those required to support the bare steel frame. 4. AISC: Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts Approved by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints of the Engineering Foundation. 5. AWS: Code for Welding in Building Construction. 6. ASTM A36: Structural Steel. 7. ASTM A307: Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners. 8. ASTM A325: High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 9. ASTM A500-B: Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Structural Steel. 10. ASTM A572-50: High-Strength, Low-Alloy Columbium Vanadium Structural Steel. 11. FS TT-P-31: Iron Oxide, Ready Mix, red and brown. 12. ASTM A525: Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dipped Process. 13. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication of structural steel for projects of similar size and complexity. C. Welding Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by welders or welding operators currently certified in accordance with the AWS Code to perform the type of welding involved. 1. All welders shall have evidence of current certification. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Certified Test Reports: Furnish, prior to fabrication, certified mill test reports covering physical and chemical tests of structural steel and high-strength bolts. B. Specifications: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions showing compliance with the specifications for filler metal for welding, shop paint and grout. C. Calibration Data: Submit procedure for calibration of wrenches and installation of high-strength bolts for Engineer's approval. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including job standards for shop and field connections, anchor bolt and base plate plans, erection drawings for framing, and detail drawings of all structural members. 1. Erection drawings shall show all necessary erection details, location, type and size of all bolts and welds, clearly distinguishing between shop and field bolts and welds. 05120 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents E. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections. 1.05 TESTING A. Shop Inspection and Testing: For fabrication shops which participate in the AISC Certification Program and are designated an AISC Certified Plant, Category STD (Standard for Steel Building Structures), the following required special inspections and tests may be performed by the fabricators designated in-house inspector in lieu of the independent special inspector. 1. Testing agency shall obtain copies of certifications of all welders and conduct shop inspections and tests during fabrication of structural steel. Reports shall include: welder's certifications, type of test, type and location of all defects and measures taken to correct defects, statement of final approval of all welding and bolting of shop connections and other data and information pertinent to proper completion of shop connections. 2. Visually inspect members for cracks, bends, warps, kinks, and ASTM identification. Visually compare fabricated members and assemblies with approved shop drawings. Report exceptions and deviations. 3. Inspect and test welding and bolting during fabrication in accordance with referenced specifications and as follows: 4. Shop Welding: Visually inspect all welds. Check size, length, pinholes, undercut and overlap. a. Inspect fillet welds as follows: 1) Single-pass fillet welds: Visually inspect. 2) Multiple-pass fillet welds: Visually inspect. b. Inspect groove welds as follows: 1) Partial penetration welds: Visually inspect. 2) Full penetration welds: 100% of welds using ultrasonic testing method. c. Additional testing: Additional testing by Owner's testing agency at Contractors expense will be required if more than 10% of the tested welds are rejected, then test an additional 10% of such welds using the same testing method. Repeat this 10% additional testing process until the rejection rate drops below in 10%. 5. ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts: Inspect and test in accordance with "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". When "slip-critical" (SC) bolts are to be installed, verify certification of fabricators tension measuring device used to determine bolt tension. Verify that pre-installation tests and installation procedures meet ASTM requirements. Inspect 100% of slip critical connections. 6. Camber: Measure four randomly selected beams requiring camber, for each level of structure. Measure camber 24 hours after cambering operation and report camber by beam mark. 7. Reporting: Special Inspector (or Fabricator's designated in-house inspector) shall provide written reports indentifying tests and inspections performed and attesting to the acceptance of the affected work. Include reports of non-conforming work along with acceptable corrective work. B. Field Inspection and Testing: 1. Field Assembly: Inspect steel frame to verify compliance with details shown on approved drawings including, but not limited to: bracing, stiffening, member locations and proper application of joint details at connections. 2. Field Welding: Inspect and test during erection in accordance with AWS Code and as follows: a. Obtain copies of welders' certifications and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and location of all defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies. b. Perform visual inspection of all welds. Check for size, length, pinholes, undercut and overlap. Test suspected defects using magnetic particle method for fillet 05120 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents welds and methods below for groove welds. c. Inspect fillet welds as follows: 1) Single-pass fillet welds: Visually inspect. 2) Multiple-pass fillet welds: Visually inspect. d. Inspect groove welds as follows: 1) Partial Penetration welds: Visually inspect. 2) Full penetration welds: 100% of welds using ultrasonic testing method. e. Additional testing: Additional testing by Owners testing agency at Contractors expense will be required if more than 10% of the tested welds are rejected, then test an additional 10% of such welds using the same testing methods. Repeat this 10% additional testing process unit the rejection rate drops below one in ten. 3. High-Strength Bolted Connections: Inspect and test in accordance with HS bolting specification and as follows. a. Confirm accuracy of Contractor's Tension Calibration as noted above. b. Inspect as noted in "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". c. Where "slip-critical" (SC) bolts are used, verify that erector is performing required pre-shift calibrations and tests. Inspect installed SC bolts by the "arbitration inspection" method, except, if any bolt fails, all bolts in that connection shall be checked and tightened, if necessary, by the erector and resubmitted. Inspect 10% of bolts, but not less than two, in each SC connection. d. Visually inspect all bolts for proper installation. e. Cost of retests on bolts and connections that fail shall be borne by Contractor. f. Alternative design tension control bolts. Visually inspect after installation per AISC requirements. Pre-test a representative sample of (5) bolts of each diameter, length, etc., at the jobsite in a device capable of indicating bolt tension. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete operations. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices. B. Handle members in a manner to prevent damage, distortion or abrasion of shop paint. Repair or replace damaged materials, members or structures as directed by the Architect/Engineer. C. Storage of Structural Steel: Structural steel members stored at the project site shall be above ground on platforms, skids or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Protect steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL SHAPES A. Wide Flange Rolled Shapes and WT Sections: Comply with ASTM A992, 50 ksi. B. Other Rolled Steel Shapes, Channels and Angles: Comply with ASTM A572-50, 50 ksi. C. Structural Tubular Steel: Square, cold-rolled steel tubing, fully welded constructions. Comply with ASTM A500, Grade B, 46 ksi. D. Structural Steel Pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, Grade B, 46 ksi. E. Solid Steel Bars and Plates: Comply with ASTM A36, 36 ksi. 05120 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.02 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: Regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A. B. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagonal structural bolts and nuts and hardened washers complying with ASTM A325, ASTM F1852 or ASTM A490. C. Electrodes for manual shielded and metal arc welding shall be covered mild steel electrodes conforming to the AWS Code and ASTM A233, Series E-60 and E-70. D. Bare electrodes and granular flux for submerged arc welding shall conform to the AWS Code and ASTM A588, Series F-60 and F-70. 2.03 HEADED STUD-TYPE SHEAR CONNECTORS A. Provide cold-finished carbon steel connectors conforming to ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020, with dimensions complying with AISC Specifications. 2.04 FABRICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL A. General: Structural steel shall be detailed and fabricated in accordance with the referenced codes, AISC Specifications and standards and in compliance with the final approved shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members as shown. B. Shop-fabricate and assemble sections in largest practical components for delivery and erection on the site. Extent of shop assembly shall be as approved in the shop drawings. 1. Beam Connectors: Shop-fabricate structural steel tube columns, connector plates and beam seats. C. Properly mark and match mark all materials for field assembly. Coordinate fabrication and delivery sequence to expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. Plates and anchor bolts to be built into concrete work shall be shipped loose. D. Type of connection most suitable to shop or field facilities shall be used, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. E. Cutting and Fitting: Perform necessary cutting, fitting and drilling for the accommodation of other trades. Secure correct information for same, both before and after steel is delivered. Cutting or drilling will not be permitted on the job without the approval of the Structural Engineer. F. Steel to be Exposed in Finished Structure: All steel trusses, truss connector plates, beam seats, beams, columns, purlins and other items to be exposed in the completed work shall be fabricated and cut square, true and uniform, with uneven, rough or abraded edges sanded smooth prior to shop painting. 2.05 PRIMER AND PAINT A. Shop Paint: Provide paint conforming to FS TT-P-636, manufacturer's standard red. Field touch-up paint shall be the same as shop paint. B. Asphaltic Paint: Provide an asphaltic base paint for all surfaces below grade and for all members exposed in crawlspaces, and all exterior members to be in contact with concrete, or as shown on the Drawings. 1. Sonneborn Hydrocide Semi-Mastic. C. Primer: Conform to FS TT-P-31, red. D. Hot-Dipped Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize all structural steel components, conforming to ASTM A525, in exterior locations, including all beams, channels, angles, pipe or wide flange columns and other supports. 05120 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.06 SHOP PAINTING A. After fabrication, remove all loose scale, rust, weld slag or flux deposit, oil, grease, dirt or other foreign materials. B. Apply one (1) coat of shop paint to all steel, except as specified herein. Dry film thickness shall not be less than 2 mils. C. Do not paint surfaces of steel in contact areas to be welded or contact surfaces of friction-type high-strength bolted connections. Protect machine-finished surfaces against corrosion. Do not paint surfaces of steel embedded in concrete. 2.07 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. Provide factory-packaged non-shrink non-metallic flowable grout where shown on the Drawings, manufactured by Embeco, Five Star or equal. 1. One (1) day compressive strength of 5,000 psi minimum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing work of this Section. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any discrepancies or conditions which may affect the successful installation of the structural steel work. Do not begin work until conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. B. Contractor shall be responsible for checking all dimensions, elevations and assuring fit of structural steel members prior to commencing erection. C. Prior to start of erection of the steel, Erector shall verify the location of embedded anchor bolts and report deviations from the anchor bolt setting plan to the General Contractor in writing. D. Protect adjacent materials or areas below from damage due to weld splatter or sparks during field welding. E. Make provision for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb and in true alignment until completion of erection. F. Pre-Installation Conference: Refer to Section 01200. 3.02 SHOP AND FIELD CONNECTIONS A. Weld or bolt shop connections, unless otherwise shown. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections are shown or specified. Use bolts conforming to ASTM A325, unless otherwise shown. 1. All welds exposed to view are to be "Architectural Grade". B. No one-sided connections shall be used, unless specifically shown on the Drawings. C. Detailing and fabrication of high-strength bolted joints shall conform to "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts". Connections are designed as bearing connections, unless otherwise noted on the Structural Drawings. D. Finish work in accordance with the approved shop drawings. Work shall be true and free from twists, kinks, buckles, open joints and other defects. 3.03 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL A. General: Erect steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and Code of Standard Practice and other specified requirements, including special provision of CSHA and COSH. B. Erection equipment shall be of adequate capacity to perform all work safely. Do not use floor and roof systems of building to support erection equipment. 05120 - 7 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Maintain work in safe and stable condition during erection. Provide temporary shoring and bracing as required. D. Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated within specified AISC erection tolerances. Align and adjust various members forming a part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. E. Clean bearing and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly. 1. Allowable Tolerances: Comply with requirements of AISC Code of Standard Practice. Leveling and plumbing shall be based on a mean temperature of 70° F. Compensate for difference in temperature at time of erection. F. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates on steel wedges or on other adjustable devices. Tighten anchor bolts after the supporting members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims. G. High-strength bolting shall be in accordance with AISC Specifications for Structural Joints. Testing of high-strength bolting procedures shall be as specified in Section 01410. H. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. Do not use gas cutting torches in the field for correcting fabrication errors. All gas cutting must have prior approval of the Engineer. I. Attach headed stud shear connectors if specified, to beams by automatic end welding in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. J. Where reinforcing bars are shown welded to structural steel, bars are to be furnished by rebar supplier and welded in place by structural steel erector. K. Field Modifications: Written approval of the Structural Engineer must be obtained before using cutting torch for field modification or refabrication of structural steel. Contractor shall be responsible for errors in fabrication and for correct fit in the field. 3.04 CLEANING AND FIELD PAINTING A. Clean all steel surfaces in preparation for field finishing. B. Paint only when ambient air temperature is above 40° F. Surfaces to be painted shall be free of rust, oil, dirt and mud. Immediately after erection, touch-up field welds, bolted connections and abrasions of the shop coat. C. Apply asphaltic paint to portions of columns, including base plate that will be below grade or top of slab-on-grade, and to all connections or other surfaces exposed in crawlspaces or to be in contact with concrete in exterior applications. D. Wash down all structural steel framing upon completion of erection. E. Refer to Section 09900, Painting, for field finishing of exposed steel surfaces. 3.05 PLACEMENT OF NON-SHRINK GROUT A. Inspect surfaces prior to placement of grout. Check for cleanliness and proper placement and installation of steel work to be in general conformance with the Drawings. B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Place in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Pack grout solid taking care that there are no voids. Refrain from tightening anchor bolts until grout has set and cured. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: Refer to Structural Drawings for complete steel inspection table or schedule. B. Shop- and field-welding of exposed structural steel members shall be subject to evaluation to the satisfaction of the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Alignment and spacing of members. 2. Flushness and plumb of adjacent members. 3. Quality and appearance of finished welds. 05120 - 8 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 4. Alignment of bolts and other attachments, where exposed to view in finished structure. 5. Consistency of bolt length beyond nuts, where exposed to view in finished structure. END OF SECTION 05200 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion Construction Documents SECTION 05200 STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish, fabricate and erect all bar- and angle-type steel joists and joist girders for structural roof framing, including bridging and welding to supporting members. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete: Embedded steel attachments for connection of steel joists. 3. Section 05120, Structural Steel. 4. Section 05300, Metal Decking. 5. Section 09900, Painting. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. AISC and SJI, "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders". 2. AWS, "Code for Welding in Building Construction". 3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Fabricator shall be a member of the Steel Joist Institute (SJI). 1. All steel joists and joist girders shall be by the same fabricator throughout the project, unless specifically approved otherwise by the Architect/Engineer. C. Welding Qualification: Contractor shall qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedure. 1. Joists welded in place are subject to inspection and testing. Remove and replace or reweld work found to be defective and not complying with the specifications. 1.03 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Type and size of steel joists shall be as shown on the Drawings. Design of joists and calculations of section properties shall conform to AISC and SJI Specifications. 1. Design and fabricate K series steel joists for a maximum stress of 30,000 psi for tension in chord and web members under the required total live and dead loads. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, load tables, performance and test data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including erection plans and details showing layout of joist units, special connections, accessories and the number, type, location and spacing of all joists and bridging. C. Design Calculations: Submit stamped design calculations for joist girders and special load joists designated "SP" on the Drawings for review by the Structural Engineer. 05200 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL JOISTS AND JOIST GIRDERS A. Steel Angle and Bar Joists: Prefabricated steel angle and/or bar joists, types and sizes as shown n the Structural Drawings. Steel shall comply with AISC and SJI Specifications. B. Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: Comply with ASTM A307, Grade A. C. High-Strength Threaded Fasteners: Comply with ASTM A325. D. Shop Paint: Provide paint conforming to AISC and SJI Specifications, except that black asphalt paint will not be permitted where field painting is required. E. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Vulcraft, Norfolk, NE, (402) 644-8500. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are acceptable. 2.02 BRIDGING A. Provide horizontal-type bridging complying with AISC and SJI Specifications where shown on the Drawings. B. Provide diagonal-type bridging complying with AISC and SJI Specifications where shown on the Drawings. C. Provide sag rods complying with AISC and SJI Specifications where shown on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing work of this Section. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any discrepancies or conditions which may affect the successful installation of the work. Do not begin work until conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. 3.02 FABRICATION OF STEEL JOISTS A. General: Fabricate steel joists in accordance with AISC and SJI Specifications, except as otherwise shown or specified. B. Provide holes in chord members only where shown on the Drawings for securing other work to steel joists. Deduct area of holes from the area of chord members when calculating section properties. 3.03 SHOP PAINTING A. After fabrication, remove all loose scale, rust, weld slag or flux deposit, oil, grease, dirt or other foreign materials. B. Apply one (1) coat of shop paint to all steel, except as specified herein. Dry film thickness shall not be less than 2 mils. C. Do not paint surfaces of steel in contact areas to be welded. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF STEEL JOISTS A. General: Place and secure steel joists in accordance with AISC and SJI Specifications and as specified herein. 05200 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion Construction Documents B. Do not erect steel joists until supporting work is in place and secured. Place, adjust and align in accurate location and spacing before permanently fastening steel joists. C. Install bridging immediately after installation of joists. Where X-bridging is fastened to walls of building, make final attachment to wall after roofing has been placed. D. Field weld or bolt joists to supporting members as shown on the Drawings. E. After installation, field paint all bolt heads and nuts and abraded or rusty surfaces on joists and steel supporting members. Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before painting, using same type paint as for shop painting. 3.05 CLEANING A. Wash down all steel joists, bridging and other components upon completion of erection. B. Leave surfaces prepared for further finishing as scheduled on the Drawings. END OF SECTION 05300 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 05300 METAL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install all materials required for complete installation of metal roof decking. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 05120, Structural Steel. 3. Section 05200, Steel Joists and Joist Girders. 4. Section 09900, Painting. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. AISI, "Specification for the Design of Light-Gage Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members". 2. AWS, "Code for Welding in Building Construction". 3. SDI, "Steel Roof Deck Design Manual". 4. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Fabricator shall be a member of the Steel Deck Institute (SDI). 1. All metal decking shall be by the same fabricator throughout the project, unless specifically approved otherwise by the Architect/Engineer. C. Welding Qualification: Contractor shall qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". 1. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing. Remove and replace or reweld work found to be defective and not complying with the specifications. 1.03 DECK DESIGN CRITERIA A. General: Design of decking and calculation of section properties shall conform to the AISI and SDI specifications. Moment of inertia and section modulus of units shall provide sufficient carrying capacity to support all dead and live loads shown on the Drawings, within the limits of the design criteria herein specified. B. Metal Roof Deck: 1. Live and dead load deflection shall not exceed L/240 of clear span. 2. Maximum steel flexural stress shall be 20,000 psi. Deck system shall be capable of resisting at least 30 psf uplift over floor areas and 45 psf uplift within 10' of parapets. Minimum gage shall be 22. 3. Furnish panels in lengths to span three (3) or more spans. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature, load tables, performance and test data. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including erection plans and details, deck types, gage and properties, erection marks and sequence of erection, welding diagrams and instructions, type of shop finish coat, accessories and installation instructions. 05300 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site with necessary erection markings. B. Handle and store in a manner required to avoid damage to decking. Store above ground on platforms, skids or similar supports; slope to permit drainage. C. Keep free from dirt or other foreign matter. Protect against rust and corrosion by means of weatherproof covering. Tie or weigh down broken bundles of deck to prevent wind from blowing sheets. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL ROOF DECKING A. General: Prefabricated steel roof decking shall be as specified herein or as indicated on the Structural Drawings. 1. Decking Width(s): As indicated on the Structural Drawings. 2. Gage(s): As indicated on the Structural Drawings. 3. Deck Thickness: 1-1/2” or as indicated on the Drawings. B. Headed Stud Shear Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020. C. Primed Finish: Deck units shall be furnished with manufacturer's standard baked-on rust inhibitive primer, gray, unless otherwise specified herein. Field finishing specified in Section 09900, Painting where exposed to view in the finished project. D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Vulcraft, Norfolk, NE, (402) 644-8500. 2. United Steel Deck Inc., Summit, NJ, (908) 277-1617. 3. Epic Metals Corp., Rankin, PA, (412) 351-1393. 4. Wheeling Corrugating Co., Wheeling, WV, (304) 234-2352. 5. Consolidated Systems, Inc., Columbia, SC, (800) 554-5421. 6. Manufacturers providing materials of the same design, function, quality and performance are acceptable. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Provide end and side closures, column closures, sump pans and bent plates and other miscellaneous shapes as indicated on the Drawings or as required by project conditions but not itemized. B. Cover Plates: Fabricate metal cover plates for end abutting deck units of not less than 18-gage sheet steel formed to match contour of deck units. C. Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips of minimum 18-gage sheet steel formed to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of cells or flutes and sides of decking. D. Sump Pans: Fabricate roof sump pans from single pieces of 14-gage galvanized sheet steel with level bottoms and sloping sides to direct water flow to drain, unless otherwise shown. Bearing flanges shall be at least 3" wide. Recess pans 1-1/2" below roof deck surface, unless otherwise shown. E. Cant Strips: Fabricate cant strips of 20 gage galvanized sheet steel. Bend to form a 45° cant not less than 5" wide with top and bottom flanges not less than 3" wide, unless otherwise shown. 2.03 FACTORY-APPLIED FINISHES A. General: Apply specified factory finishes after metal surfaces have been chemically cleaned and phosphatized. 05300 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents B. Deck finishes shall be provided as follows: 1. Metal roof deck without concrete fill shall have the manufacturer's standard baked-on rust inhibitive paint on all surfaces. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing work of this Section. Notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any discrepancies or conditions which may affect the successful installation of the work. Do not begin work until conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Erector. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DECKING A. General: Place units on supporting steel and adjust to final position before final welding. Units shall be straight and true and have proper bearing on supporting steel. B. Roof Deck: Fasten roof units as indicated on the Structural Drawings. C. Fasten side laps of adjacent unit between supports as indicated on the Structural Drawings. D. Fasten side and end closures of panels by tack welds or screws not more than 4' o.c. Close openings between panels and columns with column closures. 3.03 APPLICATION OF TOUCH-UP PAINT A. After installation, wire brush, clean and paint scarred area, welds and rust spots on the top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT AT OPENINGS A. General: Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking and support of other work, unless otherwise shown. B. Roof Deck: Reinforce roof decking around openings less than 12" in any dimension by means of a flat steel sheet placed over the opening and fusion welded to the top surface of the deck. Extend sheet 12" minimum beyond edge of opening in each direction. Provide steel sheet of the same quality as the deck units not less than nominal 16-gage thick before coating and at least 12" wider and longer than the opening. Provide #12 TEK screws at each corner and spaced not more than 6" o.c. along each side. Openings larger than 12" shall be framed with angle frames as detailed on the Drawings. 3.05 CLEANING A. Wash down all metal deck, steel joists, bridging and other components upon completion of erection. END OF SECTION 05999 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 05999 MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install miscellaneous fabricated items of ferrous and non-ferrous metals as shown on the Drawings or required by the work, including but not limited to: 1. Pipe bollards. 2. Steel channel guardrails adjacent to Chassis Wash. 3. Roof parapet ladders. 4. Steel plate jamb and head frames for sectional overhead doors. 5. Miscellaneous steel channels, angles, lintels, and straps, if not furnished by other Sections. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 05120, Structural Steel. 3. Section 09900, Painting. 1.02 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED BY OTHERS A. Section 02515, Portland Cement Paving: Metal fabrications cast in concrete. B. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete: Metal fabrications cast in concrete. C. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete: Metal fabrications cast in concrete. D. Section 04220, Concrete Unit Masonry: Loose lintels and metal fabrications laid into concrete block masonry. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. ASTM A36: Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A307: Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners. 3. ASTM A325: High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 4. AWS D1.1: Structural Welding Code. 5. FS TT-P-86: Paint, Red-Lead Base, Ready Mixed. 6. FS TT-P-645: Primer, Paint, Zinc-Chromate, Alkyd Type. 7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced in fabrication of structural steel for projects of similar size and complexity. C. Welding Qualifications: Welding shall be performed only by welders or welding operators currently certified in accordance with the AWS Code to perform the type of welding involved. 1. All welders shall have evidence of current certification. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of any miscellaneous or specialty metal fabrications not submitted under separate Sections. 05999 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts, loose lintels and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry construction to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete operations. Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other devices. B. Handle members in a manner to prevent damage, distortion or abrasion of shop paint. Repair or replace damaged materials, members or structures as directed by the Architect/Engineer. C. Storage of Steel Materials: Structural steel members stored at the project site shall be above ground on platforms, skids or other supports and stored upright to prevent twisting. Protect steel from corrosion. Store other materials in a weathertight and dry place until ready for use. Store packaged materials in their original, unbroken package or container. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: Conform to ASTM A572-50, 50 ksi. 1. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: High-strength type recommended for structural steel joints, ASTM A307. 2. Welding Materials: Applicable AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded. 3. Primer: Zinc-chromate alkyd FS TT-P-645. B. Structural Tubular Steel: Square, cold-rolled steel tubing, fully welded construction. Conform to ASTM A500, Grade B. C. Structural Steel Pipe: Comply with ASTM A53, Grade B. D. Miscellaneous Materials: 2-1/2" wide reflectorized tape, self-adhering, to match existing. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Shop-fabricate and assemble items in largest practical components for delivery and installation on the site. Extent of shop assembly shall be as approved in the shop drawings. B. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured. C. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces. 1. All welds exposed to view to be "Architectural Grade". D. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, unless otherwise specified. E. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to prime painting. F. Prime paint items for field finishing as specified in Section 09900. Do not shop-prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding. Shop-prime in one (1) coat. G. Hot-dipped galvanize all items to be installed in exterior locations or to be in contact with concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Contractor shall check all lines and levels and verify existing conditions prior to commencing work of this Section. Notify Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies or conditions which may affect the successful installation of the work. Do not begin work until such conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions affecting the work of this Section and coordinate fit and installation details with related trades prior to fabrication. 05999 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Ensure that items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry are supplied to the site prior to concrete or masonry work, complete with necessary setting templates. D. Ensure that ferrous metal surfaces have been properly painted where in contact with aluminum or other dissimilar metals as required to prevent electrolysis. E. Pipe Bollards: Ensure that bollards have been properly located in relation to openings in concrete, masonry or other materials or equipment to be protected by the bollards. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or required to match specific site requirements, locate bollards as follows: 1. Jambs: Centerline of bollard aligned with centerline of jamb opening, and placed 12" out from face of wall. 2. Corners: Centerline of bollard placed 12" out from corner in both directions. 3. Equipment: Centerline of bollard placed 12" out from edge or corner of gas meters, electrical transformers, pad-mounted condensing units and other equipment. Coordinate clearance requirements with utility providers, as applicable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install prefabricated items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion. B. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment. C. Replace items damaged in course of installation. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Pipe Bollards: Embed bollards minimum 24" deep into concrete piers with a minimum dimension of 12" diameter x 36" depth below grade, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 1. Fill bollards with concrete and form top surface smooth, dense, and flush or crowned to a maximum of 1/4" to allow proper drainage. 2. Install 2-1/2" wide reflectorized tape near top, to match existing. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 SCHEDULE OF MISCELLANEOUS METALS A. Pipe Bollards: 8-1/2" o.d. (at exterior locations) and 6-3/4" o.d. (at interior locations) steel pipe, concrete filled. Match height and embedment as detailed on the Drawings. Weld steel channels between bollards at Chassis Wash, to match existing. B. Roof Parapet Ladders: As detailed on the Drawings. C. Steel Sectional Overhead Door Jamb and Head Frames: As detailed on the Drawings. D. Miscellaneous Steel Channels, Angles, Lintels and Straps: Furnish under this Section, unless arranged for otherwise. END OF SECTION DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. 06100 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish materials and labor for installation of rough carpentry, including but not limited to: 1. Miscellaneous Redwood or pressure-treated furring, stripping, blocking, roof curbs, crickets and plates. 2. Miscellaneous wall-mounted plywood backer boards for electrical and related equipment. B. Furnish and install pressure-treated and/or fire-treated wood materials. C. Furnish nails, screws, bolts, fasteners, construction adhesives, and other related or accessory materials required for a complete installation. D. Coordination of all other trades as required for a complete installation. E. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. 3. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry. 4. Section 07221, Tapered Rigid Insulation. 5. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim. 6. Division 15, Mechanical. 7. Division 16, Electrical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. PS 1: Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. PS 2-92: Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural Use Panels. 3. PS 20: American Softwood Lumber Standard. 4. NFPA National Forest Products Association National Design Specification for Wood Construction. 5. APA: American Plywood Association, Plywood Specification and Grade Guide. 6. AWPA: American Wood-Preservers' Association. a. AWPA C1: All timber products – preservative treatment by pressure processes. b. AWPA C2: Lumber, timber, bridge ties and mine ties – preservative treatment by pressure processes. c. AWPA C9: Plywood - preservative treatment by pressure processes. d. AWPA C14: Wood for highway construction - preservative treatment by pressure processes. e. AWPA C15: Wood for commercial-residential construction – preservative treatment by pressure processes. 7. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 8. California Redwood Association. 9. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Rough Carpentry Lumber: Materials shall carry the visible grade stamp of agency certified by National Forest Products Association (NFPA). C. Plywood panels shall be identified with APA grade trademark of the American Plywood Association. D. Grading of lumber shall be in accordance with the current edition of the Western Wood Products Association. 06100 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents E. Pressure-Treated Lumber: Pressure-treated lumber materials shall not contain chromated copper arsenate (CCA). 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Preservative Treatment Certification: Treating plant's certification of compliance with specified standards, process employed and preservative retention values. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature for all construction adhesives. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect lumber and plywood and keep under cover in transit and at jobsite. B. Do not deliver material unduly long before it is required to be installed in the work. C. Store on level racks and keep free of the ground to avoid warping. Stack to ensure proper ventilation and drainage. D. Pressure-Treated Wood Materials: Protect wood products against moisture and dimensional changes, in accordance with instructions from treating plant. E. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's original unbroken boxes, cartons or containers, with labels intact. Store in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1.05 COMPLIANCE A. Do not permit materials not complying with the provisions of this Section to be brought onto or to be stored at the jobsite. B. Promptly remove non-complying materials from the jobsite and replace with materials meeting the requirements of this Section. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written lifetime warranty for pressure-treated wood products covering defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS A. Framing Lumber: PS 20, grade in accordance with established WPA grading rules, maximum moisture content of 12% to 19% (S-Dry) S4S, of the following species and grades: 1. Blocking and Miscellaneous Furring and Stripping: Douglas Fir or Hem-Fir, construction grade or better. 2. Roof Curbs and Plates: Redwood or pressure-treated Hem-Fir, where in contact with concrete or masonry. Pressure-treated lumber shall not contain CCA. 2.02 PRESSURE-TREATED ROUGH CARPENTRY MATERIALS A. Roof Curbs and Plates: PS 20, grade in accordance with established WPA grading rules, maximum moisture content of 12% to 19% (S-Dry) S4S, with preservative treatment specified below. B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. ACQ Preserve by Chemical Specialties, Inc., Charlotte, NC, and distributed locally by ECO Products, Boulder, CO, (303) 449-1876, as basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, performance and quality, and meeting the requirements of paragraph 2.07 below, are acceptable. 06100 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.03 PLYWOOD MATERIALS A. General: APA-rated softwood plywood, meeting the grading requirements of PS-1. 1. Sizes: Manufacturer's standard 4'-0" wide x 8'-0" long x thicknesses as shown on the Drawings. 2. Edges: Tongue-and-groove. B. Exterior Concealed Plywood: CDX, Exterior APA. C. Interior Exposed Plywood: A/D or A/C, Interior APA, for painted opaque finish. D. Interior Concealed Plywood: C/D plugged, Interior APA with exterior glue. E. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Weyerhaeuser Corp., Tacoma, WA. 2. Georgia Pacific Corp., Atlanta, GA, (404) 652-4000. 3. Manufacturers providing products of the same design, function, quality and performance are acceptable. 2.04 REDWOOD MATERIALS A. Redwood Roof Curbs, Plates and other Semi-Concealed Members: Construction common grade or better, flat grain, unseasoned, smooth finish to remain unfinished. 2.05 FASTENERS, ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Nails: Size and type to suit application, as indicated on the Structural Drawings. 1. Framing: 8d to 12d rosin-coated box. 2. Sheathing: 8d, 2 1/2" long box nails, zinc-coated. B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Size and type to suit application or as indicated on the Structural Drawings. 1. Medium Carbon Steel: Galvanized for exterior locations, high-humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations or when in contact with concrete. 2.06 CONSTRUCTION ADHESIVES A. Construction Adhesives: Low-viscosity, mastic-type, multipurpose adhesive, formulated for field- gluing for interior or exterior use, meeting the following specifications: 1. Reference Standards: Comply with the following minimum standards: a. APA Spec. AFG-01. b. ASTM D3498 and C557. c. HUD/FHA requirements in Bulletin #60. 2. Type: Synthetic elastomeric polymer, VOC compliant. a. Calculated VOC: 47 g/L maximum. 3. Base: Synthetic elastomer. 4. Consistency: Approx. 130,000 cps, Brookfield viscometer. 5. Weight/Gallon: 10.4 lbs. minimum. 6. Solids content: 78%. 7. Strength: ASTM D3498. 8. Aging: Retains flexibility after 500 hrs. at 300 psi and 158° F by ASTM D572-61. 9. Water Resistance: Waterproof. 10. Application Method: Caulking gun or trowel. 11. Application Temperature: 0°-100° F. 12. Service Range: -20° to 120° F. 13. Material Suitability: Select appropriate adhesive product(s) for materials/products to be field bonded, including but not limited to: a. Medium- and heavy-duty construction adhesives. b. Polyurethane adhesive. 06100 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents c. Repair construction adhesive. B. Approved Product and Manufacturer: 1. Titebond VOC-Compliant Adhesives, manufactured by Franklin International, Columbus, OH, (888) 533-9043, as basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same type, design, quality, performance and VOC compliance are acceptable. 2.07 WOOD TREATMENTS A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated on the Drawings or specified herein to be pressure-treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA standards C2, C9, C14, C15, C16, C17 or ICBO ER4981, as applicable. Pressure-treat items with waterborne preservatives complying with WPA LP-2, except that in no case shall chromated copper arsenate (CCA) be used. After treatment, kiln dry to a maximum moisture content of 19% for lumber and 18% for plywood. Mark each treated item with the WPA quality mark requirements. 1. Application Rates: Apply specified preservative treatment as follows, or as recommended by approved manufacturers: a. Preservative treatment for above ground use: 0.25 lb./cu.ft. minimum. b. Preservative treatment where in contact with ground: 0.40 lb./cu.ft. minimum. 2. Treated wood products shall be used in the following locations, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings: a. In contact with roofing, flashing or waterproofing. b. In contact with masonry or concrete. c. In contact, or within 6" of grade. d. Exposed to weather. e. Other locations indicated. B. Fire-Retardant Treatment: Where fire-retardant or treated lumber or plywood is indicated or required by applicable building codes, comply with AWPA C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood, using types required for interior and exterior use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. The Contractor shall inspect the structures and roof decking associated with the work of this project, and notify the Architect/Engineer of any condition that may affect the structural integrity, quality or appearance of the completed project. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Contractor. B. Selection of Lumber Pieces: 1. Carefully select the members. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing and will allow for proper connections. 2. Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended function. 3. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect/Engineer, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting, provided such defects exceed the criteria allowed by referenced standards for the lumber grade specified. The Contractor shall replace rejected material at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Do not shim any framing component. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROUGH CARPENTRY A. General: 1. Erect wood furring, stripping and nailing members true to lines and levels; do not deviate 06100 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents from true alignment more than 1/4" in 10'-0". 2. Space members as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein. 3. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. 4. Construct and erect required built-up curbs. 5. Produce joints which are tight, true and well nailed, with members assembled in accordance with the Drawings and with applicable codes and regulations. 6. Set horizontal and sloped members with the crown up. Crowns to be set in the same direction for vertical or horizontal application. 7. Make bearings full and uniform for solid support. B. Fastening: 1. Nailing shall be in accordance with the requirements of applicable sections of the building code, current edition, unless indicated otherwise. a. Nail without splitting wood. b. Prebore as required. c. Remove split members and replace with members complying with the specified requirements. 2. Bolting: a. Drill holes 1/16" larger in diameter than the bolts being used. b. Drill straight and true from one side only. c. Do not bear bolt heads on wood, but use washers under head and nut where both bear on wood, and use washers under all nuts. 3. Screws: For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes same diameter as root of threads, enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank. C. Furring and Stripping: Member sizes as indicated on the Drawings spaced at maximum 24" o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maintain the following tolerances for all rough carpentry work. Defective work shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1. Variation from Plumb: a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum 2. Variation in Plan: a. 0-10': 1/4" maximum b. 20' or more: 3/8" maximum 3. Variation in Openings: a. Size: +/-1/8" b. Location: +/-1/4" 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect plywood sheathing from exposure to excessive moisture and accumulations of snow. Broom snow off uncovered floor sheathing within 4 hours of snowfall. B. Replace sheathing panels that exhibit delamination, swelling or other deterioration from exposure to moisture, or as directed by the Architect. 3.05 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination required by all other Sections of the Specifications as a part of the work of this Section. Coordination shall be provided to ensure the proper, timely and complete installation of all materials, equipment and systems of the project. END OF SECTION 06160 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 06160 EXTERIOR GLASS MAT GYPSUM SHEATHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install exterior glass mat gypsum sheathing on exterior parapet walls as substrate for roof base flashings. B. Furnish and install exterior glass mat gypsum sheathing as roof cover board, unless provided by Division 7 Section(s). C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management and Removal. 2. Section 07220, Roof and Deck Insulation. 3. Section 07536, Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully Adhered. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Fire-Rated Partitions: Listed and labeled by UL, 1-hour or as indicated on the Drawings, if applicable. 2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature and installation instructions indicating compliance with these Specifications. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the site in original, unopened packages, containers or bundles with labels intact bearing type, brand name and name of manufacturer. B. Handle sheathing carefully to avoid abrading surfaces or edges. C. Store materials flat, under cover, on level platforms, with edges, ends and surfaces properly protected from weather, undue sagging and damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXTERIOR GLASS MAT GYPSUM NON-STRUCTURAL SHEATHING A. General: Paperless exterior gypsum non-structural sheathing board, consisting of a moisture- resistant treated core surfaced with glass mat facings and bond-enhancing primer coating, mold resistant, conforming to ASTM C1177. 1. Fire-Rated Sheathing: UL-rated, 5/8" thick, maximum permissible length(s), tapered edges. 2. Panel Size(s): 4'-0" x 8'-0", or as recommended by the manufacturer for the application. B. Exterior Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing on Exterior Parapet Walls as Substrate for Base Flashings: DensDeck DuraGuard Fireguard Roof Board as basis of design. C. Approved Manufacturers: 1. DensGuard Glass Mat Panels by G-P (Georgia-Pacific) Company. 2. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable. 06160 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.02 EXTERIOR GLASS MAT GYPSUM ROOF COVER BOARD A. General: Paperless exterior gypsum sheathing board, consisting of a moisture-resistant treated core surfaced with glass mat facings and bond-enhancing primer coating, conforming to ASTM C1177. Refer to Section 07220, Roof and Deck Insulation. 2.03 GLASS MAT GYPSUM SHEATHING FASTENERS, ADHESIVES AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide gypsum wallboard accessories in accordance with GA 216. B. Corner Beads and Edge Trims: Not applicable. C. Sealants: 1. Method 1: Dow Corning 795, Pecora 895 or equal. 2. Method 2: Pecora AC-20 acrylic latex sealant, GE silicone Silpruf, Tremco Dymonic or equal. D. Joint Tape: 2" wide 10x10 glass mesh quick tape. Apply with method 2, paragraph C.2 above. E. Fasteners: Type "S" bugle-head screws, lengths as recommended by manufacturer of gypsum wallboard material for light-gage steel construction. F. Insulation Adhesive (Cold Application): 2-part polyurethane insulation adhesive, used to attach insulation boards or deck cover boards to the roof deck or to other insulation boards. 1. Approved Products: Johns Manville 2-Part UIA, or equal. G. Provide auxiliary materials and accessories for glass mat gypsum sheathing work of the type and grade recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the framing and/or substrates to receive exterior glass mat gypsum sheathing and the conditions under which the sheathing is to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.02 GLASS MAT GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install exterior glass mat gypsum sheathing in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and the recommendations of GA 253. All construction shall be in compliance with the required fire-rated wall assemblies. B. Fire-Rated Gypsum Sheathing: Apply gypsum sheathing panels of maximum practical length with long dimensions at right angles to studs with "V" edge up and fasten with type "S" screws, spaced as required by the manufacturer for the span and thickness specified. End joints shall occur over supports with end joints staggered. Properly support panels around cutouts and openings. C. Caulk joints with sealants as recommended for long-term weather protection against wind, air infiltration and water penetration per one of the two (2) methods below. 1. Method 1: Apply a 3/8" bead of sealant to all joints and trowel in firmly until flat. Apply sealant to cover each fastener completely when troweled flat. Use backer rod for openings greater than 1/8". 2. Apply glass mesh joint tape to all joints. Apply a 3/8" bead of sealant along joint. Embed the caulk into the entire surface of the tape with a trowel. Use backer rod on joints over 1/8". Apply caulk to cover each fastener completely when troweled flat. 3.03 GLASS MAT GYPSUM ROOF DECK COVER BOARD INSTALLATION A. General: Install exterior glass mat gypsum sheathing as roof deck cover board in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Refer to Section 07220. 06160 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove soil, stain and extraneous materials caused by installing of sheathing materials from adjacent surfaces. B. Remove and replace items and materials that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned. 3.05 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protection of the exterior gypsum sheathing work from damage and deterioration during the remainder of the construction period. END OF SECTION 06200 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Installation of the following items, unless arranged for otherwise: 1. Hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Finish hardware specified in Division 8. 3. Building specialties specified in Division 10. 4. Miscellaneous equipment and accessories as specified elsewhere. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 4. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 5. Section 08700, Finish Hardware. 6. Section 09900, Painting. 7. Section 10520, Fire Protection Specialties. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and quality requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the precast concrete, concrete block masonry, gypsum wallboard and other substrates and finishes and notify the Contractor in writing of any condition that will prevent the successful installation of the work of this Section. Do not proceed with the installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Proceeding with the work shall be considered acceptance of substrates and site conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ITEMS SUPPLIED BY OTHER SECTIONS A. Install doors and frames, finish hardware, fixtures, accessories, specialties and equipment supplied under other Sections for installation. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.03 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Install finish carpentry items at mounting heights shown on the Drawings or specified herein. All items in handicapped accessible areas shall comply with American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) publication A117.1-1992 and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 1990. B. Consult with Architect for mounting heights of items not specifically listed. END OF SECTION DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. 07220 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 07220 ROOF AND DECK INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install rigid board-type roof insulation materials to provide thermal and vapor barrier for building elements and spaces. B. Furnish and install fire-rated glass-faced gypsum or cementitious fiber cover board over rigid roof insulation, if specified. C. Furnish and install built-up roof drainage crickets. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 06160, Exterior Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Parapet wall sheathing. 3. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation. 4. Section 07215, Foundation Insulation. 5. Section 07221, Tapered Rigid Insulation. 6. Section 07536, Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully-Adhered. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable standards of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Applicable Federal Specifications (FS) for materials as specified herein. 3. PIMA, Polyisocyanurate Insulation Manufacturers Association: Technical Bulletin 101. 4. ASTM E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 5. CAN/ULC 5770: Long-Term Thermal Resistance of Materials. 6. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Certification: Manufacturer shall certify that insulation materials supplied are compatible with sheet roofing membrane specified. C. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials supplied are free from asbestos and urea formaldehyde and are non-toxic. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications indicating that materials supplied meet the requirements of this Section. Clearly mark each submittal for R-value of material being furnished. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Furnish material in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation instructions. B. Store materials away from sources of intense heat such as open flames or welder's torches. C. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored tarp or equal. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of R-value of insulation materials in conjunction with the warranty specified for the membrane roofing 07220 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents specified in Section 07536. 1. Rigid Board Insulation: Fifteen (15) years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Single-ply membrane roof system supplier and installer shall ensure that roof insulation materials provided are compatible with the roofing system specified and approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use in this system. 2.02 EXTRUDED POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION A. General: ASTM D1621, closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam insulation board, L1.L. Class A, FM I-90. 1. R-Value: 6.0 per inch, aged per ASTM C518. Provide total roof system R-value of 30 minimum, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. 2. K-Value: 3. Thickness: 5.0" or as required to meet thermal requirements specified above. In no case shall thickness be less than that required to meet Factory Mutual I-90 criteria. 4. Properties: a. Compressive Strength: 25 psi minimum, ASTM D1621. b. Water Absorption: Less than 1, ASTM C209. c. Moisture Vapor Transmission: 2 perm. inches, ASTM C355-64. d. Dimensional Stability: Less than 2% linear change, ASTM D2126. e. Service Temperature: -100° F to 250° F. f. Product Density: 2, ASTM D1622. g. Flame Spread: Less than 25 (Class A), ASTM E84. 5. Board Size: 4’-0” wide x 8’-0” long or manufacturer's standard. 6. Deck Flute Span: 2-1/2" minimum. 7. Facings: Manufacturer's standard organic/inorganic facers. B. Fiber Cants: Provide fiber cants, complying with the sheet roofing manufacturer's requirements and compatible with the insulation materials specified, if required by the manufacturer for the roofing system specified. C. Accessories: Provide other products as required by manufacturer for a complete and thermally sealed system. D. Wood Blocking and Stripping: Refer to Section 06100. E. Plywood for Crickets: CDX plywood, 5/8" thick, unless otherwise approved. F. Fasteners: Screws, type and length as recommended by the manufacturer for mechanical attachment to roof sheathing. 1. Sure-Seal fasteners and insulation plates by Carlisle or equal. G. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville, Littleton, CO, (800) 654-3103. 2. Apache Building Products, Co., Belvedere, IL, (800) 435-5493. 3. Carpenter Insulation Co., Richmond, VA, (800) 722-2272. 4. NRG Barriers, Inc., Sanford, ME, (800) 343-1285. 5. Rmax, Inc., Dallas, TX, (800) 527-0890. 6. Temple-EasTex, Inc., Diboll, TX, (800) 231-6060. 7. Thermal Systems, Inc., Huntington Beach, CA, (714) 895-7117. 8. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable. 2.03 FIRE-RATED COVER OR RECOVER BOARD A. General: Furnish manufacturer's standard 1/2" thick, 1-hour fire-rated, glass-faced gypsum or 07220 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents cementitious fiber board sheathing, 4’-0” wide x 8’-0” long or manufacturer's standard, if required by applicable building codes or project conditions. 1. Sure-Seal HP Board by Carlisle Tire and Rubber Co., Carlisle, PA, (800) 433-5326. 2. DensGuard by G-P (Georgia-Pacific) Gypsum Corp., (800) 225-6119, as specified in Section 06160. 3. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable, if approved by roof insulation and/or roofing manufacturer as part of the specified roof assembly. 2.04 ADHESIVES AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Insulation Adhesive (Cold Application): 2-part polyurethane insulation adhesive, Johns Manville, used to attach insulation boards or deck cover boards to the roof deck or to other insulation boards. 1. Approved Products: Johns Manville 2-Part UIA, or equal. B. Modified Asphalt Adhesive (Cold Application): 1-part cold application modified asphalt adhesive, conforming to ASTM 3019, Type III, Grade 2. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the roof substrate and conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the insulation work until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of substrate. B. Thoroughly clean the new steel deck substrate prior to installation of rigid board insulation systems. C. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive roof insulation are clean, dry, free of deleterious matter and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation. D. Ensure that plywood crickets, if shown on the Drawings or required by project conditions, are properly located, constructed and anchored in place. E. Nothing in this Section shall be construed to relieve the Contractor of ultimate responsibility for the satisfactory completion of the work. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROOF CRICKETS A. General: Install built-up roof crickets, minimum 1/4" per foot slope, whether specifically shown on the Drawings or not, as required for adequate roof drainage, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. Roof valleys, as required to direct water to roof drains or scuppers. 2. Roof parapets, as required to direct water to roof drains or scuppers. 3. Mechanical equipment curbs. 4. Skylight curbs. 5. Other equipment curbs or other items projecting through the roof surface. B. Crickets shall be constructed of plywood or other specified roof sheathing material, or tapered rigid insulation, at the Contractor's option, unless otherwise specifically called for on the Drawings. 1. Insulated Roof Decks: Where crickets are a part of an insulated roof deck assembly, construction shall maintain the minimum R-value specified for the assembly. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION A. General: Install rigid board insulation systems in accordance with manufacturer's written 07220 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents instructions and recommendations. Installation shall be consistent with local building codes and insurance requirements and meet the requirements of the sheet roofing manufacturer. 1. Installation: Mechanically-attached with cover board specified below. B. Install roof insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building spaces and elements. Boards shall be installed with long joints continuous and end joints staggered. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt edges and ends tight. C. Apply treated wood blocking at perimeter parapet, same thickness as insulation, to provide starter strip, if recommended by the manufacturer. D. Take necessary precautions to prevent breakage of rigid insulation materials laid directly over fluted metal roof deck. Limit foot traffic on completed sections. Remove and replace any broken panels. E. Cut around rooftop equipment curbs, skylights, pipe vents and exhaust fans to provide tight-fitting joints. Cut into roof drains as required for proper drainage. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARD A. General: Install fire-rated cover board in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Installation shall be consistent with local building codes, insurance requirements and meet the fire rating requirements of the sheet roofing manufacturer. 1. Installation: Mechanically-attached. Fasteners shall extend through the rigid board roof insulation and be securely attached to the metal roof decking. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Continually protect the roof insulation from moisture by installing only as much insulation as can be properly covered by the sheet roofing each day. Provide temporary water seals, temporary ballast and end-of-workday water cut-offs. Protect insulation from wind blow-off during all phases of construction. B. Clean and protect exposed surfaces of insulation and leave prepared for roofing application. Refer to Section 07536. END OF SECTION 07221 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 07221 TAPERED RIGID INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install tapered rigid board roof insulation system for formed drainage crickets as shown on the Drawings. B. Furnish and install coordinating flat rigid board roof insulation, as specified in Section 07220, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Furnish and install fire-rated glass-faced gypsum or cementitious fiber cover board over tapered rigid roof insulation, if specified. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 07210, Thermal Building Insulation. 3. Section 07220, Roof and Deck Insulation: Standard rigid board insulation. 4. Section 07536, Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully-Adhered. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable tests as specified herein of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Applicable Federal Specifications (FS) for materials as specified herein. 3. FS HH-I-524C, Type 1, and ASTM C578-83 for expanded polystyrene. 4. ASTM C578, Type II: Expanded Polystyrene. 5. ASTM C578, Type IV: Extruded Polystyrene. 6. ASTM E84: Surface burning characteristics of building materials. 7. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Certification: Manufacturers shall certify that insulation materials are free from asbestos and urea formaldehyde and are non-toxic. C. Certification: Manufacturer shall certify that insulation materials supplied are compatible with sheet roofing membrane specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit complete manufacturer's product literature and specifications indicating compliance with the requirements of this Section. Clearly mark each submittal for R-value of insulation material being furnished. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings indicating slopes of tapered rigid insulation system, material thicknesses, proposed system layout, accessories and details for approval by the Architect. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Furnish materials in manufacturer's original packaging, complete with installation instructions. B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture and sunlight with an opaque light-colored tarp or equal. 07221 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering materials, workmanship and retention of R-value of insulation materials in conjunction with the warranty specified for the membrane roofing specified in Section 07536. 1. Rigid Board Insulation: Fifteen (15) years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Single-ply membrane roof system supplier and installer shall ensure that roof insulation materials provided are compatible with the roofing system specified and approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use in this system. 2.02 ROOF INSULATION MATERIALS A. General: Composite roof insulation system consisting of tapered rigid board insulation and coordinating flat rigid board insulation, to provide a continuous thermal barrier over the gross area of the roof. 1. Total R-Value: As indicated on the Drawings, or specified in Section 07220. B. Tapered Rigid Insulation System: Factory-tapered closed-cell polyisocyanurate insulation to provide minimum surface slope of 1/4" per foot when installed over new decking, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. C. Properties: Match rigid board insulation specified in Section 07220. D. Roof Deck Insulation: Refer to Section 07220. E. Fiber Cants: Provide fiber cants, complying with the sheet roofing manufacturer's requirements, and compatible with the insulation materials specified, if required by the manufacturer for the roofing system specified. F. Accessories: Provide other products as required by manufacturer for a complete and thermally sealed system. G. Wood Blocking and Stripping: Refer to Section 06100. H. Fasteners: Screws, type and length as recommended by the manufacturer for application. 1. Sure-Seal fasteners and insulation plates by Carlisle or equal. I. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Tapered ENRGY 3 Polyiso Roof Insulation by Johns Manville, Littleton, CO, (800) 654-3103. 2. Styrofoam SM and Tapered Styrofoam by factory-approved fabricator of Dow Chemical Co., Midland, MI, and represented locally by Styrofoam Brand Products, Englewood, CO, (303) 930-2231. 3. Sure-Seal insulation manufactured for Carlisle Tire and Rubber Co., Carlisle, PA, (800) 433- 5326. 4. Contour Taper Tile by Advanced Foam Plastics, Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 297-3844. 5. Manufacturers providing materials of same function and performance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. 2.03 FIRE-RATED COVER OR RECOVER BOARD A. General: Furnish glass-faced gypsum or cementitious fiber cover board as specified in Section 07220. 07221 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the roof substrate and conditions under which the insulation work is to be performed and notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of substrates. B. Thoroughly clean the new steel substrate prior to installation of tapered rigid and board insulation systems. C. Ensure that surfaces which are to receive roof insulation are clean, dry, free of deleterious matter and are sufficiently level to allow proper installation of insulation. D. Nothing in this Section shall be construed to relieve the Contractor of ultimate responsibility for the satisfactory completion of the work. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF TAPERED ROOF INSULATION SYSTEM A. General: Install tapered rigid and flat board insulation systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and layout shown on the approved shop drawings. Installation shall be consistent with local building codes and insurance requirements, and meet the requirements of the sheet roofing manufacturer. 1. Installation: Loose-laid, asphalt embedded, or as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Install roof insulation to maintain continuous and complete thermal protection for building spaces and elements. Boards shall be installed with long joints continuous and end joints staggered. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit and butt ends and edges together tightly. C. Where tapered roof insulation is used with multiple layers of rigid board insulation, tapered sections shall be installed between the layers of solid boards to protect tapered edges of insulation. D. Apply treated wood blocking at perimeter parapet, same thickness as insulation, to provide starter strip, if recommended by manufacturer. E. Take necessary precautions to prevent breakage of rigid insulation materials laid directly over fluted metal roof deck. Limit foot traffic on completed sections. Remove and replace any broken panels. F. Cut around rooftop equipment curbs, skylights, pipe vents and exhaust fans to provide tight-fitting joints. Cut into roof drains as required for proper drainage. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARD A. General: Install fire-rated cover board as specified in Section 07220. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Continually protect the roof insulation from moisture by installing only as much insulation as can be properly covered by the sheet roofing each day. Provide temporary water seals, temporary ballast and end-of-workday water cut-offs. Protect insulation from wind blow-off during all phases of construction. B. Clean and protect exposed surfaces of insulation and leave prepared for roofing application. Refer to Section 07536. END OF SECTION 07536 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 07536 THERMOPLASTIC SHEET ROOFING – FULLY-ADHERED PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Cleaning of substrate in preparation for roofing and insulation installation. B. Installation of all insulation and protection boards, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Furnish and install fully-adhered sheet roofing system. D. Furnish and install miscellaneous roofing specialties as noted, including parapet flashings, edge flashings and terminations and counterflashings, unless arranged for otherwise. E. Furnish and install built-up roof drainage crickets, unless provided by roof insulation or decking contractor. F. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 07220, Roof and Deck Insulation. 3. Section 07221, Tapered Rigid Insulation. 4. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim. 5. Division 15, Mechanical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable tests as specified herein of the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. Applicable Federal Specifications (FS) for materials as specified herein. 3. International Building Code, current edition: Wind exposure classification. 4. SMACNA, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition. 5. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Materials and installation shall comply with applicable standards and recommendations of the Rubber Manufacturers Association and the Single-Ply Roofing Institute (SPRI). C. Materials shall be supplied and installed by a roofing contractor licensed by the manufacturer or certified by the manufacturer as a qualified installer of the specified products. D. All work of this Section shall be performed by a single installer, who shall have minimum five (5) years of successful experience with projects of similar size and complexity. E. Installer shall certify that all roof system materials provided are compatible with the roof system assembly specified and approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use in this system. F. Design Criteria: Roof design shall meet the minimum requirements of the Single-Ply Roofing Institute for the specified roofing system type, unless more stringent requirements are required by the jurisdiction with authority over the project. 1. External Fire Resistance: UL Class A. 2. Internal Fire Resistance: Factory Mutual (FM) Class I. 3. Wind Resistance: 100 mph, Exposure B (IBC) for fully-adhered systems. 4. Warranty shall meet wind resistance defined above. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for sheet roofing installation, surface conditioner compatibility, elastic flashings, joint cover sheet and joint 07536 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents and crack sealants, with temperature range for application of roofing membrane. B. Warranties: Submit sample warranties, in accordance with the requirements of Section 01740. C. Design and Specification Approval: Prior to starting roofing, Contractor shall submit a letter certifying that the roofing design and specifications are proper for this particular project. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather Conditions: Proceed with elastomeric sheet roofing work only when weather conditions comply with manufacturer's recommendations and will permit materials to be applied and cured in accordance with those recommendations. Do not exceed temperature limitations recommended by roofing manufacturer. 1. Do not apply sheet roofing during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40° F. 2. Do not expose membrane and accessories to a constant temperature in excess of 180° F. 3. Do not apply sheet roofing to damp, frozen, dirty, dusty or deck surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials, insulation and accessories in manufacturer's protective containers with labels intact and legible, and comply with manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling. B. Handle rolled goods as required to prevent damage. Store all materials on clean, raised platforms with weather-protective coverings. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written 15-year system warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship, and covering all specified design criteria. Warranty shall be written to cover the wind resistance specified in paragraph 1.02 F above. B. Provide manufacturer's written extended 20-year warranty covering defects in materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fully-Adhered Thermoplastic Sheet Membrane Roofing System: Single-ply thermoplastic sheet roofing fully-adhered over fire-rated cover board and rigid board roof insulation. 1. Solar Reflectance Index: Meet or exceed SRI of 101, when tested in accordance with ASTM E-1980. 2.02 ROOF INSULATION A. Membrane roof system supplier and installer shall ensure that roof insulation materials provided are compatible with the roofing system specified and approved by the roof membrane manufacturer for use in this system. 1. Rigid Board Roof Insulation: Refer to Section 07220. 2. Tapered Rigid Roof Insulation: Refer to Section 07221. 2.03 SHEET ROOFING MATERIALS A. Membrane: Fully-adhered 60 mil thermoplastic membrane, conforming to ASTM D-6878 and the following minimum criteria: 1. Roll Width: 8'-0" wide, or manufacturer's standard width not less than 6'-0". 07536 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2. Color: Light gray or white, as required for specified SRI and Energy Star rating. B. Batten Strips: Manufacturer's standard 1" x 18-gage aluminized steel strapping. C. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant type, compatible with materials being attached. D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concrete fastener for mechanically-attached insulation into existing concrete deck. E. Flashing: 1/16" thick thermoplastic forming flashing as furnished by membrane manufacturer. F. Bonding Adhesive: Furnished by membrane manufacturer, compatible with all materials to which the membrane is to be bonded. G. Splicing Cement and Lap Sealant: For sealing the exposed edge of the splices, shall be trowel or gun consistency as furnished by membrane manufacturer. H. Lap Sealant: Compatible with materials with which it is used, shall be trowel or gun consistency, furnished by membrane manufacturer. I. Water Cut-Off Mastic: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane manufacturer. J. Molded Pipe Flashing: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane manufacturer. K. Nite Seal: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane manufacturer. L. Pourable Sealer: Compatible with materials with which it is used, furnished by membrane manufacturer. M. Rubber Nailing Strips and Fasteners: Extruded nailing strips and fasteners furnished by membrane manufacturer. N. Primer: None required. O. Approved Manufacturer: 1. Johns Manville TPO-60 System, Littleton, CO, (800) 654-3103, as basis of design. 2. Carlisle Sure-Weld TPO, Carlisle SynTec Systems, Carlisle, PA, (800) 233-0551. 3. Duro-Last Thermoplastic Membrane, Saginaw, MI, (800) 248-0280. 4. GenFlex Roofing Systems, Maumee, OH, (800) 443-4272. 5. Firestone UltraPly TPO, Indianapolis, IN, (800) 428-4442. 6. Versico Inc., Carlisle, PA, (800) 992-7663. 7. Tremco, Beachwood, OH, (800) 562-2728. 8. Manufacturers providing materials of same function, design and performance are acceptable, only as approved by the Architect and Owner prior to bidding. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Walkway Protection Panels: None required. B. Manufacturers of walkway protection system shall certify that use of their materials will not affect warranty for the sheet roofing system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall thoroughly examine surfaces and substrates to receive fully-adhered sheet roofing materials prior to commencing work. Report in writing to the Contractor any condition that may potentially affect proper application or warranty. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Roofing Subcontractor. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of surfaces. B. Ensure that drains, sleeves and curbs which pass through surfaces to receive roofing are rigidly installed. C. Ensure that concrete HVAC equipment pads or raised curbs are properly formed and installed prior to beginning installation. 07536 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents D. Ensure flatness and tightness of joints in deck sheathing. 1. Test pullout capacity of mechanical fasteners in the presence of the roofing manufacturer's technical representative if required by the manufacturer as a condition of the warranty. E. Ensure that surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves or projections which may be detrimental to the successful installation of sheet roofing. Remove foreign materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent asphalt, solvent or adhesive fumes or any other potentially noxious or toxic substance that is a part of the application of the roof membrane system from being drawn into the building through rooftop air intake equipment. Notify the Owner of any potential problem prior to commencing work. B. Protection: 1. Protect pavements and building walls adjacent to hoist prior to starting work. Lap suitable protective materials at least 6". Secure protective coverings against wind. Leave protective covering in place for duration of roofing work. 2. Protect parapets and adjacent surfaces not designated to receive roofing. C. Deck Surfaces: Dry and broom clean surfaces of foreign matter detrimental to installation of roofing. D. Joints in Deck: Seal cracks and joints with recommended material and sealant. Use proper depth- to-width ratio as recommended by the sealant manufacturer in accordance with Section 07900. E. Start the installation only in the presence of the manufacturer's technical representative, if required as a condition of the warranty. F. Ensure that self-flashing skylight units are properly located and attached in place. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF ROOF CRICKETS A. General: Install built-up roof crickets, minimum 1/4" per foot slope, whether specifically shown on the Drawings or not, as required for adequate roof drainage, including but not limited to the following locations: 1. Roof valleys, as required to direct water to roof drains or scuppers. 2. Roof parapets, as required to direct water to roof drains or scuppers. 3. Mechanical equipment curbs. 4. Skylight curbs. 5. Other equipment curbs or other items projecting through the roof surface. B. Crickets shall be constructed of plywood or other specified roof sheathing material, or tapered rigid insulation, at the Contractor’s option, unless otherwise specifically called for on the Drawings. 1. Insulated Roof Decks: Where crickets are a part of an insulated roof deck assembly, construction shall maintain the minimum R-value specified for the assembly. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF SHEET ROOFING A. Install rigid or tapered rigid insulation in accordance with roofing manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations and as specified in Section 07220 and 07221. B. Install fire-rated cover board over rigid board roof insulation in accordance with roofing manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations, if specified. Refer to Section 06160 or 07220. C. Install fully-adhered single-ply sheet roofing in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications, written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Loosely lay sheet membrane over roof insulation. Allow membrane to relax minimum thirty (30) minutes before adhering or splicing. 2. Membrane: Apply, lap and splice using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer. Laps shall run parallel to slope of the roof, unless approved otherwise. Apply adjoining sheets by lapping the edges and splicing. Attach membrane to perimeter 07536 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents edges, nailers and penetrations in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 3. Fasteners: Mechanically attach membrane at maximum 1'-0" o.c. along all seams, unless otherwise required by the manufacturer's installation specifications. Fasteners shall extend through the rigid board roof insulation and cover board and be securely attached to the original wood roof deck. 4. Fasteners (Field and Parapet Conditions): Mechanically attach membrane in the field of the roof as required by the manufacturer's specific requirements for this Project. Spacing of fasteners along projecting parapet walls shall be decreased as necessary in accordance with both the manufacturer and code mandated requirements, based on parapet height and related factors. 5. Flashing: Apply, lap and splice using methods and materials recommended by the manufacturer. Flash around penetrations using factory prefabricated pipe seals where possible. Field fabricated seals may be used where necessary using manufacturer's standard details. D. Installation shall be performed by a roofing contractor licensed by the manufacturer. E. Adhesive apply sheet roofing to perimeter edges, lay seam edges 3" and seal. Seal sheet roofing with 3" lap where metal collars or flanges are required. F. Apply isolating sections for roof control/expansion joints. G. Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal ends and edges to each other and to adjoining surfaces with uniform fillet bead of sealant. H. Flash and seal watertight any items projecting through membrane with counterflashing membrane material. 1. Provide and install prefabricated sheet metal boots at all pipe vents and other roof penetrations. Solder joints as specified in Section 07621. I. Apply precut disks of sheet roofing material to cover and protect fasteners in the field. J. Manufacturer’s Details: Install the sheet roofing system in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard details subject to actual field conditions. Installing contractor shall receive approval from the manufacturer’s technical field representative for deviation from any of the manufacturer’s standard details, including but not limited to: 1. Parapet wall terminations. 2. Fastener splice. 3. Membrane splice or lap. 4. Roof drain flashings. 5. Thru-wall scupper flashings. 6. Vent pipe flashings. 7. Equipment curb flashings. 8. Applications where parapet wall terminations and other areas exposed to view are also subject to approval and modification by the Architect. K. Exercise all required care not to damage the elastic sheet roofing or the completed single-ply membrane roof assembly. 3.05 TESTING A. Contractor shall perform a flood test for the watertightness of the roof membrane. The test shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner's principal representative. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: A representative of the manufacturer shall make an inspection upon completion to ascertain that the entire system has been installed according to the manufacturer's specifications and details. Written letters of acceptance shall be sent to the Owner's principal representative and the Architect. 07536 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Upon completion, remove surplus materials and debris from the site. B. Remove excess adhesives or other materials from adjacent surfaces, including metal surfaces of flashings and rooftop equipment. C. Adjacent Materials: Do not use oil-based or plastic roof cement. Do not allow waste products (petroleum, grease, oil, solvents, vegetable or mineral oil, animal fat) or direct steam venting to come in contact with membrane roofing system. END OF SECTION 07621 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 07621 GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install new galvanized sheet metal cap flashings, reglets and counterflashings, as indicated on the Drawings. B. Furnish and install new prefinished galvanized sheet metal flashings, overflow scuppers, trims, flashings and accessories. C. Furnish miscellaneous metal flashings to other Sections as required. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 07220, Roof and Deck Insulation. 3. Section 07221, Tapered Rigid Insulation. 4. Section 07536, Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully-Adhered. 5. Section 07900, Sealants and Joint Fillers. 6. Section 09900, Painting. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. SMACNA, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition. 2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Fabrication and installation shall be by manufacturer's personnel or manufacturer approved subcontractor with minimum five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar size and complexity. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and shop drawings indicating proposed materials, shapes, proposed layout of joints, special details and intersections, and fabrication and assembly details. B. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard colors of prefinished flashings, gutters and downspouts for selection by the Architect. C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard profiles of galvanized flashings and trim for selection by the Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. General: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A525, except ASTM 527 for lock-forming hot-dipped galvanized, standard G90 class finish. Use in applications not exposed to view, unless otherwise shown or indicated on the Drawings. 1. Gages: a. 24-gage for cap flashings, reglets and counterflashings. 07621 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents b. 22-gage for clips, retainers and other concealed backer materials. c. 26-gage for concealed edge and drip flashings, and other miscellaneous trims not specified for other gages. 2. Finish: Supply sheet metal flashings and trim with manufacturer's standard galvanized finish. No further field finishing will be performed where unexposed to view in the completed project. 3. Profiles: Specified in paragraph 2.04 below. 2.02 PREFINISHED GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING AND TRIM A. Prefinished Galvanized Metal: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A525, except ASTM 527 for lock-forming hot-dipped galvanized: G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized. Use in locations exposed to view, unless shown or indicated on the Drawings for other materials. 1. Gages: a. 24-gage for and thru-wall scupper flashings. b. 22-gage for clips, retainers and other concealed backer materials. c. 26-gage for edge flashings and other miscellaneous trims not specified for other gages. 2. Finish: Supply galvanized sheet metal flashings and trim with manufacturer's standard baked-on enamel finish. Color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. 3. Profiles: Specified in paragraph 2.04 below, shop formed to extent possible. 2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. Fasteners: Concealed clip-type of same material as flashings, sized to suit application. B. Nails: Hot-dipped galvanized steel roofing type. C. Screws: Hot-dipped galvanized Phillips head, with neoprene washers. D. Solder and Flux: Type recommended for materials being used. E. Bituminous Paint: Acid- and alkali-resistant type, black color. F. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type, FS SS-C-00153a. G. Sealant: One (1) component silicone, conforming to FS TT-S-00230, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging, of color suitable for material matching. 1. Dow 790 or equal. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. B. Form sections in maximum lengths possible. Make allowances for expansion and contraction at joints. 1. Provide for thermal expansion at 10' intervals, unless otherwise shown. Use material in longest practical lengths. Sections shorter than 3'-0" will not be allowed. C. Joints and Seams: Fabricate joints and seams along running lengths of metal as flat-lock type, except corners, or detailed as flat-butt joints with back-up plate, where exposed to view. Open- lap seams are not permitted for joints exposed to view. D. Corners: Fabricate corners minimum 18" x 18", mitered, soldered and sealed as one (1) piece. Seal all seams with elastic cement. E. Wipe and wash clean soldered joints to remove traces of flux immediately after soldering. F. Hem exposed edges of flashings to underside 1/2". Hemmed edges shall be straight, square design, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. G. Backpaint flashings with bituminous paint where expected to be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. 07621 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents H. Profiles shall conform to current SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual standards and details. 1. Conductor Heads: Figure F, page 55 of the SMACNA manual. 2. Cap Flashings, Reglets and Counterflashings: As shown on the Drawings. 3. Overflow Scuppers: 8" x 8" thru-wall scuppers, prefinished, similar to Figure A, page 1.65 of the SMACNA manual, size to match gutter sections provided. 4. Curb Cap Flashings: As shown on the Drawings. 2.05 FIELD EQUIPMENT A. Installer shall furnish and maintain any site-based cutting, forming and seaming equipment as necessary to fabricate and install all metal flashings, accessories and trims not factory fabricated for a complete and weathertight installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which flashing and trim work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions which would prevent the successful completion of this work. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Ensure miscellaneous galvanized metal flashings and trims are fabricated in accordance with paragraph 2.04 above. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GALVANIZED SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General: Install scuppers, flashings, reglets, counterflashings and trim in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. 1. Ensure adequate clearances for thermal expansion and contraction of fabricated sections of materials. B. Secure flashings in place using specified fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only in locations approved by Architect. When using exposed fasteners, they are to be of same finish as flashings. C. Conform to applicable SMACNA details, unless otherwise shown. Consult with Architect as necessary. D. Lock seams and end joints. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes and lines accurate to profiles. E. Counterflash mechanical, plumbing and electrical items projecting through roofing. 1. Mechanical, plumbing and electrical details may be schematic in nature. Install all flashings in accordance with current SMACNA requirements. 2. Refer to the Drawings for any special flashing conditions. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean all exposed galvanized surfaces and leave prepared for field finishing as specified in Section 09900. 1. Remove excess sealants, flux, plastic cement and bituminous paint. 2. Clean soiled surfaces with a solution which will not harm adjacent surfaces. B. Clean all exposed prefinished galvanized surfaces. Remove smudges and other imperfections using cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer. Remove excess sealant from prefinished materials and leave installation in clean condition. C. Advise Contractor of measures to be taken to protect prefinished surfaces from damage during the balance of construction. END OF SECTION 07710 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 07710 PREFABRICATED ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install prefabricated roof expansion joint assemblies, including: 1. Wall-to-roof preformed expansion joints. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 07536, Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully-Adhered. 2. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, current edition. 2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Manufacturer: Manufacturer of prefabricated expansion joint assemblies shall have minimum 10 years experience in the type(s) of systems specified and be ISO 9001:2000 certified. C. Installer: Installation of the prefabricated expansion joint assemblies shall be by manufacturer- certified or trained, with minimum five (5) years successful experience with projects of similar type, scale and complexity. D. Manufacturer shall certify that expansion joint curbs supplied are compatible with sheet roofing membrane specified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's written product literature, specifications, rough-in diagrams, details, installation instructions and general product recommendations. B. Samples: Submit representative sample of specified prefabricated expansion joint assemblies, minimum 6" long, showing all components. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver roof specialties and components to the site in manufacturer’s original packaging with installation instructions. B. Protect finishes from damage or marring during storage and installation. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer’s standard written one-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CURB-TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard prefabricated units, modified as necessary to comply 07710 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents with the requirements of this Project. B. Components: Provide matching curb units as detailed on the Drawings, with cant strips and movable curb cap anchored against displacement, with cap flashing. Equip matching curbs with waterproof bellows of 30-60 mil elastic flashing sheet of neoprene, EPDM, butyl rubber or chlorinated polyethylene. Fill void with blanket of mineral-fiber insulation and conceal under curb cap between curbs to form a waterproof, airtight insulated expansion joint system. 1. All materials shall be compatible with sheet roofing membrane specified. 2. Expansion joint assemblies shall be capable of allowing building movement of up to 2" both horizontally and vertically. C. Gaskets: Tubular or fingered design of neoprene or polyvinyl chloride. Provide units of manufacturer's standard lengths in styles required for roof-to-wall applications as indicated. 1. Provide prefabricated corner and intersection units required, equipped with special field- splice provisions to ensure permanent continuous waterproof installation of expansion joint system. 2. Bellows Width: 6". D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Expand-O-Flash system as manufactured by Manville Co., Denver, CO, (303) 978-2835. 2. Manufacturer providing materials of same design, function and performance are acceptable. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: All adhesives, sealants and other accessory materials shall be compatible with the roofing system specified. B. Zinc-Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20% copper, ASTM A525, G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized. C. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid board or glass fiber of thicknesses indicated. D. Wood Curbs, Blocking or Nailers: Redwood or pressure-treated lumber with water-borne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPB LP-2, 1-1/2" thick. Refer to Section 06100. E. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened or non-magnetic stainless steel or other non- corrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. F. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494 or SSPC-Paint 12, solvent type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coating. G. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene sealant, non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating. H. Roofing Cement: ASTM D2822, asphaltic. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the roof materials, substrates and conditions under which the prefabricated specialties are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with installation until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Ensure that roof deck surfaces are dry, flat, and free of ridges, warps and voids. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF CURB-TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install prefabricated materials and assemblies in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of the roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units and with roof insulation, roofing membrane and flashing as 07710 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents required to ensure that each element of the work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures. B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces or provide other permanent separation. C. Flange Seals: Set flanges of accessory units in thick bed of roofing cement to form a complete seal. D. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as a component of the accessory, install to provide adequate waterproof overlap with roofing or roof flashings. Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open for ventilation. E. Counterflashing: Provide counterflashing for all wall-to-roof type preformed expansion joint installations, as detailed on the Drawings. 1. Existing Precast Concrete Walls: Use 1-piece surface-mounted counterflashing with sealant. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all prefabricated roof specialties and assemblies from damage during installation, placement of roof materials and thereafter until completion of construction. B. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with products approved by the manufacturer. Touch up damaged metal coatings. C. Installer shall advise Contractor of required procedures for protection of roof accessories so that units will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07810 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 07810 SKYLIGHTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish double-domed unit skylights, self-flashing with integral curbs. B. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 07220, Roof Insulation. 2. Section 07536, Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully-Adhered. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have minimum five (5) years experience fabricating modular skylight units for projects of similar scale and complexity. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and/or shop drawings indicating materials, unit sizes and assembly and installation details. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in unbroken factory cartons. B. Store in a secure location and protect finishes and glazing from damage until installation. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's standard written five-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship and unit leakage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SELF-FLASHING, CURB-MOUNTED DOMED UNIT SKYLIGHTS A. General: Factory-fabricated double-domed skylight units consisting of one-piece acrylic plastic domes, thermally-broken extruded aluminum retaining frame, with integral self-flashing curb and sloping condensation gutter. B. Retaining Frame: Extruded aluminum, 6063-T5 alloy, minimum thickness of .72", thermally broken. C. Glazing: Factory-installed acrylic plastic, double insulated, bronze tinted. D. Sizes: 24" wide x 48" long nominal, or manufacturer's standard sizes. E. Aluminum Finish: Manufacturer's standard clear anodized finish. F. Approved Models and Manufacturers: 1. AIA Industries, Inc., Denver, CO, (800) 748-2036. 2. Inter-Sky Skylight Specialties, Santa Ana, CA, (800) 972-9112. 07810 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3. Skylights USA, Fort Lauderdale, FL, (800) 346-6991. 4. Manufacturers providing products of same design, function and performance are acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare mounting substrate as per manufacturer's requirements. B. Coordinate size of new framed curb openings with manufacturer’s standard unit approved by Architect. C. Ensure that structural framing and edge angles for new curb openings have been properly installed, in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install prefabricated skylight units in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. After installation of first unit, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water test in presence of Owner and Contractor. Make corrections in installation methods if needed prior to proceeding with installation of subsequent units. C. Protect installed skylights and glazing from damage by adjacent construction. Units with marred surfaces or scratched glazing shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 07900 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 07900 SEALANTS AND JOINT FILLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Clean and prepare joint surfaces. B. Furnish and install joint backing materials. C. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants in exterior applications. D. Furnish and install joint caulking and sealants in interior applications. E. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 02515, Portland Cement Paving. 3. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork: Joint fillers for cast-in-place concrete work. 4. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 5. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete: Joint sealants. 6. Section 07621, Galvanized Metal Flashings and Trim. 7. Section 07810, Skylights. 8. All Sections of Division 8, Doors and Windows. 9. Division 15, Mechanical. 10. Division 16, Electrical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer of sealants and caulking shall have minimum five (5) years of successful experience with projects of similar size and complexity. Installer shall be continuously employed in work of this type. C. Certification: Manufacturer/Supplier of sealant and accessory materials shall certify that materials supplied are acceptable and appropriate for the materials, substrates and conditions under which sealants are to be installed. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of sealant, caulking compound and associated miscellaneous material required. B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's standard color line for each type of sealant specified for exposed locations for selection by the Architect. C. Sample Installation: Select a test area for each major exterior building material or system and install caulking. Notify the Architect for approval and acceptance prior to proceeding with caulking. The test area will become the standard for quality control of remaining caulking and sealant work. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather conditions or when temperatures are below 40° F or above 100° F. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper curing and development of high early bond strength. 07900 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents Where joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants only when temperatures are in lower third of the manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation and bond stress by subsequent low temperatures. Coordinate time schedule with Contractor to avoid delay of project. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty covering defects in materials when such materials are properly applied and fully cured as described in the manufacturer's product data sheets. The Contractor further agrees to replace sealants which fail because of loss of cohesion or adhesion, or that do not cure properly due to improper application or curing, or when the materials installed are not appropriate for that application, joint type or other factor beyond the manufacturer's control, for a period of five (5) years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANT MATERIALS A. General: Supplier/Installer of work of this Section shall certify that materials specified and/or furnished for this project are appropriate for use in the specified applications for the following criteria: 1. Compatibility of sealant material with adjacent materials. 2. Compatibility of sealant material with type and degree of weather exposure. 3. Compatibility of sealant material with expected use of space. 4. Compatibility of sealant material with joint type, width and depth. B. Exterior: One- or two-part polyurethane-based elastomeric sealants complying with FS TT-S-00230, Class A, Type I (self-leveling) or Type II (non-sag). 1. One-Part Sealant: Sonolastic NP-1 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by manufacturer for type of application. 2. Two-Part Sealant: Sonolastic NP-2 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by manufacturer for type of application. C. Interior: One-part silicone-based non-sag, elastomeric sealant, resistant to mildew complying with FS TT-S-01543, Class A, and FF TT-S-00230, Class A. 1. Sonolastic Omniseal and OmniPlus by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by manufacturer for type of application. D. Interior Paintable: One-part non-sag mildew-resistant acrylic emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C834, paintable. 1. Sonolac by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by the manufacturer for type of application. E. Concrete Slab Joints: One-part non-priming urethane-based self-leveling pourable sealant complying with FS TT-S-00230C, Class A, Type 1 (horizontal use). 1. Sonolastic SL-1 by Sonneborne as basis of design or as recommended by manufacturer for type of application. F. Color(s): 1. Colors are to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. 2. Design intent is to match sealant color to color of adjacent material, unless indicated otherwise. The Architect shall have final authority for color selection, including variations from this policy. G. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Sonneborne Building Products, Minneapolis, MN, (612) 835-3434. 2. Tremco Sealants, Cleveland, OH, (800) 321-7906. 3. Schnee-Morehead Inc., Irving, TX, (800) 255-9427. 07900 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 4. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are acceptable. 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Primer: Non-staining type for joints as recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type recommended by sealant manu-facturer, compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Filler: ASTM D1056, round polyethylene foam rod, over-sized 30-50%, as recommended by manufacturer of sealant used. 1. Provide closed cell or open cell foam rod materials, as recommended by the Installer for specific applications. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure-sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. E. Joint Fillers for Cast-in-Place Concrete Work: Refer to Section 03100. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine joint surfaces, backing and anchorage of units forming sealing rabbet and conditions under which sealant work is to be performed and notify Contractor of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work, performance and curing of sealants. Do not proceed with sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Clean, prepare and size joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Ensure that horizontal and vertical surfaces are of sufficient dimension for required bonding of sealant materials as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Ensure that sealants are compatible with the substrates to which they are to adhere. E. Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant. F. Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. G. Install joint filler to achieve required joint depths to allow sealants to perform properly. H. Install bond breaker where required. I. Mask or otherwise protect adjacent surfaces which may be marred or damaged by sealant materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS A. General: Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges. B. Tool joints slightly concave in vertical surfaces and flush in horizontal surfaces. C. Maintain joints free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges or sags. D. Ensure that sealant is applied leaving crisp, clean lines with adjacent materials. Do not allow sealant to bleed onto adjacent surfaces. Immediately wipe excess sealant materials off adjacent surfaces. E. Remove and replace any sealants improperly applied, to the satisfaction of the Architect. F. Repair and replace any adjacent materials that have been damaged, marred or discolored by work of this Section, to the satisfaction of the Architect. 07900 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 SCHEDULE OF SEALANT WORK A. Exterior: Install sealants as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein, including but not limited to: 1. Expansion joints in exterior concrete flatwork adjacent to buildings. 2. Expansion joints in exterior concrete pavements and curb and gutter sections. 3. Vertical and horizontal joints between architectural precast concrete wall panels. 4. Perimeter of exterior door frames. 5. Perimeter of materials and equipment passing through building walls and roofs. 6. Perimeter joints of metal flashings, counterflashings, reglets and similar accessories. 7. Perimeter joints of prefabricated skylight units. 8. Miscellaneous vertical and horizontal joints between dissimilar materials, where required for contraction and expansion of joints, or where required to maintain the weathertightness of the project. 9. Other joints as indicated, as required for neat appearance, or as directed by the Architect. B. Interior: Install sealants as indicated on the Drawings or scheduled herein, including but not limited to: 1. Expansion joints and control joints in interior concrete slabs where surfaces are scheduled to be sealed and/or exposed to view. 2. Vertical and horizontal joints between architectural precast concrete wall panels. 3. Horizontal joints between interior concrete slabs and precast concrete wall panels. 4. Perimeter of interior door frames. 5. Perimeter of materials and equipment passing through building walls and roofs. 6. Miscellaneous vertical and horizontal joints between dissimilar materials, where required for contraction and expansion of joints, or where required to maintain the weathertightness of the project. 7. Other joints as indicated, as required for neat appearance, or as directed by the Architect. C. Refer to other Division 2 sections for sealants required for site concrete work and other materials. END OF SECTION DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. 08110 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 08110 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish standard exterior and interior hollow metal doors and frames. B. Grout or foam-insulate (as specified) cores of exterior hollow metal frames where shown on the Drawings or specified herein, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation of doors and frames. 3. Section 08700, Finish Hardware. 4. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing. 5. Section 09900, Painting. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. SDI-100: Recommended Specifications of Standard Steel Doors and Frames of Steel Door Institute (SDI). 2. ASTM A366: Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 3. NFPA 80: Fire-rated door assemblies. 4. NFPA 65: Smoke-control door assemblies. 5. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Manufacturer: Member of Steel Door Institute (SDI). C. Manufacturer shall comply with all requirements of Underwriters Laboratories where labeled doors and frames are required. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and door installation schedules. B. Door Schedules: Submit schedule of doors and frames, using same reference marks or numbers for doors and details as that shown on the Drawings. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating general construction, configurations, jointing methods, reinforcement and location of cutouts for louvers or glazing. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle all hollow metal doors and frames in a manner to prevent damage and deterioration. B. Provide packaging, including corner guards, separators, spreaders, banding and, if prefinished, plastic or vinyl wrappings as required to protect all metal doors and frames during transportation and storage. C. Store doors upright, in a protected area, off the ground, with air space between individual pieces. Protect all finished surfaces. 08110 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer’s written one-year warranty for standard steel doors and frames, covering materials and workmanship, including dimensional stability, flushness of door faces, squareness of doors and frames, and shop finishes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Hollow Metal Doors: Doors shall be cold-rolled, pickled and oiled, stretcher-leveled, all bonderized steel sheets with clean smooth surfaces, complying with Steel Door Institute SDI-100, except as amended in this Section. 1. Type: Composite construction with flush faces and seamless with hemmed edges. Provide insulated doors where scheduled. a. Exterior Doors: Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 1, full flush design. b. Interior Doors: Grade I, standard-duty, Model 1, full flush design. 2. Construction: Steel face sheets bonded to 1-3/4" honeycomb or unitized steel core, 14- gage top and bottom channels and 7-gage hinge reinforcement. Provide full urethane core on exterior doors or where scheduled to be insulated door. Furnish the following minimum face sheets: a. Exterior Doors: 16-gage. b. Interior Doors over 36" Wide or 84" High: 16-gage. c. All Other Interior Doors: 18-gage. 3. Sizes: As scheduled on the Drawings, 1-3/4" thick, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Style: a. "Regent Door" by Ceco as basis of design for honeycomb core. b. "Imperial Door" by Ceco as basis of design for insulated core. 5. Finish: Shop-prime as specified below. B. Door Louvers (where scheduled): Fixed-slat, inverted Y-shape, 18-gage steel frames and core. 1. Sizes: As scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Screening: Provide insect screening for louvers in exterior doors only, mounted in frame to interior door face. 3. Style: No. 4634 by Ceco (Leslie Locke Model 8CY). 4. Finish: Shop-prime as specified below. C. Metal Vision Lite Frames: 18-gage, cold-rolled steel frames with countersunk mounting holes and phillips-head steel through bolts. Corners to be mitered, continuously welded and ground smooth prior to finishing. 1. Size(s): As shown on the Drawings. 2. Finish: Shop-prime as specified below. 3. Glazing: Refer to Section 08800, Glass and Glazing. Areas of vision lites shall be limited as follows: a. UL 3-Hour Label: None allowed. b. UL B-1 or B-1-1/2 Hour Label: 100 sq. in. maximum. c. UL 45-minute and 20-Minute Certificate: 1296 sq. in. maximum. D. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Ceco Corp., Brentwood, TN, distributed locally by Architectural Doors, Denver, CO, (303) 322-1410. 2. Curries, Mason City, IA, (515) 423-1334. 3. Kewanee Corp., Kewanee, IL, (800) 447-5687. 4. Republic Doors, distributed by Hahl-Kern Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 733-5909. 08110 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 5. Manufacturers providing products of same design, performance and function are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. 2.02 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Hollow Metal Frames: Frames shall be cold-rolled or hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel, all bonderized sheets, complying with Steel Door Institute SDI-100, except as amended by this Section. Except where other gages are indicated or specified, fabricate frames from steel not lighter than the following: a. Exterior Doors: 14-gage. b. Pairs of Interior Doors: 14-gage. c. Single Interior Doors over 36" Wide or 84" High: 14-gage. d. All Other Frames: 16-gage. 1. Type: Mitered corners, fully welded frames. Knockdown-type frames are not permitted. 2. Sizes: As shown and scheduled on the Drawings. 3. Finish: Shop-primed as specified below. 4. Silencers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type, minimum three (3) per jamb, equally spaced. 5. Jamb Anchors: a. Metal Stud Construction: Stud anchors, four (4) per jamb, securely welded to back of frames. b. Masonry or Architectural Precast Concrete Construction: Corrugated or other deformed type, adjustable anchors, four (4) per jamb. c. Existing Construction: Expansion anchors, four (4) per jamb. Provide 3/8" x 4" long FH Dynabolt or equal approved by the frame manufacturer. 6. Floor Anchors: 16-gage, one (1) per jamb. B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Ceco Corp., Oak Brook, IL, distributed locally by Ceco Door Division, Fountain, CO, (303) 382-7930. 2. Curries, Mason City, IA, (515) 423-1334. 3. Kewanee Corp., Kewanee, IL, (800) 447-5687. 4. Republic Doors, distributed by Hahl-Kern Inc., Denver, CO, (303) 733-5909. 5. Manufacturers shall be the same as those for hollow metal doors. 2.03 FIRE-RATED HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Doors and Frames: Manufacturer's standard door and frame construction for fire-rated assemblies. Refer to the Drawings for UL label requirements. 2.04 PROFILES A. Hollow Metal Frames for Doors: Jamb sections shall be standard 2" wide x 5-3/4" deep, double- rabbeted, with 7/16" returns, or as shown on the Drawings or required by specified wall construc- tion, except as noted below. Fabricator to verify profile specified with wall construction and furnish jamb sections with the required depth. 1. Head Sections: Provide 4" head sections for frames where shown or scheduled on the Drawings. B. Miscellaneous Filler and Closure Shapes: Fully weld to standard profiles and grind smooth as detailed on the Drawings. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Hollow Metal Doors: Fabricate doors in accordance with Steel Door Institute requirements and recommendations. 08110 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 1. Fabricate doors of type, sizes, materials and designs indicated. Provide door clearance of 1/8" at jambs and heads and 5/8" at bottoms. Doors shall have lock edges beveled 1/8" in 2". 2. Finished work shall be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Form moulded members straight and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed and in true alignment. All welded joints on exposed surfaces shall be dressed smooth so they are invisible after finishing. 3. Mechanically interlock longitudinal seams. Leave seams invisible or weld, fill and grind smooth. Close top and bottom edges of all hollow metal exterior doors to provide a weather seal, provided as part of door construction. 4. Fabricate exterior doors with face sheets welded to perimeter stiles and inner frame members. Form perimeter frame with continuous one-piece channel at hinge edge, continuous one-piece channel at lock edge and channels at top and bottom. Inner frame members shall be continuous one-piece vertical steel rib stiffeners spaced not to exceed 6" o.c. Face sheets are to be continuously arc welded to perimeter channels. Weld face sheets to interior frame members in manner to provide a door with smooth surfaces. Spaces between stiffeners shall be sound-deadened and insulated full height of door where scheduled. 5. Fabricate interior doors with honeycomb core and steel face sheets welded to perimeter stiles and inner frame members, same as specified above. 6. Reinforce and prepare doors to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for hardware requirements. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors at factory to receive all mortise-type hardware. Provide reinforcing only for doors to receive surface-applied hardware as required. Gages of metal for reinforcing plates shall comply with manufacturer's recommendations for type of hardware used and size and thickness of doors. 7. Reinforce and prepare doors and/or frames to receive access control systems and other specialty hardware. Refer to Division 16, Electrical, for wiring requirements. 8. Fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth uniform finish. 9. Prepare cutouts for louvers or glazing where scheduled on the Drawings and factory install louvers where possible. 10. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of primer. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with Steel Door Institute requirements and recommendations. 1. Form frames of steel to sizes, gages, profiles and shapes as detailed. Frames shall be combination-type with integral trim and fabricated with full-welded type construction at joints. 2. Form frames with full mitered corners and stops, butt T-joints of frames and continuously weld all joints for full depth and width of frame and trim. Close all contact edges tight and dress all welds on exposed surfaces smooth and flush. 3. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects. Fabricate moulded members straight and true with corner joints well formed, in true alignment and fastenings concealed. 4. Reinforce and prepare frames to receive hardware. Refer to Section 08700 for hardware requirements. a. Prepare frames at factory by templates for installation of specified type hardware. Welding of hinges to frames is not acceptable. Provide frames to receive surface- applied hardware with reinforcing plates only. Provide cover boxes in back of all hardware cutouts. 5. Provide jamb anchors per Steel Door Institute recommendations for type of wall substrate. a. Fabricate jambs of frames with dimples for machine bolt anchorage specified in paragraph 2.02 above. 6. Provide floor anchors per Steel Door Institute recommendations for anchoring frame to type of floor construction. Clips shall be adjustable and drilled for two (2) 3/8" anchor bolts. 08110 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 7. Glazing: When glazed or louvered panels are required, furnish 18-gage metal glazing beads. Drill and tap frames to receive oval-head countersunk machine screws, spaced approximately 9" o.c. Beads shall be mitered at corners. Fabricate frames so that glazing will be installed from the inside of the building or room. 8. Place minimum of three (3) silencers on each interior single door frame. Space equally along jamb strike. Set out and adjust lock strikes to provide clearance for silencers. Delete silencers where door jamb gaskets or continuous weather-stripping are specified in Section 08700. 9. Fill surface depressions of hollow metal frames with metallic paste filler and grind to smooth finish. 10. Chemically treat surfaces and apply one (1) coat of primer as specified below. 2.06 FINISHES A. Shop-prime by manufacturer using a phosphatized treatment followed by a prime coat paint finish to all surfaces. Clean and chemically treat surfaces to ensure complete paint adherence. Follow with a baked-on coat of rust-inhibitive metallic oxide, zinc-chromate or synthetic resin primer on all surfaces. Air-drying is acceptable when metal is electro-galvanized. Field finishing is specified in Section 09900. B. Shop-prime by manufacturer using a hot-dipped galvanized process in accordance with ASTM A525, with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized. Field finishing is specified in Section 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the substrates, wall openings and conditions under which the hollow metal door and frames are to be installed and notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Contractor shall field verify dimensions and conditions governing the work of this Section prior to beginning fabrication. C. Contractor shall verify depth of all frames with specified wall constructions prior to fabrication. Notify Architect of any discrepancies or propose required modifications in the shop drawings, noted as deviations as specified in Section 01340. D. For welded frames, provide temporary steel shipping spreaders fastened across bottom of frames. Where construction will permit concealment, leave spreaders in place after installation; otherwise remove spreaders when frames are set and anchored. In place of spreaders, frames may be strapped together in pairs with heads inverted for bracing during shipment. Before shipping, label each frame with metal or plastic tags to show their location, size, door swing and other pertinent information. Number frames to correspond to opening numbers on construction drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. General: Installation of hollow metal doors and frames is specified in Section 06200, Finish Carpentry. B. Install frames and doors in accordance with SDI-100, except as amended in this Section. Remove shipping spreaders, set frames in position, plumb, align and brace securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottom of frames to floors with expansion bolts or with power fasteners. Provide wood spreaders to maintain jamb alignment. Build wall anchors into walls, or secure to adjoining construction as indicated or specified. Where frames require ceiling struts or other overhead bracing, they shall be anchored securely to ceilings or structural framing above, as indicated or as 08110 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents required by site conditions. C. Frames: Install hollow metal frames plumb and square with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16". Ensure frames are accurately and rigidly anchored to adjacent construction. D. Grout all exterior hollow metal frames full with masonry mortar after installation in masonry or concrete construction; foam in insulation in frames scheduled for insulated doors in other construction, and frames in fire-rated assemblies where required by the applicable assembly. E. Ensure that foam insulation, specified in Section 07210, has been installed around all door and window frames prior to installation of gypsum wallboard and/or interior casings and trims. F. Doors: Install hollow metal doors plumb and square with maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16". Install hardware in accordance with requirements of Section 08700 and adjust as necessary for proper operation. G. After installation, touch-up scratched or damaged surfaces. Use type of primer identical to that used for shop coat. H. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing in doors, sidelites, and transoms, where scheduled. I. Coordinate installation of mechanical units or louvers, furnished by Division 15, into hollow metal doors and/or frames, if applicable. Ensure the compatibility of sizes, materials, finishes and anchorages. J. Doors are to be finished without hardware. Coordinate with painting trades. Masking of hardware is unacceptable. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect doors and frames from damage during transportation and at site. After installation, protect doors and frames from damage during subsequent construction activities. Damaged work will be rejected and shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Clean all surfaces of hollow metal doors and frames, and leave prepared for field finishing. Refer to Section 09900, Painting. END OF SECTION 08331 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 08331 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install insulated steel sectional overhead doors, electrically operated, as scheduled on the Drawings for interior and exterior locations. B. Relocate existing insulated steel sectional overhead door and operator, as indicated on the Drawings. C. Furnish and install electric door operators, complete with controls and wiring. D. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 05999, Miscellaneous Metals: Steel jamb and head frame. 3. Section 09900, Painting. 4. Division 16, Electrical: Controls and wiring for electric operator. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. FS QQ-S-775: Steel sheets, carbon, zinc-coated (galvanized) by the hot-dip process. 2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Design Criteria: Doors shall be designed to withstand horizontal wind load of 20 psf minimum. Deflection of door in horizontal position shall be 1/120 of door width maximum. C. Certification: Manufacturer shall certify that steel sectional overhead door systems furnished are appropriate for the opening sizes scheduled, the type of structural support provided and the track configuration and all materials specified. D. Hazardous Locations: Installer/manufacturer shall provide explosion-proof enclosures for electrical operator and other items required by applicable codes for installation in hazardous locations. E. Wet Locations: Installer/manufacturer shall provide waterproof enclosures for wash bays or other wet locations. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and shop drawings indicating door sizes, configurations, operators, accessories and assembly details. 1. Manufacturer/Supplier shall review all aspects of the doors, operators and installation specified herein or shown on the Drawings prior to fabrication and notify the Architect of any discrepancies. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and details, accessories, anchorage methods, hardware locations and installation details. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and hardware in manufacturer's packaging complete with installation instructions. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in material, workmanship and 08331 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents installation by the distributor. 1. Electrical operator and components shall be covered by manufacturer's standard two (2)- year warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATED STEEL EMBOSSED SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS A. General: Heavy-duty 2" insulated and thermally broken steel sectional overhead doors, with interior and exterior skin material mechanically interlocked and pressure bonded to an expanded polystyrene core. 1. Wind Load: Door assemblies shall be fabricated to withstand wind loads of 25 psf minimum. B. Door Sections: 2" thick 20-gage roll-formed from commercial quality hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A525 and A526. Each door section to have flush face. C. Core Material: 1-7/8" thick elementally stable expanded polystyrene. D. Stiles: End and center stiles to be 16-gage hot-dipped center stiles to be galvanized steel with thermal break. E. Thermal Performance: Section set shall have R-value of 7.70 minimum, as tested in accordance with ASTM C236. 1. Maximum air infiltration at door perimeter: 0.81 cfm per foot at 25 mph wind velocity. 2. No air leakage shall be detected between section joints when tested in accordance with ASTM E283. F. Thermal Break Seals/Weatherstripping: Provide perimeter seals for jambs, header and floor as follows: 1. Thermal Break/Section Joint Seals: Interior and exterior skins shall be separated along their length by integral vinyl section joint seal, attached with mechanical interlock. 2. Floor Seals: Bottom seal shall be flexible U-type vinyl encased in an extruded aluminum retainer. 3. Jamb Seals: EPDM rubber blade attached to a rigid vinyl snap-on extrusion, mounted to the track angle. 4. Header Seals: EPDM rubber sealing strip, attached by a galvanized steel retainer. G. Tracks: Galvanized track, manufacturer’s standard size for particular door size. Tracks to be bracket- or continuous-angle mounted and fully adjustable for sealing door to jamb. Horizontal track to be adequately reinforced with continuous angle. H. Track Configuration: 1. New Exterior Doors: Normal headroom, with rear-mounted springs, or type recommended by manufacturer for installation. 2. New Interior Connecting Door: Vertical lift and/or inclined track type. Consult with Architect as necessary. I. Spring Counterbalance: Heavy-duty oil tempered wire torsion springs on continuous ball bearing cross header steel shaft. Galvanized aircraft-type lifting cables with minimum safety factor of 5 to 1. J. Hardware: Hinges and brackets to be galvanized steel. Track rollers shall be hardened steel ball bearings. K. Locks: 1. Interior Lock: Provide interior deadbolt with hole for padlock. Padlock supplied by Owner. L. Frames: Door openings are in existing concrete block masonry. M. Finish: 1. Exterior and interior door skins shall be manufacturer’s standard ribbed panels with smooth texture, precoated prior to roll-forming with a two-coat process of baked-on polyester enamel finish over an epoxy primer. Color: White. 08331 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2. Field finishing of exterior surfaces specified in Section 09900. Interior surfaces to remain as primed by manufacturer. N. Window Lites: Factory-installed, full-lite glazed inserts in doors where scheduled, encased in continuous extruded vinyl or rubber frames. 1. Glazing: Double glazed, tempered, clear. O. Accessories: Provide manufacturer’s standard door panel accessories, complete with all anchorages, trims and weatherseals as required for a complete installation. P. Operation: Electric, refer to paragraph 2.02. Q. Approved Models and Manufacturers: 1. SteelForm Standard S-20, manufactured by Raynor Manufacturing Co., Dixon, IL, (815) 288- 1431, as basis of design. 2. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc., Brooklyn, NY, (800) 257-4634. 3. Delden Manufacturing Co., Inc., Kansas City, MO (816) 221-2844. 4. Kinnear, Columbus, OH, (614) 294-5509. 5. McKee Door, Aurora, IL, (312) 897-9600. 6. Overhead Door Corp., Dallas, TX, (214) 233-6611. 7. Atlas Roll-Lite, Edison, NJ. 8. Northwest Door Inc. 9. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. 2.02 COMMERCIAL/INDUSTRIAL DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Prefabricated, electrically operated overhead door operator(s): 1. Trolley type, heavy-duty chain driven, for normal lift doors, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 2. Jack-shaft type, heavy-duty chain driven, for vertical lift or incline lift doors. B. Track Configuration: Refer to paragraph 2.01 above. C. Motor: Provide continuous-duty capacitor start motor, 1/2 hp minimum, or as recommended by manufacturer for door sizes. Separate from reduction mechanism for ease of maintenance. Refer to Division 16, Electrical, for power requirements. All electrical components shall be in NEMA-1 enclosure. 1. Hazardous Locations: Installer/manufacturer shall provide explosion-proof motor enclosures, switches and any other devices required for hazardous locations, if applicable. 2. Wet Locations: Installer/manufacturer shall provide waterproof motor enclosures, switches and any other devices required for wash bays or other wet locations. D. Reduction: Furnish V-belt drive from motor to full ball bearing power train with additional reduction by chain and sprockets. All power train shafts shall be minimum 3/4" diameter. E. Roller Chain Drive: Door shaft shall be driven by roller chain to provide door travel of 8-12" per second. F. Adjustable Friction Clutch: Provide adjustable friction clutch to protect door and operator if door movement is obstructed. G. Starter-Reversing Contractor Type: Furnish heavy-duty across the line reversing type with mechanical interlock. H. Limit Switches: Provide positive chain-drive screw-type limit switch, enclosed in electrical control box, easily accessible for precision setting. Limit switches shall remain in time when emergency disconnect issued and door is operated manually. I. Control Wiring: Control voltage shall be 24 volts for safety. Refer to Division 16. J. Control Station: Provide manufacturer’s standard 3-position (open, close, stop) push-button station, surface-mounted. 1. Exterior Doors: In addition to push-button control stations, provide manufacturer’s standard remote control units, two (2) per door. K. Overload Protection: Provide manual reset for overload protection. L. Magnetic Brake: Furnish magnetic solenoid brake for positive stop. 08331 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents M. Emergency Operation: Supply floor-operated disconnect for manual operation. N. Accessories: 1. Sensing Edge. O. Approved Models and Manufacturers: Operators shall be furnished by same manufacturer as overhead doors. 1. Model RGJH by Raynor Manufacturing Co., Dixon, IL, (815) 288-1431, as basis of design. 2. Manufacturers providing equipment of same function and performance and meeting the above requirements, are acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Manufacturer/Supplier shall review all aspects of the doors, operators and installation specified herein or shown on the Drawings prior to fabrication and notify the Architect of any discrepancies. B. Ensure that track configuration specified is compatible with headroom prior to fabrication. C. Ensure that adequate clearances have been provided for other mechanical equipment. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install sectional overhead doors and tracks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Fit, align and adjust complete door assemblies level and plumb, to provide smooth operation. C. Install operating hardware and lubricate as necessary for smooth operation. D. Existing Overhead Doors: Relocate and reinstall sectional overhead doors into new openings as indicated on the Drawings, including tracks, operators, controls and accessories. 1. Any jamb or sill seals, weatherstripping or other miscellaneous trims that require replacement will be paid for by the Owner. 3.03 TESTING AND CLEANING A. Test sectional overhead door operation and electric operator functions in the presence of the Owner's principal representative. B. Clean all sectional door panels, tracks, glazing, hardware and accessories, and leave exterior surfaces prepared for field finishing specified in Section 09900. END OF SECTION 08700 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish finish hardware for new interior and exterior doors, other than that specified in specific door Sections. B. Furnish keys in keyed groups as indicated, and deliver keys to Owner as specified. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Limitations on substitute products, if applicable. 2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 3. Section 06200, Finish Carpentry: Installation. 4. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 5. Section 08331, Steel Sectional Overhead Doors. 6. Division 16, Electrical: Card-key access systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. BHMA: Applicable standards for finish door hardware. 2. ANSI A115.2: Door and Frame Preparation for Bored or Cylindrical Locks for 1-3/4" Doors. 3. ANSI A115.9: Door and Frame Preparation for Closer, Offset Hung, Single-Acting. 4. ANSI A156.1: Butts and Hinges. 5. ANSI A156.2: Locks and Lock Trim. 6. ANSI A156.4: Door Controls (Closers). 7. ANSI A156.6: Architectural Door Trim. 8. ANSI A117.1, Current Edition: Specifications for Handicapped Accessibility. 9. Americans with Disabilities Act, 1990: Specifications for Handicapped Accessibility. 10. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Hardware Schedule: Submit schedule of each type of hardware required for the Project in accordance with Section 01340, indicating door location, type, quantity required, style, finish and keying group. B. Templates: Supply hardware templates to Section 06200, Finish Carpentry, and respective Sections of Division 8 prior to hardware installation. C. Provide manufacturer's parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary tools required for proper maintenance of hardware. 1.04 KEYING A. Temporary Construction Locks: Not applicable. B. Permanent Locks: Contractor shall supply and install a Primus keying system for the project and will coordinate this process with the City's sole source provider: Colorado Doorways, Inc., Denver, CO, (800) 321-6448 or (303) 291-0900. C. Provide two (2) change keys for each lock. 08700 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents D. Provide two (2) master keys for each master keyed group. E. Provide one (1) master key for installation in each key access box, specified in Section 10520, for fire department use. F. Master Key Groups (review with Owner): 1. Key new exterior doors to Owner's existing Master key system. G. Master Card Key Access Groups (review with Owner and Architect): 1. Locations for future fob access control locations are shown on the Drawings. H. Stamp or engrave each key with appropriate keying designation (MASTER, 1AA, 2AA, etc.). When keys are turned over to Owner at completion of the project, secure keys with same keying designation on same ring, one (1) ring for each keying designation. I. Key Blanks: Provide Owner with specified quantity of blanks for keying separate from this contract. 1. Quantity: 10. J. Deliver keys to the Owner as specified in paragraph 1.06.B. below. 1.05 HARDWARE FUNCTIONS – CYLINDER LOCKS (BHMA) A. F-75 (410) Passage Latch: Latchbolt operated by knob from either side at all times. B. F-81 (451) Office or Entry Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by knob from either side, except when outside knob is locked by turn button in inside knob. When outside knob is locked, latchbolt is operated by key in outside knob or by rotating inside knob. Turn button must be manually rotated to unlock outside knob. C. F-84 (455) Classroom Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by knob from either side, except when outside knob is locked, latchbolt is operated by key in outside knob or by rotating inside knob. D. F-86 (457) Storeroom/Utility Space Door Lock: Deadlocking latchbolt operated by key in outside knob or by rotating inside knob. Outside knob is always fixed. E. Deadlocks: 1. E-2151: Deadbolt operated by key from outside and turn button or lever from inside. Bolt automatically deadlocks when fully thrown. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Neatly and securely package hardware items and identify for individual location and use. B. Keys shall be delivered directly to the Owner by certified mail, unless arranged otherwise at the Pre-Construction Conference or by subsequent written direction from the Owner. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH HARDWARE A. General: Furnish hardware items of the type, function, quality and quantity to meet the requirements of this Section and for a complete and operational installation. Products listed are indicative of the design, grade, construction, size and type to be used by the listed manufacturer. Alternate products of same quality, function, performance and design are acceptable in conformance with Section 01600, unless limited by the specific requirements of Section 01600 or this Section. 1. Hinges: Stanley, Bommer, Hager, Mont-Hard or McKinney. 2. Cylinder Locksets and Latchsets: Schlage Primus Series only. 08700 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2. Closers: LCN, Norton or Dorma. 3. Deadbolts: Schlage Primus Series only. 4. Thresholds and Weatherstripping: Pemko, Reese, Zero, Master Manufacturers or Barrier Systems by Hager. 5. Trim, Stop and Holders: Hager, Trimco, Rockwood, Quality or Master Manufacturers. 6. Panic Sets: Von Duprin, Corbin Russwin, Falcon, Sargent or Dorma. 7. Door Gaskets and Sweeps: Pemko, Reese, Zero, National Guard Products Inc. or Barrier Systems by Hager. 8. Manufacturers furnishing finish hardware items of the same function, design, appearance, quality and performance are acceptable as approved by the Architect prior to bidding except where restricted in Section 01600 or elsewhere in this Section. B. Consistency: Hardware lines shall be coordinated and by the same manufacturer, at a minimum to the extent scheduled: 1. All cylinders, locksets and passage sets shall be Schlage Primus Series only. Coordination of keying shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier for these items. 2. All closers shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the project. 3. All panic hardware shall be by the same manufacturer throughout the Project. 4. All finish door hardware shall be of the same, or correlated (brushed stainless steel with satin chrome), finish, unless specifically indicated for different finish(es). 5. Deviations from consistency of one manufacturer are only acceptable when available designs are not satisfactory. C. Handing: Handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier, to be reviewed by the Architect as a part of the Hardware Schedule submittal. D. Special Requirements: 1. All hinges shall be ball-bearing type, unless otherwise indicated. Provide non-removable pins in all hinges of exterior outswinging doors. 2. All cores of cylinder locksets shall be interchangeable, unless otherwise specified. 3. All deadbolts specified for required exit or egress doors shall be provided with lever or paddle type operators on the interior. 4. All panic hardware shall be capable of being “dogged” open, except for panic sets in exterior exit doors. 5. Where kickplates are specified for only one side of each door leaf, install on active side, or as recommended by the supplier. 6. Closers shall be provided with hold-open capability, except where part of a fire-rated door assembly. 7. Closers shall be parallel arm type for push side applications, and mounted on the room side of all doors where possible. Regular arm-type closers are acceptable for pull side applications. E. Accessibility: Door hardware shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A117.1, current edition, the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) for handicapped accessibility, and the Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards. 1. All doors shall have lever trim as scheduled in this Section. F. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Refer to paragraph 2.01.A. above for approved manufacturers for specific types of finish hardware. 2. Bommer, Landrum, SC, (800) 334-1654. 3. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware, Charlotte, NC, (800) 543-3658. 4. Dorma Architectural Hardware, Reamstown, PA, (800) 523-8483. 5. Glynn-Johnson, Indianapolis, IN, (317) 613-8940. 6. Hager Companies, St. Louis, MO, (800) 325-9995. 7. LCN, Princeton, IL, (800) 526-2400. 8. Pemko, Ventura, CA, (800) 283-9988. 9. Schlage Lock Co., Colorado Springs, CO, (719) 264-5300. 08700 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 10. Trimco, Los Angeles, CA, (323) 262-4191. 11. Von Duprin, Indianapolis, IN, (800) 999-0408. 12. Manufacturers providing products of same quality, function, performance, design and finishes are acceptable in conformance with Section 01600, unless limited by the specific requirements of Section 01600 or this Section. 2.02 COMMERCIAL HARDWARE DESIGNS AND FINISHES A. General: Design of finish hardware shall comply with the requirements specified in paragraph 2.01 above. B. Commercial Line: Heavy-duty, commercial grade hardware, D-Series by Schlage as basis of design. C. Commercial Grade Trims: 1. Lever trim: Omega by Schlage as basis of design. 2. Knob trim: Not used. D. Panic Set Trims: FLW Design by Sargent or equal. E. Commercial Line Finish: US26D, Satin Chromium, or match existing. F. Threshold Finish: Mill finish cast or extruded bronze. 2.03 SCHEDULE OF HARDWARE ITEMS A. Approved Models and Manufacturers, as basis of design: 1. Locksets and Latchsets: Schlage Primus Series only, 2-3/4" backset. 2. Hinges: McKinney TA2714, Stanley or Hager BB1279, steel, full-mortised, 5-knuckle ball bearing, 4-1/2" x 4-1/2", NRP. 3. Deadbolts: Heavy-duty, with interchangeable core, Schlage Primus Series only. 4. Panic Set, Rim Type: Von Duprin 98 Series, plated steel, with lever trim. 5. Closers: LCN 4040 Series, with full molded cover. Provide delayed-action option where scheduled. 6. Kickplates: Trimco, 10" x length recommended for door width, 16-gage, (.050" aluminum) (polished brass), beveled edges. 7. Saddle Thresholds: Pemko 271A-5, flat, or Reese S483AV-5" with integral vinyl stop. All thresholds shall be handicapped accessible. 8. Door Shoes/Sweep: Pemko 217 AV extruded aluminum with vinyl insert for 1-3/4" doors. Verify compatibility with specified threshold. 9. Sweep: Pemko 307AV. 10. Door Smoke Gaskets: Pemko S88D. 11. Weatherstripping: Pemko 303AV for wood doors/frames; Pemko 316AV for hollow metal doors/frames. 12. Wall Stop: Ives 407. Use wall-type, unless door position requires otherwise. 13. Floor Stop: Ives 438. 14. Lock Shield: ___________________. B. Furnish hardware items as listed in Schedule at the end of this Section, complete to the function intended. C. Furnish all accessory hardware items as required for a complete installation, including strikes and anchorage devices. 2.04 SPECIALTY FINISH HARDWARE A. General: Hardware furnished with this Project shall be compatible with the future installation of fob access controls. 08700 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the doors, frames and other substrates that are to receive finish hardware and notify the Contractor of any existing condition that will be detrimental to the successful installation and performance of the hardware. Do not install hardware until such conditions have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Installer. B. Ensure that door cutouts or bores for hardware and frame cutouts for strike plates are properly aligned. C. Do not install finish hardware until doors, frames and other substrates have been painted, stained or otherwise finished as specified in other Sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE A. General: Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations, using proper templates. Installation is specified in Section 06200. B. Mounting Heights: Maintain following mounting heights for new doors, from finished floor to center line of hardware item: 1. Locksets and Latchsets: 40", unless special height requirements are specified elsewhere. 2. Deadlocks: 48". C. Verify compliance of mounting heights with current ANSI A117.1 and ADA requirements. D. Ensure proper operation of all finish hardware items. Adjust alignments as necessary for smooth operation. E. Adjust operating force for all door closers for compliance with applicable codes and handicapped accessibility standards. 3.03 HARDWARE FURNISHED TO OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 08110, Standard Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Hardware supplier to provide templates to door fabricator. 3.04 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: While the following Hardware Schedule is intended to cover all doors and other movable parts of the project and establish a type and standard of quality, it shall be the specific responsibility of the finish hardware supplier to examine the Drawings and Specifications and furnish proper hardware for all openings, whether listed or not. If there are any omissions in the hardware groups, the hardware supplier shall notify the Architect prior to bid opening for instruc- tions; otherwise, the list will be considered complete. No extras will be allowed by the Owner or the Architect. B. It is intended that the following groups be complete in the coverage of required items, but it is the responsibility of the hardware supplier to furnish finish hardware necessary for a complete installation, particularly in regard to fire-rated door assemblies. Where items are referred to in the singular, they shall be furnished in numbers sufficient for a complete installation. C. Every attempt has been made to coordinate the finish hardware items between each other and with doors, etc. to which they are to be installed. It is the responsibility of the hardware supplier to ensure the compatibility of the finish hardware supplied with both related hardware items and the doors, etc. to which they are to be used. D. Hardware Notes: 1. Ea. refers to each leaf. 2. LH refers to left-hand leaf only. 3. RH refers to right-hand leaf only. 08700 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 4. All other handing shall be the responsibility of the hardware supplier. PART 4 SCHEDULE 4.01 HARDWARE GROUPS Group A Exterior Entrances/Exits 1-1/2 pr. Hinges 1 ea. Rim-type panic set, with lever trim 1 ea. Electric strike (future) 1 ea. Card/fob access control (future) 1 ea. Closer 1 ea. Kickplate 1 ea. Threshold 1 ea. Door sweep 1 set Weatherstripping Group B Interior Connecting Doors 1-1/2 pr. Hinges 1 ea. Passage set, with lever trim 1 ea. Closer 2 ea. Kickplates 1 set Smoke gaskets END OF SECTION DIVISION 9 - FINISHES Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. 09900 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Prepare surfaces to receive opaque painted finishes as specified. B. Furnish materials and finish surfaces as indicated in the schedule at the end of this Section. Generally, the scope of work shall include painting all exposed surfaces, whether specifically noted or not, and certain concealed surfaces, except where materials are prefinished or where intended to remain unfinished as described in paragraph 1.02 below. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01600, Material and Equipment: Maintenance materials. 2. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 3. Section 02580, Pavement Markings. 4. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete: Clear sealer. 5. Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard: Priming. 6. Division 15, Mechanical. 7. Division 16, Electrical. 1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED A. Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces in concealed areas and inaccessible areas such as furred spaces, foundation spaces, utility tunnels, pipe spaces and duct shafts. B. Metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require painting under this Section, except as may be so specified. C. Materials, fixtures and equipment specified or supplied by the manufacturer as prefinished shall not be painted, unless otherwise indicated in the Schedule at the end of this Section. Materials supplied with factory-applied primer coats shall be field finished by this Section, unless otherwise indicated. D. Do not paint moving parts of operating units, mechanical or electrical parts such as valve operators, linkages, sensing devices and motor shafts, unless otherwise indicated. E. Priming or finishing of certain surfaces may be specified to be factory-applied or installer- performed under other Sections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Finish work shall be performed only by qualified personnel employed by firms specializing in work of this type, with a minimum of five (5) years successful experience in projects of similar size and complexity. C. Materials shall be applied with appropriate equipment and tools as specified herein, or as required to provide the specified quality. D. Coordination of Paint Finishes, Primers and Substrates: 1. Provide finish coats which are compatible with the prime coats actually used. 2. Review other Sections of these Specifications as required, verifying the prime coats to be used and assuring compatibility of the total coating system for the various substrates. 09900 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 3. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of the specific finish materials to assure that compatible prime coats are used. 4. Provide barrier coats over non-compatible primers or remove the primer and reprime as required. 5. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems over prime coatings or substrates supplied under other Sections. E. Certification: Supplier shall certify that all paint materials supplied contain no lead or other toxic substances. F. Certification: Paint materials used in interior building applications shall be GreenGuard certified for indoor air quality. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and specifications to show compliance with the specified requirements. B. Materials List: Submit materials list of all items proposed to be provided under this Section. C. Samples: Painting Contractor shall prepare samples of each substrate and finish specified, as directed by the Architect, including but not limited to: 1. Paint samples for typical interior exposed structural steel beams, columns, joists and metal decking. 2. Paint samples for typical interior gypsum wallboard. 3. Paint samples for interior and exterior metal doors, pipe railings and miscellaneous metal work. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver paint materials in original, sealed and labeled containers bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color, designation and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. B. Provide adequate storage facilities to store materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45° F in a well-ventilated area. C. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. General: Follow manufacturer's written specifications and recommendations for product handling and application. Adhere to all applicable OSHA regulations related to product application and handling of removed paint, rinse water and other residual materials. B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes, unless moisture contents of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12%. C. Ensure that surface temperature or the surrounding air temperature is above 40° F before applying finishes. Minimum application temperatures for latex paints for interior work is 45° F; 50° F for exterior work. D. Provide adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities to maintain temperatures above 45° F for 24 hours before, during and 48 hours after application of finishes. E. Provide minimum 15 footcandles of lighting on surfaces to be finished. 1.07 PROTECTION A. Adequately protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection. B. Furnish sufficient dropcloths, shields and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from soiling surfaces not being painted and, in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation area. 09900 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Place cotton cloths and any material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed, metal containers and remove daily from the site. D. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings and fastenings prior to painting operations. These items are to be carefully stored, cleaned and replaced on completion of work in each area. Do not use solvents to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finish. 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Contractor shall furnish Owner additional maintenance stock of not less than five (5) gallons of each color of finish coating, except that one (1) gallon shall be adequate for all accent and trim colors. B. Containers are to be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for identification. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINISH MATERIALS A. Paints, Enamels and Fillers: Type and brand scheduled herein, ready-mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Pigments fully ground maintaining a soft paste consistency, capable of readily and uniformly being dispersed to a complete homogeneous mixture. Paints shall have good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 1. Paint materials shall contain no lead or other toxic substances. Refer to paragraph 1.03.C. 2. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: a. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. b. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. c. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC content of not more than 250 g/L. d. Floor Coatings: VOC content of not more than 100 g/L. e. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0% by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). f. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: 1) Acrolein 14) Formaldehyde 2) Acrylonitrile 15) Hexavalent chromium 3) Antimony 16) Isophorone 4) Benzene 17) Lead 5) Butyl benzyl phthalate 18) Mercury 6) Cadmium 19) Methyl ethyl ketone 7) Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate 20) Methyl isobutyl ketone 8) Di-n-butyl phthalate 21) Methylene chloride 9) Di-n-octyl phthalate 22) Naphthalene 10) 1,2-dichlorobenzene 23) Toluene (methylbenzene) 11) Diethyl phthalate 24) 1,1,1-trichloroethane 12) Dimethyl phthalate 25) Vinyl chloride 13) Ethylbenzene B. Paint Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not specifically indicated herein but required to achieve the finishes specified, of high quality and approved manufacturer. 09900 - 4 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Color(s) as selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full color selection, unless otherwise indicated. Painter shall prepare samples for the Architect's approval of each paint color selected. Remake samples until approved, at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Approved Manufacturers: Use the same brand throughout the project for each type of paint material specified: 1. Sherwin-Williams ProMar 200 Series (for exterior) and Harmony or ProGreen 200 Low-VOC Series) (for interior), as basis of design. 2. Paint: Pittsburgh, Diamond Vogel, ICI Dulux, Fuller O'Brien, Benjamin Moore, Kelly Moore, Kwal-Howell and Sophir Morris. Using product lines of same quality, function and performance are acceptable only as approved by the Architect prior to bidding. 3. Stain, varnish and other transparent finishes: Not used. 2.02 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A. For application of the specified paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of the particular paint by the manufacturer and approved by the Architect, except as limited by paragraph 2.02.C. B. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that the proposed equipment is actually compatible with the material to be applied and that integrity of the finish will not be jeopardized by use of this equipment. C. Contractor shall use the following application equipment for the specific condition listed, unless otherwise approved: 1. Exposed Structural Steel and Decking: Spray application only. Brushing or rolling is not permitted. 2. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Spray application only. Brushing or rolling is not permitted. 3. Other areas indicated in paragraph 3.03. 2.03 COLOR SCHEDULES A. The Architect will prepare marked-up elevations or a color schedule with samples for guidance in painting. Contractor shall furnish samples of all other related finish materials for coordination in preparation of the color schedule. B. The Architect may select, allocate and vary colors on different surfaces throughout the work, subject to the following: 1. Exterior Work: A maximum of two (2) different colors will be used, plus variations for trim, doors, miscellaneous work and metal work. 2. Interior Work: A maximum of three (3) different pigmented colors will be used, plus variations for trim and wall surfaces and wainscots. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Subcontractor shall thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted or finished prior to commencing work. Notify the Architect of any condition that may potentially affect proper application and final appearance. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected to the satisfaction of the painting subcontractor. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of surfaces. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. General: All preparatory work shall be subject to evaluation and acceptance by the Architect. 09900 - 5 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents Painting subcontractor will accept responsibility for the preparation of all surfaces, as specified herein, prior to finishing. B. Cleaning of all surfaces shall be done with non-toxic, biodegradable products that comply with the California Code of Regulations, Title 17, Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning products. C. Ensure that the Contractor has corrected defects in all surfaces which may adversely affect work of this Section, including but not limited to: 1. Hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Exposed structural steel work. 3. Gypsum wallboard surfaces and texturing. 4. Welding and other attachments. D. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse well with clean water and allow the surface to dry completely. E. Remove surface contamination and oils from galvanized surfaces and wash with solvent. Apply a coat of etching-type primer. F. Remove grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust from steel, ferrous metal and iron surfaces. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing, sandblasting or any other necessary method. 1. Clean unprimed surfaces by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring that weld joints, bolts and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime surfaces as required. 2. Sand and scrape shop-primed surfaces to remove loose primer and rust. Feather out edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent and prime surfaces as required. 3. Back-prime structural steel and ferrous metal surfaces to be in contact with concrete, unless furnished by other Sections. 4. Ensure that excess weld slag or flux deposits are removed, and that all exposed welds are ground or sanded to specified appearance. G. Priming of gypsum wallboard prior to application of texturing is specified in Section 09260, Gypsum Wallboard. No further priming is required for the drywall surfaces by this Section, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. H. Prime top and bottom edges of metal doors with enamel undercoat when they are to be painted. I. Remove all hardware from doors before painting. Masking of hardware is unacceptable. J. Schedule painting prior to installation of prefinished materials, specialties, furnishings and fixtures to the extent possible, including but not limited to: 1. Finish hardware. 2. Fire extinguishers and other specialties. 3. Surface-mounted mechanical and electrical devices such as thermostats, prefinished grilles and diffusers, switchplates and outlet cover plates, etc. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply finish materials in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Ensure that surfaces have been properly prepared and primed prior to application of finish coats. B. Apply each coat at the proper consistency. Allow each coat of finish to dry before the following coat is applied, unless directed otherwise by manufacturer. Sand lightly between coats to achieve the required finish. C. Brush Applications: 1. Brush out and work the brush coats onto the surface in an even film. 2. Finish coats shall be finished by roping the paint, moving from wet to dry areas. 3. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness and other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 09900 - 6 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents D. Spray Applications: 1. Except as specified in paragraph 2.02 or as specifically otherwise approved by the Architect, confine spray application to metal framework and similar surfaces where hand brush work would be inferior. 2. Gypsum wallboard shall be finished by spray application, then back-rolled with roller equipment to result in specified mil thickness, moving from wet to dry areas. 3. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide the hiding equivalent of brush coats. 4. Do not double back with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two (2) coats in one (1) pass. E. For completed work, match the approved samples as to texture, color and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with the specified requirements. 3.04 PAINTING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Painting of exposed equipment, louvers, ductwork, piping, conduits, etc. shall be work of this Section, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint all ductwork, piping, conduit and devices to be exposed to view in the completed project, unless prefinished or in concealed areas as defined in paragraph 1.02. 2. Coordinate extent of field finishing of mechanical and electrical equipment with the Architect as necessary. 3. Architect retains the right to require prefinished diffusers, grilles and other mechanical or electrical devices to be field finished, whether or not specifically called for. 4. Prime and paint insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports in exposed locations, except where items are plated or covered with a prefinished coating, or where located in mechanical chase spaces. Finish paint primed equipment to color selected. B. Color Coding: Refer to Mechanical and Electrical Sections for requirements concerning color coding, identification branding of equipment, ducting, piping and conduit, if required. 1. Color code equipment, piping, conduit and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. 2. Color banding and identification (flow arrows, naming, numbering, etc.). C. Remove grilles, covers and access panels for mechanical and electrical systems from location and paint separately. D. Paint face(s) and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them. 1. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over or spattered. E. Do not paint gas meters, electric meters and similar exterior equipment provided by outside utility providers, if not permitted by those agencies. Coordinate requirements with the appropriate Subcontractor prior to painting. 1. Exposed gas piping leading to the gas meters shall be painted. 2. Exterior surface-mounted meter centers, disconnects, CT cabinets, exposed conduit and similar equipment shall be painted, where not specifically excluded above. 3. Interior panelboard cabinet frames and doors shall not be painted, unless specified elsewhere. 3.05 PAINTING ROOFTOP ACCESSORIES A. Paint exposed roof penetrations, flues, roof vents, exhaust vent caps, pipe vents, etc., where located on sloped roofs or otherwise exposed to view, unless prefinished or otherwise indicated. B. Rooftop mechanical equipment, exhaust fan hoods, roof access hatches, pipe vents and other roof penetrations need not be painted where concealed from view by parapet walls at least 2'-0" high or other obstructions, as determined by the Architect. The Architect retains the right to require 09900 - 7 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents these items to be painted, if in his sole opinion, they are exposed to view. 3.06 CLEANING A. Promptly remove paint from adjacent materials or surfaces as work proceeds where spilled, splashed or splattered. B. Cleaning of all surfaces shall be done with non-toxic, biodegradable products that comly with the California Code of Regulations, Title 17, Section 94509, VOC standards for cleaning products. C. During progress of work, keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials and debris. D. Place cotton cloths and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from the site. E. Upon completion of work, leave premises neat and clean, to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.07 QUALITY CONTROL A. Painted finishes shall be subject to evaluation and approval to the satisfaction of the Architect, including but not limited to, the following characteristics: 1. Consistency and smoothness of surface. 2. Coverage and mil thickness. 3. Color match between adjacent areas. 4. Compliance with approved sample(s). PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 EXTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE NOTE: MWF indicates minimum wet film thickness which is a per coat measurement in mils thickness. Systems are based on Sherwin-Williams (S-W) or as noted. A. Exterior Hollow Metal or Ferrous Metal Surfaces: 1. Location: Hollow metal doors and frames, pipe bollards and guardrails. 2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils. 4. Product: S-W Industrial Enamel. 5. Color(s): To be selected. B. Metal Boxes, Conduits and Mechanical Equipment: 1. Location: As shown on the Drawings or required by project conditions. 2. Primer: One (1) coat, factory primed. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, MWF 3.6 mils where not factory finished. 4. Product: S-W A-100 Satin Latex House and Trim. 5. Color: To match adjacent surfaces. C. Exterior Galvanized Surfaces: 1. Location: Galvanized metal flashings, roof vents and flues, where exposed to view. 2. Primer: One (1) coat galvanized steel primer, MWF 3.6 mils. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd-resin enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils. 4. Product: S-W Industrial Enamel. 5. Color: To match adjacent surfaces, or as selected. D. Louvers: Paint where not prefinished by manufacturer. E. Pavement Markings: Specified in Section 02580. F. Exterior Architectural Precast Concrete Wall Panels: Clear silicone sealer, as specified. G. Exterior Signage: Prefinished by manufacturer. 09900 - 8 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents H. Steel Sectional Overhead Doors: Primed by manufacturer. Field finished by painting subcontractor. 4.02 INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE A. Interior Exposed Steel Surfaces: 1. Location: Exposed surfaces of interior steel columns. 2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, stain, MWF 4.4 mils. 4. Product: S-W Harmony Alkyd Satin Enamel. 5. Color(s): To be selected. B. Interior Hollow Metal or Ferrous Metal Surfaces: 1. Location: Hollow metal doors and frames, handrails and guardrails, and miscellaneous metals. 2. Primer: One (1) coat shop prime or inhibitive metal primer, MWF 3.6 mils. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, MWF 4.4 mils. 4. Product: S-W ProGreen 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel. 5. Color(s): To be selected. C. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry Surfaces: 1. Location: Exposed concrete block, unless scheduled for integral coloration or epoxy finish. 2. Primer: One (1) coat vinyl emulsion block filler, MWF. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, MWF 3.6 mils. 4. Product: S-W ProGreen 200 Latex Eg-Shel Enamel. 5. Color(s): To be selected. D. Interior Cast-in-Place or Architectural Precast Concrete Surfaces: 1. Location: Exposed concrete, unless scheduled for clear silicone sealer or other applied finish. 2. Primer: One (1) coat vinyl emulsion block filler, MRF. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, MWF 3.6 mils. 4. Product: S-W ProGreen 200 Latex Eg-Shel Enamel. E. Interior Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces: 1. Location: Walls, ceilings and soffits as scheduled on the Drawings. 2. Primer: Vinyl emulsion sealer, flat, MWF 3.6 mils. 3. Finish: Two (2) coats acrylic latex, satin, MWF 3.6 mils per coat. 4. Product: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex, Satin Latex. 5. Color(s): To be selected. F. Concrete Floors: Finishes specified in Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete. G. Steel Sectional Overhead Doors: Primed by manufacturer, no field finishing required for interior surfaces. H. Fire Protection Specialties: Prefinished by manufacturer. I. Door Hardware: Prefinished by manufacturer. J. Interior of Metal Roof Deck: Not painted. END OF SECTION DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. 10210 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 10210 METAL WALL LOUVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install prefinished architectural metal wall louvers, including but not limited to: 1. Exterior wall louvers for outside air intake, exhaust fan discharge and other mechanical equipment. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 03450, Architectural Precast Concrete: Louver openings in architectural precast concrete wall panels. 3. Division 15, Mechanical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Materials shall be certified by the Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA) for air performance and water penetration. 2. ASTM B221: Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes. 3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in the fabrication of architectural metal wall louvers of the type(s) specified, with a minimum five (5) years experience in projects of similar scale and complexity. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for all components or products, including certified test reports of required testing. B. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations and sections of each section of metal wall louvers specified, including installation details. 1. Indicate locations for interlocking vertical mullions, if recommended by the manufacturer for specific louver size(s), location(s) or project conditions. C. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's standard finishes for selection by the Architect. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver metal wall louvers to the site until wall panels are fully prepared to accept installation. B. Maintain protective coverings on all components and finishes until louvers are permanently installed. C. Protect louvers and finishes from damage during installation and protect adjacent surfaces, finishes and materials from damage during installation of louvers. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's written one-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. 10210 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL LOUVERS A. General: Prefinished, factory fabricated, stationary (fixed) blade extruded aluminum louvers in locations shown on the Drawings. B. Construction: Fabricate frame and blades from minimum 14-gage (0.081") extruded aluminum 6063-T52 alloy with reinforcing bosses. C. Sizes: 1. Exterior: 75" wide x 30" high and 96" wide x 30" high nominal, or as required for openings in precast concrete wall panels. 2. Thickness: 4". D. Blade Style: Stationary (fixed), mounted at 45° slope to the "outside" face. Blades shall be spaced at 4" o.c. or manufacturer's standard spacing as required for cut-off of sight lines. 1. Exterior outside air intake and attic ventilation louver blades shall have vertical offset "hook" in blades for moisture elimination. E. Bird/Insect Screens: 18x14 aluminum mesh, .0123" diameter, 5056 clad. F. Free Air Space: 1. Exterior: Minimum 46% free area. 2. Interior: Minimum 6.67 sq. ft. per 4' x 4' unit. G. Frames: Provide manufacturer's standard integral head, sill, jamb frames and interlocking vertical mullions at multiple panelized sections. 1. Head sections to have exterior drip lip. 2. Sill sections to have integral water stop. 3. Jamb sections to have returns, acting as a water bar. 4. Heads, sills and jambs to be one-piece structural members with integral caulking slot and retaining bead. 5. Slideable interlocking mullion sections to have provision for expansion and contraction. H. Anchorage Devices: Manufacturer's standard concealed or countersunk aluminum or stainless steel fasteners. I. Finish: Kynar 500 coating with color to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard colors. J. Approved Models and Manufacturers: 1. Exterior: Model ESK-402 by Greenheck, Schofield, WI, (715) 359-6171, as the basis of design. 2. Construction Specialties (C/S), Cranford, NJ, (800) 631-7379. 3. Arrow United Industries, Wyalusing, PA, (570) 746-1888. 4. The Airolite Company, Marietta, OH, (740) 373-7676. 5. American Warming and Ventilating, Holland, OH, (419) 865-5000. 6. Industrial Louvers Inc., Delano, MN, (800) 328-3421. 7. Ruskin, Kansas City, MO, (816) 761-7476. 8. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function, performance, quality, and appearance are acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall inspect the conditions under which work is to installed and notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory dimensions or conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. Beginning work shall be considered acceptance of conditions. B. Field verify dimensions affecting work of this Section prior to fabrication. 10210 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents C. Ensure that openings have been properly sized, framed and prepared for installation of louvers and frames. D. Ensure that flashings have been properly installed to divert moisture to the exterior of the building. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install prefinished, factory fabricated wall louvers and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. B. Install louvers in openings properly aligned and level. C. Install louvers rigid and square with specified fasteners of non-corrosive metals. D. Install interlocking vertical mullions for louvers requiring intermediate vertical support, as proposed in the shop drawings and approved by the Architect. E. Maintain required clearances and allow for expansion and contraction of materials. F. Leave installation of metal wall louvers prepared to receive sealants, specified in Section 07900. G. Coordinate installation of wall louvers with Division 15, Mechanical, for installation of fans, filters, ductwork and other mechanical equipment behind louvers. PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 EXTERIOR LOUVER SCHEDULE A. Furnish and install exterior prefinished architectural louvers in the following locations: 1. Outside air intake louvers. 2. Exhaust fan discharge louvers. END OF SECTION 10430 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 10430 SIGNAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Relocate existing surface-mounted plaque-type building signage as shown on the Drawings. B. Furnish pole-mounted directional traffic signage along vehicular access roads. C. Furnish column-mounted directional traffic signage within the building. D. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise. E. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Section 01714, Construction Waste Management. 2. Section 02580, Pavement Markings: Painted pavement markings. 3. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete: Signage foundation construction, including footings, foundation walls and piers. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. Site Traffic Signage: a. Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT): Standard Specifications. b. U. S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration: Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). c. City of Fort Collins Engineering Department: Design and Construction Standards. 2. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data and Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's product literature, shop drawings and schedule of required signage indicating type, size, style and method of installation. 1. Shop drawings and schedule shall illustrate each required sign for size, style and copy, and indicate quantity required for each. B. Samples: Submit samples of manufacturer's full line of standard colors and finishes for selection by the Architect. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Package separately or in like groups, as applicable. Include installation template, hardware or adhesive specified and installation instructions. 1.05 WARRANTIES A. General: Provide manufacturer’s written one-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. 10430 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SITE TRAFFIC SIGNAGE A. Type: Pole-mounted graphics type. B. Size, Color, Graphics and Copy: As required by the Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT) and/or the City of Fort Collins Engineering Department standards. C. Materials: Sheet steel with painted or vinyl lettering and/or graphics, as required by CDOT or the City of Fort Collins. 1. Posts: Telestar tubing in accordance with City of Fort Collins standards. Steel posts shall be certified by the manufacturer to conform to the breakaway requirements of AASHTO "Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs". 2. Aluminum sign blanks shall conform to ASTM B209 Alloy 5052-H38. D. Mounting Height: In accordance with City of Fort Collins standards: 6'-0" high. E. Traffic Signage Copy: 1. "FIRE LANE – NO PARKING" signs, pole-mounted. 2. "ONE WAY, DO NOT ENTER" signs, pole-mounted. 3. "SPEED LIMIT 10 MPH" and "SPEED LIMIT 5 MPH" signs, pole-mounted and/or column- mounted. 4. "CITY VEHICLE ACCESS ONLY" signs, pole-mounted. F. Approved Signage Fabricators: 1. DaVinci Sign Systems, Inc., Fort Collins, CO, Mike Long, (970) 203-9292. 2. Adcon Signs, Fort Collins, CO, (970) 484-3637. 3. Gardner Signs, Inc., Fort Collins, CO, (970) 482-3976. 4. Shaw Signs, Fort Collins, CO (970) 493-6244. 5. ABC Sign Works, Inc., Fort Collins, CO, (970) 223-9211. 6. Custom signage companies offering design services and fabrication capabilities meeting the design intent of this Section are acceptable upon approval by the Architect prior to bidding. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Exact copy for all traffic signage to be verified with the Owner and the City of Fort Collins Engineering Department and coordinated with the Architect prior to fabrication. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Installation shall be by qualified signage fabrication company personnel in accordance with accepted industry standards. B. Site Directional and Traffic Signage: Install in locations indicated on the Drawings and/or specified in Part 4 below. Securely mount and place in accordance with City of Fort Collins standards. Confirm locations of each traffic control sign in public rights-of-way with City inspector prior to installation. C. Reinstall existing surface-mounted plaque sign at chassis wash overhead door as shown on the Drawings. 10430 - 3 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents PART 4 SCHEDULES 4.01 SCHEDULE OF EXTERIOR SIGNAGE A. Site traffic signage shall be installed in the locations shown on the Drawings, and as specified herein. 1. "FIRE LANE – NO PARKING" signs shall be installed along designated fire lanes where specifically indicated on the Drawings. 2. "ONE WAY – DO NOT ENTER" signs shall be installed in the site locations shown on the Drawings. 3. "SPEED LIMIT 10 MPH" signs shall be installed in the site locations shown on the Drawings. 4. "SPEED LIMIT 5 MPH" signs shall be installed at each bus aisle within the building in the locations shown on the Drawings. 5. "CITY VEHICLE ACCESS ONLY" signs shall be installed in the site locations shown on the Drawings. 6. Other miscellaneous site traffic signage as shown on the Drawings or required by any jurisdiction with authority over the Project. END OF SECTION 10520 - 1 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish portable fire extinguishers, complete with surface-mounted wall brackets. B. Installation of same, unless arranged for otherwise. C. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Division 15, Mechanical: Performance specification for fire sprinkler system. 2. Division 16, Electrical: Fire alarm system. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Conform to the current requirements of applicable portions of standards, codes and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified. 1. NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers". 2. UL Labels: Provide units that have been approved and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. 3. Applicable provisions of the codes referenced in Section 01060, or as adopted by any jurisdiction with authority over this Project. B. All fire protection specialties shall be furnished by one (1) manufacturer throughout the project. C. Certification: Supplier shall certify that the fire extinguisher type specified for each space or building is appropriate for the type of materials and/or hazards anticipated to be encountered in each space, particularly specialized areas such as electrical equipment rooms. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data on all fire protection accessories and specialties for approval by the Architect. 1.04 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's standard one-year warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PORTABLE MULTIPURPOSE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Type: Units shall be 10-lb. multipurpose dry chemical pressurized type equipped with pressure gauge and which do not need recharging, except after use. 1. Units shall be tested and approved by UL with a minimum 4A-60BC rating. UL rating shall appear on extinguisher labels and be attached to, and a part of, fire extinguisher units. 2. Ensure that units are properly charged prior to installation. 3. Instructions for repairs, maintenance and recharging shall be attached. 4. Refer to certification requirements specified in paragraph 1.02 above. B. Approved Manufacturer: 1. MP Series by Larsen Manufacturing, Minneapolis, MN, (800) 527-7367, as basis of design. 2. JL Industries, Bloomington, MN, (800) 554-6077. 3. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are acceptable. 10520 - 2 Transfort Facility Expansion 100% Construction Documents 2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER WALL BRACKETS A. Type: Manufacturer’s standard mounting bracket, suited to fire extinguisher supplied, white baked enamel finish, complete with anchorage devices. 1. Supply each bracket with one (1) fire extinguisher specified above. B. Approved Manufacturer: 1. B Series by Larsen Manufacturing, Minneapolis, MN, (800) 527-7367, as basis of design. 2. JL Industries, Bloomington, MN, (800) 554-6077. 3. Manufacturers providing materials of same design, function and performance are acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Installer shall examine the substrates and conditions under which the fire protection specialties are to be installed and notify the Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. B. Verify servicing, charging and tagging of all fire extinguishers. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire protection accessories where shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. Securely fasten all components in position, square and plumb, in accordance with recognized industry practices. B. Install multipurpose extinguishers in locations as shown on the Drawings or as required to comply with governing regulations. C. Install fire extinguishers and/or cabinets at mounting height to comply with handicapped accessibility requirements. END OF SECTION DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15010 - 1 MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15010 - MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. SPECIAL NOTE A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and the applicable provi- sions of General Requirements are hereby adopted and made part of Division 15, Mechanical Work. B. The Mechanical Drawings and the Division 15 sections listed below constitute the Mechanical Construction portion of this project. 15010 Mechanical Special Conditions 15050 Materials and Methods 15250 Mechanical Systems Insulation 15440 Plumbing 15850 Heating and Ventilating 15950 Automatic Temperature Control 15990 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing C. Where "Project Manager" is used in this Specification, we mean that person so designated by the Owner. 2. SCOPE OF WORK A. These specifications are for the chassis wash and bus parking garage additions, plumbing, heating, and ventilation systems only for the City of Fort Collins Transfort Facility. 3. DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS A. Contract drawings for mechanical work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, ducts, conduits, piping, and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and outlets. Mechanical trades shall follow these drawings in laying out their work, consult general construction drawings to familiarize themselves with all conditions affecting their work, and shall verify spaces in which their work will be installed. Coordinate work with other trades as job conditions reasonably require. B. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangement, make such changes without extra cost to Owner. C. The drawings are not intended to be scaled for roughing in measurements or to serve as shop drawings. D. The installation details, instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer of the product used, modified, to obtain the best end result shall form the basis of installation of the products for usage on this project except where definite and specific instructions are set forth therein or details are shown on plans. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15010 - 2 MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 4. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. Shop Drawings must be submitted for the following equipment: Valves Insulation Trench Drains Roof Drains Overflow Roof Drains Downspout Nozzles Hose Bibbs Dampers Exhaust Fans Louvers Unit Heaters and Radiant Heaters Temperature Controls All items followed by '*' B. Shop Drawings must first be checked by the Contractor for space conformance and for performance characteristics established by Plans and/or Specifications, and so stamped. Contractor's stamp shall include name and address of Contrac- tor, specification paragraph, item designation and the following statement: "Item(s) has (have) been checked for compliance with specification requirements and space limitations and will meet these conditions; checked by; Date." C. Shop Drawings not stamped as specified will be returned to the Contractor without action. D. Contractor must submit a minimum of 5 sets of complete drawings to Engineer or one set of electronic submittals, stamped as specified above. 5. SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS A. Materials or products specified by name of manufacturer, brand, trade name, or catalog reference, shall be furnished under the contract unless changed by an Addendum or a Contract Modification. Where two or more materials are named, the choice of these shall be optional with the Contractor. B. Prior to award of the Contract, interested parties may request approval of substi- tute materials. Such request shall be made in writing and be delivered to the Engineer no later than 6 days (excluding Sundays and holidays) prior to date and time of receipt of bids. All substitutions approved will be listed in an Addendum. One set of specific detailed technical data for each item shall be delivered to the Engineer. C. See Section 01030, Alternates and Basic Section 01600, Material and Equipment, for Alternates and Substitutions. D. After the award of the Contract, any request for a substitution must be made in writing by the Contractor (not material supplier or subcontractor). Such request shall state the name of the product specified, the name of the product proposed for substitution, the reason for requesting the substitution, and any change in Contract Amount resulting from the substitution. No such substitution shall be made until an appropriate Contract Modification has been issued and approved by the Engineer and the Owner. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15010 - 3 MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS E. The cost of any changes of other trades as a result of use of the substitution materials or equipment must be borne by the Contractor submitting such materi- als or equipment. 6. ORDINANCES, PERMITS, AND CODES A. All work shall be executed in accordance with the following codes applicable to the trade affected and be subject to the inspection of these departments: 1. 2009International Building Code 2. 2009 International Energy Conservation Code 3. 2009 International Plumbing Code 4. 2009 International Mechanical Code 5. All Local, State, and other attending codes, rules, regulations, and amendments. B. Obtain all permits and licenses required for work performed under Division 15 and pay all fees in connection with same. C. Where work required by the drawings and specifications is above the standard required by local regulations, it shall be done as shown and/or specified. 7. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials, apparatus and equipment for the work shall be new and shall be of first class quality, presently being manufactured. Absolutely NO "close-out" type materials, apparatus or equipment shall be allowed. All materials, apparatus and equipment shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be selected and arranged to fit properly into the allotted space allowing proper room for maintenance. 8. TESTS A. Tests shall be performed on the systems specified herein. Any one or all of the systems listed herein may be provided. See Drawings and Specification Section to determine which systems are to be provided. Tests shall be repeated until each system is proven acceptable. All tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer and/or the Owners. A letter must be obtained by the Contractor and be filed with the Engineer's Office, if the tests were witnessed by the Owner. Where required, perform such tests in the presence of local or state building inspection officials. B. General 1. The pipe systems shall be tested to assure they are installed leak tight and structurally safe for the intended purpose. 2. Cleaning and flushing tests and approvals shall be completed before performing pipe system tests to eliminate retesting. 3. If the pipe tests fail, the pipe system shall be repaired and retested. 4. The installing supervisor shall confirm the safe test pressure for vessels, equipment and accessories in the pipe system from drawings, specifica- tions, or name plate data. 5. Notify the Owner's Project Manager 24 hours in advance of each test. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15010 - 4 MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS C. New System Test 1. Instruments, vessels, equipment and accessories which cannot withstand the test pressure required of attached piping shall be isolated from the piping. Remove or block and vent direct operated or self- contained regulators. Each part of a pipe system shall be tested, divided as indicated, for the time specified for the given class of test. 2. Safety valves, relief valves, and rupture discs shall be removed during the pipe system test and reinstalled after the test. New gaskets shall be used when reinstalling all flanged items. Do not change spring settings or make inoperative any safety and relief valves, except valves designed to be pinned or yoked. Normally closed control valves shall be opened before test. 3. Piping and vessels shall be vented when draining them to prevent their collapse by vacuum. 4. The pipe system installer shall provide all necessary connections, vents and drains to test and drain the system completely. 5. Allowance shall be made by the Project Manager for variations of pres- sure and volume due to temperature changes in determining satisfactory maintained test pressure. 6. The Project Manager shall check the test pressure at the beginning and end of each test before acceptance of the system. 7. Pipe systems shall be tested and accepted before insulation, paint, or other covering or coating is applied. The only exceptions are for those parts, including vessels, which have been painted, covered or coated, and have had previous certification tests. 8. The test shall be a hydrostatic test, or as otherwise specified. D. Test Pressures The final test pressure shall be as follows: 1. 125 psig for domestic water systems. 2. 12 ft. of water head held for 30 minutes for waste and vent systems. 3. 1.5 times the system operating pressure, but not less than 3 psig, air pressure held for 24 hours for natural gas piping above and below grade. 4. 1.5 times the system operating pressure air pressure held for 2 hours for hose reel service piping. E. Domestic Water Systems 1. An initial test pressure of 24 psig shall be applied and a visual inspection of the piping system conducted for leaks. The pressure shall then be raised to .75 times the design pressure and rechecked for leaks, after which the final test pressure shall be applied and a final inspection of the piping system performed. 2. Clean domestic water shall be used as the test medium. 3. Trapped air shall be removed. 4. A test gauge with a minimum 4 1/2" diameter dial and a test pressure reading between 1/2 to 3/4 of full scale shall be used. Test gauges approved by the inspector shall be used. 5. The final test pressure shall be held for 4 hours, and then visually inspected for leaks. Pressure loss during the 4 hour test period may be cause for rejection of the system. 6. Retesting Retest piping failing initial tests following correction of defective work. Requirements of initial tests shall apply. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15010 - 5 MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS F. Final Test 1. After final connections to the existing system are made and prior to application of insulation, a final test shall be made of the complete new system. 2. The test shall be visual inspection in normal service test. 3. Systems to be tested - ALL piping systems. 4. The test pressure shall be the working pressure as a minimum or as specified. 5. The test medium shall be the system's working fluid, or as specified. 6. Trapped air shall be removed. 7. Piping shall be visually inspected for leaks. G. Report 1. The Report shall contain the following and be submitted within 24 hours of each test: - Date, time and place of test - Duration of test - Person responsible for testing - Results of test - Action taken to correct deficiency - Outside dry bulb temperature - Inside dry bulb temperature - Specific section of piping tested 2. The Report shall be required for final payment. 3. Notify the Project Manager after successful testing. 9. WARRANTY A. All systems shall be warranted for one (1) year after Owner occupancy in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, etc. of the contract. B. In addition, the Contractor is hereby forewarned that expansive soils may exist in the construction area. Any slab heave and resulting damage during the above warranty period attributable to moisture from any leaking water, sewer, or storm drainage piping installed under this Contract shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner. Restore structure and repair all damage. C. All lubrication, filter changes, and normal maintenance shall be the responsibility of the Owner. 10. START-UP A. At a time set by the Contractor and agreed to by Owner, arrange to place equipment in operation and have available at that time, if required, representa- tives of the manufacturer of equipment to assist in starting equipment, to make necessary adjustments to equipment, and to prove satisfactory operation prior to turning facility over to Owner. B. Any irregularities, faulty equipment, etc., shall be repaired or replaced as re- quired prior to acceptance. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15010 - 6 MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS C. Run operating test for (3) 8 hour periods and submit test data for approval. D. All equipment shall be freshly oiled, cleaned, filters changed with clean media and installation completely finished prior to acceptance. 11. MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. Prepare three (3) typed portfolios with complete sets of high quality copies of Shop Drawings used in the erection of mechanical system. Each piece of equip- ment shall have information on installation, testing, cleaning, and maintenance instructions, list of materials for maintenance, parts list, wiring diagrams, and name and address of authorized service organization, with 24 hour phone number. List shall be alphabetized, within each category. B. Complete manuals shall also include "As Built" temperature control drawings, final balance report. C. Include operating instructions for complete system, including emergency pro- cedures for fire or failure of major equipment, normal starting, operating and shut down, and long term shut down. D. Include maintenance instructions, identified equipment lists, proper lubricants and lubricating instructions for each piece of equipment, necessary cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment schedule. E. Information shall be folded, if necessary, and included in 8-1/2" x 11" hard cover, indexed, loose-leaf 3 ring binder. Multiple binders shall be used if required to contain materials. All material shall be properly identified with job name, date, name and address of Contractor, Architect, and Engineer. F. Portfolios shall be submitted to the Engineer for review of material and comple- teness, and when approved by Engineer, portfolios will be turned over to the Owner. G. Where indicated in the specification, provide the services of a factory trained representative to instruct the Owner's authorized personnel in the operation, control, and maintenance of equipment. Contractor shall instruct Owner's Project Manager and Maintenance Supervisor in the operation and maintenance of all other equipment and systems, using the O & M Manual as a guide, including paragraph C above. Final payment will not be made until this is done to the Owner's satisfaction. 12. PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. All sheaves, belts, gears, couplings, and moving parts are to be protected by approved permanent guards, casings, or railings. 13. PROTECTIVE COVERING FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide covering and shielding for all equipment (including open-ended piping and ductwork) provided under Division 15 and equipment furnished by Owner for installation under Division 15 to protect from mortar, paint, debris, etc., during construction. A polyethylene covering tied securely around the equipment will be acceptable for this purpose. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15010 - 7 MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 14. CLEANING AND PAINTING A. Clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting from Mechanical Con- tractor's work or operations, leaving the job and equipment in a clean condition. All existing areas in which work is performed shall be cleaned and restored to their original condition upon completion of the project. B. Air surfaces of all coils, fans, air units, air filters, etc., shall be wiped clean or washed if required. All plumbing fixtures shall be thoroughly cleaned of all for- eign matter, including stickers. Clean all items furnished, such as motors, etc., leaving the entire installation in a first-class condition. C. Equipment and materials provided under Division 15 will be painted by the General Contractor except where specified otherwise. However, any mechanical equipment which has sustained damage to the manufacturer's prime and finish coats of paint shall be restored to the original condition and appearance prior to application of finish paint. 15. FINAL INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing to make arrangements for a final inspection. B. After the final inspection is made, the Contractor will receive a list of items requiring adjustment, correction, replacement or completion. C. The Contractor shall comply completely with all the listed requirements within thirty (30) days of receipt of list. Should the Contractor fail to perform within this time limit, the Engineer and/or Owner reserves the right to have the work completed by others and the cost deducted from the contract price. D. The Contractor shall initial and date each item as completed and return copy to Engineer prior to re-inspection. 16. EXISTING OUTSIDE UTILITIES A. Utility companies shall be contacted and advised of proposed work prior to the start of excavation. B. Active Utilities: When encountered in work, protect, brace, support existing active sewers, gas, electric, other services where required for proper execution of work. If existing active utilities are encountered that are not indicated and which required relocation, make request in writing for determination. Do not proceed with work until written directions are received. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services that are to remain. C. Inactive Utilities: When encountered in work, remove, cap, or plug inactive services. Notify utility companies or municipal agencies having jurisdiction; protect or remove these services as directed. D. Interruption of Utilities: Where work makes temporary shutdown of services unavoidable, shut down at night, or at such times as approved by Owner, which will cause least interference with established operating routine. Arrange to work continuously, including overtime, if required, to make necessary connections to existing work. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15010 - 8 MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 17. PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Brady 2. Seton 3. Westline Products 4. Approved Equal B. Mark all pipe on both sides of partitions and slabs, at take-offs, valves, connec- tions to equipment and at intervals not exceeding 25 feet, identifying markers, black on background color band; over 3" diameter pipe, 2" letters on 2 1/4" color band. Marker shall indicate domestic "CW", etc. C. Show flow direction with arrows, immediately adjacent to all pipe identification markers. 1 1/8" x 4 2/3" arrows shall be black on background color scheduled for respective service. D. Attach identifying markers and arrows on lower quadrant of overhead pipes, and tape ends. E. Application on soft insulation or chalky surface; binding tape shall be spirally wrapped and overlapped around the circumference of the insulation for a suffi- cient distance to mount identification markers and arrows to taped surface. F. Pipe Identification List - Note: Any one or all of the following services may be provided. See Drawings and Specifications Sections to determine which servic- es are to be provided. IDENTIFICATION BACKGROUND COLOR Cold Water Green Roof and Overflow Roof Drain Green Natural Gas Yellow Service Reel Piping Yellow 18. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify all key equipment, fans, thermostats, controls, relays, dampers, etc., using Dymo Embossing Tape punched with M-3 Dymomite hand embossing tool. Punch out 3/32" holes at each side of label and secure with Parker-Kalon self- tapping screws in addition to adhesive. B. Coordinate the location of all ceiling access panels for gypboard ceilings with the General Contractor, so that there is access to each valve, volume damper, fire damper or other equipment or temperature controls. C. Familiarize the Owner's maintenance personnel with the locations of equipment identified above. 19. TEMPORARY HEATING OF BUILDING A. Provide temporary smokeless unit heaters as required. Installation, maintenance, and fuel cost for temporary heat shall be at the expense of this Contractor. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15010 - 9 MECHANICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS OR B. As specified in the General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions of this Specification. Permanent heating system shall not be used for temporary heat during construction until all walls are taped and textured, without specific approval by the Owner in writing. 20. ASBESTOS A. Products, equipment or materials that contain asbestos shall not be allowed in the construction of the mechanical and plumbing systems on this project. END OF SECTION TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15050 - 1 MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15050 - MATERIALS AND METHODS 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer- ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, is hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specifications. B. Materials and methods specified herein apply to all sections under Division 15 of the specifications. Intent of this section is to set forth common requirements and to avoid repetition under each particular section. See drawings and/or Division 15 Specification sections to determine which systems are to be provided. 2. PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Provide pipe and fittings of type and materials scheduled herein, of quantities shown on the drawings and as required to connect fixtures and equipment. All fittings shall have ANSI tolerances and dimensions and have ASTM materials for conformance with piping below. B. Provide standard weight IPS brass nipples and adapters where required between copper tubing and fixtures. Steel or iron nipples are not permitted between copper lines and brass valves or trim. C. Joints: Joints in all copper domestic water and condensate drainage piping systems shall be made using 95/5 tin/antimony or equal tensile strength solder that contains no lead. Engelhard "Silvabrite 100", Oatey "Safeflo" or Canfield "Watersafe" are all acceptable. Use flux recommended by solder manufacturer. Absolutely no lead containing solders or fluxes will be allowed in any portion of the work. The Owner reserves the right to inspect solders, fluxes and joints. Any joint found containing lead solder shall be cause for resoldering all joints made in all systems in the building. D. Pipe and Fitting Schedule 1. Trench drain and rain water piping below grade. a. Hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe, extra heavy weight, centrifugally spun, ASTM A-74, bearing the mark of CISPI. Fittings shall be cast iron hub and spigot, ASTM A-74, bearing the mark of CISPI. Joints shall be positive-seal elastomeric compression type, Tyler Ty-Seal or equal. ASTM C564, CISPI 301. 2. Rain water piping in building above ground. a. Hubless cast iron, service weight, centrifugally spun per CISPI- 301, bearing the mark of CISPI. Fittings shall be hubless cast iron, ASTM A-74, bearing the mark of CISPI. Joints, neoprene sleeve and stainless steel retaining band with double screw connectors bearing the mark of NSF, installed per manufactur- er's recommendations. CISPI-310-(latest edition). 3. Domestic water (cold water) in building above ground. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15050 - 2 MATERIALS AND METHODS a. 3” and smaller: Piping shall be Type "L" hard drawn copper water tube, per ASTM B88. Fittings wrought copper, solder joint. b. Except as otherwise specified elsewhere, Type "L" soft drawn copper may be used adjacent to fixtures and equipment. 4. Gas piping. a. 2 ½” and Smaller: i Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 black. ii Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, malleable iron. iii Joints: NFPA 54, threaded. b. 3” and Larger: i Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 40 black. ii Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel welding type. iii Joints: Welded to ASME B31.1. c. Below Grade: i Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11. ii Fittings: ASTM D 2683 or ASTM D 2513 socket type. iii Joints: Fusion welded. 5. Service reel piping. a. 2 ½” and Smaller: i Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M Schedule 80 black. ii Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300, malleable iron. iii Joints: ASTM B1.20.1, threaded. 3. VALVES* A. Provide valves in piping where indicated and provide shut-off valves in lines serving each piece of equipment, including mixing valves, wall hydrants, sill cocks, pumps, water heaters, plumbing fixtures, eyewash stations, etc. Also isolate each major zone, building wing, loop, etc. 1. Ball valves shall be manufactured by Apollo, Nibco or Watts. 2. Valves by other manufacturers must have prior approval. B. Valve Schedule. 1. Shut-off valves for domestic water, hose reel service, and natural gas shall be full flow ball valves, rated at 600 psig WOG. a. Apollo 77............Bronze Threaded or Soldered Ball Valve b. Nibco 585...........Bronze Threaded or Soldered Ball Valve c. Watts FBV-3C...Bronze Threaded or Soldered Ball Valve TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15050 - 3 MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. Where ball valves are used in insulated piping, handle extensions shall be provided. Extension shall be manufactured as an option for the valve furnished and shall extend the handle a minimum of 1/4" beyond the insulation jacket. 3. Contractor shall verify that ball valve seat and stem seal materials are compatible with the fluids used in that particular system. 4. Ball valves for natural gas service shall be threaded and carry CSA approval for natural gas use. 4. UNIONS A. Make connections at each piece of equipment with unions or flanges located for quick/easy disconnect for maintenance. Provide unions or flanges on: 1. Equipment 2. Meters 3. Tanks B. Use the same materials and finish as the piping system. C. Use dielectric unions or flanges where copper or brass piping is connected to ferrous piping or equipment. Epco Model FX, FB, EA. (All junctions of dissimilar metals). D. Unions and flanges are not required at equipment where flanged valves, strain- ers, control valves, etc., are used. E. Omit unions and flanges in straight pipe runs or in concealed locations, except for flanged valve applications. F. Union Schedule: 1. Copper Piping a. All pipe sizes: Copper, ground joint union. Chase 402, Mueller WC407. 2. Natural Gas and Service Reel Piping a. Sizes 2” and smaller: i Malleable iron unions with ground brass to iron seat, 150 pound working steam pressure. (a) Anvil International; Figure 463. (b) Or equal. ii Service Reel piping unions shall be Class 300 malleable iron. b. Sizes 2 ½” and larger ( welded ) TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15050 - 4 MATERIALS AND METHODS i Forged steel flanges, 150 pound, welding neck or slip on with raised faces and 1/16” Garlock 9712 EPDM or Gylon style 3565 Evelon gaskets and carbon steel bolts. (a) Grinnell Fig. 1911 and 1921 (b) Or equal. 5. PIPE AND DUCT SLEEVES A. Provide sleeves for all pipes and ducts passing through floors, roofs, walls, and full height partitions. Ducts passing through gypboard walls do not require sleeves. B. For sleeves passing through fire rated walls/floors, fill void with fire stop material. C. At points where a duct passes through a fire rated wall/floor and a fire damper is being installed, the duct sleeve can be eliminated. D. Pipe Sleeves: 1. Floor Sleeves in Exposed Areas: Schedule 40 PVC pipe, reamed, ex- tending 2" above floor in equipment rooms and wet areas and 1/4" above the floor in all other locations. 2. Masonry Wall Sleeves: Schedule 40 PVC pipe reamed, and finished flush with wall. 3. Roof Sleeves and Floor Sleeves in Concealed Locations (as in chases)-- Schedule 40 PVC. 4. Make pipe sleeves 1/2" larger inside diameter than the outside diameter of the pipe or pipe insulation, where insulated. Fabricate sleeves from new materials, with ends cut square. 5. Floor Sleeves, where water is to be kept out, fill with graphite packing and caulking compound. E. Sealing of all other sleeves shall be as specified under Section for Mechanical Systems Insulation. F. Sleeve Flashing, Caulking. For sleeves passing through membrane waterproof- ing or lead safe, except as otherwise specified herein, provide 16 oz. soft sheet copper of 4 pound lead per square foot flashing extending 9" beyond sleeve in all directions; secure to waterproofing or lead safe; turn down flashing into space between pipe and sleeve, insert oakum gasket, pour lead, caulk water tight. Over air plenums caulk all sleeves with polysulfite base sealing compound conforming to ASA A116.1 (Thiokol). 1. Where sleeves are indicated with flashing flanges provide Josam, or equal, 26420 series threaded riser sleeve with anchor lugs, flashing flange, steel pipe extensions. 6. FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES A. Plates shall be installed on all exposed pipe passing through walls, floors, or ceilings. Plates shall be as manufactured by Ritter Pattern and Casting Compa- ny, 120 Walker Street, New York, New York 10013, or approved equal, chrome TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15050 - 5 MATERIALS AND METHODS plated steel plates with set screw and concealed hinge. Cut plates to fit flush at close-spaced piping locations. 7. PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS* A. Provide pipe hangers, supports, anchors, and guides as specified herein and/or indicated, conforming to manufacturer's standardization society specification SP- 69. Locate at changes in direction and at concentrated loads. Hanger design shall permit vertical adjustment and lateral movement to allow pipe expansion. Double nut hangers where piping is subject to water hammer, i.e. near flush valves and solenoid valves. B. Bear hot piping directly on hangers or on insulation shields and cold piping on insulation, shielded as described under article for insulation. Provide pipe hangers of ample diameter for cold piping insulation and vapor barrier jacket. C. Use carbon steel adjustable hangers as follows: 1. Steel and cast iron, 2 1/2" and larger. Grinnell Fig. 260, Fee and Mason Fig. 239, Elcen Fig. 12. 2. Steel, plastic and cast iron, 2" and smaller. Grinnell Fig. 69, Fee and Mason Fig. 400, Elcen Fig. 202. 3. Copper pipe 2" and smaller. Grinnell Fig. CT-69, Fee and Mason Fig. 389, Elcen Fig. 389. D. Three or more pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers using 2 clevis hang- ers and a capped pipe cross member. Isolate copper pipe from bearing on the cross member with an electrically insulating material. 1. Where indicated trapeze hangers shall be "Unistrut" or equal, double channel with drop rods. Where pipes are indicated to be supported from the underside of trapeze hanger provide "Unistrut" or equal speed clamps. Isolate copper pipe from cross member same as specified above. E. Steel gas piping on the roof shall be supported on manufactured pipe supports located at manufacturer’s recommended spacing or as specified below for steel piping. 1. OMG Roofing Products – Large Pipe Guard. 2. Miro # 3-R-4. 3. Cooper B Line #DBR4-6. 4. Prior Approved Equal. F. Support horizontal steel piping per SP-69 or as follows, whichever is more stringent: Pipe Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing Up to 1 1/4" 3/8" 8 ft. 1 1/2” to 3 1/2" 1/2" 8 ft. 4” & 5" 5/8" 12 ft. 6” 3/4” 12 ft. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15050 - 6 MATERIALS AND METHODS G. Support horizontal copper piping per SP-69 or as follows, whichever is more stringent: Nom. Tubing Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing Up to 1 1/2" 3/8" 6 ft. 2” to 2 1/2" 3/8" 8 ft. 3” 1/2” 9 ft. H. Support horizontal hub and spigot pipe at every hub, 10 ft. max. spacing. I. Support horizontal hubless cast iron pipe at every joint and at each horizontal branch connection. Sway brace to prevent shear. J. Support vertical piping as follows: 1. Steel--Every other floor 2. Cast iron and Copper--Every floor, 10 ft. max. intervals 3. Plastic--Every floor plus 5' spacing between floors K. Hanging from one pipe to another is prohibited. L. Support piping racked on walls with Uni-strut hangers and channel supports or equal. Copper piping shall be insulated from contact with the steel channels. 8. PIPING INSTALLATION A. General 1. Pipe sizes shown on the drawings are nominal pipe sizes, not outside diameters. Use straight round pipe reamed to full size after cutting. Remove all chips from reaming. 2. Arrange pipe in group runs where feasible. Coordinate locations with all trades. Avoid traps in piping. 3. The right is reserved to authorize minor changes in pipe location to avoid conflicts with other trades at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Drain and Rain Water Piping 1. All drain and rain water piping shall be properly pitched at 1/4 inch to the foot (or 2%) minimum for 3" and smaller pipe and 1/8 inch (or 1%) minimum for 4 inch and larger, unless otherwise indicated. Piping shall be properly supported so that it will not sag and form pockets. Exceptions must be approved in writing by the Engineer, Owner and by the Administrative Authority. 2. The manufacturer's recommendations shall be carefully followed when installing pipe using neoprene gasketed joints. 3. Locate vertical hubs of underground piping below partition walls for concealment. In locations where hubs will project beyond finish partition wall, set hubs 1" below finished floor. 4. All drain and rain water pipe underground outside of building shall be buried a minimum of 3'6" deep. C. Domestic Water Distribution Piping 1. All unnecessary traps in circulating lines shall be avoided. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15050 - 7 MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. All water pipe underground outside of building shall be buried a minimum of 5'-0" deep. Where waste and water piping is run in the same trench, installation shall conform to all governing codes. D. Gas Piping 1. Service: a. Make all arrangements with the local gas company for the installation of the gas service, including meter installation. b. Provide main gas shut-off just outside of building. c. Provide bypass fittings, etc. as required by the utility company. 2. Piping: a. All gas piping shall be installed with removable capped drip pockets at low points. b. Pipe shall be extended as shown on the plans to all gas equipment in building. c. The entire gas piping installation shall be in accordance with the latest requirements of the 2009 International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC), AGA and NFPA. d. Valves or cocks and unions shall be installed on inlet pipe to all equipment, including safety valves where required or noted to be installed. e. Gas pipe installed on the roof shall be supported with manufactured pipe supports specifically designed for roof top service, per para. 7. E. above. f. All underground gas piping shall be installed as indicated on the drawings and in compliance with all NFPA requirements. 9. EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Excavation. Trenches for all underground pipe lines shall not be carried below the required depths except as necessary for special pipe bedding or to remove unstable soil or rock. Furnish and backfill with thoroughly compacted sand- gravel mixtures or excavated materials approved by the Engineer's representa- tive, all excess excavation below required levels. Rock will be encountered and shall be excavated to allow for 6" granular bed between bottom of pipe and rock. B. Trench Preparation. The bottom of the trench shall be accurately graded and shaped to fit the lower 1/4 circumference so as to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe except where necessary to excavate for pipe jointing. Where pipe elevations run below the granular fill in to natural soil, provide a minimum of six (6) inches of granular material below the pipe, granular material equal to material specified above. C. Grading and Stacking. All grading in the vicinity of trench excavations shall be controlled to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches. Any water accumulated in the trenches shall be removed by pumping or by other approved methods. During excavation, materials suitable for backfilling shall be stacked in TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15050 - 8 MATERIALS AND METHODS an orderly manner a sufficient distance back from edges of trenches to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave-ins. D. Crossing Protection. Provide adequate temporary crossovers for pedestrian and vehicular traffic, including guard rails, lamps, flags, as directed; remove same when necessary for such protection ceases. E. Backfilling. After pipe lines have been tested, inspected and approved by the Architect-Engineer, and prior to backfilling, all forms shall be removed and the excavation shall be cleaned of all trash and debris. Material for backfilling shall consist of the excavated granular material, or borrow equal to that specified above, and shall be free of trash, lumber, or other debris. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers, not exceeding nine (9) inches in thickness. Moisten and hand or machine compact to 95% of standard proctor density. Bring fill to elevations indicated. If backfill fails the proctor density test, conducted by an independent testing laboratory retained by the Owner, Contractor shall recom- pact and retest until satisfactory density is reached. First backfill layer shall be coarse sand to 6" above top of pipe. F. Restoration of Area. All areas disturbed by the Mechanical Contractor shall be restored to their original condition unless otherwise indicated. 1. Replace pavement, curbs, sidewalks, other appurtenances removed or damaged in connection with work and restore to original conditions, unless otherwise directed. 10. DISINFECTING AND SPECIAL CLEANING A. Domestic Water Systems 1. General: All new potable water systems shall be cleaned as herein specified prior to testing or application of insulation. Testing must be wit- nessed by the State or City Department of Health personnel and report filed with the Owner to receive final payment. 2. Notification: Notify State or City Department of Health in writing, 48 hours in advance of the beginning of the cleaning process. 3. Witness: The cleaning process will not be deemed acceptable unless witnessed and approved by the State or City Department of Health's representative. 4. Procedure: Comply with City of Fort Collins standards, Larimer County, or Colorado State Department of Health requirements, whichever is more stringent. 5. Report: The report shall contain the following and be submitted to the Owner’s Project Manager within 24 hours of the cleaning: a. Date, time and place of cleaning. b. Duration. c. Person responsible. d. Solutions concentration and temperature. e. Signature of State Department of Health representative. f. Results. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15050 - 9 MATERIALS AND METHODS 6. The report and its timely submission shall be required for final payment. 11. ELECTRICAL A. Electric Motors. 1. Provide electric motors with all equipment furnished and installed under Division 15, unless specified otherwise. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers a. G.E. b. U.S. Motors c. MagneTek (Century) 3. Include the following features on all motors: a. Ball bearings with lube lines extended to accessible location. b. Cast iron or steel base with provision for slide adjustment unless directed otherwise. c. Conduit box with ample room for lead terminal connections. d. Numbered leads of ample length for connection, terminating in the conduit box. e. Permanently stamped nameplate. f. Single speed 1750 RPM, unless specified otherwise. g. Rated for continuous duty in ambient not exceeding 40 degrees C. 4. All motor wiring and windings shall be copper. 5. Power Factor a. Motors shall have a labeled power factor, at name plate rating and rated voltage, of not less than 85%. If a motor draws less than 1000 watts labeled rating, it is excluded from the 85% P.F. requirement. If, through motor or design (i.e. RPM less than 1200), an 85% power factor is not available, the supplier of that motor shall furnish power factor correction components capable of correcting that non-conforming motor to 90% or better. 6. Horsepower ratings, in V-belt drive applications, size motor for 120 percent of brake horsepower requirement, or scheduled horsepower, whichever is greater. 7. Single phase motors, furnish for all applications 1/6 through 3/4 HP, single phase, capacitor start, capacitor run, dripproof, thermally pro- tected motors, unless indicated otherwise, for 120 volt 60 hertz current. B. Unit manufacturer shall provide belt guard. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15050 - 10 MATERIALS AND METHODS C. Motor starters will be provided under Division 15, Mechanical, as specified below. 1. Starters shall be across-the-line, with manual reset, trip-free thermal overload relay in each ungrounded conductor, necessary auxiliary con- tacts, proper NEMA Standard enclosure for location, and hand-off- automatic switches in cover. Provide manual motor starters for locally controlled single phase motors. For single phase motors which are interlocked with external devices provide H-O-A magnetic starters or relay and switch rated at locked rotor motor amps and manual starter. Starters, except those furnished mounted in or on equipment, shall be by the same one of the following manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley b. Cutler Hammer c. Square D D. Electrical wiring, except where otherwise specified in Division 15, will be provided under Division 16, Electrical Work. 1. Electrical wiring provided under Division 15 of the Specifications shall conform to all applicable requirements of Division 16, Electrical Work. 2. Control Wiring: Consists of wiring in pilot circuits of contactors, starters, relays, etc., and wiring for valve and damper operators. 3. For single-phase devices where power current passes through controller and device, wiring shall be considered power wiring. E. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, all motors and controls for Division 15 equipment shall be furnished, set in place and wired in accordance with the following schedule: Set In Power Control Furnished Place Wiring Wiring Under Under Under Under ITEM Division Division Division Division Equipment Motors 15 15 16 - Starters/Contactors: Separate 15 16 16 15 Factory Mounted and Wired 15 15 16 15 Pushbutton Stations: Separate 15 16 - 15 In Starter Enclosure 15 16 - 15 Disconnect Switches 16 16 16 - Thermal Overload Switches 16 16 16 - Control Relays 15 15 - 15 Control Transformers 15 16 16 15 TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15050 - 11 MATERIALS AND METHODS Operating Switches 16 16 16 - Line Voltage Thermostat 15 15 - 15 Low Voltage Thermostat 15 15 - 15 Sub-Base Low Voltage 15 15 - 15 Time Switches Not In Control Panel 15 15 16 15 Thermostat and Controls Integral with Equipment or Directly Attached to Ducts, Pipes, etc. 15 15 - 15 Equipment in Temperature Control Panels 15 15 - 15 Valve Motors, Damper Motors, Solenoid Valves, etc. 15 15 - 15 Control Circuit Outlets 16 16 16 - Smoke Detectors Including Relays for Fan Control 16 15 16 15 Equipment Interlocks 15 15 - 15 END OF SECTION TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15250 - 1 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer- ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050, Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specifications. 2. SCOPE OF THE WORK A. The work involved in this section of the specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, accessories and materials and in performing all operations necessary for the installation of all insulation for the plumbing and duct systems, and sealing of sleeves. B. All insulation shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled workmen engaged in this type of work. 3. MATERIALS* A. All insulations shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings not exceeding the fol- lowing unless otherwise specified: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 50 1. Insulation on all cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are used shall be applied with a continuous unbroken vapor seal (hangers on outside of insulation jacket). 2. Support inserts for cold water piping shall be installed at all outside hanger points. Inserts between the pipe and pipe hangers shall consist of wood or rigid insulation sections of equal thickness of the pipe insula- tion. 3. Inserts shall be installed in a manner to completely support the pipe and not crush the insulation or damage the vapor barrier. 4. Hangers, supports, anchors, etc. that are secured directly to cold sur- faces must be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. B. Material Approval Code 1. Code I Fiberglass Pipe Insulation a. Owens-Corning One or Two Piece Pipe Insulation i. Fiberglass 25 ASJ - All service jacket ii. Fiberglass 25 ASJ - SSL - All service jacket b. Schuller Flame Safe Pipe Insulation i. All purpose jacket - AP ii. All purpose jacket - AP self-sealing lap system c. Certain-Teed Manson Fiberglass Pipe Insulation i. All service jacket TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15250 - 2 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION d. Or Equal by Knauf 2. Code II One Piece PVC Insulated Fitting Covers a. Ceelco b. Zeston c. Perma-Jac d. Proto LoSmoke e. Or prior approved equal 3. Code VIII Plastic Pipe Insulation a. Insulation shall not exceed the following fire hazard ratings: Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed (3/4") 225 b. For service - 40 degrees F. to 200 degrees F. c. Armstrong FR Armaflex d. Or Equal by IMCOA or Nomaco C. Vapor barrier to be kraft paper reinforced foil with integral self-sealing pressure sensitive adhesive longitudinal seam sealing strips. Insulation maximum thermal conductivity shall be .25 at 75 deg. F per inch. No staples shall be used. 4. COLD PIPING A. Domestic Cold Water: All piping in concealed and exposed areas shall be insu- lated with fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jacket or grades mentioned in Code I. Thickness shall conform to the following schedule: Service & Size Insulation Thickness Domestic Cold Water: 1” and smaller 1/2" 1-1/4” and larger 1" B. Rain Water: All piping shall be insulated with fiberglass pipe insulation with all service jacket or grades mentioned in Code I. All Rain Water piping shall be insulated with ½” thick insulation. This includes the drain body, all horizontal piping and the first two feet of vertical piping drop. C. Jackets and end laps shall be sealed with Chicago mastic 17-465, or equal, applied to two surfaces or with self-sealing type lap system. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15250 - 3 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION 5. FITTINGS, VALVE BODIES AND FLANGES A. PVC insulated fitting covers as mentioned in Code II. 1. The pre-cut insulation shall be applied to the fitting to make a snug fit of equal thickness against the adjoining pipe insulation. The fitting covers shall be secured by vapor barrier adhesive. 2. On cold services all seam edges shall be additionally sealed with vapor barrier adhesive. 6. SHIELDS A. Provide sheet metal insulation shields at all hanger locations for cold services. Form the shields to bear on the lower 1/3 periphery of the insulated pipe. Use 20 gauge sheet metal for pipes less than 4", 16 gauge for larger pipes. Comply with the following table for shield length: Pipe Size Length 4” and smaller 9" 6” to 10" 12" 7. SEALING OF SLEEVES A. All sleeves for pipes, ductwork, etc., furnished under Division 15 of the specifi- cations, penetrating floors, and walls and full height partitions shall be sealed in accordance with the following: 1. All insulated services shall have the specified insulation terminated on either side of sleeve. Services which require a vapor barrier jacket shall have segment through sleeve insulated with calcium-silicate having a minimum thickness same as specified for service. Entire void space between inside of sleeve and outside of duct, pipe, and/or calcium- sili- cate insulation shall be packed with fiber insulation, conforming to HHI- 521E Type 3 or HHI-558B Form A and having an ASTM fire class E-84 with fiber melt point in excess of 2000 deg. F., to a point 1/8 inch from ends of pipe sleeve. After void is packed with fiber insulation, services which are specified to be insulated shall have a section of insulation installed on each side of sleeve, insulation to be fitted tight to sleeve insulation. Balance of space in sleeve to be filled with non-hardening silicone conforming to TTS-00230 and of type which will allow 50 percent movement in one direction. END OF SECTION TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15300-1 FIRE PROTECTION SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer- ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050, Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specifications. 2. SCOPE OF WORK A. The work involved in this specification section consists of performing all calculations, piping design, sprinkler head layout, furnishing of all material and equipment, and labor necessary to install all complete systems listed below, including minor items obviously necessary for complete and operating installation. This system starts at the point of connection to the existing fire sprinkler riser. 1. New full coverage automatic fire sprinkler system for the new Bus Parking Building Addition complete with a new zone control valve, and flow alarm. 2. New full coverage automatic fire sprinkler system for the new Wash Bay Addition complete with a new zone control valve with flow alarm, if required by the local Fire Authority. 3. The existing fire sprinkler system is a dry pipe type. All new additions and modifications to the existing fire sprinkler system shall be dry pipe type also. Verify that the existing air compressor has sufficient capacity for all additions and modifications. B. Work involved with installing new systems or remodeling existing system shall be done in accordance with this specification, and NFPA-13. Provide new sprinkler heads in all locations, including where existing head layout is altered. Verify existing piping arrangement, conditions, and locations at site before beginning fabrication. C. All drawings and sprinkler calculations are subject to Insurance Services Offices and/or the local Fire Authority review and approval, as well as the Architect/Engineer’s before installation. 3. FLOW ALARMS AND SUPERVISORY VALVE SWITCH* A. Flow alarms shall be Autocall Type WF, Potter Model VSR, Grinnell E-1, or approved equal, DPST flow alarms with suitable adjustable retards. Flow alarms shall be suitable for 120 volt operation. Factory Mutual (FM) approved and UL listed. B. Provide a UL approved switch for main sprinkler valve(s) where indicated. Switch shall give alarm indication when main valve is closed. Switch shall be suitable for 120 volt operation. C. Alarm indication and wiring for the above will be provided under Division 16. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15300-2 FIRE PROTECTION 4. SPRINKLER SYSTEM* A. Automatic sprinkler system shall be designed by the Contractor for hazard indicated. Entire system shall be in accordance with NFPA and as specified herein and/or indicated. Contractor is herein given the option of sizing sprinkler system per pipe sizing tables in NFPA-13 or by the hydraulic method. 1. Contractor is responsible for obtaining all necessary flow tests at site required for hydraulic calculations. B. Hydraulic design methods shall conform to the methods outlined in NFPA No. 13 and shall provide for pipe sizes such that not more than a 10 percent variation will occur in sprinkler discharge. Hazen and Williams formula with C=120 shall be used in hydraulic calculations, and additional requirements specified herein. Design conditions shall be based on the most remote 1,500 square feet for each zone. Except where otherwise indicated, design shall be light hazard with a design density of 0.10 GPM per square foot, or as determined by the authority having jurisdiction. C. Prior to starting fabrication or installation of sprinkler system, Contractor shall submit detailed 1/8 inch scale (minimum) shop drawings, stamped reviewed by agency having jurisdiction, to Architect/Engineer for review and approval. At time of completion of work, obtain certificate of inspection and approval from same agency. D. Approved manufacturer: 1. Viking Sprinkler Corporation 2. Grinnell Company, Inc. 3. The Automatic Sprinkler Corporation of America 4. Grimes Company 5. Approved equal selected from "List of Inspected Fire Protection Equip- ment and Materials" published annually by Factory Mutual Engineering and U.L., and shall bear U.L approved stamp or label. E. In rooms and/or spaces where sprinkler head locations are not indicated, Con- tractor shall locate sprinkler heads to avoid conflicts with other pieces of equip- ment, such as lights, speakers, ducts and diffusers, piping etc. located in the overhead (there are no ceilings). Consult Architectural, Mechanical, or Electrical plans carefully to avoid conflicts. F. System shall be provided complete with water supply connection, sprinklers, all piping, fittings, valves, seals, test connections, hangers, supports, sleeves, escutcheons, drain valves, test connections, signs, diagrams, etc., all as required for a complete and operating system. Provide drain valves at all low points. G. Fire Sprinklers: 1. All sprinklers shall be automatic closed spray type sprinkler heads of ordinary degree temperature rating except where excess temperatures are anticipated, heads shall be of higher rating. 2. Sprinkler heads installed in areas which do not have suspended ceilings shall be of brass upright type. Sprinklers shall be installed with consid- TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15300-3 FIRE PROTECTION eration being given to all ductwork, piping, etc., and heads shall be located above and/or below ductwork as required by NFPA Standards. 3. Side wall sprinkler heads, if required, shall be sidewall chrome plated with chrome plated flat type escutcheon plate. 4. Provide stock of spare heads, of each type installed, and packed in a suitable cabinet. Number of each type of spare heads to be provided shall be as indicated in NFPA-13. The cabinet shall contain at least two sprinkler head wrenches. 5. Upright sprinklers which are so located as to be subject to mechanical injury shall be protected with approved guards. END OF SECTION TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15440 - 1 PLUMBING SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer- ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050, Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specifications. 2. SCOPE OF THE WORK A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all material and equipment necessary to install all complete systems listed below, including minor items obviously necessary for complete and operating installation. 1. Rain Water Drainage System 2. Trench Drainage System 3. Domestic Cold Water Piping 4. Service Reel and Piping 5. Gas Piping 6. Plumbing Fixtures 3. CONNECTIONS TO MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. Make all domestic water, gas, service reel, drain, etc., connections to all equipment in this building whether or not such equipment is furnished under this section or under other sections of this specification. This includes installation, furnishing piping and shut-off valves on branches to and from each piece of equipment from mains or branch mains. 4. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleaning: At completion clean strainers, traps, aerators, and valves of debris, sand and dirt. Thoroughly clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 5. PROTECTION A. Protect piping, valves and related components from damage before, during and after installation to date of Final Acceptance or Owner move-in. Provide protective coverings or other protection as required. 6. DRAIN AND RAINWATER PIPING A. Connect to new drain service(s) as indicated on the plans. Provide minimum 3'- 6" minimum cover over drain line(s) outside of building. Provide main clean-out where drain(s) leaves building as indicated on the plans. See Section 15050 paragraph labeled "Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling." B. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall carefully survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the service installation, in order to avoid unforeseen obstructions, such as telephone cables, cisterns, electric conduits, large tree roots, etc. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15440 - 2 PLUMBING C. This Contractor shall include all costs for this work, including street and sidewalk repair, permits, etc., in his bid. 7. DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Provide new domestic water piping as indicated on the plans. Connect to existing domestic water piping as indicated on the plans. B. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall carefully survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the service installation, in order to avoid existing duct work, piping, electric conduits, etc. C. This Contractor shall include all costs for this work, including vertical pipe supports, permits, etc., in his bid. 8. GAS PIPING A. Provide new gas piping as indicated on the plans. Extend new underground gas piping to new riser location as indicated on the plans. B. Before proceeding with this part of the work, the Contractor shall carefully survey the existing conditions, and, if necessary, modify the service installation, in order to avoid existing duct work, piping, electric conduits, etc. C. This Contractor shall include all costs for this work, including roof top pipe supports, concrete cutting and patching, permits, etc., in his bid. 9. CLEANOUTS* A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith 2. Josam 3. Wade 4. Zurn 5. Prior approved equal B. Cleanouts shall be full line size through 4" pipe. C. Inside caulk or spigot connections, bronze cleanout plug, straight threaded with tapered shoulder and caulked lead seat. Plugs shall be removed, doped, and reinstalled just tight enough to prevent leakage. D. Screwed pipe cleanouts-bronze pipe threaded plug with four raised square lugs or counter sunk plug. E. Floor cleanouts (FCO)--frame and cover threaded for 1 1/2" vertical adjustment, threads protected with shield to be removed when concrete is set. Covers--nickel bronze round frame and cover, deep flange tractor type. Extra heavy type in heavy traffic areas. F. Grade Cleanouts (GCO) --cast iron cleanout with round, heavy duty scoriated, non-tilt cast iron top, adjustable to finished grade level. Set GCO in 2'x2'x4" deep concrete pad, minimum. Zurn Z1474 heavy duty cleanout housing with Zurn Z1440-A-BP cleanout ferrule with bronze plug, or equal TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15440 - 3 PLUMBING G. Cleanouts in floors shall be located as shown on plans and at changes in direc- tion of pipe run and shall consist of 'Y' fittings and eighth bends. Cleanouts shall be provided at the base of all vertical stacks with the cleanout plug located approximately 12 inches above the floor. Cleanouts in horizontal runs above ground shall consist of 'Y' fittings with cleanout plugs. CLEANOUTS MUST BE PROVIDED IN EVERY 100 FT. OF HORIZONTAL RUN, and as per the International Plumbing Code. 10. TRENCH DRAINS* A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith 2. Josam 3. Wade 4. Zurn 5. Prior approved equal B. Provide trench drains of type specified herein. Sizes and locations shall be as indicated on the plans. C. Trench drains shall be high density polyethylene with built in slope of 0.75%, coated carbon steel top frame, DIN EN 1443 Class E ductile iron slotted grate made in the USA. Trench drains to have bottom no hub outlets. D. Trench drains in slabs on ground. 1. Trench Drains shall be Zurn Z-886-HD with 4" diameter bottom dome strainer. 11. PLUMBING FIXTURE TYPES* A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Hose Bibbs: a. J.R. Smith b. Josam c. Wade d. Woodford e. Zurn f. Prior approved equal 2. Roof Drains and Down Spout Nozzles: a. J.R. Smith b. Josam c. Wade d. Zurn e. Prior approved equal B. The following schedule establishes the standards to which each type of fixture must conform and the plumbing fixture submittals shall completely illustrate and describe each type. Refer to the drawings for exact quantities. 1. HB-1 Hose Bibb: TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15440 - 4 PLUMBING a. Woodford Model 26 backflow pretected hose bibb with testable backflow preventer, brass construction, chrome plate finish, and metal wheel handle. 2. RD-1 Roof Drain: a. Roof drainss shall be cast iron with inside caulk bottom outlet, combination clamping ring and gravel guard, under deck clamp, cast iron dome enclosing the entire drain sump, insulation extension sleeve of same thickness as insulation. Where metal deck is used, provide a steel roof sump formed to receive roof drain without any raise in insulation at roof drain. Coordinate with Architectural drawings. 3’ minimum size. b. RD-1 – Zurn ZC-100-C. c. Provide 42”X42” 4 pound per square foot lead pan or 16 ounce cold rolled copper flashing flanges for each roof drain and overflow roof drain. 3. ORD-1 Overflow Roof Drain: a. Overflow roof drains shall be the same as roof drains specified above. The overflow roof drains shall have a collar or dam designed to provide a higher water inlet elevation, unless located higher on the roof than the roof drain, per code. 4. DSN-1 Down Spout Nozzle: a. Provide down spout nozzles of size and location as indicated on the plans. Nozzle shall be all bronze construction with threaded inlet and wall flange. With bronze screws or bolts as need for the flange. b. DSN-1 Zurn Z-199. c. ODSN-1 Zurn Z-199. 5. Service Reels: a. Service reels shall be Lincoln Series 87000 Medium Pressure, or equal, suitable for Engine Oil, Engine Coolant, and Automatic Transmission Fluid. END OF SECTION TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15850 - 1 HEATING AND VENTILATING SECTION 15850 – HEATING AND VENTILATING 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer- ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050, Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specifications. 2. SCOPE OF WORK A. The work in this section of the specification and the accompanying drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all material and equipment necessary to install heating and air handling systems as indicated on drawings and specified herein, including minor items obviously necessary for complete and operating systems. 3. SHEET METAL WORK - LOW VELOCITY SYSTEMS A. Low velocity sheet metal work includes all ducts serving supply, return, and exhaust air systems operating at a maximum of 2" W.G. of pressure. B. Construction. Construct ducts from zinc coated iron or steel sheets conforming accurately to the dimensions indicated on the drawings. All ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. Construct ducts in accordance with the recommendations in the current edition of the "SMACNA" duct construction standards, 2" W.G. pressure class. C. All ductwork transverse joints shall be made airtight by using duct sealer in accordance with SMACNA standards. No open joints at the corners or else- where will be allowed. All seams in horizontal ducts will be standing seams with separate cleats mitering at the corners. All seams in vertical duct or risers shall be self-supporting. All ducts shall be complete in themselves. No single thickness partitions between ducts allowed. All ducts over 18" wide to be crossbroken. 4. DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Securely attach all ductwork to the building construction in a manner to be free from vibration and swaying under all conditions of operation. Hanger attach- ments shall be appropriate for the building structure and shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. Hang ducts from beams and joists whenever possible. B. Ducts shall be substantially supported with hangers located at a maximum of 8 feet on centers, or less as conditions dictate, for the length of the duct. All hangers shall be made of 1" wide galvanized iron straps, 18 gauge for hangers spaced at 8 feet centers, 22 gauge for 4 feet centers, both for ducts up to 96" semi-perimeter, or per latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Hanger straps to be secured to the bottom of the duct using sheet metal screws. Additional screws to be added to sides of ductwork as conditions dictate. Trapeze hangers per SMACNA standards may also be used. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15850 - 2 HEATING AND VENTILATING 5. DUCT INSTALLATION A. All ductwork will be run substantially as shown on the plans. Changes in size or cross section shall be made with long tapers. The Engineer reserves the right to slightly change the run of certain ducts without extra cost to the Owner, if necessary to avoid unforeseen structural or other interferences. B. Where ducts run through ceiling spaces and structural, mechanical, or electrical interference is encountered, maintain same cross sectional area as indicated on plans with a maximum of 4 1/2 to 1 aspect ratio. C. All openings in duct for grilles, registers, etc., shall be capped dust-tight with G.I. metal caps during the construction period. D. Where square turns are indicated, either round or rectangular duct, provide and install square turn elbows with turning vanes. Vanes may be either commercial type duct turns or approved equal, or shop fabricated to conform to SMACNA standards. Vanes shall be single or double thickness type preassembled on runners before installing in each elbow. Brace adequately and avoid rough edges to prevent objectionable noise. E. Where moisture may condense within the duct system, pitch ductwork to low points and provide drip pans and drain connections with plugs for removal of condensate. F. No obstructions will be allowed in ducts except places where absolutely neces- sary and prior approval has been received from the Engineer. In such cases they shall be installed so as to least interfere with the passage of air. 6. DAMPERS: A. Provide low leak dampers as indicated on the unit drawings. Low leakage dampers shall have thermally broken insulated blades. The damper blade shall incorporate silicon rubber edge seals and zinc plated tubular steel shaft for a non-slip operation. Shaft bearings holes shall be N.C. machine punched and fitted with one inch O.D. heavy duty nylon bearings to eliminate friction and any metal to metal contact. Damper jamb seals shall be stainless steel spring arcs or silicon rubber designed for a minimum air leakage and smooth operation. Damper linkage shall be concealed within a 1/8” thick extruded thermally broken frame. Greenheck model ICD-45 or equal. 7. STATIONARY LOUVERS* A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American Warming and Ventilating 2. Arrow 3. Dowco 4. Greenheck 5. Industrial Louvers 6. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 7. Prior approved equal. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15850 - 3 HEATING AND VENTILATING B. Provide stationary outside air intake and exhaust louvers where indicated on the plans. C. See schedule on the plans for exact type, construction, and accessories. D. Louvers shall have drainable blades, vertical gutters, and sloped sills for water drainage out of the louver. E. Install louvers, where indicated on the plans, according to manufacturer's recommendations. Provide anchor clips and caulk as required for a sound, watertight installation. Make airtight duct connections to installed louvers. 8. GAS FIRED UNIT HEATER* A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Reznor 2. Lennox 3. Modine 4. Trane 5. Prior approved equal B. Manufacturer, Model, and Size: 1. As scheduled on the plans. 2. Description: a. AGA certified natural gas fired unit heater, rated and tested according to D.O.E. test procedures. Test operated prior to shipment to insure proper operation. Completely factory assembled with all controls installed. b. Titanium stabilized aluminized steel heat exchanger. c. Multi-try direct spark pilot ignition. d. Heavy gauge cold rolled steel cabinet with baked on paint finish. Adjustable louvers for air flow direction control. e. With 24 VA control transformer factory installed with fan timer and limit controls. f. Direct drive, propeller fan statically and dynamically balanced. Internal overload protected motor. g. Provide gas modification kit for 5000 feet elevation if needed, or otherwise adjust the unit for altitude. h. Single-stage gas valve; and kit for multiple unit heaters running from one single-stage, low-voltage thermostat. See schedule. i. Concentric kit for combustion air and vent piping thru the exterior wall or roof with a single hole. j. Provide a high wind vent cap for the flue. k. With structure suspension kit. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15850 - 4 HEATING AND VENTILATING C. Controls: 1. Controls to be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor under Section 15950 “Temperature Control.” 9. GAS FIRED RADIANT HEATER* A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Detroit Radiant 2. Roberts Gordon 3. Reznor 4. Prior approved equal B. Manufacturer, Model, and Size: 1. As scheduled on the plans. 2. Description: a. AGA certified natural gas fired radiant heater, rated and tested according to D.O.E. test procedures. Test operated prior to shipment to insure proper operation. Completely factory assembled with all controls installed. b. Titanium combustion chamber with black coating. c. Aluminized steel radiant tube heat exchanger with black coating. d. Hot surface ignition with flame rod sensing. e. Highly polished aluminum reflectors. f. 120 VAC power supply. g. Stainless steel flexible connector with ½” gas cock. h. Provide gas modification kit for 5000 feet elevation if needed, or otherwise adjust the unit for altitude. i. Single-stage gas valve; and kit for multiple radiant heaters running from one single-stage, low-voltage thermostat. See schedule. j. Combustion air inlet roof and wall cap, and vent high wind wall cap. See plans. k. With structure suspension kit. C. Controls: 1. Controls to be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor under Section 15950 “Temperature Control.” 10. EXHAUST FANS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Greenheck. 2. Acme. 3. Loren Cook. 4. Penn. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15850 - 5 HEATING AND VENTILATING 5. Prior approved equal. B. Manufacturer, model, and size: 1. As scheduled on the plans. 2. Description: a. Provide where indicated and as scheduled on the plans. Arrangement shall be as shown on the plans. b. All fans shall be dynamically and statically balanced at the factory. c. Fan ratings shall be based upon tests performed in strict accordance with the AMCA Standard 210-67 Test Code for Air Moving Devices. Each fan shall carry, near the manufacturer's nameplate, the seal authorized by AMCA indicating that ratings are certified. Fans not bearing this seal will not be acceptable. C. Controls: 1. Controls to be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor under Section 15950 “Temperature Control.” END OF SECTION TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15950 - 1 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SECTION 15950 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Basic Mechanical Requirements, in its entirety, including appli- cable provisions of other Specification sections, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the Specifications. 2. SCOPE OF WORK A. The work involved in this specification and the accompanying drawings consists of performing all labor and furnishing of all materials and equipment necessary to provide the Automatic Temperature Control System for Heating, and Ventilating systems as specified herein, including minor items obviously necessary for complete and operating installation. 3. AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Control system shall be electric and electronic. The system shall be installed under the full-time supervision of an authorized Installations Engineer employed by the Long and Assoc., Carrier West Controls Division, Air Comfort, Yoder Electrical Services, or prior approved equal. B. Prior to start of work, the Contractor shall submit control shop drawings as stated in this Section. Shop drawings shall be prepared by an authorized temperature control contractor as listed above. Work shall not begin until shop drawings are approved by the Engineer. 4. CONTROL INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT* A. In general, the control instruments and equipment furnished for this installation shall be the best product of its type produced by the manufacturer. B. Damper Operators: 1. Damper Operators: 120 V or 24 V electric type with two position control and spring return to normal position. Damper operators shall have metal bodies. Provide operators with ample power to overcome friction of damper linkage and air pressure acting on the damper blades. Locate the damper operator mounting arrangement outside the airstream wherever possible. Provide the operators with external adjustable stops to limit the stroke. The operator linkage arrangement shall be such as to permit normally closed position of the damper. Belimo operators are preferred. C. Thermostats: 1. Heating thermostat. 40 to 90 degrees F. range. Low voltage programmable. 2. All thermostats shall be mounted at 5 feet above finished floor. See plans for locations. 3. Coordinate electrical requirements with Electrical Contractor. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15950 - 2 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 5. WIRING A. Except where otherwise specified under sequence of controls, wire all electrical controls furnished under this section of the specifications. B. This installation shall comply with all rules and regulations of the National Electrical Code and all state and local codes and regulations. C. Install all conduits in a neat and orderly manner with conduit grouped as much as possible following horizontal and vertical building lines and rigidly secure conduit to the building construction. D. Work performed under this section of the specifications shall be coordinated with associated work being done under Division 16. E. Except where otherwise specified, voltages for control of circuiting associated with motors and their starters, and all control devices shall be rated at 120 volts or 24 volts. 6. INSTALLATION A. Coordinate the installation of temperature control equipment furnished under this section but installed under other sections of this Division. B. Radiant Heaters and Unit Heaters: The manufacturer will provide all combustion control devices, transformers, relays, and other appurtenances as required per manufacturer's system wiring and interlock submittals. Additional controls may be required. 7. SERVICE AND OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS A. After completion of the installation, adjust all thermostats, motors, and other equipment provided under this Section. B. Following complete adjustment, have a qualified representative fully acquainted with the installation instruct the Owner's operators in the fundamentals and operations of the system. This instruction period shall not be less than four (4) hours. C. Submit typewritten and/or printed sets of operating and maintenance instructions, to be included in the O&M Manuals, including sheets describing fundamentals of each system and an explanation of the operation and function of each system device in the installation as part of the maintenance and operating instructions portfolio required under Section 15010. 8. CONTROL DRAWINGS* A. Before proceeding with the work required under this section, the Contractor shall submit for approval complete temperature control diagrams, including a written description of the systems and descriptive literature covering each item of control equipment. Diagrams shall indicate all control functions required. Submit to Engineer. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15950 - 3 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL 9. OPERATING TESTS A. A complete system-operating test shall be made for a period of two (2) weeks with controls set in their respective positions to ensure proper operation. All tests and final adjustments, including calibration of all controllers and thermostats, shall be made to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. B. At the completion of the test, Contractor shall prepare a list showing temperature settings of all thermostats together with actual thermostat readings. This list shall be submitted to the Engineer as part of the maintenance and operating instruction portfolios. 10. "AS-BUILT" DRAWINGS A. The Contractor will, at the same time, insure that the control diagrams for the project are brought up-to-date and that they reflect the control system "As-Built". These control diagrams will be included in the Maintenance Manuals, which shall be turned over to the Owner following the acceptance of the above procedure by the Consulting Engineer. B. The "As- Built" diagrams will have an indication on them as to what changes occurred to the control system between the system originally specified and the system as installed. If necessary, the description of operation shall be changed to adequately describe the completed control system. C. Provide reproducible set of "As-Builts" which must be mylar sepias. D. Operating sequences and control diagrams modified "As-Built," shall be framed under glass or Plexiglas, and suitably mounted in the mechanical room. 11. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. General: The following description gives the intent of the sequence of operation. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate controls furnished with the equipment with necessary supplementary controls under this section to provide a working system as described below. B. Exhaust Fans, Intake and Exhaust Dampers: 1. EF-1, Bus Parking Garage Addition - Normal Operation: a. Exhaust fans normally off, intake and exhaust dampers normally closed. Exhaust fans are interlocked to start when an occupancy sensor or a door switch activates. Intake and exhaust dampers open when exhaust fan starts. See Electrical sheet E1.0, Interior Lighting Schematic for occupancy sensor and door switch locations. 2. EF-1, Bus Parking Garage Addition - Emergency Operation: TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15950 - 4 AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL a. Exhaust fans, intake and exhaust dampers start and open as specified above upon a contact closure by the methane detection system to be installed by the Owner. C. Radiant Heaters: 1. RH-1, Chassis Wash Bay Addition: a. Column mounted thermostat shall cycle the gas valve and fan to maintain a heating setpoint of 55 degrees F (adjustable). See plan for location of thermostats. 2. RH-2, Bus Parking Garage Addition: a. Column mounted thermostat shall cycle multiple gas valves and fans to maintain a heating setpoint of 55 degrees F (adjustable). See plan for location of thermostats and radiant heaters to be grouped together on a single thermostat. D. Unit Heaters: 1. GUH-1, Bus Parking Garage Addition: a. Column mounted thermostat shall cycle multiple gas valves and fans to maintain a heating setpoint of 55 degrees F (adjustable). See plan for location of thermostats and unit heaters to be grouped together on a single thermostat. END OF SECTION TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15990 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 1. GENERAL A. Section 15010, Mechanical Special Conditions, in its entirety, including refer- ences to applicable provisions of the General Requirements, and Section 15050, Materials and Methods, are hereby adopted and made part of this section of the specifications. 2. SCOPE OF WORK A. Balance the Garage Addition building exhaust system only. The exhaust system is comprised of (4) 6090 CFM wall mount belt drive exhaust fans and associated louvers and dampers. 3. FIRM REQUIREMENTS A. Balancing shall be done by a firm specializing in this work. Prequalified firms are: 1. Fort Collins/Midwest, Fort Collins, Colorado. 2. Lawrence H. Finn & Assoc., Greeley, Colorado. 3. Double T Test and Balance. Denver, Colorado. 4. Prior Approved Equal B. Other firms desiring to furnish services for this project shall submit for written approval during bid time. 1. A brochure shall be provided listing the qualifications of personnel in the organization, instruments available to be used and a list of projects successfully balanced within the last two years. 2. Information regarding qualifications must be in the office of the Design Engineer at least six days, excluding Sundays and holidays, prior to the date set for receiving bids. C. The balancing work shall be performed by a firm having total professional responsibility for the final testing, adjusting and balancing of the exhaust system. All balancing shall be performed by qualified technicians in the employ of the pre- qualified firm. D. This firm shall furnish all necessary tools, scaffolding and ladders that are required and shall provide all required instruments, take all readings and make all necessary adjustments. E. Instruments shall be used and applied which are best suited to the system func- tion being tested. Instruments shall be in first-class state of repair and have been calibrated within a period of six months prior to starting the job. Instru- ments shall be recalibrated upon completion of the job if required by the Design Engineer to prove reliability. F. The exhaust system shall be balanced using an applicable procedure. G. After all adjustments are made, a detailed written report shall be prepared and submitted for approval. Final acceptance of this project will not be made until a satisfactory report is received and field verified. TRANSFORT FACILITY ADDITIONS 15990 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING H. The Design Engineer will field verify the report in the following manner: 1. Select quantities to be tested at random. (Quantity shall not exceed 10% of total.) 2. Require balancing firm to read the quantities in his presence. 3. Field tested values shall be within plus or minus 5% of those shown on plans. 2. AIR BALANCING PROCEDURES A. Before any adjustments are made, Garage addition is to be closed off with overhead and man doors closed. The systems are to be checked for such items as duct leakage, damper leakage, equipment vibrations, correct damper operations, etc. All fan systems are to be adjusted to deliver design air quantities within plus or minus 5 %. After balancing is completed, check motor amperage. B. Sheaves and/or belts shall be exchanged or speed controllers adjusted as required to adjust the RPM of all fans so they handle specified air quantity. 3. MISCELLANEOUS A. All installed thermal overload protection shall be observed and noted in the data sheets. If thermal overload protection is incorrect, it shall be the responsibility of the balancing firm to see that proper overload protection is installed at the completion of the job. B. Plug all test holes, replace access doors and belt guards. 4. REPORT A. A bound report shall be provided which shall contain a general information sheet listing instruments used, methods of balancing, and altitude correction. B. Provide equipment data sheets listing make, size, serial number, rating, etc., of all mechanical equipment, including fans, motors, starters, and drives. Operating data shall include rotational speed, inlet and outlet pressures, pressure drop components, and measured motor current and voltage. C. Balancing data sheets shall indicate the required and actual CFM of all exhaust outlets and inlets, and shall be totaled and summarized by systems. D. Reports shall contain a reduced set of contract drawings with inlets and outlets marked thereon for easy identification of the designation used in the data sheets. E. The report shall outline any abnormal or notable conditions not covered in the above. F. Final report shall be included in the O&M Manuals. END OF SECTION DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL Portions of these specifications designated as Bidding and Contract Requirements and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to this Division and all Sections herein. Transfort Facility Expansion 16010 - 1 GENERAL ELECTRICAL August 2012 REQUIREMENTS SECTION 16010 GENERAL ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements specifically applicable to Division 1 in addition to Division 1 provisions. 2. All work as required to provide complete, operating systems, including completion of all details and items of work not specifically shown on the Drawings or within these Specifications. 3. Coordination 4. General references 5. Regulatory requirements 6. Submittals 7. General standards for materials 8. General workmanship requirements 9. Utility coordination 10. General project requirements 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work specified in this Division with the work of other trades. B. Order the progress of the electrical work so as to conform with the progress of the other trades. C. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the other work within the facility will permit. D. Any cost resulting from ill-timed work performed under this Division shall be borne by the Electrical Contractor. E. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of the project to ascertain and establish all conditions affecting the proposed electrical work. Make provisions within the Bid Amount for the cost of such conditions and factors. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/IEE C2 – National Electrical Safety Code and other publications B. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC) Transfort Facility Expansion 16010 - 2 GENERAL ELECTRICAL August 2012 REQUIREMENTS C. NECA – Standard for Installation 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections required. B. Furnish to the Owner a certificate of final inspection and approval from the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) over the electrical installation. C. Conform to all aspects of the NEC, with all local or jurisdictional interpretations, modifications, and ordinances. D. Conform to applicable building codes plus International Mechanical Code (IMC) or Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC), as applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials and Equipment: Acceptable to the AHJ as suitable for the use intended. B. All materials shall be new and conform to applicable standards. 1. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) 4. Insulated Power Cable Engineer’s Association (IPCEA) C. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced in a manner meeting approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. Such work shall be performed prior to final acceptance by the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP A. Install all electrical systems and perform all work using procedures defined in the NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise indicated within these Specifications or on the Drawings. B. The Work shall also include completion of such details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems defined within these Contract Documents. Transfort Facility Expansion 16010 - 3 GENERAL ELECTRICAL August 2012 REQUIREMENTS C. The Drawings and Specifications shall take precedence when they are more stringent than applicable codes, ordinances, or standards in effect. D. The installation shall meet all of the requirements of all Utility Companies. 3.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION POWER A. Utilize existing power from bus garage for temporary power requirements. Coordinate directly with owner’s representative for exact location of power usage for construction. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform all cutting, channeling, chasing, drilling, etc. as required to remove any electrical equipment or materials in areas of remodel. Where installed in new conditions, order the work so as to minimize such methods and use only where inadvertent omissions have been made during the construction process. B. Perform all such work as required to conceal conduits, except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or as within these Specifications. C. Perform all such work in a manner to minimize damage to portions of wall finishes, surfaces or structure which are not being demolished, refinished, etc. D. Provide refinish, resurface, and repair of finishes damaged during electrical construction. E. All openings made in fire walls or ceilings: Penetrate and patch so as not to affect the fire rating. Use only red colored fire rated caulk, mortar, blocks, pads, etc. to match the assembly rating and application. Follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions for installation. F. All penetrations in concrete or masonry shall be by use of core drill or saw cutting, except as specifically permitted on the Drawings. Caulk, mortar into place and waterproof all penetrations in below grade walls or floors. END OF SECTION 16010 Transfort Facility Expansion 16020 - 1 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS August, 2012 AND SHOP DRAWINGS SECTION 16020 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section is supplementary to any General requirement or Division 1 section. Where conflict in content occurs, the more stringent criteria shall apply, 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit on all equipment as listed within this Division and/or as shown on the Drawings. B. For pre-bid Include all unapproved items, including light fixtures of different manufacturer and/or model than as indicated in a Fixture Schedule, in notes, or as indicated in these Specifications. C. Refer to architectural requirements for submittal copy requirements and delivery method. 1.3 SUBMITTALS PRIOR TO ORDERING A. Maximum of 30 days after award of contract or less as required to meet proposed project schedule. See individual Sections within this Division for specific equipment submittals that will be required. B. Allow fourteen (14) working days for review of such submittals. C. Where shorter review periods are required to maintain delivery times within the Project Schedule, submit a separate written request for shorter periods with the submittals and list specific equipment or systems where shorter review time is dictated. END OF SECTION 16020 Transfort Facility Expansion 16040 - 1 SECONDARY August, 2012 ELECTRICAL SERVICE SECTION 16040 SECONDARY ELECTRICAL SERVICE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECONDARY SERVICE A. 480/277 Volt, 3 Phase, 4 Wire service is existing to remain. 1.2 UTILIZATION VOLTAGES A. Lighting: 277 volt 1-phase B. Convenience Outlets: 120 volt, 1-phase. Power outlets: 120 volt, 1-phase or as indicated on the Drawings. C. Motors (unless shown otherwise on the Drawings): 1. 3/4 HP and Smaller: 120 volt, 1-phase 2. 1.0 HP and larger: 208 volt, 3-phase D. Special Equipment: As shown on the Drawings 1.3 UTILITY COORDINATION A. Utility Company Serving this facility: Fort Collins Light and Power Company. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and Equipment: Acceptable to the Utility Company prior to start of construction. END OF SECTION 16040 Transfort Facility Expansion 16060 - 1 GROUNDING AND August, 2012 BONDING SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. B. Power system grounding C. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product or hardware indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. Transfort Facility Expansion 16060 - 2 GROUNDING AND August, 2012 BONDING 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure- type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. 2.3 GROUNDING HARDWARE A. Provide all bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps, etc. as required for a complete, operating grounding system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No.8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Connections to Structural Steel and Reinforcing Bars: UL listed irreversible compression connectors. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct- mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, Transfort Facility Expansion 16060 - 3 GROUNDING AND August, 2012 BONDING heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. C. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode at each pole and bond to the separate insulated equipment grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors back to main panel or service. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Install all wiring grounding conductors in raceways with phase and grounded conductors. Grounding electrode conductors shall be installed without any joint or splice. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground- resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method using 600 volt megohm tester according to IEEE 81 or by use of clamp-on grounding tester. c. Provide written report of grounding test results prior to project Substantial Completion B. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground for the service exceeds 8.0 ohms, notify Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 16060 Transfort Facility Modifications 16073 - 1 SUPPORTS AND August, 2012 HANGERS SECTION 16073 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Hangers, equipment, and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases. 3. Fastening hardware. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents, including a 30 percent spare margin. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of times the applied force. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. Transfort Facility Modifications 16073 - 2 SUPPORTS AND August, 2012 HANGERS 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. h. Other as approved 3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. 5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. 7. Material: Steel or stainless steel where shown on the Drawings. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. Transfort Facility Modifications 16073 - 3 SUPPORTS AND August, 2012 HANGERS E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Do not use on structural concrete of steel elements without prior approval of the structural engineer of record. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. 5) Other as approved 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. 3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 6) Other as approved 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. Plastic toggles not permitted 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 8. Hollow wall Fasteners: Zinc plated steel Transfort Facility Modifications 16073 - 4 SUPPORTS AND August, 2012 HANGERS 2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. Drive straps or nails specifically prohibited. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. Transfort Facility Modifications 16073 - 5 SUPPORTS AND August, 2012 HANGERS 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts or hollow wall fasteners on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater if approved by the structural engineer of record. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts, Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69, or Spring-tension clamps. Do not drill structural steel members. 7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. Coordinate with the General Contractor. F. In wet locations, install free standing electrical equipment on concrete pads. G. Independently support all electrical items directly from the structure or structural components capable of carrying the load. Do not fasten supports to any piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment or conduit. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in other Divisions for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. Transfort Facility Modifications 16073 - 6 SUPPORTS AND August, 2012 HANGERS 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 LIGHT FIXTURE SUPPORT A. Support all luminaires from structural elements capable of carrying the total weight, including wiring. Mount all light fixtures rigidly and securely with no “rocking” action. Where fixtures are mounted to the surface of a grid ceiling system, specialty clips may be used only if the use results in rigid attachment (provide additional materials as required to prevent “rocking” movement). B. Luminaires in suspended accessible ceiling systems: Provide metal screws or specialty clips to secure fixtures to the grid ceiling per the NEC. Mount all conduits and supports a minimum of 7 inches above any lift-out ceiling system. C. Surface mounted luminaires greater than 12 inches in length: Provide minimum of two supports at each end of the fixture. Supports fixtures from main ceiling tees only. Provide additional cross supports above ceiling to main tees or structure as required. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in other Divisions for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal and lighting poles. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 16073 Transfort Facility Modifications 16075 - 1 ELECTRICAL August, 2012 IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16075 IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Identification for conductors and cable. 2. Warning labels and signs. 3. Equipment identification labels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Marker Tape: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound or split sleeve type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. Transfort Facility Modifications 16075 - 2 ELECTRICAL August, 2012 IDENTIFICATION B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Minimum nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized- or stainless-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Minimum nominal size, 10 by 14 inches. E. Fasteners for Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. F. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR." 2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label. B. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label with black letters on a white or light- gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 2.4 PROHIBITED PRODUCTS A. Embossed tape labels not permitted for any location or application. EXECUTION 2.5 APPLICATION A. Conductor and Cable Identification: Use marker tape to identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data wiring connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and cable pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. Transfort Facility Modifications 16075 - 3 ELECTRICAL August, 2012 IDENTIFICATION B. Warning Labels for Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels, baked-enamel warning sign, or metal-backed, butyrate warning signs. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. 2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high letters on 1-1/2-inch high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Attach using factory self-adhesive, epoxy adhesive, or rivets. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, drilled for screw or rivet attachment. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and legend to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. c. Transformers. d. Motor-control centers. e. Disconnect switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Motor starters. h. Push-button stations. i. Power transfer equipment. j. Contactors. k. Special equipment junction and pull boxes. 2.6 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive labels, signs, or plates. Transfort Facility Modifications 16075 - 4 ELECTRICAL August, 2012 IDENTIFICATION B. Mount level, horizontal reading and parallel with equipment lines C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products D. Mount labels and plates on interior of flush panelboards located in finished spaces. E. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. F. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. G. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. H. Attach non-adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. I. Wire identification: Wire markers at all panelboard gutters, pull boxes, junction boxes, and at load connection. Label with circuit number and panel designation. Label control and alarm conductors with wire designation per control diagrams or manufacturer’s shop drawings. J. Conduit and Box Color Coding: Use colored tape, colored split bands, or painted color bands to identify conduits and box covers and label as outlined below: FUNCTION COLOR LETTERING 240 or 208 volt None Circuit Numbers 277/480 volt Yellow “HIGH VOLTAGE” + Circuit Numbers Data and Telephone Blue “DATA/COM” Emergency Lighting Rust “EM LTG” Fire Alarm Red “FIRE ALARM” Low Voltage Switching Black “LV SWITCHING” K. Color-Coding for voltage and phase Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Color shall be factory applied 2. Grounding Conductor: Green per NEC 3. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue d. Grounded (Neutral): White Transfort Facility Modifications 16075 - 5 ELECTRICAL August, 2012 IDENTIFICATION 4. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Grounded (Neutral): Gray END OF SECTION 16075 Transfort Facility Modifications 16120 - 1 WIRE AND CABLE August, 2012 600 VOLT AND LESS SECTION 16120 WIRE AND CABLE - 600 VOLT AND LESS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70 C. NEMA WC 3 – Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. D. NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and Cable for Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THW, THHN-THWN, or XHHW. Transfort Facility Modifications 16120 - 2 WIRE AND CABLE August, 2012 600 VOLT AND LESS 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp. 6. As approved C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper for all feeders and services. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Aluminum conductor not permitted for any size or application. C. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. D. Use Type THHN/THWN for supply conductor connection to ballasted light fixtures. E. For high temperature areas and within 10 feet of any heating equipment. Use insulation rated 105 degrees C. F. Control Circuits: Copper stranded Type THHN/THWN G. Fire Alarm Circuits: Copper, solid conductor Type THHN/THWN 3.2 GENERAL WIRING METHODS A. All line voltage conductors to be installed in an approved raceway system, regardless of voltage or application. B. Minimum Wire Size: #12AWG. Transfort Facility Modifications 16120 - 3 WIRE AND CABLE August, 2012 600 VOLT AND LESS C. Minimum Wire Size: Use #10 AWG for all exterior lighting circuit plus all 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet or 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet. D. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in the same raceway. E. Neatly train and lace or wire-tie wiring inside boxes, cabinets, equipment, and panelboards. F. Make parallel circuit conductor lengths equal. 3.3 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes of proper size and volume. B. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for solid copper wire splices and taps. Stranded conductors #8 AWG and smaller to be connected using pressure connectors only after the conductors are solder tinned. C. For copper conductors #8 AWG and larger, using insulated solderless compression connectors. D. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape and insulated splice caps. E. Thoroughly clean all conductors before installing lugs or connectors. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS A. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant for conductor sizes larger than #4 AWG and where necessary. Compound may be equal to Ideal “Yellow” and must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. B. Install wire into conduit in building interior after building has been physically protected from the weather, with all concrete and plastering work completed and after all mechanical work likely to damage wire completed. Do not install conductors in incomplete conduit runs. C. Completely swap all raceways before installing conductors. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. Transfort Facility Modifications 16120 - 4 WIRE AND CABLE August, 2012 600 VOLT AND LESS G. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. All terminations in underground, exterior or wet location boxes to be watertight. H. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 8 inches of slack. I. Color coding shall be per mechanical or special equipment diagrams or as required for application. See Electrical Identification Section of this Division. Color coding of sizes #6 AWG and smaller shall be by factory color-coding of insulation. For conductors #4 AWG and larger, color taping of the exposed ends shall be acceptable. J. Conductor bends shall be made in a neat, consistent manner. Conductors larger than #6 AWG shall be bent to avoids stress points on the insulation where routed through bushings or other openings. Any insulation so stressed shall result in replacement of the entire conductor length at the Engineer’s discretion. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Perform continuity test on all power and branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing connections prior to energizing three-phase equipment. 3. Provide megohm meter (i.e. Megger) testing of all feeder and service conductors larger than #4 AWG. Use 600 volt megohm meter and submit results to the Engineer. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. D. Recheck all splices and terminations and make tight during a 15 day period immediately prior to final acceptance of the work. E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. F. Conductors that are nicked during the process of insulation removal shall be replaced at the discretion of the Engineer with no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 16120 Transfort Facility Modifications 16130 - 1 RACEWAYS August, 2012 AND BOXES SECTION 16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, cabinets, underground warning tape, etc. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC): ANSI C80.1. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): ANSI C80.6. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): ANSI C80.3. D. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): Zinc-coated steel. E. Liquidtight Metal Conduit (LFMC): Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. Transfort Facility Modifications 16130 - 2 RACEWAYS August, 2012 AND BOXES 1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. 2. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. ENT: NEMA TC 13. B. PVC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated. C. LFNC: UL 1660. D. Fittings for ENT and PVC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. E. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric. 4. As approved C. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type or flanged-and-gasketed type for NEMA 3R as indicated on the Drawings . F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Transfort Facility Modifications 16130 - 3 RACEWAYS August, 2012 AND BOXES 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Thomas & Betts Corporation. b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. d. As approved B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division. b. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division. c. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division. d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. e. Panduit Corp. f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. h. As approved 2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable] rectangular. E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round. F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum, with gasketed cover. H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. I. Cabinets: Transfort Facility Modifications 16130 - 4 RACEWAYS August, 2012 AND BOXES 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Underground Conduit to within 5 feet of building: PVC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried. 2. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R. B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: EMT 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size except that 3/8” size may be used for fixture connections. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded GRC fittings, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot- water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. Transfort Facility Modifications 16130 - 5 RACEWAYS August, 2012 AND BOXES C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. Use of FMC in concealed spaces to be limited to 48 inches maximum and only with prior approval of each specific location from the Engineer. H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Change from ENT to PVC, Type EPC-40-PVC, GRC, or IMC before rising above the floor. I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. K. Raceways for Communications Cable: Install as follows: 1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. 3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. M. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of FMC or LFMC for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures in accessible ceilings and all exposed Transfort Facility Modifications 16130 - 6 RACEWAYS August, 2012 AND BOXES equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. N. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. O. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. 2. Install backfill as specified. 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified. 4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow. 5. Install manufactured GRC elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. 6. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits. Utilize yellow polyethylene material, minimum 3 inches wide and 3 mils thickness. Imprint yellow tape with black letters reading “WARNING – BURIED ELECTRIC BELOW”. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. END OF SECTION 16130 Transfort Facility Modifications 16140 - 1 WIRING DEVICES August, 2012 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacle. 2. Receptacles with integral GFCI. 3. Snap switches. 4. Communications outlets. 5. Associated device plates. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). Transfort Facility Modifications 16140 - 2 WIRING DEVICES August, 2012 5. As approved 2.2 DEVICE COLOR A. Except for special purpose devices and as otherwise indicated in these Specifications and on the Drawings, device and matching device plate color shall be: GREY 2.3 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 Ampere: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). 2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 Ampere: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084. c. Hubbell GFR5352 d. As approved 2.5 SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 Ampere : 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: Transfort Facility Modifications 16140 - 3 WIRING DEVICES August, 2012 a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224- 2 (four way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way). e. approved 2.6 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS A. Telephone Outlet: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper; 3560-6. b. Leviton; 40649. c. As approved 3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1 complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863. 2.7 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished and Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 3. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with in-use style lockable cover by Hubbell, Carlon or as approved. Nonmetallic assembly not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: Transfort Facility Modifications 16140 - 4 WIRING DEVICES August, 2012 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 8 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. E. Receptacle Orientation: Transfort Facility Modifications 16140 - 5 WIRING DEVICES August, 2012 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates, except on masonry surfaces. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 3. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 4. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 16140 Transfort Facility Modifications 16145 - 1 LIGHTING CONTROL August, 2012 DEVICES SECTION 16145 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION A. The work covered in this section is subject to all of the requirements in the General Con- ditions of the Specifications. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all of the trades covered in other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operable system. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Install a lighting control system consisting of relay/contactor panel(s), control switches, occupancy sensors, photocells and other controlling devices. The devices are connected by low voltage and line voltage wiring. The general operation of lighting and controlled loads shall include: 1. Interior lighting: Manual switch and occupancy sensor control on/off with automatic time scheduled shut off. 2. Scheduled on/off loads: Time on, time off by automatic time schedule with after hour override capability and shutoff. 3. Exterior lighting: Photocell or astronomic on/time off, time on/photocell or astronomic off. Exterior security lighting: Photocell or astronomic on, photocell or astronomic off. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types and capacities, whose products have been in satisfac- tory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical wiring work. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to types of electrical equipment and enclosures. D. UL Approvals: UL listed under UL 916 Energy Management Equipment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional drawings of all lighting control system components and accessories. B. One Line Diagram: Submit a one-line diagram of the proposed system configuration if it differs from that illustrated in the riser diagram included in the contract drawings. C. Typical Wiring Diagrams: Submit typical wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited to, lighting control panels, relays, contactors, photocells, switches, occu- pancy sensors and daylighting controls. D. The basis of the specified system is the LP8 lighting control relay panel manufactured by The Watt Stopper. Any other system to be considered must submit descriptive infor- mation a minimum of 10 working days prior to bid. Prior approval does not guarantee fi- Transfort Facility Modifications 16145 - 2 LIGHTING CONTROL August, 2012 DEVICES nal approval by the electrical engineer. The contractor shall be completely responsible for providing a system meeting this specification in its entirety. All deviations from this specification must be listed and individually signed off by the consultant as part of the pre-bid review. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RELAY PANELS 1) Description a) Lighting Control Panels shall be UL listed and consist of the following: i) Enclosure/Tub: NEMA 1. ii) Cover: Surface or Flush as required, hinged, lockable and shall restrict access to line voltage section. iii) Interior: Barrier for separation of high voltage (class 1) and low voltage (class 2) wir- ing. It shall include intelligence boards, power supply and control relays. Clock dis- play and keypad shall be mounted on interior cabinet door for easy user access and programming. 2) Features a) Panel shall accept up to eight single pole relays. Relays shall be individual latching re- lays with 20 Amp load contacts for ballast (including HID, magnetic or electronic type ballasts), tungsten and general purpose loads. Provide isolated auxiliary contacts for pi- lot light switching. Relays shall use quick connectors and be individually replaceable to facilitate ease of use. b) Where indicated, panels shall provide space within the high voltage section of the en- closure to accommodate up to 12 multi-pole contactors. Two sections of DIN rail mount- ing shall be provided as standard. No field drilling or fabrication shall be required for mounting contactors or other accessories within the enclosure. c) The lighting control panel shall provide a stagger up delay, override push buttons, pilot light outputs, and LED status light indicators for each relay or contactor control channel. d) The clock shall have a backlight display, user keypad and shall provide 8 channels of time or astronomical control. Preprogrammed lighting control scenarios shall include: scheduled on/off, manual on/scheduled off, manual on/automatic switch sweep off, as- tronomic or photocell on/off and astronomic or photocell control with scheduled on/off. Time clock shall provide up to 42 holidays, automatic daylight savings adjustment, as- tronomic coordinates by major cities, and help screens. Program memory shall be non- volatile and clock shall retain time keeping during power outages for at least 48 hours. e) The panel shall have 8 universal switch inputs that are low voltage, self-configuring and shall not require programming to accept momentary on/ momentary off switch, push but- ton switch (cycling), maintained switch or 24VDC signals from occupancy sensors, pho- tocells or other interfacing devices. f) Occupancy sensor and time control shall be integrated to allow occupancy sensor con- trol after hours with hold on of lighting during occupancy scheduled time. During occu- pied time, control scenarios shall be selectable for time schedule of lighting on or occu- pancy sensor detection of lighting on initially and then hold on of lighting during occu- Transfort Facility Modifications 16145 - 3 LIGHTING CONTROL August, 2012 DEVICES pied hours. Control shall provide selectable occupancy sensor blink warning prior to shut off and adjustable occupancy sensor time delay from the time clock keypad. g) After-hour interior lighting shut off control shall provide a full duration override time of 1 to 240 minutes with a warning blink five minutes prior to shutting the lighting off. An im- pending shut off will be cancelled and the override period re-initialized through the oper- ation of any assigned switch input. h) After-hour interior lighting shut off control may be by line voltage power interrupt control to automatic control switches. The lighting control relay panel shall provide a warning blink signal to automatic control switches, thus allowing a five-minute delay prior to shut- ting off lighting. The lighting shut off event may be cancelled by pressing the automatic control switch push button. The lighting control panel time clock shall provide periodic lighting sweep signals to shut off automatic control switches. 2.02 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1) Watt Stopper/Legrand or approved equal. 2) Watt Stopper/Legrand catalog numbers. a) Lighting control relay panel: LP8 or LP24 b) Low voltage exterior photocell: EM24-A2 c) Automatic Control Switch: AS-100 / HB350-B-L3 as required for a complete system PART 3 EXECUTION AND SUPPORT SERVICES 3.01 INSTALLATION B. All lighting control panels, switches, occupancy sensors, photocells, etc., shall be mounted as indicated on the Reflected Ceiling Plans. All wiring shall be labeled clearly indicating which lighting control panel or device it connects to. Use only properly color- coded, stranded wire as indicated on the drawings. All relays, contactors, and switches shall be tested after installation to confirm proper operation, and all connected loads shall be recorded on the lighting control schedule for each panel. C. The lighting control panels shall be mounted as indicated on the drawings. The relay panel shall be wired to control the power of each load as indicated on the Lighting Con- trol Panel Schedules. All power wiring will be identified with the circuit breaker number controlling the load. 3.02 CONTRACTOR PROVIDED INFORMATION 1) Contractor shall provide system documentation after the equipment has been installed: a) Lighting control operational summary sheet. b) Programming record sheet. c) System Installation and Operation Manual shall be provided to the owner. 3.03 WARRANTY Manufacturer shall provide a one year warranty for all system components. END OF SECTION 16145 Transfort Facility Modifications 16410 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES August, 2012 AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS SECTION 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Single, Separate Enclosed: 1. Fusible switch 2. Nonfusible switch 3. Switch with thermal overload device 4. Enclosures 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. Transfort Facility Modifications 16410 - 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES August, 2012 AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. As approved B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses where required, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Provide with voltage rating for system being applied. D. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when specific Class R fuses are specified. 4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2.2 SWITCH WITH THERMAL OVERLOAD A. Outlet box mounted switch with integral thermal device for all 120 volt, 1-phase motor loads as shown on the Drawings, including self-protected motors. B. Size heater at 115% of the full load current or as otherwise required by the manufacturer C. Mount on or directly adjacent to the motor load. D. Equip with device plate to meet requirements of the location. E. Provide engraved label on switch or engraved device plate defining load served. F. Switch/Fuse combination units (e.g. SKU) expressly prohibited Transfort Facility Modifications 16410 - 3 ENCLOSED SWITCHES August, 2012 AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2.3 ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R 3. Kitchen or Wash-Down] Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel or fiberglass. 4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. C. Install fuses in fusible devices. D. Comply with NECA 1. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Transfort Facility Modifications 16410 - 4 ENCLOSED SWITCHES August, 2012 AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION 16410 Transfort Facility Modifications 16442 - 1 PANELBOARDS August, 2012 SECTION 16442 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 SPARE PARTS A. Keys: Furnish minimum of five (5) or two (2) per panelboard to Owner. B. Fuses: Furnish to the Owner three spare fuses of each size, type and rating installed and mounted in the existing spare fuse cabinet located in the existing electrical room. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Spaces: Defined as unoccupied portions of the panelboard bus and trim components which may be used for installation of circuit breakers or fusible switch units in the future. Transfort Facility Modifications 16442 - 2 PANELBOARDS August, 2012 B. Spares: Defined as unused circuit breakers or fusible switch units to be provided in the panelboard for future loads in addition to the connected complement of devices. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NEMA PB 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder indicating load served and location. B. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Tin-plated aluminum C. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. D. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short- circuit current available at terminals. See Electrical One-Line Diagram. Minimum values – 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical for 120/208 or /240 volt systems and 14,000 amperes RMS symmetrical for 277/480 volt systems. Transfort Facility Modifications 16442 - 3 PANELBOARDS August, 2012 2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: The fusible distribution panelboard is existing, manufactured by General Electric. 2.3 BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. As approved. B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. C. Mains: See One-Line Diagram. 1. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. D. Doors: Concealed hinges with door-in-door construction; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. 2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 5. As approved B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. 2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground- fault protection (5-mA trip). 3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. Transfort Facility Modifications 16442 - 4 PANELBOARDS August, 2012 c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high- intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Shunt Trip: 120V trip coil energized from separate circuit. f. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on position. C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1. B. Mount top of trim 76 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges. E. Obtain breaker settings from the Engineer and set prior to system energization. Do NOT leave trip setting at factory-set minimum values. F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. G. Stub one 1-inch empty conduits for each three empty pole spaces and one additional empty 1-inch conduit from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. I. Comply with NECA 1. J. Arrange conduit entries to avoid congested areas or overlapping arrays or incorrectly punched or removed knockouts 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. Transfort Facility Modifications 16442 - 5 PANELBOARDS August, 2012 B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. C. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding 2. Check for proper installation of breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. D. Phase Balance: 1. Measure steady state loads at each panelboard feeder. 2. Where phase unbalance exceeds 20 percent, rearrange circuits to balance the loads within 20 percent. 3. Modify branch circuit panel schedule. 4. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. 5. Submit test results to the Engineer. E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION 16442 Transfort Facility Modifications 16461 - 1 DRY TYPE August, 2012 TRANSFORMERS SECTION 16461 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of general purpose and specialty dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less: 1. Distribution transformers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and weights. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 16. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Transfort Facility Modifications 16461 - 2 DRY TYPE August, 2012 TRANSFORMERS B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acme Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division. 2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp. 3. Controlled Power Company. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 5. Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp. 6. General Electric Company. 7. Micron Industries Corp. 8. Myers Power Products, Inc. 9. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 10. Sola/Hevi-Duty. 11. Square D; Schneider Electric. 12. Other 2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service. B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel. C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps. 1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Aluminum 2.3 GENERAL PURPOSE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561. B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Division 16. C. Cores: One leg per phase. D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2. 1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air. E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250. 1. Finish Color: Gray ANSI 49 gray. F. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature, unless otherwise noted. G. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger: Transfort Facility Modifications 16461 - 3 DRY TYPE August, 2012 TRANSFORMERS 1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2. H. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets only for sizes no more than 45 kva. 2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate. Indicate transformer designation, voltage, location of source breaker, and load served. Nameplates are specified in Division 16. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer. 1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified. B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions, seismic codes applicable to Project. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results. B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals. C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings. END OF SECTION 16461 Transfort Facility Modifications 16491 - 1 FUSES August, 2012 SECTION 16491 FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.4 SPARES A. Provide three (3) spare fuses of each size and type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following 1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc. 5. Other Transfort Facility Modifications 16491 - 2 FUSES August, 2012 2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages. B. Provide fuse class or equivalent to any Bussmann designation, where shown on the Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder. END OF SECTION 16491 Transfort Facility Modifications 16511 - 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING August, 2012 SECTION 16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs. 3. Lighting fixture supports. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer. D. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In Luminaire Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. Transfort Facility Modifications 16511 - 2 INTERIOR LIGHTING August, 2012 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Fixtures in entry corridors or kitchen areas to be equipped with gasketed door frame or lens assemblies. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. D. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 87 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. 5. 2.3 EXIT SIGNS A. Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Minimum letter height on exit signs to be 6 inches. 1. Lamps for AC Operation: Green LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Rating: Exit fixture emergency power system will include spare capacity for up to three additional remote egress heads that will operate on power failure only. Battery rating will support exit and remote heads for minimum of 90 minutes before automatic cutoff due to low voltage. 3. Remote heads shall be as shown on the Drawings with weatherproof units on exterior locations. Transfort Facility Modifications 16511 - 3 INTERIOR LIGHTING August, 2012 2.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. 4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. 5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 2.5 LAMPS A. LED assemblies, per specification. 2.6 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel. D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. Coordinate fixture locations with the Architectural Reflected ceiling Plan. Coordinate space requirements with the Mechanical Contractors and other trades prior to rough-in. B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports. C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: Transfort Facility Modifications 16511 - 4 INTERIOR LIGHTING August, 2012 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures according to manufacturer’s or Engineer’s criteria to provide required light footcandle intensities E. Mount all fixtures and outlets at a position and height to clear all ductwork, piping, etc. F. Install grid clips or other approved methods required to secure the fixtures to the ceiling system. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 16511 Transfort Facility Modifications 16515 - 1 SOLID STATE LUMINAIRE August, 2012 LIGHTING SECTION 16515 SOLID STATE LUMINAIRE LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This specification is for the purchase of Solid State Lighting (SSL) Luminaires (herein referred to as luminaires) applied to the illumination of interior spaces. Luminaires shall be listed in accordance with national recognized testing laboratories (NRTLs) approved by the United States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) under the requirements of 29CFR1910.7. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Datasheets (general device descriptions, dimensions, wiring details, nomenclature). B. Other Diagrams – As needed for special operation or interaction with other system(s). C. Other operational descriptions as needed. 1.5 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall provide a warranty against loss of performance and defects in materials and workmanship for the luminaires for a period of 5 years after acceptance of the luminaires. Replacement luminaires shall be provided promptly after receipt of luminaires that have failed at no cost to the customer. All warranty documentation shall be provided to customer prior to random sample testing. PART 2 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 2.1 Each luminaire shall consist of an assembly that utilizes LEDs as the light source. In addition, a complete luminaire shall consist of a housing, LED array, and electronic driver (power supply). 2.2 Each luminaire shall be rated for a minimum operational life of 50,000 hours as defined by IES LM-80 and TM-21. 2.3 Each luminaire shall be designed to operate at an average operating temperature of 25°C. B. The operating temperature range shall be -10°C to +25°C. Transfort Facility Modifications 16515 - 2 SOLID STATE LUMINAIRE August, 2012 LIGHTING 2.4 Each luminaire shall meet all parameters of this specification throughout the minimum operational life when operated at the average operating temperature. 2.6 The individual LEDs shall be connected such that a catastrophic loss or the failure of one LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire. 2.7 Each luminaire shall be listed with a nationally recognized testing laboratory (including but not limited to UL, CSA, ETL) under UL 1598 and UL 8750, or an equivalent standard from a recognized testing laboratory. PART 3 - TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 3.1 ELECTRICAL A. Power Consumption: Input voltage 277 VAC. B. Power Factor: The luminaire shall have a power factor of 0.90% or greater at all standard operating voltages. C. THD: Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC power line by a luminaire shall not exceed 20 percent at any standard input voltage. D. Surge Suppression: The luminaire shall include surge protection to withstand high repetition noise and other interference. 1. The surge protection which may reside within the driver shall protect the luminaire from damage and failure for transient voltages and currents as defined in ANSI/IEEE C64.41 1991 for Location Category A Low where failure does not mean a momentary loss of light during the transient event. 2. Surge protection performance shall be tested per the procedures in ANSI/IEEE C62.45 based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41 1991 definitions for standard and optional waveforms for Location Category A-Low. F. Operational Performance: The LED circuitry shall prevent perceptible flicker to the unaided eye over the voltage range specified above. G. RF Interference: The luminaire and associated on-board circuitry must meet Class A emission limits referred in Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15 regulations concerning the emission of electronic noise. H. Dimming: The luminaire shall be capable of continuous dimming without perceivable flicker over a range of 100% to 5% of rated lumen output. Dimming shall be controlled by a 0-10V signal. I. Lumen Management: The luminaire shall be capable of continuously monitoring system performance to allow for constant lumen management / compensation function. 3.2 PHOTOMETRIC REQUIREMENTS Transfort Facility Modifications 16515 - 3 SOLID STATE LUMINAIRE August, 2012 LIGHTING A. Light Output: 1. The minimum initial lumen output of the luminaire shall be 3294 lumens exiting the luminaire in the 0-90 degree zone - as measured by IESNA Standard LM-79- 08. 2. The lumen output shall not decrease by more than 20% over the minimum operational life of Section 2.2 (or L80 shall be at least the minimum number of hours as specified in Section 2.2). 3. The measurements shall be calibrated to standard photopic calibrations. B. Light Color/Quality: 1. Corrected Color temperature (CCT) range between 3,500K and 4,100K and shall be correlated to chromaticity as defined by the absolute (X,Y) coordinates on the 2-D CIE chromaticity chart. 2. The color rendition index (CRI) shall be 80 or greater. 3.3 THERMAL MANAGEMENT A. The thermal management (of the heat generated by the LEDs) shall be of sufficient capacity to assure proper operation of the luminaire over the expected useful life (Section 2.2). 1. The LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature for the expected life (Section 2.2) shall not be exceeded at the average operating ambient. 2. The LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature for the catastrophic failure shall not be exceeded at the maximum operating ambient. 3. The luminaire shall have an UL IC rating. B. The Driver manufacturer’s maximum case temperature shall not be exceeded at the maximum operating ambient. Thermal management shall be passive by design. 1. The use of fans or other mechanical devices shall not be allowed. 3.4 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. The luminaire shall be a single, self-contained device, not requiring on-site assembly for installation. The power supply for the luminaire shall be integral to the unit. B. The assembly and manufacturing process for the SSL luminaire shall be designed to assure all internal components are adequately supported to withstand mechanical shock and vibration. C. The optical assembly of the luminaire shall consist of a ribbed metal reflector system and extruded refracting optical lens with high-transmission internal diffusion film applied to the inside of the refracting lens. No individual LED images shall be visible to the occupant. Transfort Facility Modifications 16515 - 4 SOLID STATE LUMINAIRE August, 2012 LIGHTING D. The electronics/power supply enclosure shall be internal to the SSL luminaire and be accessible per UL requirements. E. The circuit board and power supply shall be contained inside the luminaire. F. Electrical connections between normal power, driver and LED boards must be modular utilizing a snap fit connector. All electrical components must be easily accessible after installation from the room side and all electrical components must be able to be replaced without removing the fixture from the ceiling. 3.5 MATERIALS A. Housings shall be fabricated from post or pre-painted cold rolled steel. B. Each refractor or lens shall be made from UV inhibited high impact plastic (such as acrylic or polycarbonate) or heat and impact resistant glass. C. Polymeric materials (if used) of enclosures containing either the power supply or electronic components of the luminaire shall be made of UL94VO flame retardant materials. The lenses (lens) of the luminaire are excluded from this requirement. 3.6 LUMINAIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Each luminaire shall have the manufacturer's name, trademark, model number, serial number, date of manufacture (month-year), and lot number as identification permanently marked inside each unit and the outside of each packaging box. B. The following operating characteristics shall be permanently marked inside each unit: rated voltage and rated power in Watts and Volt-Ampere. PART 4 - QUALITY ASSURANCE 4.1 The luminaires shall be manufactured in accordance with a manufacturer quality assurance (QA) program. The QA program shall include two types of quality assurance: (1) design quality assurance and (2) production quality assurance. The production quality assurance shall include statistically controlled routine tests to ensure minimum performance levels of the modules built to meet this specification, and a documented process of how problems are to be resolved. 4.2 QA process and test results documentation shall be kept on file for a minimum period of seven years. 4.3 LED luminaire designs not satisfying design qualification testing and the production quality assurance testing performance requirements described below shall not be labeled, advertised, or sold as conforming to this specification. END OF SECTION 16515 Transfort Facility Modifications 16521 - 1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING August, 2012 SECTION 16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires. 2. Poles and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate lighting equipment installation with the General Contractor. B. Coordinate bidding, installation, and placement of concrete components with the General Contractor. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code." C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In Luminaire Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: Transfort Facility Modifications 16521 - 2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING August, 2012 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 3. Basis of Design Product: The design of each item of exterior luminaire and its support is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires. C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires. F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens. G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel. H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field. J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors. Transfort Facility Modifications 16521 - 3 EXTERIOR LIGHTING August, 2012 L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and - tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials. M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Color as selected by Engineer or Architect. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2.3 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4. 1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed of 100 mph, with a gust factor of 1.3. 2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis. B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated. C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated. 3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel. D. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are by General Contractor. Coordinate requirements during Bid Preparation. 2.4 STEEL POLES A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig (317 MPa); 1-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall. 1. Shape: Square, straight. 2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway support. Transfort Facility Modifications 16521 - 4 EXTERIOR LIGHTING August, 2012 B. Steel Mast Arms: Continuously welded to pole attachment plate. Material and finish same as pole. C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace. 1. Adapter fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with galvanized steel bolts. 2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire. 3. Match pole material and finish. D. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and securely fastened to pole top. E. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded log listed for attaching grounding and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole. F. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor. G. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting. H. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M. I. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Color shall be as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION A. Lamps provided in each luminaire. B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and approved by manufacturer. 3.2 POLE INSTALLATION A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole. B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: Transfort Facility Modifications 16521 - 5 EXTERIOR LIGHTING August, 2012 1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches. 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 6 feet. 3. Trees: 15 feet. C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing by General Contractor; coordinate requirements D. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable). E. Touch up marred paint finishes on poles or luminaires at completion of the work. 3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION A. Steel Conduits: In concrete foundations, use PVC-coated conduit, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap or protect conduit using tar coating. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Ground metal poles and support structures 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire assembly to equipment grounding conductor. B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures. 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations. END OF SECTION 16521 FINAL DRAINAGE REPORT FOR TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION FORT COLLINS, COLORADO Prepared for: ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY ARCHITECTS PROJECT MANAGER: MATT NEWMAN 712 WHALERS WAY, BLDG B, SUITE 100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 PHONE: (970) 223-1820 JSD PROJECT NO. 2598 MARCH 30, 2011 Prepared by: 153 West Mountain Avenue Fort Collins, Colorado 80524 Fax 970.484.2443 970.484.1921 F:\JSD PROJECTS\2598 TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION\03 DESIGN CALCULATIONS\DRAINAGE\REPORT\2598 COVER LETTER.DOC March 30, 2011 Wes Lamarque City of Fort Collins – Storm Water Utility 700 Wood Street Fort Collins, CO 80522 RE: Transfort Facility Expansion Project JSD Project No.: 2598 Mr. Larmarque: Please refer to our enclosed submittal for the “Final Drainage & Erosion Control Report for the Transfort Facility Expansion Project.” This report has been prepared in accordance with the drainage guidelines presented in the City of Fort Collins’ Storm Drainage Criteria and Construction Standards along with the Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual. Please feel free to contact our office at (970) 484-1921 at your convenience if you have any questions regarding this report. We thank you for your time and consideration in reviewing the drainage and erosion control report. Sincerely, Jim Sell Design, Inc. Jason Claeys, PE Project Engineer JIM SELL DESIGN, INC. Landscape Architecture, Engineering & Planning 153 West Mountain Avenue Fort Collins, CO 80524 Tele: 970.484.1921 Fax: 970.484-2443 Page i TABLE OF CONTENTS Table of Contents............................................................................................................................. i Engineer’s Certification Block ....................................................................................................... ii General Description and Location .................................................................................................. 1 Site Description and Location ..................................................................................................... 1 Site Soils...................................................................................................................................... 1 Storm Drainage Criteria.................................................................................................................. 2 Hydrologic Criteria...................................................................................................................... 2 Hydraulic Criteria........................................................................................................................ 2 Drainage Basins and Historic Runoff ............................................................................................. 4 Historic Basin .............................................................................................................................. 4 Developed Basins ........................................................................................................................ 4 Drainage Facility Design ................................................................................................................ 6 Drainage Conveyance Design ..................................................................................................... 6 Detention/Water Quality Pond Design........................................................................................ 6 Stormwater Pollution Prevention.................................................................................................... 7 Temporary Erosion Control......................................................................................................... 7 Permanent Erosion Control ......................................................................................................... 7 Conclusions..................................................................................................................................... 8 References....................................................................................................................................... 9 Appendix....................................................................................................................................... 10 Site Descriptions and Characteristics ...................................................................................... A-1 Pond Calculations.................................................................................................................... A-2 Historic & Proposed Rational Calculations............................................................................. A-3 Conveyance Element Sizing.................................................................................................... A-4 Erosion Control Details ........................................................................................................... A-5 Page ii ENGINEER’S CERTIFICATION BLOCK I hereby certify that this Drainage Report for the Transfort Facility Expansion Project was prepared by me (or under my direct supervision) for the Owners thereof and meets or exceeds the City of Fort Collins’ Storm Drainage Design Criteria and Construction Standards. ________________________________________ Jason Thomas Claeys Registered Professional Engineer State of Colorado No. 42122 Page 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION AND LOCATION SITE DESCRIPTION AND LOCATION The Transfort Facility Expansion is a proposed addition to the current Transfort Operations Headquarters to house the future Mason Street BRT bus fleet and an associated bus training area. The Transfort Operations Headquarters is located at 6570 Portner Road, between College (Hwy 287) and Lemay, just off of Trilby. The site is bound by Trilby to the south, Portner Road and a natural drainage way to the west, open space and the Prairie Dog Meadow Natural Area to the North, and the residential subdivision Brittany Knolls to the east. Access to the site is off of Portner Road and no new accesses are proposed with this project. The total site area included the existing facility and the area defined associated with the proposed improvements, is approximately 10.40 acres. For the intent of this drainage report and calculations, the area analyzed consists of the proposed improvements that contribute to the increase in impervious area, which is approximately 3.24 acres. The site area currently consists of a portion of the existing Transfort site and the remaining is undeveloped open space. It appears that the past use of the site has been open space seeded with non-native grasses. The naturalized drainage way to the west does contain wetland species but is not going to be affected with this project with the exception of the installation of the pond outlet pipe. An Ecological Characterization Study has been completed and discusses the naturalized drainage way and also discusses a remnant stock pond wetland. To maintain this small wetland area and trees, the drainage patterns to this area will be modified to accommodate the proposed improvements but will not divert runoff away from this wetland. The site general slopes 1% to 2% from the southeast to the northwest. The site is proposed to be constructed with an approx 16,240 sf bus storage facility and approximately 62,500 sf concrete paved vehicle access and training area. The detention pond is proposed to be located in the northwest corner of the site and outlets into the western naturalized drainage way. The pond is designed to detain the increase 100-yr runoff rates, while releasing at the historic 2-yr runoff rate. This drainage way along the west side of the site has been included in a drainage study as a tributary to Stone Creek. The HEC-RAS models have been provided by the City of Fort Collins and reviewed. It appears that cross sections 1512 thru 1200 would be located near the facility expansion and does not breach the drainage way during a 100-yr event. The Transfort Facility is located along a tributary to the Fossil Creek Drainage Basin. The Transfort Facility is not located within a FEMA regulated floodplain or floodway. SITE SOILS According to the National Cooperative Soil Survey-Web Soil Survey 1.1, the area of improvements for the Transfort Facility Expansion site soils consist of clay loam soils. These soils are classified as being in the Type C hydrologic group with a slow infiltration rate. Supporting figures can be found in the appendix. Page 2 STORM DRAINAGE CRITERIA This report was prepared to meet or exceed the City of Fort Collins Storm Drainage Design Criteria & Construction Standards. Urban Drainage Flood Control District’s (UDFCD) Drainage Criteria Manual (USDCM) Volumes 1, 2 and 3 were also referenced as guidelines for this design. HYDROLOGIC CRITERIA The City of Fort Collins’ (CoFC) criteria is used to determine the allowed release rate and required detention volume. It is required that the developed storm water runoff rate shall not be released from developments at a rate greater than the 2-year historic runoff rate. The rational method is used to calculate the 2-yr and 100-yr peak runoff rates under both historic and developed conditions. A combination of runoff coefficients from the CoFC criteria and the time of concentration and intensity equations from the USDCM were referenced to calculate the peak runoff rates for the 2-yr and 100-yr storm events. The UDFCD’s UD-Detention_v2.2 spreadsheet is utilized to calculate the required detention volume. This spreadsheet uses the rational formula-based modified FAA Procedure to determine the detention volume based on a certain release rate. To account for the City of Fort Collins’ IDF Curve, Coefficient 3 of the UDFCD’s intensity formula was adjusted to 0.7867. The City of Fort Collins uses a 1-hr rainfall depth of 2.86 inches for the 100-yr storm, which is the 1997 adjusted rainfall depth. The percent impervious is obtained using USDCM Table RO-3 and Figure RO-5. Using the weighted average of surface characteristics, a composite percent impervious was calculated for each basin under both historic and developed conditions. Using the percent impervious, the runoff coefficients were calculated reflecting the soil characteristics of Type C soils, as defined by the Natural Resources Conservation Service’s Web Soil Survey 2.0. The longest time of concentration was calculated for each basin. All of these site calculations, site characteristics and rainfall depths were used as inputs in the detention calculations and are attached for reference. All supporting references and calculations can be found in the appendix. HYDRAULIC CRITERIA The hydraulic elements conveying runoff to the pond is limited to the site’s grading design and curb and gutters. The site is graded to drain from the south to the north and west along the curb and gutter, to a curb cut that drains directly into the detention pond. The rational method was performed to calculate the peak runoff rates for each basin. Weighted percent imperviousness and weighted runoff coefficients were calculated for each basin using USDCM Tables RO-3 and RO-5 and the City of Fort Collins runoff coefficients. The Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) classifies the site with majority Type C hydrologic soil classification with a slow infiltration rate. The time of concentration was calculated using Page 3 USDCM Equation RO-3 and the intensity was calculated using the corresponding storm rainfall depth and USDCM Equation RA-3 The pond was sized as described above in the hydrologic criteria. The outlet structure was designed with an orifice plate that limited the release rate to the 2-yr historic runoff rate. The water quality control feature is based off of USDCM’s design requirements with a 40-hour release rate. The spillway is sized using the equation for trapezoidal broad-crested weirs and sized to allow the combination of site’s developed 100-yr and any offsite 100-yr flows conveyed to the pond and through the spillway with 1’ of freeboard. The pond’s outlet pipe is analyzed using Bentley’s StormCAD storm sewer modeling program to design the pipe size and slopes. StormCAD conducts a steady state simulation and creates flow profiles based on pipe capacities and backwater analysis. The program accounts for head losses within manholes, bends, and head losses associated with pipe friction. Bentley’s FlowMaster was used to compute the open channel hydraulics and verify the capacities of the drainage elements throughout the site. Flow velocities within these elements were reviewed and if flow were found to be supercritical, the appropriate erosion control is sized and proposed to accordingly to protect from erosion. All swale and pipe outlets are protected with riprap. Storm sewer pipe outlets are protected using the requirements set by the USDCM for the protection downstream of culverts. All supporting calculations are located in the appendix. Page 4 DRAINAGE BASINS AND HISTORIC RUNOFF HISTORIC BASIN The historic were analyzed using the rational method as 2 sub-basins. The two basins are: Basin H01 and Basin H02. The basin descriptions are below: Basin H01 is approximately 2.55 acres and consists of the existing open space north of the existing Transfort Facility. The boundary of this basin is determined by the extent of proposed impervious area and the proposed detention pond. This basin is 2.0% impervious with 2-yr and 100-yr peak runoff rates of 1.27 cfs and 5.55 cfs, respectively. This 2-yr runoff rate is used as the allowed release rate of the detention pond. Basin H02 is approximately 0.69 acres. This basin contains the northern access around the current facility and the landscape areas adjacent building. There are 5 area inlets located within the access drive. These basin ultimately drains to a type R inlet and into the western drainage way. This basin is 68.6% impervious with 2-yr and 100-yr peak runoff rates of 1.18 cfs and 5.15 cfs, respectively. Currently, the total basin containing the entire proposed impervious improvements and detention pond has an overall imperviousness of 16.2% with a 2-yr and 100-yr peak runoff rate of 2.46 cfs and 10.70 cfs, respectively, and is approximately 3.24 acres. Reference the exhibits and calculations located in the appendix. DEVELOPED BASINS The developed basin is divided into 3 sub-basins for the developed evaluation. The runoff flow path is determined for each basin, from the furthest point to a design point. The peak 2-yr and 100-yr values were determined for these various design point locations using the rational method. All calculations can be found in the appendix. The sub-basin descriptions are below: Basin D01 is approximately 1.07 acres and consists of the detention pond located in the northwest portion of the site. The basin is 2.0% impervious with a 2-yr and 100-yr peak runoff rate of 0.56 cfs and 2.43 cfs, respectively. Basin D02 is approximately 1.50 acres and consists of the proposed building expansion and the concrete access and training area. This basin was analyzed separate to Basin D01 to verify the capacities of the curb cut which directs runoff to the pond. This basin is 95.5% impervious with 2-yr and 100-yr peak runoff rates of 3.84 cfs and 14.31 cfs, respectively. Page 5 Basin D03 is the remaining areas of Basin H02. The Basin H02 is reduced with the removal of the proposed expansion roof area. Though these appear detached, the existing storm sewer and inlet are going to remain. The reduced area will still drain to the type R inlet and into the drainage way. The one inlet located under the proposed canopy will have a cover placed on it. The basin is 0.66 acres, 93.2% impervious with a 2-yr and 100-yr peak runoff rates of 1.51 cfs and 5.83 cfs, respectively. The total developed basins have an overall imperviousness of 64.1% with a 2-yr and 100-yr peak runoff rate of 5.90 cfs and 22.57 cfs, respectively. Reference the exhibits and calculations located in the appendix. Page 6 DRAINAGE FACILITY DESIGN DRAINAGE CONVEYANCE DESIGN Storm infrastructure to convey runoff will include overland grass-lined swales, existing inlets, and existing storm sewer and the curb and gutter grading of the training area. Storm water detention and water quality enhancement will be achieved through the use of an extended detention basin. Supporting calculations and exhibits can be found in the appendix of this report. DETENTION/WATER QUALITY POND DESIGN An extended detention basin (EDB) with a dry bottom is to be utilized as the detention and water quality facility for the Transfort Facility Expansion site. The pond provides open space in addition to reducing the peak runoff rate and improving the water quality. The pond is located adjacent to the existing naturalized drainage way and within the 50 ft buffer and is allowed because of the compatible uses. The design criteria and procedures in the USDCM Vol. 3 were used as the basis of this design. The EDB water quality capture volume is based off of the required 40-hr drain time. The total detention volume is based on the allowable release rate of the historic 2-yr storm event in addition to the required water quality capture volume. The pond has been designed with maintenance to the outlet structure from the irrigation maintenance road. Water Quality Capture Volume (WQCV): The water quality capture volume required is 0.06 acre-ft with a 40-hr drain time. The WQCV water surface elevation is 4940.38 ft. 100-yr Detention Volume: The peak historic 2-yr runoff rate is equal to 1.27 cfs. The developed peak flow entering the pond from the Transfort Facility Expansion is 16.74 cfs. The combination of the WQCV and the 100-yr detention volume gives the required pond volume of 0.57 acre-ft and a 100-yr WSEL of 4943.45 ft. All supporting calculations are included in the appendix. Page 7 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL A temporary erosion control plan is to be implemented for the site during construction. Temporary erosion control measures include, but not limited to, slope and swale protection provided by the use of erosion control wattles/sediment control logs, silt fence placed around areas of disturbance, construction vehicle tracking pads at entrances, designated concrete truck washout basins, designated vehicle fueling areas, inlet protection, etc. All temporary erosion control measures are to be removed after they are deemed unnecessary. The Town of Parker’s Storm Drainage and Environmental Criteria Manual was referenced for construction best management practice details and can be found in the appendix. PERMANENT EROSION CONTROL Permanent erosion control measures include, but not limited to, the constructed detention/water quality pond, riprap pads placed for culvert outlet protection, seeding and mulch placed to enable and established vegetative growth, etc. Long-term maintenance of these erosion control measures shall be the responsibility of the Owner of the property. Reference the attached erosion control plan. Page 8 CONCLUSIONS This Drainage Report has been prepared to comply with the City of Fort Collins’ Storm Drainage Design Criteria and Construction Standards. The drainage system presented in this report is designed to convey the developed stormwater runoff through the site to the proposed detention pond and provide water quality treatment prior to discharging offsite. The 100-yr peak flow release from the site under the proposed conditions is less than or equal to the 2-yr historical peak runoff. It can therefore be concluded that development of the Transfort Facility Expansion Project will not have an adverse impact on the current runoff conditions. Best management practices are proposed for erosion control during construction, and permanent landscaping, riprap, and a water quality/detention pond are proposed for long-term stormwater management. Page 9 REFERENCES 1. Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual (Volumes 1, 2, and 3), Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, June 2001. 2. City of Fort Collins’ “Storm Drainage Design Criteria and Construction Standards,” Storm Drainage Volume II. Department of Public Works and Water Utilities – Storm Drainage Division, Updated April 1999. 3. “Hydrologic Group Rating for Weld County, Colorado, Southern Part.” USDA-Natural Resources Conservation Service, National Cooperative Soil Survey. Web Soil Survey URL: http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov. [July 11, 2010] 4. Bentley StormCAD Version 5.6 [Computer Software]. Bentley Systems, Inc. 5. Bentley FlowMaster [Computer Software]. Bentley Systems, Inc. 6. Grading, Erosion, and Sediment Control Manual (GESC), Douglas County Department of Public Works – Engineering Division, March 2004 7. Storm Drainage and Environmental Criteria Manual, Construction Best Management Practices, Standard Details, Town of Parker, Colorado, December 2002 Page 10 APPENDIX Site Descriptions and Characteristics Pond Calculations Historic & Proposed Rational Calculations Conveyance Element Sizing Erosion Control Page A-1 SITE DESCRIPTIONS AND CHARACTERISTICS Trilby Rd Portner Dr Westbourn Cir Autumn Ridge Dr Compton Rd Desert Willow Way 90 54 27 63 106 27 106 494340 494340 494400 494400 494460 494460 494520 494520 494580 494580 494640 494640 494700 494700 4482540 4482540 4482600 4482600 4482660 4482660 4482720 4482720 4482780 4482780 4482840 4482840 4482900 4482900 4482960 4482960 4483020 4483020 0 50 100 200 300 Feet 0 20 40 80 120 Meters 40° 29' 53'' 105° 3' 45'' 40° 29' 35'' 105° 3' 45'' 40° 29' 35'' 40° 29' 53'' 105° 4' 2'' 105° 4' 2'' Map Scale: 1:2,590 if printed on A size (8.5" x 11") sheet. Hydrologic Soil Group—Larimer County Area, Colorado (Transfort Facility Expansion) Natural Resources MAP LEGEND MAP INFORMATION Area of Interest (AOI) Area of Interest (AOI) Soils Soil Map Units Soil Ratings A A/D B B/D C C/D D Not rated or not available Political Features Cities Water Features Oceans Streams and Canals Transportation Rails Interstate Highways US Routes Major Roads Local Roads Map Scale: 1:2,590 if printed on A size (8.5" × 11") sheet. The soil surveys that comprise your AOI were mapped at 1:24,000. Please rely on the bar scale on each map sheet for accurate map measurements. Source of Map: Natural Resources Conservation Service Web Soil Survey URL: http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov Coordinate System: UTM Zone 13N NAD83 This product is generated from the USDA-NRCS certified data as of the version date(s) listed below. Soil Survey Area: Larimer County Area, Colorado Survey Area Data: Version 7, May 1, 2009 Date(s) aerial images were photographed: 8/6/2005 The orthophoto or other base map on which the soil lines were compiled and digitized probably differs from the background imagery displayed on these maps. As a result, some minor shifting of map unit boundaries may be evident. Hydrologic Soil Group–Larimer County Area, Colorado (Transfort Facility Expansion) Natural Resources Conservation Service Web Soil Survey National Cooperative Soil Survey 7/11/2010 Page 2 of 4 Hydrologic Soil Group Hydrologic Soil Group— Summary by Map Unit — Larimer County Area, Colorado Map unit symbol Map unit name Rating Acres in AOI Percent of AOI 27 Cushman fine sandy loam, 3 to 9 percent slopes C 4.0 14.2% 54 Kim loam, 3 to 5 percent slopes B 10.3 36.6% 63 Longmont clay, 0 to 3 percent slopes C 1.0 3.7% 90 Renohill clay loam, 3 to 9 percent slopes C 11.3 40.0% 106 Tassel sandy loam, 3 to 25 percent slopes D 1.5 5.5% Totals for Area of Interest 28.1 100.0% Description Hydrologic soil groups are based on estimates of runoff potential. Soils are assigned to one of four groups according to the rate of water infiltration when the soils are not protected by vegetation, are thoroughly wet, and receive precipitation from long-duration storms. The soils in the United States are assigned to four groups (A, B, C, and D) and three dual classes (A/D, B/D, and C/D). The groups are defined as follows: Group A. Soils having a high infiltration rate (low runoff potential) when thoroughly wet. These consist mainly of deep, well drained to excessively drained sands or gravelly sands. These soils have a high rate of water transmission. Group B. Soils having a moderate infiltration rate when thoroughly wet. These consist chiefly of moderately deep or deep, moderately well drained or well drained soils that have moderately fine texture to moderately coarse texture. These soils have a moderate rate of water transmission. Group C. Soils having a slow infiltration rate when thoroughly wet. These consist chiefly of soils having a layer that impedes the downward movement of water or soils of moderately fine texture or fine texture. These soils have a slow rate of water transmission. Group D. Soils having a very slow infiltration rate (high runoff potential) when thoroughly wet. These consist chiefly of clays that have a high shrink-swell potential, soils that have a high water table, soils that have a claypan or clay layer at or near the surface, and soils that are shallow over nearly impervious material. These soils have a very slow rate of water transmission. If a soil is assigned to a dual hydrologic group (A/D, B/D, or C/D), the first letter is for drained areas and the second is for undrained areas. Only the soils that in their natural condition are in group D are assigned to dual classes. Hydrologic Soil Group–Larimer County Area, Colorado Transfort Facility Expansion Natural Resources Conservation Service Web Soil Survey National Cooperative Soil Survey 7/11/2010 Page 3 of 4 Rating Options Aggregation Method: Dominant Condition Component Percent Cutoff: None Specified Tie-break Rule: Lower Hydrologic Soil Group–Larimer County Area, Colorado Transfort Facility Expansion Natural Resources Conservation Service Web Soil Survey National Cooperative Soil Survey 7/11/2010 Page 4 of 4 40 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0 Duration (min) City of Fort Collins IDF Curve 2-yr (FTC) 10-yr (FTC) 100-yr (FTC) 2-yr (UD) 10-yr (UD) 100-yr (UD) 0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 0.0 5.0 10.0 15.0 20.0 25.0 30.0 35.0 40.0 45.0 50.0 55.0 60.0 65.0 Intensity (in/hr) Duration (minutes) 2-yr Intensity (in/hr) 10-yr Intensity (in/hr) 100-yr Intensity (in/hr) Duration (minutes) 2-yr Intensity (in/hr) 10-yr Intensity (in/hr) 100-yr Intensity (in/hr) 5 2.85 4.87 9.95 33 1.22 2.08 4.24 6 2.67 4.56 9.31 34 1.19 2.04 4.16 7 2.52 4.31 8.80 35 1.17 2.00 4.08 8 2.40 4.10 8.38 36 1.15 1.96 4.01 9 2.30 3.93 8.03 37 1.13 1.93 3.93 10 2.21 3.78 7.72 38 1.11 1.89 3.87 11 2.13 3.63 7.42 39 1.09 1.86 3.80 12 2.05 3.50 7.16 40 1.07 1.83 3.74 13 1.98 3.39 6.92 41 1.05 1.80 3.68 14 1.92 3.29 6.71 42 1.04 1.77 3.62 15 1.87 3.19 6.52 43 1.02 1.74 3.56 16 1.81 3.08 6.30 44 1.01 1.72 3.51 17 1.75 2.99 6.10 45 0.99 1.69 3.46 18 1.70 2.90 5.92 46 0.98 1.67 3.41 19 1.65 2.82 5.75 47 0.96 1.64 3.36 20 1.61 2.74 5.60 48 0.95 1.62 3.31 21 1.56 2.67 5.46 49 0.94 1.60 3.27 22 1.53 2.61 5.32 50 0.92 1.58 3.23 23 1.49 2.55 5.20 51 0.91 1.56 3.18 24 1.46 2.49 5.09 52 0.90 1.54 3.14 25 1.43 2.44 4.98 53 0.89 1.52 3.10 26 1.40 2.39 4.87 54 0.88 1.50 3.07 27 1.37 2.34 4.78 55 0.87 1.48 3.03 28 1.34 2.29 4.69 56 0.86 1.47 2.99 29 1.32 2.25 4.60 57 0.85 1.45 2.96 30 1.30 2.21 4.52 58 0.84 1.43 2.92 31 1.27 2.16 4.42 59 0.83 1.42 2.89 32 1.24 2.12 4.33 60 0.82 1.40 2.86 Figure 3-1a City of Fort Collins Rainfall Intensity-Duration-Frequency Table for using the Rational Method Duration 2-yr 10-yr 100-yr 2-yr Δ 10-yr Δ 100-yr Δ 5 2.85 4.87 9.95 2.78 0.07 4.74 0.13 9.68 0.27 6 2.67 4.56 9.31 2.64 0.03 4.51 0.05 9.20 0.11 7 2.52 4.31 8.80 2.52 0.00 4.30 0.01 8.78 0.02 8 2.40 4.10 8.38 2.41 -0.01 4.11 -0.01 8.39 -0.01 9 2.30 3.93 8.03 2.31 -0.01 3.94 -0.01 8.04 -0.01 10 2.21 3.78 7.72 2.21 0.00 3.78 0.00 7.72 0.00 11 2.13 3.63 7.42 2.13 0.00 3.64 -0.01 7.43 -0.01 2-yr 0.82 12 2.05 3.50 7.16 2.05 0.00 3.51 -0.01 7.16 0.00 10-yr 1.4 13 1.98 3.39 6.92 1.98 0.00 3.39 0.00 6.92 0.00 100-yr 2.86 14 1.92 3.29 6.71 1.92 0.00 3.28 0.01 6.69 0.02 15 1.87 3.19 6.52 1.86 0.01 3.17 0.02 6.48 0.04 16 1.81 3.08 6.30 1.80 0.01 3.08 0.00 6.28 0.02 C1 28.5 17 1.75 2.99 6.10 1.75 0.00 2.99 0.00 6.10 0.00 C2 10 18 1.70 2.90 5.92 1.70 0.00 2.90 0.00 5.93 -0.01 C3 0.786651 19 1.65 2.82 5.75 1.65 0.00 2.82 0.00 5.77 -0.02 20 1.61 2.74 5.60 1.61 0.00 2.75 -0.01 5.61 -0.01 21 1.56 2.67 5.46 1.57 -0.01 2.68 -0.01 5.47 -0.01 22 1.53 2.61 5.32 1.53 0.00 2.61 0.00 5.34 -0.02 23 1.49 2.55 5.20 1.49 0.00 2.55 0.00 5.21 -0.01 24 1.46 2.49 5.09 1.46 0.00 2.49 0.00 5.09 0.00 25 1.43 2.44 4.98 1.43 0.00 2.43 0.01 4.97 0.01 26 1.40 2.39 4.87 1.39 0.01 2.38 0.01 4.86 0.01 27 1.37 2.34 4.78 1.36 0.01 2.33 0.01 4.76 0.02 28 1.34 2.29 4.69 1.34 0.00 2.28 0.01 4.66 0.03 29 1.32 2.25 4.60 1.31 0.01 2.24 0.01 4.57 0.03 30 1.30 2.21 4.52 1.28 0.02 2.19 0.02 4.48 0.04 31 1.27 2.16 4.42 1.26 0.01 2.15 0.01 4.39 0.03 32 1.24 2.12 4.33 1.24 0.00 2.11 0.01 4.31 0.02 33 1.22 2.08 4.24 1.21 0.01 2.07 0.01 4.23 0.01 34 1.19 2.04 4.16 1.19 0.00 2.03 0.01 4.15 0.01 35 1.17 2.00 4.08 1.17 0.00 2.00 0.00 4.08 0.00 36 1.15 1.96 4.01 1.15 0.00 1.96 0.00 4.01 0.00 37 1.13 1.93 3.93 1.13 0.00 1.93 0.00 3.94 -0.01 38 1.11 1.89 3.87 1.11 0.00 1.90 -0.01 3.88 -0.01 39 1.09 1.86 3.80 1.09 0.00 1.87 -0.01 3.82 -0.02 40 1.07 1.83 3.74 1.08 -0.01 1.84 -0.01 3.76 -0.02 41 1.05 1.80 3.68 1.06 -0.01 1.81 -0.01 3.70 -0.02 42 1.04 1.77 3.62 1.04 0.00 1.78 -0.01 3.64 -0.02 43 1.02 1.74 3.56 1.03 -0.01 1.76 -0.02 3.59 -0.03 44 1.01 1.72 3.51 1.01 0.00 1.73 -0.01 3.54 -0.03 45 0.99 1.69 3.46 1.00 -0.01 1.71 -0.02 3.48 -0.02 46 0.98 1.67 3.41 0.99 -0.01 1.68 -0.01 3.44 -0.03 Rainfall Depth Coefficients Intensity (in/hr) Urban Drainage Intensity (in/hr) City of Fort Collins Urban Drainage Inputs This cell was determined using solver to best match intensities given from the Fort Collins IDF values. C 3 2 1 1 ( C t c ) I C P 2-year 5-yr 10-yr 25-yr 50-yr 100-yr 5 0.29 0.40 0.49 0.63 0.79 1.00 10 0.33 0.45 0.56 0.72 0.90 1.14 15 0.38 0.53 0.65 0.84 1.05 1.33 20 0.64 0.89 1.09 1.41 1.77 2.23 25 0.81 1.13 1.39 1.80 2.25 2.84 30 1.57 2.19 2.69 3.48 4.36 5.49 35 2.85 3.97 4.87 6.30 7.90 9.95 40 1.18 1.64 2.02 2.61 3.27 4.12 45 0.71 0.99 1.21 1.57 1.97 2.48 50 0.42 0.58 0.71 0.92 1.16 1.46 55 0.35 0.49 0.60 0.77 0.97 1.22 60 0.30 0.42 0.52 0.67 0.84 1.06 65 0.20 0.28 0.39 0.62 0.79 1.00 70 0.19 0.27 0.37 0.59 0.75 0.95 75 0.18 0.25 0.35 0.56 0.72 0.91 80 0.17 0.24 0.34 0.54 0.69 0.87 85 0.17 0.23 0.32 0.52 0.66 0.84 90 0.16 0.22 0.31 0.50 0.64 0.81 95 0.15 0.21 0.30 0.48 0.62 0.78 100 0.15 0.20 0.29 0.47 0.60 0.75 105 0.14 0.19 0.28 0.45 0.58 0.73 110 0.14 0.19 0.27 0.44 0.56 0.71 115 0.13 0.18 0.26 0.42 0.54 0.69 120 0.13 0.18 0.25 0.41 0.53 0.67 2-year 5-yr 10-yr 25-yr 50-yr 100-yr 1-hr 0.82 1.14 1.40 1.81 2.27 2.86 2-hr 0.98 1.36 1.71 2.31 2.91 3.67 Note: The City of Fort Collins SWWM input hyetopgrah is used to calculate the 1-hr and 2-hr storm rainfall depths for the different storm events. Storm Rainfall Depth (in) Duration Time Intensity (in/hr) (min) City of Fort Collins Design Storms for using SWMM Figure 3-1c Page A- 2 POND CALCULATIONS Transfort Facility Expansion Pond Summary Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: Pond Summary Table 0.06 4940.38 16.74 4 1/2 1.27 0.57 4943.45 16.74 17.00 1.5 4943.50 4945.00 J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 100-yr Detention Volume (acre-ft) 100-yr Water Surface Elev. (ft) Detention Pond Summary Table Water Quality Capture Volume (acre-ft) WQCV Water Surface Elev. (ft) 100-yr Pond Max Inflow (cfs) 100-yr Site Release Rate (cfs) Outlet Orifice Size (in) Spillway Summary Table Top of Berm Elev. (ft) 100-yr Pond Max Inflow (cfs) Length (ft) Spillway Depth, including 1 ft freeboard (ft) Spillway Crest Elev. (ft) 2598 PondCalcs.xls - Pond Summary Page 1 of 7 Jim Sell Design, Inc. Project: Basin ID: Design Information (Input): Design Information (Input): Catchment Drainage Imperviousness Ia = 57.00 percent Catchment Drainage Imperviousness I a = 57.00 percent Catchment Drainage Area A = 2.573 acres Catchment Drainage Area A = 2.573 acres Predevelopment NRCS Soil Group Type = C A, B, C, or D Predevelopment NRCS Soil Group Type = C A, B, C, or D Return Period for Detention Control T = 2 years (2, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100) Return Period for Detention Control T = 100 years (2, 5, 10, 25, 50, or 100) Time of Concentration of Watershed Tc = 15 minutes Time of Concentration of Watershed Tc = 15 minutes Allowable Unit Release Rate q = 0.10 cfs/acre Allowable Unit Release Rate q = 0.49 cfs/acre One-hour Precipitation P1 = 0.82 inches One-hour Precipitation P 1 = 2.86 inches Design Rainfall IDF Formula i = C1* P1 /(C2+Tc )^C3 Design Rainfall IDF Formula i = C1 * P1/(C2 +Tc)^C3 Coefficient One C1 = 28.50 Coefficient One C 1 = 28.50 Coefficient Two C2 = 10 Coefficient Two C 2 =10 Coefficient Three C3 = 0.787 Coefficient Three C 3 = 0.787 Determination of Average Outflow from the Basin (Calculated): Determination of Average Outflow from the Basin (Calculated): Runoff Coefficient C = 0.65 Runoff Coefficient C = 0.81 Inflow Peak Runoff Qp-in = 3.16 cfs Inflow Peak Runoff Qp-in = 13.72 cfs Allowable Peak Outflow Rate Qp-out = 0.27 cfs Allowable Peak Outflow Rate Qp-out = 1.27 cfs Mod. FAA Minor Storage Volume = 5,273 cubic feet Mod. FAA Major Storage Volume = 22,202 cubic feet Mod. FAA Minor Storage Volume = 0.121 acre-ft Mod. FAA Major Storage Volume = 0.510 acre-ft 25 <- Enter Rainfall Duration Incremental Increase Value Here (e.g. 5 for 5-Minutes) Rainfall Rainfall Inflow Adjustment Average Outflow Storage Rainfall Rainfall Inflow Adjustment Average Outflow Storage Duration Intensity Volume Factor Outflow Volume Volume Duration Intensity Volume Factor Outflow Volume Volume minutes inches / hr cubic feet "m" cfs cubic feet cubic feet minutes inches / hr cubic feet "m" cfs cubic feet cubic feet (input) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (input) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) 5 2.78 1,393 1.00 0.27 80 1,313 5 9.68 6,055 1.00 1.27 381 5,674 30 1.28 3,864 0.74 0.20 357 3,507 30 4.48 16,794 0.74 0.94 1,695 15,098 55 0.88 4,835 0.63 0.17 558 4,277 55 3.06 21,015 0.63 0.80 2,648 18,367 80 0.68 5,444 0.59 0.16 759 4,686 80 2.37 23,663 0.59 0.75 3,601 20,062 105 0.56 5,893 0.57 0.15 959 4,933 105 1.95 25,611 0.57 0.72 4,553 21,058 130 0.48 6,250 0.56 0.15 1,160 5,090 130 1.67 27,163 0.56 0.71 5,506 21,657 155 0.42 6,548 0.55 0.15 1,361 5,187 155 1.47 28,460 0.55 0.69 6,458 22,002 180 0.38 6,805 0.54 0.14 1,561 5,244 180 1.31 29,578 0.54 0.69 7,411 22,168 205 0.34 7,032 0.54 0.14 1,762 5,270 205 1.19 30,565 0.54 0.68 8,363 22,202 230 0.31 7,236 0.53 0.14 1,963 5,273 230 1.09 31,450 0.53 0.68 9,316 22,134 255 0.29 7,421 0.53 0.14 2,163 5,257 255 1.01 32,254 0.53 0.67 10,268 21,985 280 0.27 7,591 0.53 0.14 2,364 5,226 280 0.94 32,991 0.53 0.67 11,221 21,770 305 0.25 7,748 0.52 0.14 2,565 5,183 305 0.88 33,674 0.52 0.67 12,173 21,500 330 0.24 7,894 0.52 0.14 2,766 5,128 330 0.83 34,309 0.52 0.66 13,126 21,183 355 0.23 8,031 0.52 0.14 2,966 5,065 355 0.79 34,905 0.52 0.66 14,078 20,827 380 0.21 8,160 0.52 0.14 3,167 4,993 380 0.75 35,466 0.52 0.66 15,031 20,435 405 0.20 8,282 0.52 0.14 3,368 4,914 405 0.71 35,996 0.52 0.66 15,983 20,012 430 0.19 8,398 0.52 0.14 3,568 4,829 430 0.68 36,499 0.52 0.66 16,936 19,563 455 0.19 8,508 0.52 0.14 3,769 4,739 455 0.65 36,978 0.52 0.66 17,888 19,090 480 0.18 8,613 0.52 0.14 3,970 4,643 480 0.62 37,435 0.52 0.65 18,841 18,595 505 0.17 8,714 0.51 0.14 4,170 4,543 505 0.60 37,873 0.51 0.65 19,793 18,080 530 0.17 8,810 0.51 0.14 4,371 4,439 530 0.58 38,293 0.51 0.65 20,746 17,547 555 0.16 8,903 0.51 0.14 4,572 4,332 555 0.56 38,697 0.51 0.65 21,699 16,999 580 0.15 8,993 0.51 0.14 4,773 4,220 580 0.54 39,086 0.51 0.65 22,651 16,435 605 0.15 9,079 0.51 0.14 4,973 4,106 605 0.52 39,461 0.51 0.65 23,604 15,858 630 0.14 9,163 0.51 0.14 5,174 3,989 630 0.51 39,824 0.51 0.65 24,556 15,268 Project: Basin ID: DETENTION VOLUME BY THE MODIFIED FAA METHOD (See USDCM Volume 2 Storage Chapter for description of method) Transfort Facility Expansion UDFCD DETENTION VOLUME ESTIMATING WORKBOOK Version 2.2, Released January 2010 -20,000 -10,000 0 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 Volume (Cubic Feet) Duration (Minutes) Inflow and Outflow Volumes vs. Rainfall Duration Minor Storm Inflow Volume Minor Storm Outflow Volume Minor Storm Storage Volume Major Storm Inflow Volume Major Storm Outflow Volume Major Storm Storage Volume 2598 UD_Detention_2.2.xls, Modified FAA 9/15/2010, 7:53 AM Transfort Facility Expansion Water Quality Pond and Outlet Sizing (Per USDCM) Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: DESIGN CRITERIA: REQUIRED WATER QUALITY CAPTURE VOLUME (WQCV): Tributary Area, A 2.57 acres Composite. Imperviousness, I 57.0% WQCV (watershed inches) 0.226 inches 40-Hour Drain Time (Fig SQ-2) Required WQCV 0.058 acre-feet Including 20% for Sedimentation WATER QUALITY OUTLET SIZING (Per USDCM, Volume 3): Design Water Quality Depth, DWQ 1.28 ft Determine K40 K40 = 0.013DWQ 2 + 0.22DWQ - 0.10 0.203 Maximum Area per Row, a a = WQCV / K40 0.287 square inches Number of Rows, nr 3 rows Number of Columns, nc (See Table 6a-1 for Max.) 1 columns Choose Hole Diameter 9/16 inches Use USDCM Volume 3, Figure 5 0.563 inches Total Area per Row, Ao 0.25 square inches J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual (USDCM) Volume III, Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, June 2001 Circular Perforation Sizing * * 1 . 2 12 WQCV Area Volume ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎝ = ⎛ Total Outlet Area, Aot 0.75 square inches Does design work? Yes Minimum Steel Plate Thickness 1/4 inch (Not Used) Number of Rows, nr 2 rows Choose Rectangular Hole Width (w/ 2" Height) 0 inches Use USDCM Volume 3, Figure 5 0.000 inches Total Outlet Area, Aot 0.00 square inches Does design work? Yes Minimum Steel Plate Thickness 1/4 inch Rectangular Perforation Sizing * * 1 . 2 12 WQCV Area Volume ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎝ = ⎛ 2598 PondCalcs.xls - WQCV & Outlet Structure Page 2 of 7 Jim Sell Design, Inc. Transfort Facility Expansion Water Quality Pond and Outlet Sizing (Per USDCM) Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 WATER QUALITY TRASH RACK SIZING (Per USDCM, Volume 3) Required Open Area, At At=0.5*[77(e-0.124D)]*Aot 27 square inches Min. Distance between Columns, Sc 3 inches Width of Trash Rack and Concrete Opening per Column 3 inches Use USDCM Volume 3, Table 6a-1 Total Width, Wconc 3 inches Height of Trash Rack Screen, Htr 15 6/16 inches Check - Larger than Required Type of Screen S.S. #93 VEE Wire (US Filter) Screen Opening Slot Dimension 0.139" (US Filter) Support Rod Type (See Table 6a-2) Spacing of Support Rod (O.C.) 3/4 inches O.C. Total Screen Thickness (See Table 6a-2) 0.31 inches Carbon Steel Frame Type (See Table 6a-2) (Not Used) Required Open Area, At (including 50% clogging) At=0.5*[77(e-0.124D)]*Aot 0 square inches Width of Trash Rack Opening, Wopening 1 inches Rectangular Perforation Trash Rack Sizing #156 VEE 3/8in x 1.0in flat bar Circular Perforation Trash Rack Sizing Width of Trash Rack Opening, Wopening 1 inches Use USDCM Volume 3, Table 6b-1 Width of Concrete Opening, Wconc 12 inches Min Height of Trash Rack Screen, Htr (including 2' 4" below lowest openings) 28.00 inches Type of Screen Kelmp KRP Series Aluminum Bar Gate (or Equal) Screen Opening Slot Dimension 3/16" Bars on 1-3/16" Centers Minimum Bearing Bar Size (See Table 6b-2) 1 in x 3/16 in 2598 PondCalcs.xls - WQCV & Outlet Structure Page 3 of 7 Jim Sell Design, Inc. Transfort Facility Expansion Critical Pond Elevations Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: DESIGN CRITERIA Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual, Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, June 2001 Stage Storage Volume (pond volume calculated using the prismoidal formula): CONTOUR (FT) AREA (FT2) AREA (ACRE) VOLUME (ACRE-FT) DEPTH (FT) CUMULATIVE VOLUME (ACRE-FT) 4939.10 0.000 0.000 0.00 0.000 4940.0 3260.37 0.075 0.022 0.90 0.022 4941.0 4973.785 0.114 0.094 1.90 0.116 4942.0 7243.862 0.166 0.139 2.90 0.256 4943.0 9882.058 0.227 0.196 3.90 0.452 4944.0 12965.129 0.298 0.261 4.90 0.713 4945.0 16171.518 0.371 0.334 5.90 1.047 0.06 4940.38 ft 0.57 4943.45 ft J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 Acre-Ft Interpolates to an Elev. of Acre-Ft Interpolates to an Elev. of Required Water Quality Capture Volume = Required 100-yr Detention Volume (including WQCV) = September 15, 2010 ( ) 3 AAAADepth 1 2 1 2 V + + = 2598 PondCalcs.xls - Pond Stage Storage Page 4 of 7 Jim Sell Design, Inc. 4938.00 4939.00 4940.00 4941.00 4942.00 4943.00 4944.00 4945.00 4946.00 0.0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 ELEVATION (FT) DETENTION POND VOLUME (AC-FT) DETENTION POND VOLUME VERSUS ELEVATION ( ) 3 AAAADepth 1 2 1 2 V + + = 2598 PondCalcs.xls - Pond Stage Storage Page 4 of 7 Jim Sell Design, Inc. Transfort Facility Expansion Emergency Overflow Spillway Calculations Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: Broad-Crested Weir Equation-Trapezoidal Shape where: Q = Discharge (cfs) C = Weir Coeffecient L = Weir Length (ft) H = Average Weir Head (ft) H:V =Side Slope Calculations Knowns: 4.00 0.50 ft 2.6 4943.50 ft 16.74 cfs *Total Offsite/Onsite Runnoff 16.21 ft 17 ft 1.50 ft Side Slopes (H:V) Desired Spillway Head Weir Coefficient Spillway Elevation J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 100-yr Pond Inflow Calculated Spillway Length Use Spillway Length Spillway Depth 2 5 2 3 H V Q CLH C H ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎝ = + ⎛ Topft of Berm Elevation 4945.0 (including 1' freeboard) 4943.00 4943.50 4944.00 4944.50 4945.00 4945.50 4946.00 0.00 50.00 100.00 150.00 200.00 ELEVATION (ft) DISCHARGE (cfs) STAGE - DISCHARGE CURVE FOR THE PROPOSED DETENTION POND OVERFLOW SPILLWAY FOR SOUTH Transfort Facility Expansion Emergency Overflow Spillway Calculations Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 Ponding Depth (ft) Spillway Head (ft) QTotal (CFS) 4943.50 0.00 0.00 4943.60 0.10 1.43 4943.70 0.20 4.14 4943.80 0.30 7.78 4943.90 0.40 12.23 4944.00 0.50 17.47 4944.10 0.60 23.44 4944.20 0.70 30.15 4944.30 0.80 37.58 4944.40 0.90 45.73 4944.50 1.00 54.60 4944.60 1.10 64.19 4944.70 1.20 74.51 4944.80 1.30 85.55 4944.90 1.40 97.34 4945.00 1.50 109.86 4945.10 1.60 123.13 4945.20 1.70 137.16 4945.30 1.80 151.95 4945.40 1.90 167.51 4945.50 2.00 183.85 2598 PondCalcs.xls - Spillway Page 6 of 7 Jim Sell Design, Inc. Transfort Facility Expansion Circular Orifice Plate Sizing Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: Orifice Equation where: C = Orifice Discharge Coefficient A o = Orifice Area (ft 2 ) g = Gravity (32.2 ft/s 2 ) Δh = Difference in Elevation Head (ft) D o = Orifice Diameter (in) Calculations 100-yr Orifice Sizing 100-yr Orifice Rating Table Knowns: 100-yr Release Rate 1.27 cfs 100-yr WSEL 4943.45 ft 4939.10 0.00 0.000 4940.00 0.52 0.022 Pond Outlet Invert 4939.10 ft 4941.00 0.81 0.116 4942.00 1.02 0.256 Discharge Coefficient 0.65 4943.00 1.20 0.452 4944.00 1.35 0.713 Tailwater Elevation 4938.00 ft 4945.00 1.49 1.047 Orifice Diameter 4 11/16 in Pond Volume (ac-ft) J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 Elevation (ft) Discharge (cfs) C g h Q CA o g h A o Q Δ = Δ ⇒ = 2 2 π o o D A 576 = 2598 PondCalcs.xls - Outlet Orifice Plate Sizing Page 7 of 7 Jim Sell Design, Inc. Orifice Area 0.119 ft 2 Centroid Elevation 4939.29 ft Actual Release Rate 1.27 cfs C g h Q CA o g h A o Q Δ = Δ ⇒ = 2 2 π o Page A- 3 HISTORIC & PROPOSED RATIONAL CALCULATIONS Transfort Facility Expansion DRAINAGE SUMMARY Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: DRAINAGE SUMMARY: Area (acres) % Impervious 2-yr Peak Runoff (cfs) 100-yr Peak Runoff (cfs) H01 2.547 2.0% 1.27 5.55 H02 0.688 68.6% 1.18 5.15 Overall 3.235 16.2% 2.46 10.70 Area (acres) % Impervious 2-yr Peak Runoff (cfs) 100-yr Peak Runoff (cfs) DO1 1.070 2.0% 0.56 2.43 DO2 1.503 95.5% 3.84 14.31 Total to Pond 2.573 56.6% 4.40 16.74 DO3 0.662 93.2% 1.51 5.83 Overall 3.235 64.1% 5.90 22.57 Basin J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 Basin Historical Proposed Page 1 of 7 Transfort Facility Expansion HISTORIC IMPERVIOUS AREA CALCULATION Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: DESIGN CRITERIA: Storm Drainage Design Criteria and Constructions Standards, City of Fort Collins, 1999 Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual by Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, June 2001 (Revised August 2006) BASINS: % Impervious Runoff Coefficient C Return Period Frequency Adjustment Factor (Cf) 100% 0.95 2-year & 5-year 1.00 90% 0.95 100-year 1.25 40% 0.50 2% 0.25 Atotal A total Apaved Aroof A gravel Agreen (sq feet) (acres (sq feet) (sq feet) (sq feet) (sq feet) C2 / C5 C100 H01 110,939 2.547 0 0 0 110,939 2.0% 0.25 0.31 H02 29,961 0.688 20,347 0 0 9,613 68.6% 0.73 0.91 Overall 140,900 3.235 20,347 0 0 120,553 16.2% 0.35 0.44 J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 % Impervious values from Table RO-3 in the Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual for Hydrologic Soil Classification C Sub-basin Designation COMPOSITE Land Use Paved Roof Gravel Greenbelt Weighted % Impervious Page 2 of 7 Transfort Facility Expansion HISTORIC TIME OF CONCENTRATION Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: DESIGN CRITERIA: Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual by Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, June 2001 (Revised August 2006) EQUATIONS: -Equation RO-3 -Equation RO-4 -Urbanized Check Equation RO-5 -Equation RO-3 CONSTRAINTS: 300 ft - Overland flow shall not exceed for developed condition 500 ft - Overland flow shall not exceed for undeveloped condition Final t c = minimum of t i + t t and urbanized basin check recommended minimum t c = 5 min for urbanized basins J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 () 0 . 33 0 . 395 1 . 1 5 S C L ti − = t c = t i + t t 0 . 5 VCvS = w 10 180 = + tc L V tt 60 L = Page 3 of 7 BASINS: Type of Travel Surface C v H1 H01 0.25 2.547 498 0.0228 26.43 0 0.0000 Grassed Waterway 15 0.05 0.00 26.43 12.77 12.77 H2 H02 0.73 0.688 73 0.0705 3.06 492 0.0060 Paved Areas 20 1.55 5.30 8.35 13.14 8.35 SUB-BASIN DATA INITIAL/OVERLAND TIME (ti) DESIGN POINT Sub-basin C5 AREA (acres) LENGTH (ft) SLOPE (ft/ft) ti (min) LENGTH Table RO-2 (ft) TRAVEL TIME (tt) REMARKS Transfort Facility Expansion HISTORIC PEAK RUNOFF Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: DESIGN CRITERIA: Storm Drainage Design Criteria and Constructions Standards, City of Fort Collins, 1999 (Rainfall Depths) Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual by Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, June 2001 (Revised August 2006) EQUATIONS: Q n = n -yr peak discharge (cfs) I = rainfall intensity (in/hr) C n = n -yr runoff coefficient P 1 = one-hour point rainfall depth (in) I n = n -yr rainfall intensity (in/hr) t c = time of concentration (min) A n = Basin drainage area (ac) P 1-2yr = 0.82 in P 1-100yr = 2.86 in BASINS: R noff Coeff C(A) It it R noff Coeff C(A) It it J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 100-yr Peak Runoff Design Sub basin Area (acres) t (min) 2-yr Peak Runoff Q n = C n I n A n 0.7867 1 ( 10 ) 28 . 5 t c I P + = Page 4 of 7 Runoff Coeff. (C2) C(A) (acres) Intensity (in/hr) Q (ft 3 /s) Runoff Coeff. (C100) C(A) (acres) Intensity (in/hr) Q (ft 3 /s) H1 H01 2.547 12.77 0.25 0.64 2.00 1.27 0.31 0.80 6.97 5.55 H2 H02 0.688 8.35 0.73 0.50 2.37 1.18 0.91 0.62 8.26 5.15 es g Point Sub-basin Area (acres) tc (min) Q n = C n I n A n 0.7867 1 ( 10 ) Transfort Facility Expansion DEVELOPED IMPERVIOUS AREA CALCULATION Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: DESIGN CRITERIA: Storm Drainage Design Criteria and Constructions Standards, City of Fort Collins, 1999 Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual by Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, June 2001 (Revised August 2006) BASINS: % Impervious Runoff Coefficient C Return Period Frequency Adjustment Factor (Cf) 100% 0.95 2-year & 5- year 1.00 90% 0.95 100-year 1.25 40% 0.50 2% 0.25 Atotal Atotal Apaved Aroof Agravel Agreen (sq feet) (acres (sq feet) (sq feet) (sq feet) (sq feet) C2 / C5 C100 DO1 46,589 1.070 0 0 0 46,589 2.0% 0.25 0.31 DO2 65,483 1.503 47,885 16,240 0 1,358 95.5% 0.94 1.00 Total to Pond 112,072 2.573 47,885 16,240 0 47,947 56.6% 0.65 0.81 DO3 28,828 0.662 26,842 0 0 1,986 93.2% 0.90 1.00 Overall 140,900 3.235 74,727 16,240 0 49,932 64.1% 0.70 0.88 % Impervious values from Table RO-3 in the Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual for Hydrologic Soil Classification C Roof Paved J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 Sub-basin Designation Greenbelt Weighted % COMPOSITE Impervious Land Use Gravel Page 5 of 7 Transfort Facility Expansion DEVELOPED TIME OF CONCENTRATION Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: DESIGN CRITERIA: Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual by Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, June 2001 (Revised August 2006) EQUATIONS: -Equation RO-3 -Equation RO-4 -Urbanized Check Equation RO-5 -Equation RO-3 CONSTRAINTS: 300 ft - Overland flow shall not exceed for developed condition 500 ft - Overland flow shall not exceed for undeveloped condition Final t c = minimum of t i + t t and urbanized basin check recommended minimum t c = 5 min for urbanized basins J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 () 0 . 33 0 . 395 1 . 1 5 S C L ti − = t c = t i + t t 0 . 5 VCvS = w 10 180 = + tc L V tt 60 L = Page 6 of 7 BASINS: Type of Travel Surface C v D1 DO1 0.25 1.070 127 0.0916 8.40 291 0.0100 Grassed Waterway 15 1.50 3.23 11.63 12.32 11.63 D2 DO2 0.94 1.503 100 0.0129 2.77 298 0.0094 Paved Areas 20 1.94 2.56 5.32 12.21 5.32 D3 DO3 0.90 0.662 73 0.0705 1.62 492 0.0060 Paved Areas 20 1.55 5.30 6.91 13.14 6.91 TRAVEL TIME (tt) REMARKS tc Urban Check Final tc (min) tc=t i+tt SLOPE (min) (ft/ft) VEL. (ft/s) tt (min) DESIGN POINT Sub-basin C5 Transfort Facility Expansion DEVELOPED PEAK RUNOFF Design Engineer: Design Firm: Project Number: Date: DESIGN CRITERIA: Storm Drainage Design Criteria and Constructions Standards, City of Fort Collins, 1999 (Rainfall Depths) Urban Storm Drainage Criteria Manual by Urban Drainage and Flood Control District, June 2001 (Revised August 2006) EQUATIONS: Q n = n -yr peak discharge (cfs) I = rainfall intensity (in/hr) C n = n -yr runoff coefficient P 1 = one-hour point rainfall depth (in) I n = n -yr rainfall intensity (in/hr) t c = time of concentration (min) A n = Basin drainage area (ac) P 1-2yr = 0.82 in P 1-100yr = 2.86 in BASINS: R noff Coeff C(A) It it R noff Coeff C(A) It it J.Claeys Jim Sell Design, Inc. 2598.1 September 15, 2010 100-yr Peak Runoff Design Sub basin Area (acres) t (min) 2-yr Peak Runoff Q n = C n I n A n 0.7867 1 ( 10 ) 28 . 5 t c I P + = Page 7 of 7 Runoff Coeff. (C2) C(A) (acres) Intensity (in/hr) Q (ft 3 /s) Runoff Coeff. (C100) C(A) (acres) Intensity (in/hr) Q (ft 3 /s) D1 DO1 1.070 11.63 0.25 0.27 2.08 0.56 0.31 0.33 7.26 2.43 D2 DO2 1.503 5.32 0.94 1.41 2.73 3.84 1.00 1.50 9.52 14.31 D3 DO3 0.662 6.91 0.90 0.60 2.53 1.51 1.00 0.66 8.81 5.83 es g Point Sub-basin Area (acres) tc (min) Q n = C n I n A n 0.7867 1 Page A- 4 CONVEYANCE ELEMENT SIZING Project Description Friction Method Manning Formula Solve For Discharge Input Data Roughness Coefficient 0.012 Channel Slope 0.10000 ft/ft Normal Depth 0.50 ft Bottom Width 3.00 ft Results Discharge 30.54 ft³/s Flow Area 1.50 ft² Wetted Perimeter 4.00 ft Top Width 3.00 ft Critical Depth 1.48 ft Critical Slope 0.00460 ft/ft Velocity 20.36 ft/s Velocity Head 6.44 ft Specific Energy 6.94 ft Froude Number 5.08 Flow Type Supercritical GVF Input Data Downstream Depth 0.00 ft Length 0.00 ft Number Of Steps 0 GVF Output Data Upstream Depth 0.00 ft Profile Description Profile Headloss 0.00 ft Downstream Velocity Infinity ft/s Upstream Velocity Infinity ft/s Normal Depth 0.50 ft Critical Depth 1.48 ft Channel Slope 0.10000 ft/ft Critical Slope 0.00460 ft/ft Worksheet for Parking Lot Chase 9/15/2010 9:13:52 AM Bentley Systems, Inc. Haestad Methods Solution Center Bentley FlowMaster [08.01.071.00] 27 Siemons Company Drive Suite 200 W Watertown, CT 06795 USA +1-203-755-1666 Page 1 of 1 Project Description Friction Method Manning Formula Solve For Discharge Input Data Channel Slope 0.01000 ft/ft Normal Depth 0.50 ft Section Definitions Station (ft) Elevation (ft) 0+00.00 0.50 0+16.67 0.17 0+18.67 0.00 0+18.67 0.50 0+19.17 0.50 Roughness Segment Definitions Start Station Ending Station Roughness Coefficient (0+00.00, 0.50) (0+16.67, 0.17) 0.013 (0+16.67, 0.17) (0+18.67, 0.00) 0.012 (0+18.67, 0.00) (0+19.17, 0.50) 0.012 Results Discharge 13.50 ft³/s Elevation Range 0.00 to 0.50 ft Flow Area 3.58 ft² Wetted Perimeter 19.18 ft Top Width 18.67 ft Normal Depth 0.50 ft Critical Depth 0.56 ft Critical Slope 0.00401 ft/ft Velocity 3.77 ft/s Velocity Head 0.22 ft Specific Energy 0.72 ft Worksheet for Parking Lot C&G Capacity 9/15/2010 9:15:22 AM Bentley Systems, Inc. Haestad Methods Solution Center Bentley FlowMaster [08.01.071.00] 27 Siemons Company Drive Suite 200 W Watertown, CT 06795 USA +1-203-755-1666 Page 1 of 2 Results Froude Number 1.52 Flow Type Supercritical GVF Input Data Downstream Depth 0.00 ft Length 0.00 ft Number Of Steps 0 GVF Output Data Upstream Depth 0.00 ft Profile Description Profile Headloss 0.00 ft Downstream Velocity Infinity ft/s Upstream Velocity Infinity ft/s Normal Depth 0.50 ft Critical Depth 0.56 ft Channel Slope 0.01000 ft/ft Critical Slope 0.00401 ft/ft Worksheet for Parking Lot C&G Capacity 9/15/2010 9:15:22 AM Bentley Systems, Inc. Haestad Methods Solution Center Bentley FlowMaster [08.01.071.00] 27 Siemons Company Drive Suite 200 W Watertown, CT 06795 USA +1-203-755-1666 Page 2 of 2 Project Description Friction Method Manning Formula Solve For Discharge Input Data Roughness Coefficient 0.030 Channel Slope 0.01000 ft/ft Normal Depth 1.00 ft Left Side Slope 8.00 ft/ft (H:V) Right Side Slope 4.00 ft/ft (H:V) Results Discharge 18.53 ft³/s Flow Area 6.00 ft² Wetted Perimeter 12.19 ft Top Width 12.00 ft Critical Depth 0.90 ft Critical Slope 0.01746 ft/ft Velocity 3.09 ft/s Velocity Head 0.15 ft Specific Energy 1.15 ft Froude Number 0.77 Flow Type Subcritical GVF Input Data Downstream Depth 0.00 ft Length 0.00 ft Number Of Steps 0 GVF Output Data Upstream Depth 0.00 ft Profile Description Profile Headloss 0.00 ft Downstream Velocity Infinity ft/s Upstream Velocity Infinity ft/s Normal Depth 1.00 ft Critical Depth 0.90 ft Channel Slope 0.01000 ft/ft Critical Slope 0.01746 ft/ft Worksheet for Eastern Drainage Swale 9/15/2010 9:15:56 AM Bentley Systems, Inc. Haestad Methods Solution Center Bentley FlowMaster [08.01.071.00] 27 Siemons Company Drive Suite 200 W Watertown, CT 06795 USA +1-203-755-1666 Page 1 of 1 Scenario: Base JSD Custom Table Title: Transfort Facility Expansion f:\...\drainage\2598 stormcad.stm 09/15/10 09:46:05 AM Jim Sell Design IncFort Collin © Bentley Systems, Inc. Haestad Methods Solution Center Watertown, CT 06795 USA +1-203-755-1666 Project Engineer: jasonc StormCAD v5.6 [05.06.014.00] Page 1 of 1 Label Structure Diameter (ft) Section Size Number of Sections Rim Elevation (ft) Sump Elevation (ft) Upstream Invert Elevation (ft) Downstream Invert Elevation (ft) Length (ft) Constructed Slope (ft/ft) Headloss Method Headloss Coefficient Hydraulic Grade Line In (ft) Hydraulic Grade Line Out (ft) Energy Grade Line In (ft) Energy Grade Line Out (ft) Additional Flow (cfs) Scenario: Base Title: Transfort Facility Expansion f:\...\drainage\2598 stormcad.stm 09/15/10 09:34:41 AM Jim Sell Design IncFort Collin © Bentley Systems, Inc. Haestad Methods Solution Center Watertown, CT 06795 USA +1-203-755-1666 Project Engineer: jasonc StormCAD v5.6 [05.06.014.00] Page 1 of 1 P-1 O-1 I-1 Profile Scenario: Base Title: Transfort Facility Expansion f:\...\drainage\2598 stormcad.stm 09/15/10 09:35:49 AM Jim Sell Design IncFort Collin © Bentley Systems, Inc. Haestad Methods Solution Center Watertown, CT 06795 USA +1-203-755-1666 Project Engineer: jasonc StormCAD v5.6 [05.06.014.00] Page 1 of 1 Elevation (ft) Station (ft) Profile: Outlet Pipe Scenario: Base 0+00 1+00 4,935.00 4,940.00 4,945.00 Sump: 4,938.00 ft Rim: 4,939.50 ft Label: O-1 Sump: 4,939.10 ft Rim: 4,941.10 ft Label: I-1 S: 0.014667 ft/ft Size: 18 inch L: 75.00 ft Dn. Invert: 4,938.00 ft Up. Invert: 4,939.10 ft Label: P-1 Page A- 5 EROSION CONTROL DETAILS PRINTED OWNER REPRESENTATIVE: STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: CONTACT: MECHANICAL ENGINEER: CONTACT: ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: CONTACT: ABBREVIATIONS @ AT A.F.F. Above Finished Floor A.H.U. Air-Handling Unit B.O. Bottom Of B.M. Benchmark C.J. Control Joint C.M.U. Concrete Masonry Unit C.U. Condensing Unit CAB. Cabinet CER.TL. Ceramic Tile CONT. Continuous D.F. Drinking Fountain DBL. Double D.S. Downspout DWG. Drawings E.C. Electrical Conduit E.F. Exhaust Fan E.J. Expansion Joint E.W.C. Electric Water Cooler EA. Each E.P.PT. Epoxy Paint EQ. Equal EXIST or (E) Existing EXT. Exterior F.D. Floor Drain F.E. Fire Extinguisher F.V. Field Verify FIN. Finish FLR. Floor FTG. Footing GALV. Galvanized GYP.BD. Gypsum Wallboard HC Handicapped H.C. Hollow Core (Wood) HDR. Header H.M. Hollow Metal HORIZ. Horizontal I.D. Inside Diameter INS.STL. Insulated Steel INT. Interior M.O. Masonry Opening MANUF. Manufacturer MTL. Metal (N) New N.I.C. Not in Contract N.T.S. Not to Scale NOM. Nominal O.A. Overall O.C. On Center O.D. Outside Diameter O.H. Overhead SCALE 1" = 0 30' 30 15 15 30 PROJECT DATE DRAWN TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION CITY OF FORT COLLINS 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 Landscape Architecture, Engineering, & Planning 153 West Mountain Ave. Fort Collins, CO 80524 970 484 1921 Fax 970 484 2443 C 2009 ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY ARCHITECTS 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED: 2/ FILE NAME: .CPFUECRG2NCPFYI CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: City of Fort Collins, Colorado UTILITY PLAN APPROVAL Parks and Recreation Traffic Engineer Stormwater Utility Water & Wastewater Utility City Engineer CHECKED BY: APPROVED: Date Environmental Planner Date Date Date Date Date Date Prepared by or under the direct supervision of: For and On Behalf of Jim Sell Design, Inc. (3) AH (2) GI (2) MS (3) CT (6) CB (3) SE (3) SE (3) CB (3) SE (3) CB (3) CT (4) AA (2) PS (3) PS-T SCALE 1" = 0 30' 30 15 15 30 PROJECT DATE DRAWN TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION CITY OF FORT COLLINS 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 Landscape Architecture, Engineering, & Planning 153 West Mountain Ave. Fort Collins, CO 80524 970 484 1921 Fax 970 484 2443 C 2009 ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY ARCHITECTS 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED: 2/ FILE NAME: .CPFUECRG2NCPFYI CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: City of Fort Collins, Colorado UTILITY PLAN APPROVAL Parks and Recreation Traffic Engineer Stormwater Utility Water & Wastewater Utility City Engineer CHECKED BY: APPROVED: Date Environmental Planner Date Date Date Date Date Date Prepared by or under the direct supervision of: For and On Behalf of Jim Sell Design, Inc. * * * * EVERGREEN TREE PLANTING DETAIL 1 DECIDUOUS TREE PLANTING DETAIL 2 SHRUB PLANTING DETAIL NOTES: PLANT ALL SHRUBS SO THAT THEIR CENTERS ARE A MINIMUM 4' FROM EDGES OF PAVEMENT. SPACE SHRUBS AS INDICATED ON THE PLANS SCORE SCALE 1" = 0 50' 50 25 50 100 PROJECT DATE DRAWN TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION CITY OF FORT COLLINS 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 Landscape Architecture, Engineering, & Planning 153 West Mountain Ave. Fort Collins, CO 80524 970 484 1921 Fax 970 484 2443 C 2009 ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY ARCHITECTS 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED: 2/ FILE NAME: 5KVG2NCPFYI CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: CHECKED BY: City of Fort Collins, Colorado UTILITY PLAN APPROVAL Parks and Recreation Traffic Engineer Stormwater Utility Water & Wastewater Utility City Engineer CHECKED BY: APPROVED: Date Environmental Planner Date Date Date Date Date Date Prepared by or under the direct supervision of: For and On Behalf of Jim Sell Design, Inc. SITE PLAN 0843.10 8/6/2012 BW SP1 SITE PLAN VICINITY MAP SCALE 1" = 0' 1,250' 625 1,250 2,500 SITE CALCULATIONS LEGAL DESCRIPTION: Know all men by these presents, that the undersigned, being owners of the following described land: A parcel of land being comprised of Tract A of the South Side Service Center P.U.D., Phase One, recorded January 27, 1983 as Reception 490275 of the Records of Larimer County and Tract TRILBY ROAD PORTNER ROAD DIRT TWO-TRACK ROAD FUEL FARM FUEL ISLAND BUS WASH UP UP LEVEL CNG ENCLOSURE MODULAR TRAILER CASH DEP.VAULT MAIN GARAGE CHASSIS WASH PROPOSED CHASSIS WASH EXPANSION ADMINISTRATION PROPOSED GARAGE EXPANSION PROPOSED DRIVER TRAINING AREA A1.2 1 A1.1 1 D1.1 3 D1.1 1 A7.3 5 D1.1 2 A7.3 4 PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:07:03 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt REFERENCE PLAN 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 G0.1 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 1" = 40'-0" 1 DRAWING REFERENCE PLAN NORTH UP DN CHASSIS WASH 138 BRAKE SHOP 133 COMPONENT CLEAN 134 ELEC 137 MECH 136 TIRE SHOP 132 LUBE ROOM 131 COMPONENT REBUILD 135 RUNNING REPAIR/INSPECTION 130 BREAK ROOM 122 WOMEN 123 MEN 124 OFFICE 125 EQUIPMENT 128 PARTS STORAGE 129 STORAGE 108 OFFICE 107 OFFICE 106 OFFICE 105 OFFICE 104 LOBBY 103 OFFICE 100 CONFERENCE 116 STORAGE 115 MONEY 114 COMPUTER 113 OFFICE 112 STORAGE 111 MEN 110 UP DN CHASSIS WASH 138 BRAKE SHOP 133 COMPONENT CLEAN 134 ELEC 137 MECH 136 TIRE SHOP 132 COMPONENT REBUILD 135 BREAK ROOM 122 EQUIPMENT 128 PARTS STORAGE 129 OFFICE 127 D3 D4 D4 45' - 0" 3' - 6" 7' - 6 1/2" 45' - 0" D2 D5 D6 D6 D8 D7 D10 D1 D9 D6 D6 D7 D12 D14 D13 D13 D11 D11 D12 D15 D17 D14 D19 D11 D11 D12 D13 D13 D14 D16 D17 D18 A4.1 5 CHASSIS WASH 138 BRAKE SHOP 133 COMPONENT CLEAN 134 ELEC 137 MECH 136 TIRE SHOP 132 COMPONENT REBUILD 135 X W 13.8 16 19 20 22 V 12 13 25 26 4' - 8 1/2" 10' - 11" 16' - 10 1/2" 26' - 2 1/2" 7' - 8 1/2" 18' - 6" 6' - 6 1/2" 21' - 3" 4' - 8 1/2" 14 2' - 6" 14' - 0" 4' - 6" A4.1 4 3' - 6" 7' - 6 1/2" 45' - 0" 10' - 0" 45' - 0" 1 A5.1 1 A5.1 2 A5.1 2 A5.1 P25 P5 P5 5' - 3 1/2" P6 15 16 CHASSIS WASH EXPANSION 159 16' - 0" 8" 9' - 0" 8" 6' - 4" 8" 1' - 3 1/2" 4 1/2" A7.2 8 21' - 0" W1 W1 33' - 5" P21 1/4 : 12 1/4 : 12 P22 P23 A4.1 2 2 A5.2 2 A5.2 2' - 0" 3' - 10" 2' - 2" 22' - 0" 4' - 0" 22' - 0" 4' - 0" 22' - 0" 4' - 0" 22' - 0" 4' - 0" 112' - 0" 145' - 0" 36' - 11 3/4" 35' - 6 1/4" 35' - 6 1/4" 36' - 11 3/4" B C D 31' - 5 1/2" 26' - 0" 26' - 0" 28' - 0" 1 A5.2 1 A5.2 E 2 3 4 46' - 5" 3' - 10" 44' - 6" 3' - 10" 46' - 5" 1' - 0" 46' - 6" 3' - 10" 39' - 2" 8' - 0" 45' - 6" 1' - 0" 1 4 3 5 11 12 10 13 6 9 7 8 2 GARAGE ADDITION 157 EXISTING GARAGE 158 22' - 0" 4' - 0" 22' - 0" 4' - 0" 22' - 0" 4' - 0" 22' - 0" 4' - 0" 2' - 0" 3' - 10" 2' - 2" W2 P16 P12 F1 W3 TYP. TYP. A4.1 1 A4.1 3 2' - 0" P20 24' - 0" A7.2 7 5' - 0" P20 P20 P21 2 A5.2 B C D 1 A5.2 E 2 3 4 VALLEY VALLEY VALLEY VALLEY VALLEY VALLEY VALLEY VALLEY RIDGE RIDGE 1 A7.2 5 A 1 3 A7.2 SIM R2 R3 R6 R1 R1 26' - 0" 26' - 0" 26' - 0" 14' - 0" 19' - 0" 25' - 7 1/8" 28' - 7 1/4" 25' - 7 1/4" 31' - 7 1/4" R2 R3 ROOF C/L ROOF C/L 1' - 6 1/2" 1' - 6 1/2" RIDGE RIDGE RIDGE R6 TYP. R6 TYP. 6 A7.2 R4 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 R7 X W 22 14 25 26 RD R1 4 A7.2 R6 R5 R2 PROJECT DATE DRAWN EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" CHASSIS WASH ADDITION 164' - 0 1/2" GARAGE ADDITION P16 P16 P16 P16 P11 P10 P10 P12 W3 P10 P10 P11 A4.1 P14 4 T.O. PARAPET EL. REVEAL 15 100' - 0" W2 EL. UPPER PARAPET (EXISTING) 126' - 6" P17 R1 21' - 0" P18 P2 P19 P19 P19 8' - 0" 22' - 0" 4' - 0" 22' - 0" 4' - 0" 22' - 0" 4' - 0" 22' - 0" 4' - 0" W1 P18 P18 P18 R4 P3 P7 P7 P7 P7 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 P37 P37 16' - 6" EQ EQ 16' - 0" P19 EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" EXISTING MAIN BUILDING BEYOND GARAGE ADDITION EXISTING MAIN BUILDING BEYOND P13 P10 P14 P11 P10 P10 W3 W2 P11 P10 P10 W2 EL. REVEAL 15 100' - 0" MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN T.O. PARAPET EL. W X EL. MAIN FLOOR 100' - 0" W1 R1 F1 P25 EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" A6.1 1 W1 A7.2 3 SIM P15 22 14 25 26 EL. MAIN FLOOR 100' - 0" 1 A5.1 W1 R1 W1 BEYOND F1 P25 EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" A7.2 4 (E) INTERIOR WALL (E) ROOF (E) EXTERIOR WALL A7.1 4 SIM A7.2 2 SIM P6 P15 PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:06:58 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt CHASSIS WASH BUILDING SECTIONS 0843.10 MDN EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" 2 E D A5.2 C B A6.1 2 W2 P12 A6.1 4 A R1 F1 R7 EL. MAIN FLOOR 100' - 0" EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" 1 2 A5.2 3 4 W2 P16 W2 A6.1 1 3 5 F1 R1 6 A7.2 R7 P6 PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:06:59 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt GARAGE SECTIONS 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 A5.2 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 N/S BUILDING SECTION AT GARAGE 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 E/W BUILDING SECTION AT GARAGE KEYNOTE LEGEND VALUE DESCRIPTION F1 6" SLAB ON GRADE. P6 PROVIDE 6" CONCRETE FILLED STEEL EL. CODE PLAN 100' - 0" X EL. MAIN FLOOR 100' - 0" EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" W1 SLAB ON GRADE, SEE STRUCTURAL EXT. CONC. SLAB CONC. GRADE BEAM ON CAISSON - RE: STRUCT. R1 A7.2 2 SIM 4" 2" 4" 2" 1' - 0" 2" EL. MAIN FLOOR 100' - 0" EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" 4" 4" W1 W1 A7.2 2 1' - 0" A CONC. GRADE BEAM ON CAISSON - RE: STRUCT. 11" PRECAST PANEL W/ EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING (BEIGE) W/ 2" OF RIGID INSULATION CAST IN PANEL WITH BROOM FINISH AT INTERIOR. EXTERIOR REVEAL DIMENSIONS TO MATCH EXISTING. 3" 2" 7" 2" EL. MAIN FLOOR 100' - 0" EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" A7.1 4 SIM 5 CONC. GRADE BEAM ON CAISSON - RE: STRUCT. W2 PRECAST INSUL. CONC. WALL PANEL W/ CHAMFERED EDGES AT ALL OPENINGS & CORNERS 3/8" WD. SHIM, BACKER ROD & SEALANT HM. DOOR FRAME MASONRY EXPANSION ANCHOR FROM FRAME TO PRECAST INSUL. STL. DOOR EXTERIOR SIDE 3/4" 3/4" PRECAST INSUL. CONC. WALL PANEL W/ CHAMFERED EDGES AT ALL OPENINGS & CORNERS HM. DOOR FRAME 3/8" WD. SHIM, BACKER ROD & SEALANT MASONRY EXPANSION ANCHOR FROM FRAME TO PRECAST INSUL. STL. DOOR EXTERIOR SIDE 3/4" 3/4" PRECAST INSUL. CONC. WALL PANEL W/ CHAMFERED EDGES AT ALL OPENINGS & CORNERS 3/8" WD. SHIM, BACKER ROD & FIRE CAULK - PNT. PREFINISHED MTL. FRAME MASONRY EXPANSION ANCHOR FROM FRAME TO PRECAST 3/4" 3/4" P/C PANEL BEYOND 4"X4"X1/4" T.S. FRAME @ O.H. DOOR T.S. PIECE W/ END CAPS STL. CONNECTION EMBED TO FRAME BEYOND T.S. PIECE W/ END CAPS ATTACHED TO EMBED 5 1/2" MIN. STL. ANGLE WELDED TO EMBED STL. PLATE AS REQ'D BY MANUF. COORD. W/ DOOR MANUF. INSUL. STL. DOOR A O.H. SECTIONAL DOOR A 14' - 0" RE: SCHED. 3' - 6" LINE OF SPREAD FOOTING BELOW SAW CUT JOINT, RE: STRUC. STL. COLUMN ON BASE PLATE, RE: STRUC. 24" DIA. CONC. COLUMN 36" AFF EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" (N) ROOF (E) PRECAST WALL (E) ROOF A7.2 3 SIM BENT STL. PLATE TO MATCH (E) IN GAUGE AND DIMENSION WELD TO BOLLARD -PNT. BLACK 9 A7.2 MITER PANELS AT CORNERS BACKER ROD AND SEALANT, BS PRECAST WALL PANELS WITH INTEGRAL RIGID INSULATION EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" SEALANT PREFINISHED MTL. COUNTER FLASHING ATTACHED TO (E) SMOOTH FINISH AT PRECAST REVEAL 5/8" FIBERGLASS MAT FACED GYP. BD. OVER (E) EXPOSED AGGREGATE PRECAST WALL (E) ROOF (E) WALL (N) ROOF MEMBRANE ROOFING ON ROOF COVER BOARD ON RIGID INSULATION ON MTL. DECK AND BAR JOIST BASE FLASHING ADHERED TO (E) SMOOTH FINISH AT PRECAST REVEAL. BASE FLASHING ADHERED TO EXT. FIBERGLASS MAT GYP. BD. AT (E) PRECAST W/ EXPOSED AGGREGATE. FASTEN W/ PAF'S AND ADHESIVE WIDE FLANGE BEAM, RE: STRUC. CANT STRIP AS REQ'D BY ROOFING MANUF. PT. WD. CANT STRIP PT. WD. NAILER P30 P33 20'-0" TO 25'-0" V.I.F. P31 A7.3 6 P36 P35 P34 P33 P32 P40 A7.3 3 15' - 0" P28 P30 P31 P30 P31 P33 P29 P29 30'-0" to 35'-0" V.I.F. P36 P40 P40 1 P41 30'-0" to 35'-0" V.I.F. A7.3 2 P36 P31 P30 P29 P30 P31 P29 3' - 0" 2' - 0" 6" 8-5/8" DIA. BLACK SCHEDULE 40 POSTS NEW PORTION OF BLACK VINYL CHAIN LINK FENCE SLOPE TOP OF CAISSON TO DRAIN AWAY FROM POST PROVIDE 9'-0" H POSTS THIS LOCATION, ALL OTHER POSTS TO BE 6'-0" A7.3 2 SIM 20'-0" TO 25'-0" V.I.F. P34 P31 P30 P30 P35 P36 4' - 0" COORD. W/ EQUIP. COORD. W/ EQUIP. 4' - 0" COORD. W/ EQUIP 1/4" 1' - 0" LCP 1 LOCATION: ELECTRICAL GEAR OVERRIDE SWITCH, NINE BUTTON: ONE PER LIGHTING CIRCUIT, ONE PER EXHAUST FAN, ALL ON/OFF NO SCALE OCCUPANCY SENSORS, CX-100 SERIES, QUANITY 5. CEILING MOUNTED. PART CIRCUIT HCAN-16 OUTDOOR PHOTOCELL LCP 2 LOCATION: ELECTRICAL GEAR OVERRIDE SWITCH, ONE BUTTON ALL ON/OFF NO SCALE PART CIRCUIT HCAN-16 AC ABOVE COUNTER AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFG ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AFP ARCH FAULT PROTECTION AIC AMP. INTERRUPTING CAPACITY AL ALUMINUM ANN ANNUNCIATOR ARCH ARCHITECT BFF BELOW FINISHED FLOOR BFG BELOW FINISHED GRADE C CONDUIT CATV CABLE TELEVISION CKT CIRCUIT CLG CEILING CT CURRENT TRANSFORMER CU COPPER DISC DISCONNECT DN DOWN DPDT DOUBLE POLE DOUBLE THROW DPST DOUBLE POLE SINGLE THROW EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ELEC ELECTRICAL EM EMERGENCY EXIST EXISTING F. FUSED FB FIBER OPTICS FLR FLOOR FLUOR FLUORESCENT G GROUND GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR GC GROUNDING CONDUCTOR GFCI GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPT GFP GROUND FAULT PROTECTED RECEPTACLE GRC GALVANIZED RIGID CONDUIT GRD GROUNDING CONDUCTOR HP HORSEPOWER IC INTERRUPTING CAPACITY SECTION A-A A TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION PANEL: LCAN 120/208Y VOLT BUS: 150A CU 3 PHASE, 4 W. MAIN: 150A MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER LOCATION: BUS CANOPY FACILITY Fault Current Rating: 10,000 AIC NOTES: FED FROM: PANEL HCAN MOUNTING: SURFACE ID BREAKER DESCRIPTION V - A CIRCUIT PHASE CIRCUIT V - A DESCRIPTION BREAKER ID D 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 1 A 2 1435 OVERHEAD DOOR 20/2 B D 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 3 B 4 1435 B D 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 5 C 6 1435 OVERHEAD DOOR 20/2 M D 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 7 A 8 1435 M D 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 9 B 10 1435 OVERHEAD DOOR 20/2 M D 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 11 C 12 1435 M D 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 13 A 14 1435 OVERHEAD DOOR 20/2 M D 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 15 B 16 1435 M D 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 17 C 18 1100 GUH-1 20 M + 20 SPARE 19 A 20 1100 GUH-1 20 M + 20 SPARE 21 B 22 1100 GUH-1 20 M M 20 GUH-1 1100 23 C 24 1100 GUH-1 20 M G 20 GENERAL RECEPTACLES 1080 25 A 26 200 RADIANT HEAT IGNITOR 20 E G 20 GENERAL RECEPTACLES 1260 27 B 28 200 RADIANT HEAT IGNITOR 20 E G 20 SPARE 29 C 30 1900 EF-1 30/1 M M 20 GUH-1 1100 31 A 32 1900 EF-1 30/1 M + 20 SPARE 33 B 34 1900 EF-1 30/1 M + 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 35 C 36 1900 EF-1 30/1 M + 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 37 A 38 200 FUTURE HEAT TRACE CONTROL 20/1 ** D + 20 * DEDICATED QUAD RECEPTACLE 1000 39 B 40 200 CAMERA POWER 20 D + 20 SPARE 41 C 42 200 GATE POWER 20 M * PROVIDE TIE HANDLES ON CIRCUITS WITH SHARED NEUTRAL ** PROVIDE 20/1 GFCI PROTECTED BREAKER WITH MAXIMUM 5 MILLIAMP TRIP FOR USE WITH FUTURE HEAT TRACE. CONNECTED LOAD (Downstream Loads Included) TOTALS LOAD SUMMARY Phase A 13885 CATEGORY CONNECTED FACTOR CALCULATED V - A AMPS Phase B 12965 LIGHTING 0 125% 0 0.0 Phase C 14170 GENERAL RECEPTACLE 2340 100% 2,340 6.5 DOWNSTREAM LOADS REMAINING GENERAL REC. 0 50% 0 0.0 DEDICATED RECEPTACLE 9400 100% 9,400 26.1 MOTOR 23010 100% 23,010 63.9 LARGEST MOTOR 2870 125% 3,588 10.0 MISCELANEOUS 3000 100% 3,000 8.3 KITCHEN 0 65% 0 0.0 ELECTRIC HEAT 400 125% 500 1.4 Total Demand: 41,838 116 TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION PANEL: HCAN 277/480 VOLT BUS: 125A CU 3 PHASE, 4 W. MAIN: 100/3 MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER LOCATION: BUS STORAGE FACILITY NOTES: FED FROM: EXISTING SWITCHBOARD BUCKET MOUNTING: SURFACE ID BREAKER DESCRIPTION V - A CIRCUIT PHASE CIRCUIT V - A DESCRIPTION BREAKER ID + 20 - SPARE - 1 A 2 460 EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING 20 L + 20 - SPARE - 3 B 4 400 POLE YARD LIGHTING 20 L + 20 - SPARE - 5 C 6 400 POLE YARD LIGHTING 20 L + 20 - SPARE - 7 A 8 450 INTERIOR LIGHTING NORTH 20 L + 20 - SPARE - 9 B 10 450 INTERIOR LIGHTING MIDDLE 20 L + 20 - SPARE - 11 C 12 450 INTERIOR LIGHTING SOUTH 20 L + 20 - SPARE - 13 A 14 600 INTERIOR CORRIDOR LIGHTING 20 L + 20 - SPARE - 15 B 16 200 TIMECLOCK 20 + + 20 - SPARE - 17 C 18 SPACE + + 20 - SPARE - 19 A 20 SPACE + + 20 - SPARE - 21 B 22 SPACE + + 20 - SPARE - 23 C 24 SPACE + B C D E 2 3 4 GARAGE ADDITION 157 EXISTING GARAGE 158 5 A 1 CHASSIS WASH 138 BRAKE SHOP 133 COMPONENT CLEAN 134 ELEC 137 MECH 136 TIRE SHOP 132 COMPONENT REBUILD 135 X W V CHASSIS WASH EXPANSION 159 CHASSIS WASH 138 BRAKE SHOP 133 COMPONENT CLEAN 134 ELEC 137 TIRE SHOP 132 COMPONENT REBUILD 135 X W 12 13 13.8 16 19 20 22 14 25 26 CHASSIS WASH EXPANSION 159 12 13 13.8 16 19 20 22 14 25 26 + 20 - SPARE - 25 A 26 13,946 TRANSFORMER PANEL LCAN 70/3 + + 20 - SPARE - 27 B 28 13,946 + + 20 - SPARE - 29 C 30 13,946 + CONNECTED LOAD (Downstream Loads Included) TOTALS LOAD SUMMARY Phase A 15,456 CATEGORY CONNECTED FACTOR CALCULATED V - A AMPS Phase B 14,996 LIGHTING 3210 125% 4,013 4.8 Phase C 14,796 GENERAL RECEPTACLE 0 100% 0 0.0 DOWNSTREAM LOADS REMAINING GENERAL REC. 0 50% 0 0.0 DEDICATED RECEPTACLE 0 100% 0 0.0 MOTOR 0 100% 0 0.0 LARGEST MOTOR 0 125% 0 0.0 MISCELANEOUS 42037.5 100% 42,038 50.6 KITCHEN 0 65% 0 0.0 ELECTRIC HEAT 0 125% 0 0.0 Total Demand: 46,050 55 IG ISOLATED GROUND ISC ISC AMP. SHORT CIRCUIT AVAILABLE J-BOX JUNCTION BOX KW KILOWATTS LTG LIGHTING MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MCB MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER MCC MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MCIP MAIN CONTROL INSTRUMENT PANEL MDB MAIN DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD MDB MAIN DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD MDP MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL MDP MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL MECH MECHANICAL MLO MAIN LUG ONLY MTD MOUNTED N NEUTRAL N.F. NON FUSED N.T.S. NOT TO SCALE NL NIGHT LIGHT PC PULL CHAIN PC PHOTOCELL PH PHASE PLC PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER PNL PANEL PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PWR POWER RECEPT RECEPTACLE S/N SOLID NEUTRAL SPC SPACE SPDT SINGLE POLE DOUBLE THROW SPR SPARE SPST SINGLE POLE SINGLE THROW SSRV SOLID STATE REDUCED VOLT. SW SWITCH TRANSF TRANSFORMER T-STAT THERMOSTAT TYP TYPICAL U.O.N. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED UC UNDER COUNTER UG UNDERGROUND V VOLTS VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE W WATTS WG WIRE GUARD WP WEATHERPROOF XFMR TRANSFORMER 1/4" STEEL PLATE, CONT. WELD TO TUBE STEEL, PAINT BLACK 4"X4"X1/4" TUBE STEEL POST/ ARM SET IN 1'-6" DIA. CONC. CAISSON, PAINT BLACK (E) CONC. SIDEWALK 3' - 0" MIN. 4" SLOPE CARD READER AND ENCLOSURE/ COVER AND INTERCOM PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER FRONT ELEVATION SIDE ELEVATION 4" SLOPE 4" CONDUIT ROUTED FROM GATE CONTROLLER TO EQUIPMENT LOCATION AND DATA CABINET AT (E) CNG ENCLOSURE, RE: ELEC. PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:07:02 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt VEHICLE GATES 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 A7.3 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 1" = 10'-0" 4 VEHICLE GATE NORTH PLAN 1" = 10'-0" 5 VEHICLE GATE SOUTH PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0" 3 SOUTH VEHICLE GATE - WEST ELEVATION 1/2" = 1'-0" 2 TYP. GATE POST SECTION 1/8" = 1'-0" 6 NORTH VEHICLE GATE - WEST ELEVATION KEYNOTE LEGEND VALUE DESCRIPTION P28 4"x4"x1/4" TUBE STEEL POST AND 90 DEG. ARM, 1/4" STEEL MOUNTING PLATE WITH ACCESS HOLE SET IN 1'-6" DIAMETER CONC. CAISSON FOR CARD READER AND INTERCOM. REMOVE PORTION OF SIDEWALK NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION OF CAISSON. PATCH SIDEWALK AROUND CAISSON, PROVIDE EXPANSION MATERIAL AND CAULK JOINT AT EDGE OF CAISSON. CARD READER, INTERCOM AND HOUSING AND CABLING SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER/ SEPARATE CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE CONDUIT FROM GATE OPERATOR THROUGH CAISSON/ POST TO CARD READER MOUNTING LOCATION. SEE ARCH AND ELEC FOR DETAILS. P29 NEW ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED, DOUBLE CANTILEVERED VEHICLE GATE. P30 INSTALL NEW POSTS AS NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION OF CANTILEVERED GATE. P31 INSTALL NEW VINYL-COATED FENCING WHERE REMOVED FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW GATE. P32 INSTALL NEW CURB AND GUTTER TO REPLACE DAMAGED AREAS ADJACENT TO NEW GATES. P33 INSTALL CONCRETE CAISSON FOR NEW GATE POSTS. POUR IN SLAB CUT OUT FOR REMOVAL OF OLD POST. P34 NEW ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED, SINGLE CANTILEVERED VEHICLE GATE. P35 INSTALL NEW VINYL-COATED CHAIN LINK FENCE ON NORTH SIDE OF DRIVE LANE. P36 REINSTALL SALVAGED SIGNAGE. P40 MAGNETIC VEHICLE SENSOR LOOP SAW CUT INTO (E) SLAB PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMENDATIONS. P41 GATE POST IN THIS LOCATION TO BE 9'-0" FROM GRADE TO ACCOMODATE SECURITY CAMERA. PROVIDE CONDUIT TO THIS LOCATION. CAMERA, CABLE AND INSTALLATION BY SEPARATE CONTRACT 3/4" = 1'-0" 1 CARD READER POST DETAIL EXPANSION JOINT 1" EXPANSION JOINT COVER MTL. ANGLE, RE: STRUC. 3' - 2" 4'-10" @ EXTERIOR COLUMNS 2'-10" @ INTERIOR COLUMNS 2" MIN. ROUND (6" DIA @ INTERIOR AND 8" DIA @ EXTERIOR) PAINTED STL. PIPE BOLLARD 1/4" WALL THICKNESS FILLED WITH CONCRETE. SET BOLLARD IN CAISSON AT GARAGE ADDITION CONCRETE TO EXTEND 3/4" ABOVE POST, ROUND EQUALLY TO DRAIN. AT CHASSIS WASH ADDTITION CAP BOLLARD WITH 1/4" PLATE STEEL WITH EDGES WELDED AND GROUND SMOOTH TO MATCH (E). INSTALL 2-1/2" REFLECTIVE TAPE AT TOP OF BOLLARDS 1'-4" @ EXTERIOR 1'-2" @ INTERIOR EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" 1' - 0" 1" 3" 2" 7" 2" PREFINISHED METAL COUNTER FLASHING SEALANT BASE FLASHING ROOFING MEMBRANE ON 1/2" ROOF COVERBOARD ON 5" RIGID INSULATION ON 1-1/2" MTL. DECK STL. ANGLE WELDED TO EMBED PLATE. RE: STRUC. PRECAST PANEL W/ 2" OF INTEGRAL RIGID INSULATION STL. BAR JOIST PT. WD. CANT STRIP PT. WD. NAILER 22 T.O. PARAPET 122'-0" PREFINISHED MTL. PARAPET CAP PT. WD. CURB (E) WALL BEYOND (E) WALL BEYOND (E) ROOF (N) ROOF (E) STL. BEAM STL. BEAM, RE: STRUC. WRAP BASE FLASHING UP AND OVER PARAPET WALL PT. WD. CANT STRIP AS REQ'D BY ROOFING MANUF. MEMBRANE ROOF ON COVERBOARD OVER RIGID INSULATION ON MTL DECK AND BAR JOIST PT. WD. NAILER AS REQ'D BY ROOFING MANUF. WRAP BASE FLASHING UP AND OVER PARAPET WALL PT. WD. CANT STRIP PT. WD. NAILER DASHED LINES REPRESENT (E) PRECAST PANELS TO BE REMOVED REMOVE EXISTING NAILER, CANT STRIP, INSULATION, BALLAST AND ROOFING AS NECESSARY TO INSTALL CURB AND FLASH (N) ROOF INTO (E) 2 4 2 12 (E) MTL. DECK X 22 END OF (N) PANEL TO BE BEVELED TO MATCH (E) PANEL (E) PANEL TO BE REMOVED (E) COLUMN TO REMAIN (E) PANEL TO REMAIN 1/2" 3/4" BACKER ROD AND SEALANT, BS. 4X4 TUBE STEEL FRAME 1' - 0" 1" ALIGN C/L OF INTERIOR BOLLARD ON JAMB 1/2" 1/2" OH DOOR AND TRACK R 4" R 3" EXTERIOR SIDE SELF FLASHING SKYLIGHT ROOFING MEMBRANE TO RETURN UNDER INTEGRAL CURB/ SKYLIGHT COVER P.T. WD. BLOCKING 22 GA. PREFINISHED METAL FLASHING TO CLOSE OFF GAP BETWEEN FRAMING AND SKYLIGHT STEEL FRAMING, RE: STRUC. TPO ROOFING MEMBRANE OVER ROOF COVER BOARD ON RIGID INSULATION OVER METAL DECK ON STEEL BAR JOISTS PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:07:01 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt DETAILS 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 A7.2 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 1/2" = 1'-0" 7 INTERIOR COLUMN/BOLLARD DETAIL 1" = 1'-0" 1 PARAPET LADDER 3/4" = 1'-0" 8 SOUTH BOLLARD DETAIL 1" = 1'-0" 10 TYP. P/C PANEL CORNER 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 3 EXIST. WALL @ NEW ROOF 1" = 1'-0" 9 BOLLARD SECTION 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 2 PARAPET AT NEW WALL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 4 CURB AT (E) CHASSIS WASH ROOF 1" = 1'-0" 11 CHAMFERED PANEL AT CHASSIS 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 5 TYP. OH DOOR JAMB/ BOLLARD DETAIL 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 6 SKYLIGHT DETAIL 7' - 0" LITES TO MATCH EXIST. 10" 10" 8" 5' - 8" T T= TEMPERED GLASS T T T T T H.M. FRAME 1 7' - 0" 2" 7' - 2" 2" RE: SCHED. 2" RE: SCHED. 4" 4" RE: SCHED. 4" T.S. FRAME 2 PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:07:00 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt DETAILS, DOOR SCHEDULE & TYPES 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 A7.1 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 3" = 1'-0" 1 DOOR HEAD 3" = 1'-0" 2 DOOR JAMB 3" = 1'-0" 3 LOUVER DETAIL (HEAD & JAMB) 1 1/2" = 1'-0" 4 O.H. DOOR HEAD DOOR SCHEDULE MARK FROM ROOM TO ROOM WIDTH HEIGHT DOOR FRAME HARDWARE GROUP THK MATERIAL TYPE GLASS FINISH MATERIAL TYPE FINISH COMMENTS 1 EXISTING GARAGE GARAGE ADDITION 3' - 6" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A VISION PNT HM 1 PNT B 2 GARAGE ADDITION 3' - 6" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A VISION PNT HM 1 PNT A 3 GARAGE ADDITION 22' - 0" 14' - 0" 2" STL B PANELS PNT TS 2 PNT - 4 GARAGE ADDITION 22' - 0" 14' - 0" 2" STL B PANELS PNT TS 2 PNT - 5 GARAGE ADDITION 22' - 0" 14' - 0" 2" STL B PANELS PNT TS 2 PNT - 6 GARAGE ADDITION 22' - 0" 14' - 0" 2" STL B PANELS PNT TS 2 PNT - 7 GARAGE ADDITION 3' - 6" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A VISION PNT HM 1 PNT A 8 GARAGE ADDITION 3' - 6" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A VISION PNT HM 1 PNT A 9 GARAGE ADDITION 22' - 0" 14' - 0" 2" STL B PANELS PNT TS 2 PNT - 10 GARAGE ADDITION 22' - 0" 14' - 0" 2" STL B PANELS PNT TS 2 PNT - 11 GARAGE ADDITION 22' - 0" 14' - 0" 2" STL B PANELS PNT TS 2 PNT - 12 GARAGE ADDITION 22' - 0" 14' - 0" 2" STL B PANELS PNT TS 2 PNT - 13 GARAGE ADDITION 3' - 6" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A VISION PNT HM 1 PNT A 14 EXISTING GARAGE GARAGE ADDITION 8' - 0" 10' - 0" 2" STL A - PNT H.M. 1 PNT - 15 CHASSIS WASH EXPANSION 14' - 0" 14' - 0" 2" (E) (E) (E) PNT (E) 2 PNT - EXISTING DOOR TO BE REINSTALLED 16 CHASSIS WASH EXPANSION 3' - 6" 7' - 0" 1 3/4" HM A VISION PNT H.M. 1 PNT A 1/4" = 1'-0" Door Types 1/4" = 1'-0" Frame Types EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR EXTERIOR R1 P6 EXT. SLAB ON GRADE, RE: CIVIL 1/2" EXP. JOINT EL. CODE PLAN EL. 100' - 0" MAIN FLOOR 100' - 0" EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" E A7.2 3 1/2" EXP. JOINT (E) SLAB A7.1 1 Sim (E) WALL STL. COLUMN BEYOND, RE:STRUC. (E) PIER AND CAP PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:06:59 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt WALL SECTIONS 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 A6.1 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 3/4" = 1'-0" 1 WALL SECTION - CHASSIS WASH KEYNOTE LEGEND VALUE DESCRIPTION P6 PROVIDE 6" CONCRETE FILLED STEEL BOLLARDS, PAINT BLACK. R1 FULLY ADHERED WHITE TPO SINGLE PLY ROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM ON COVERBOARD ON 5" RIGID INSULATION, METAL DECK AND STEEL ROOF JOISTS. W1 11" PRECAST PANEL W/ EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING (BEIGE) W/ 2" OF RIGID INSULATION CAST IN PANEL WITH BROOM FINISH AT INTERIOR. EXTERIOR REVEAL DIMENSIONS TO MATCH EXISTING. W2 12" PRECAST PANEL W/ EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING (BEIGE) W/ 2" OF RIGID INSULATION CAST IN PANEL WITH BROOM FINISH AT INTERIOR. EXTERIOR REVEAL DIMENSIONS TO MATCH EXISTING. 3/4" = 1'-0" 2 WALL SECTION AT GARAGE 3/4" = 1'-0" 3 N/S WALL SECTION 3/4" = 1'-0" 4 EXIST. WALL SECTION AT GARAGE BOLLARDS, PAINT BLACK. P12 (N) H.M. DOOR, PAINT BEIGE. P16 (N) OVERHEAD DOOR, PAINT BEIGE. R1 FULLY ADHERED WHITE TPO SINGLE PLY ROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM ON COVERBOARD ON 5" RIGID INSULATION, METAL DECK AND STEEL ROOF JOISTS. R7 SELF-FLASHING 24"X48" SKYLIGHTS W2 12" PRECAST PANEL W/ EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING (BEIGE) W/ 2" OF RIGID INSULATION CAST IN PANEL WITH BROOM FINISH AT INTERIOR. EXTERIOR REVEAL DIMENSIONS TO MATCH EXISTING. 8/6/12 A5.1 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 1/4" = 1'-0" 1 BUILDING SECTION - CHASSIS WASH N/S KEYNOTE LEGEND VALUE DESCRIPTION F1 6" SLAB ON GRADE. P2 INSTALL SALVAGED LIGHT FIXTURE AT SAME HEIGHT AS PREVIOUS LOCATION. P3 SALVAGED SECURITY CAMERA INSTALLED BY SEPARATE CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE CONDUIT, COORD. LOCATION W/ OWNER. P6 PROVIDE 6" CONCRETE FILLED STEEL BOLLARDS, PAINT BLACK. P15 (N) 8" CONCRETE FILLED STEEL BOLLARD, PAINT BLACK. P25 INSTALL SALVAGED OVERHEAD DOOR, PAINT BEIGE. R1 FULLY ADHERED WHITE TPO SINGLE PLY ROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM ON COVERBOARD ON 5" RIGID INSULATION, METAL DECK AND STEEL ROOF JOISTS. W1 11" PRECAST PANEL W/ EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING (BEIGE) W/ 2" OF RIGID INSULATION CAST IN PANEL WITH BROOM FINISH AT INTERIOR. EXTERIOR REVEAL DIMENSIONS TO MATCH EXISTING. 1/4" = 1'-0" 2 BUILDING SECTION - CHASSIS WASH E/W UPPER PARAPET (EXISTING) 126' - 6" P12 W3 P10 145' - 0" P19 P19 P19 6' - 0 1/2" 12' - 1" 12' - 1" 12' - 1" 12' - 1" 12' - 1" 12' - 1" 12' - 1" 12' - 1" 12' - 1" 12' - 1" 12' - 1" 6' - 0 1/2" P12 BEYOND R4 BEYOND 16' - 0" E L. CODE PLAN EL. 100' - 0" MAIN FLOOR 100' - 0" EL. PARAPET 122' - 0" GARAGE ADDITION EXISTING MAIN BUILDING BEYOND P11 P10 P10 P10 P10 P11 P10 P10 P10 P11 P16 W3 P10 P10 P10 W2 P16 P16 P16 P16 W2 EL. UPPER PARAPET (EXISTING) 126' - 6" 112' - 0" P18 P7 P19 P18 P7 P19 P18 P7 P19 P18 P7 R4 P12 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 P37 P37 16' - 6" EQ EQ 16' - 0" P19 10' - 0" P3 W1 P2 P4 P11 CHASSIS WASH ADDITION EXISTING MAIN BUILDING P15 P15 P10 P24 T.O. PARAPET EL. 122'-0" P37 P37 P18 EL. T.O. PARAPET 122' - 0" EL. MAIN FLOOR 100' - 0" W1 EXISTING CHASSIS WASH CHASSIS WASH ADDITION P10 P15 P10 W3 P11 W3 P3 P2 P11 P10 P10 P10 P10 33' - 5" 11' - 5 3/8" 10' - 11 7/8" 10' - 11 7/8" P9 P8 P15 P15 P12 P15 PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:06:57 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt ELEVATIONS 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 A4.1 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 3/32" = 1'-0" 1 EAST ELEVATION 3/32" = 1'-0" 2 NORTH ELEVATION 3/32" = 1'-0" 3 WEST ELEVATION KEYNOTE LEGEND VALUE DESCRIPTION P2 INSTALL SALVAGED LIGHT FIXTURE AT SAME HEIGHT AS PREVIOUS LOCATION. P3 SALVAGED SECURITY CAMERA INSTALLED BY SEPARATE CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE CONDUIT, COORD. LOCATION W/ OWNER. P4 PREFINISHED METAL THROUGH-WALL SCUPPER, PAINT BEIGE. P7 (N) MECH. LOUVERS, PAINT BEIGE, RE: MECH. P8 (N) RAILING TO MATCH EXISTING, BLACK. P9 (E) RAILING, BLACK. P10 (E) BOLLARD, BLACK. P11 (E) OVERHEAD DOOR, BEIGE. P12 (N) H.M. DOOR, PAINT BEIGE. P13 (E) STOREFRONT, DARK BRONZE. P14 (E) H.M. DOOR, BEIGE. P15 (N) 8" CONCRETE FILLED STEEL BOLLARD, PAINT BLACK. P16 (N) OVERHEAD DOOR, PAINT BEIGE. P17 (E) TRANSFORMER. P18 (N) 18"X18" 20 GA. STEEL DOOR NUMBER SIGNAGE, BLACK WITH WHITE LETTERING TO MATCH (E). MOUNT SIGNS AT SAME HEIGHT AND RELATIONSHIP TO DOORS AS EXISTING SIGNAGE. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL MATERIALS FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. P19 (N) WALL PACK LIGHT FIXTURE. P21 FLOOR TRENCH DRAIN. RE: MECH. P24 PATCH TOP CORNER OF (E) PRECAST PANEL WHERE CHIPPED. P37 PROVIDE A PATCH TO MATCH (E) PRECAST AND REINFORCING/ATTACHMENT AT EXISTING REVEALS R1 FULLY ADHERED WHITE TPO SINGLE PLY ROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM ON COVERBOARD ON 5" RIGID INSULATION, METAL DECK AND STEEL ROOF JOISTS. R4 24"W PARAPET LADDER, PAINT BEIGE. W1 11" PRECAST PANEL W/ EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING (BEIGE) W/ 2" OF RIGID INSULATION CAST IN PANEL WITH BROOM FINISH AT INTERIOR. EXTERIOR REVEAL DIMENSIONS TO MATCH EXISTING. W2 12" PRECAST PANEL W/ EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING (BEIGE) W/ 2" OF RIGID INSULATION CAST IN PANEL WITH BROOM FINISH AT INTERIOR. EXTERIOR REVEAL DIMENSIONS TO MATCH EXISTING. W3 (E) EXPOSED AGGREGATE PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL, BEIGE. 1/8" = 1'-0" 4 CHASSIS WASH - EAST ELEVATION 1/8" = 1'-0" 5 CHASSIS WASH - SOUTH ELEVATION 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:06:55 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt ROOF PLANS 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 A2.1 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 GARAGE ADDITION ROOF PLAN 1/8" = 1'-0" 2 CHASSIS WASH ROOF PLAN KEYNOTE LEGEND VALUE DESCRIPTION R1 FULLY ADHERED WHITE TPO SINGLE PLY ROOFING MEMBRANE SYSTEM ON COVERBOARD ON 5" RIGID INSULATION, METAL DECK AND STEEL ROOF JOISTS. R2 ROOF DRAIN - RE: MECH. R3 OVERFLOW DRAIN, 2" ABOVE PRIMARY - RE: MECH. R4 24"W PARAPET LADDER, PAINT BEIGE. R5 PREFINISHED MTL. OVERFLOW SCUPPER, PAINT BEIGE. R6 ROOF CRICKET. R7 SELF-FLASHING 24"X48" SKYLIGHTS NORTH NORTH SLOPE SLAB TO DRAIN, TYP. A7.2 10 F.E. F.E. F.E. F.E. W2 W2 W2 P21 P21 P21 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 P23 P23 P23 5 A 1 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 12' - 0" TYP. 1/8 : 12 1/8 : 12 A7.2 5 OVERFLOW DRAIN LAMBS TONGUE AT 2'-0" A.F.F. 1' - 0" P26 14 P38 PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:06:54 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt GARAGE ADDITION 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 A1.2 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 GARAGE ADDITION FLOOR PLAN KEYNOTE LEGEND VALUE DESCRIPTION F1 6" SLAB ON GRADE. P12 (N) H.M. DOOR, PAINT BEIGE. P16 (N) OVERHEAD DOOR, PAINT BEIGE. P20 (N) 8'-0" TALL CHAIN LINK FENCE W/ 4'-0" GATE. P21 FLOOR TRENCH DRAIN. RE: MECH. P23 PROVIDE 63"W x 44"D LEVEL LANDING AREA. P26 8'-0"W x 80"H CLEAR WALL SPACE FOR FUTURE EQUIPMENT P38 NEW 8'-0"X 10'-0" OH DOOR CUT INTO (E) PRECAST WALL PANEL, RE: STRUC. W2 12" PRECAST PANEL W/ EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING (BEIGE) W/ 2" OF RIGID INSULATION CAST IN PANEL WITH BROOM FINISH AT INTERIOR. EXTERIOR REVEAL DIMENSIONS TO MATCH EXISTING. W3 (E) EXPOSED AGGREGATE PRECAST CONCRETE PANEL, BEIGE. NORTH P15 A7.2 11 P6 P15 P27 1' - 3" 3' - 10" 2' - 7" A7.2 5 SIM PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:06:53 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt CHASSIS WASH/ SERVICE PIT FLOOR PLAN 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 A1.1 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 1/8" = 1'-0" 1 CHASSIS WASH/ SERVICE PIT KEYNOTE LEGEND VALUE DESCRIPTION P5 MECHANICS PIT TO BE INFILLED, RE: STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. P6 PROVIDE 6" CONCRETE FILLED STEEL BOLLARDS, PAINT BLACK. P15 (N) 8" CONCRETE FILLED STEEL BOLLARD, PAINT BLACK. P21 FLOOR TRENCH DRAIN. RE: MECH. P22 PATCH BACK SLAB. PROVIDE #3 DOWELS AT 24" O.C. 6" INTO (E) SLAB P23 PROVIDE 63"W x 44"D LEVEL LANDING AREA. P25 INSTALL SALVAGED OVERHEAD DOOR, PAINT BEIGE. P27 SERVICE REEL, OWNER PROVIDED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED. CORE DRILL WALL. RE: MECH. COORD. LOCATION WITH OWNER. W1 11" PRECAST PANEL W/ EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH TO MATCH EXISTING (BEIGE) W/ 2" OF RIGID INSULATION CAST IN PANEL WITH BROOM FINISH AT INTERIOR. EXTERIOR REVEAL DIMENSIONS TO MATCH EXISTING. NORTH D12 D19 PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:07:02 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt DEMOLITION PLAN 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 D1.1 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 1/16" = 1'-0" 3 DEMO PLAN KEYNOTE LEGEND VALUE DESCRIPTION D1 REMOVE (E) OVERHEAD DOOR. SALVAGE FOR REINSTALLATION. D2 GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR TO BE REMOVED AND RELOCATED, RE: MECHANICAL. D3 SAW CUT AND REMOVE SLAB. D4 MECHANICS PIT TO BE INFILLED. REMOVE LIGHTING/MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT, RE: STRUCTURAL/MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL. D5 REMOVE EXISTING LIGHT FIXTURE AND SECURITY CAMERA FROM EAST ELEVATION. SALVAGE FOR REINSTALLATION. CAMERA REINSTALL BY SEPARATE CONTRACT, RE: ELECTRICAL. D6 PROVIDE SQUARE SAW CUT IN SLAB FOR REMOVAL OF (4) INTERIOR & EXTERIOR BOLLARDS. PROVIDE FILL AND COMPACT. PATCH BACK SLAB. D7 SAW CUT (E) WALL TO ACCOMMODATE NEW DOORS. D8 SAW CUT (E) FLOOR AS REQ'D TO TIE NEW TRENCH DRAIN INTO EXISTING TRENCH DRAIN. D9 REMOVE ALL PRECAST PANELS, CMU & RELATED STRUCTURE ON EAST WALL OF CHASSIS WASH. D10 REMOVE EXIST. LIGHT AND MISC. EQPM. BOX ON N. WALL. D11 PROVIDE CLEAN/ STRAIGHT SAW CUTS AS NECESSARY FOR REMOVAL OF (E) EMBEDED GATE POSTS/HARDWARE AND INSTALATION OF CAISSONS FOR NEW GATE POSTS. D12 REMOVE (E) GATE AND RELATED CHAIN LINK FENCING TO THE EXTENT NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW GATE AND HARDWARE. D13 CLEAR/TRIM EXISTING BUSHES AND TREES AS NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW GATE AND FENCING. D14 SAW CUT AND REMOVE ALL (E) SLAB CURB AND SIDEWALK AS NECESSARY FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW GATE, FENCE AND ACCESS CONTROLS. D15 IF NECESSARY, CONTRACTOR TO REMOVE/ ALTER EXISTING WD. RETAINING WALL AND RELATED GRADING FOR INSTALLATION OF NEW FENCE/GATE. D16 REMOVE PORTIONS OF DAMAGED CURB, GUTTER AND SLAB IMMEDIATLEY ADJACENT TO NEW GATE LOCATION. D17 REMOVE (E) SIGNAGE AND SALVAGE FOR REINSTALLATION D18 REMOVE (E) FENCE/ POSTS NORTH OF DRIVE. D19 CONTRACTOR TO ADJUST FINISHED GRADE AS NECESSARY ADJACENT TO GATE FOR INSTALLATION/ OPERATION OF NEW GATE SYSTEM. REGRADE ADJACENT AREA TO ESTABLISH POSITIVE DRAINAGE AWAY FROM GATE SYSTEM. NORTH 1" = 10'-0" 1 VEHICLE GATE SOUTH - DEMO PLAN 1" = 10'-0" 2 VEHICLE GATE NORTH - DEMO PLAN NORTH NORTH SEE SHEET G0.1 FOR CALL-OUT LOCATIONS ON SITE PLAN WOMEN 109 DISPATCH 118 OFFICE 119 RIDE RES. 120 ENTRY 102 OFFICE 127 SERVICE PITS APPLICABLE CODES - 2009 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC) W/ LOCAL AMENDMENTS - 2009 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE W/ LOCAL AMENDMENTS - 2009 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE W/ LOCAL AMENDMENTS - 2008 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE (NEC) - 2009 INTERNATIONAL PLUMBING CODE (IPC) - 2009 INT'L FUEL GAS CODE (IFGC) - NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION STANDARDS (NFPA) FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS: AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM IN EXISTING BUILDING AND TO BE PROVIDED FOR ALL NEW CONSTRUCTION EMERGENCY LIGHTING ILLUMINATION OF THE MEANS OF EGRESS SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 1 FOOT CANDLE AT THE WALKING SURFCACE LEVEL. PROVIDE BATTERY EMERGENCY POWER FOR NOT LESS THAN 90 MINUTES. COMBUSTIBLE DUST 0 LBS. COMBUSTIBLE FIBERS 0 LBS. COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS - CLASS II 0 GAL. - CLASS IIIA 0 GAL. - CLASS IIIB 0 GAL. FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS - CLASS IA 0 GAL. - CLASS IB 0 GAL. - CLASS IC 0 GAL. OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION EXISTING BUILDING S1 W/ B AS ACCESSORY BUILDING ADDITION CHASSIS WASH - S1 PARKING GARAGE W/ REPAIR GARAGE ADDITION - S2 PARKING GARAGE W/O REPAIR CONSTRUCTION TYPE TYPE II-B ALLOWABLE FLOOR AREAS GROUP S-1: 17,500 S.F. AREA INCREASES PER SECTION 506.2 Aa={17,500 + [17,500 (.75)]+ [17,500 (3)] = 83,125 S.F. PROPOSED BUILDING AREA S1 EXISTING - 40,733 S.F. B EXISTING: 3,912 S.F. S1 NEW - 717 S.F. S2 NEW - 16,300 S.F. TOTAL PROPOSED BUILDING AREA= 61,662 S.F. MAXIMUM BUILDING HEIGHT S-1 2 STORIES, 55'-0" PROPOSED BUILDING HEIGHT 1 STORY - 22'-0" EXIT REQUIREMENTS OCCUPANT LOAD FACTORS - PARKING GARAGES 200 S.F/ PERSON NUMBER OF OCCUPANTS: CHASSIS WASH: 4, GARAGE ADDITION: 82 BUILDING EXITING BUILDING EXITS REQUIRED: 1-500 OCCUPANTS = 2 EXITS REQUIRED NUMBER OF EXITS CHASSIS WASH: 2 EXISTS PROVIDED WIDTH OF EXITS CHASSIS WASH: 42" AND 60" NUMBER OF EXITS GARAGE ADDITION: 4 EXITS PROVIDED WIDTH OF EXITS GARAGE ADDITION: 42" MAX. TRAVEL DISTANCE: WITH SPRINKLER = 250'-0" MAX FOR S-1, 400'-0" MAX FOR S-2 RAMPS - MAX SLOPE 1:12 SLOPE MAX IF PART OF EGRESS, 1:8 MAX OTHERWISE - VERT. RISE 30" MAX - CROSS SLOPE NOT TO EXCEED 2% - WIDTH MATCH CORRIDOR WIDTH, BUT NOT < 36" CLEAR - HANDRAILS BOTH SIDES OF RAMP WHEN VERT. RISE > 6" EXIT ILLUMINATION/ SIGNS: AT ALL EXITS OR ACCESS TO EXITS ACCESSIBLE - MEANS OF EGRESS: CONTINUOUS TO PUBLIC WAY FIRE RESISTIVE REQUIREMENTS BY CONSTRUCTION TYPE EXTERIOR BEARING WALLS 0 HRS INTERIOR BEARING WALLS 0 HRS EXTERIOR NON BEARING WALLS 0 HRS STRUCTURAL FRAME 0 HRS CORRIDOR PARTITIONS 0 HRS PARTITIONS - PERMANENT 0 HRS FLOORS 0 HRS ROOFS 0 HRS GARAGE ADDITION CHASSIS WASH ADDITION F.E. F.E. F.E. F.E. EXIT 21/5 42 EXIT 21/5 42 EXIT 20/5 42 EXIT 20/5 42 AREA: 16,300 S.F. OCCUPANCY: S-2 OCCUPANTS: 82 EXITS: 4 AREA: 717 S.F. OCCUPANCY: S-1 OCCUPANTS: 4 EXIT 4/1 EXITS: 2 42 MAXIMUM TRAVEL DISTANCE = 80'-0" < 250' MAXIMUM TRAVEL DISTANCE = 90'-0" < 400' P23 P23 P23 P23 P23 P23 P23 PROJECT DATE DRAWN 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com PRINTED 8/8/2012 11:07:04 AM FILE NAME: 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10−Transfort.rvt CODE PLAN 0843.10 MDN 8/6/12 G0.2 CITY OF FORT COLLINS TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION 1/16" = 1'-0" 1 CODE PLAN KEYNOTE LEGEND VALUE DESCRIPTION P23 PROVIDE 63"W x 44"D LEVEL LANDING AREA. NORTH N C of the South Side Service Center P.U.D., Phase Two, recorded February 1, 1983 as Reception 490924 of the Records of Larimer County and also that portion of the Southeast Quarter of Section Twelve (12) lying Northerly of said Tract C, Westerly of the Brittany Knolls P.U.D. Filing No. 1, Easterly of that parcel of land described in that Warranty Deed recorded August 12, 1993 as Reception No. 93057436 of the Records of Larimer County and Southerly of the Easterly prolongation of the Northerly line of said parcel described in that Warranty Deed recorded August 12, 1993 as Reception No. 93057436 of the Records of Larimer County, all in Section Twelve (12), Township Six North (T.6N.), Range Sixty-nine West (R.69W.), of the Sixth Principal Meridian (6th P.M.), City of Fort Collins, County of Larimer, State of Colorado, and being more particularly described by metes and bounds as follows: COMMENCING DWWKH6RXWK4XDUWHU&RUQHURIVDLG6HFWLRQDQGDVVXPLQJWKH6RXWKOLQHRIWKH6RXWKHDVW4XDUWHURIVDLG6HFWLRQWREHDU6RXWK ´(DVWEHLQJDJULGEHDULQJRIWKH Colorado State Plane Coordinate System, North Zone, North American Datum 1983/92, a distance of 2703.55 feet, with all other bearings herein relative thereto; 7+(1&(6RXWK ´(DVWDORQJWKH6RXWKOLQHRIWKH6RXWKHDVW4XDUWHURIVDLG6HFWLRQDGLVWDQFHRIIHHWWRWKH6RXWKHUO\SURORQJDWLRQRIWKH(DVWOLQHRI7UDFW&RIWKH6RXWK Side Service Center P.U.D., Phase Two; 7+(1&(1RUWKƒ ´:HVWDORQJWKH6RXWKHUO\SURORQJDWLRQRIWKH(DVWOLQHRIVDLG7UDFW&DGLVWDQFHRIIHHWWRWKH6RXWKHDVWFRUQHURIVDLG7UDFW&DQGWRWKH POINT OF BEGINNING ; 7+(1&(1RUWKƒ ´:HVWDORQJDOLQHSDUDOOHOZLWKDQGIHHW1RUWKHUO\RIDVPHDVXUHGDWULJKWDQJOHWRWKH6RXWKOLQHRIWKH6RXWKHDVW4XDUWHURIVDLGVHFWLRQDGLVWDQFHRI feet to a Point of Curvature; The next Four (4) courses are along the Easterly Right of Way line of Portner Road: 7+(1&(DORQJWKHDUFRIDFXUYHFRQFDYHWRWKH1RUWKHDVWDGLVWDQFHRIIHHWVDLGFXUYHKDVD5DGLXVRIIHHWD'HOWDRIƒ ´DQGLVVXEWHQGHGE\D&KRUGEHDULQJ1RUWK ƒ ´:HVWDGLVWDQFHRIIHHWWRD3RLQWRI7DQJHQF\ 7+(1&(1RUWKƒ ´(DVWDGLVWDQFHRIIHHWWRD3RLQWRI&XUYDWXUH 7+(1&(DORQJWKHDUFRIDFXUYHFRQFDYHWRWKH6RXWKHDVWDGLVWDQFHRIIHHWVDLGFXUYHKDVD5DGLXVRIIHHWD'HOWDRIƒ ´DQGLVVXEWHQGHGE\D&KRUGEHDULQJ1RUWK ƒ ´(DVWDGLVWDQFHRIIHHWWRD3RLQWRI7DQJHQF\ 7+(1&(1RUWKƒ ´(DVWDGLVWDQFHRIIHHWWRD3RLQWRI&XUYDWXUHDQGWRWKHPRVW6RXWKHDVWHUO\FRUQHURIWKDWSDUFHORIODQGGHVFULEHGLQWKH:DUUDQW\'HHGUHFRUGHG$XJXVW 1993 as Reception No. 93057436; The next Two (2) courses are along the Easterly lines of that parcel of land described in the Warranty Deed recorded August 12, 1993 as Reception No. 93057436: 7+(1&(DORQJWKHDUFRIDFXUYHFRQFDYHWRWKH1RUWKZHVWDGLVWDQFHRIIHHWVDLGFXUYHKDVD5DGLXVRIIHHWD'HOWDRIƒ ´DQGLVVXEWHQGHGE\D&KRUGEHDULQJ1RUWK ƒ ´(DVWDGLVWDQFHRIIHHWWRD3RLQWRI7DQJHQF\ 7+(1&(1RUWKƒ ´(DVWDGLVWDQFHRIIHHWWRWKH1RUWKHDVWFRUQHURIWKDWSDUFHORIODQGGHVFULEHGLQWKH:DUUDQW\'HHGUHFRUGHG$XJXVWDV5HFHSWLRQ1R 7+(1&(6RXWKƒ ´(DVWDORQJWKH(DVWHUO\SURORQJDWLRQRIWKDWSDUFHORIODQGGHVFULEHGLQWKH:DUUDQW\'HHGUHFRUGHG$XJXVWDV5HFHSWLRQ1RDGLVWDQFHRI feet to the Westerly line of the Brittany Knolls P.U.D. Filing No. 1 recorded April 27, 1987 as Reception No. 87023710 of the Records of Larimer County; 7+(1&(6RXWKƒ ´(DVWDORQJVDLG:HVWHUO\OLQHDGLVWDQFHRIIHHWWRWKH POINT OF BEGINNING . Said parcel of land contains 13.768 acres, more or less (), and is subject to any rights-of-way or other easements of record or as now existing on said described parcel of land. EX FIRE HYDRANT 112.00' MOCK STATION 151.00' 169.63' 179.83' 117.68' PROPOSED WATER QUALITY / DETENTION POND VINYL CLAD CHAIN LINK FENCE (TYP) VINYL CLAD CHAIN LINK FENCE (TYP) 15' FROM CURB PROPOSED GARAGE ADDITION 16,240 sf 22' HEIGHT REALIGNED SWALE REALIGNED SWALE ENHANCED BERMS FOR SCREENING ZONE E - EMPLOYMENT CONCRETE TRAINING AREA EXISTING VEGETATION AND IMPROVMENTS TO REMAIN EXISTING VEGETATION AND IMPROVMENTS TO REMAIN EXISTING VEGETATION AND IMPROVMENTS TO REMAIN EXISTING VEGETATION AND IMPROVMENTS TO REMAIN TRILBY RD PORTNER ROAD NATURALIZED DRAINAGE CHANNEL NATURALIZED DRAINAGE CHANNEL PEDESTRIAN CROSSING EXISTING BUILDING AND IMPROVMENTS TO REMAIN CONCRETE CONCRETE EXISTING 3 RAIL FENCE EXPANDED CHASSIS WASH 80 REGULAR AND 2 ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES TO REMAIN EXISTING BUILDING TO REMAIN EXISTING BUILDING TO REMAIN 46.73' 135.15' SITE BOUNDARY LIMIT OF DEVELOPMENT SITE BOUNDARY LIMIT OF DEVELOPMENT SITE BOUNDARY SITE BOUNDARY LIMIT OF DEVELOPMENT SITE BOUNDARY 145.00' 33.10' 20' EMERGENCY ACCESS ALIGNMENT 8.00' LANDSCAPE BUFFER SEE L1.0 FOR PLANTING DRAINAGE ALIGNMENT 21.77' PROPOSED ROW EXISTING TRILBY RD / COUNTY RD 34 COLLEGE AVE / US 287 S LEMAY AVE E SKYWAY DR BRITTANY DR PORTNER RD ZONE : E ZONE : POL ZONE : UE ZONE : RL ZONE : RL ZONE : POL ZONE : C ZONE : LMN ZONE RL ZONE : POL ZONE : RL ZONE : POL ZONE : RL ZONE : LMN ZONE : CS ZONE : LMN ZONE : RL ZONE : LMN ZONE : RL ZONE : RL ZONE : LMN PROJECT SITE ROOT BALL OF CONTAINER PLANTS VERTICALLY WITH KNIFE, CUT ANY SPIRALING ROOTS WHERE THEY EMERGE FROM SOIL BALL. MULCH FORM SAUCER WITH 4" CONTINUOUS RIM FINISH GRADE PLANTING MIX. WATER TO SETTLE, DO NOT TAMP 3 Tree Protection Specifications The following tree protection specifications should be followed to the maximum extent feasible. (1) Within the drip line of any protected existing tree, there shall be no cut or fill over a four-inch depth unless a qualified arborist or forester has evaluated and approved the disturbance. (2) All protected existing trees shall be pruned to the City of Fort Collins Forestry standards. (3) Prior to and during construction, barriers shall be erected around all protected existing trees with such barriers to be of orange fencing a minimum of four (4) feet in height, secured with metal 7SRVWVQRFORVHUWKDQVL[  IHHWIURPWKHWUXQNRURQHKDOI ò RIWKHGULSOLQHZKLFKHYHULVJUHDWHU There shall be no storage or movement of equipment, material, debris or fill within the fenced tree protection zone. (4) During the construction stage of development, the applicant shall prevent the cleaning of equipment or material or the storage and disposal of waste material such as paints, oils, solvents, asphalt, concrete, motor oil or any other material harmful to the life of a tree within the drip line of any protected tree or group of trees. (5) No damaging attachment, wires, signs or permits may be fastened to any protected tree. (6) Large property areas containing protected trees and separated from construction or land clearing areas, road rights-of-way and utility easements may be "ribboned off," rather than erecting protective fencing around each tree as required in subsection (G)(3) above. This may be accomplished by placing metal t-post stakes a maximum of fifty (50) feet apart and tying ribbon or rope from stake-to-stake along the outside perimeters of such areas being cleared. (7) The installation of utilities, irrigation lines or any underground fixture requiring excavation deeper than six (6) inches shall be accomplished by boring under the root system of protected existing trees at a minimum depth of twenty-four (24) inches. The auger distance is established from the face of the tree (outer bark) and is scaled from tree diameter at breast height as described in the chart in section 3.2.1 g of the Fort Collins Land Use Code. Tree Transplanting notes: 1. All trees to be reviewed by Ralph Zentz and David Jordan prior to Transplanting or Removal. If any trees that are schedule for Removal are able to be transplanted, or trees scheduled for Transplant need to be removed, please contact the Landscape Architect for coordination. 2. All trees to be transplanted with a minimum 100" or 9 year tree spade. 3. All trees to be transplanted in March if possible, if not any time in the Oct 15th to May 1st window will be acceptible. 4. All trees to be staked, fertilized and watered in after transplant. Mitigation trees shall meet the following minimum size requirements: (a) Canopy Shade Trees 3.0" caliper balled and burlap or equivalent (b) Ornamental Trees 2.5" caliper balled and burlap or equivalent (c) Evergreen Trees 8' height balled and burlap or equivalent HALF OF DRIP LINE MIN. 6' T-POST WITH 4 STAKES PER TREE DRIVEN (MIN. 18") FIRMLY INTO SUBGRADE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION NOTES: 1. FENCING TO CONSIST OF 5' HEIGHT ORANGE PLASTIC CONSTRUCTION FENCING TIED TO POST WITH METAL WIRE. FENCING SHALL REMAIN UNTIL CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLELTELY FINISHED. 2. SEE PLANT PROTECTION NOTES THIS SHEET. CONSTRUCTION BARRIER FENCING NTS 4 TREE PROTECTION T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 D1 D2 D3 M1 T9 M4 M3 M6 M5 M8 M7 M9 D4 D5 PROPOSED WATER QUALITY / DETENTION POND REALIGNED SWALE BLACK VINYL CLAD CHAIN LINK FENCE (TYP) REPAIR ALL DISTURBED AREAS WITH NATIVE SEED MIX PROTECT EXISTING TREES IN PLACE SEE DETAIL ON L1.1 (TYP) EXISTING TRANSFORT BUILDING PROPOSED GARAGE ADDITION TRANSPLANTED TREES SEE NOTES ON SHEET L1.1(TYP) CONCRETE DETENTION BOTTOM SEED MIX MODERATE HYDROZONE SIDESLOPE DETENTION MIX MODERATE HYDROZONE BRT STATION TURF REINFORCEMENT MAT (TYP) NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE ROCK MULCH BETWEEN FENCE AND NATIVE SEED WOOD MULCH UNDER TREES ROCK MULCH BETWEEN TREES LOW HYDROZONE MODERATE HYDROZONE (1472 SF) NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE RECONTOURED BERMS TO PROVIDE SCREENING FROM ADJACENT PROPERTY OWNERS WOOD MULCH UNDER TREES ROCK MULCH BETWEEN TREES 20' EMERGENCY ACCESS ALIGNMENT DRINAGE ALIGNMENT 6' UTILITY EASEMENT NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE LOT1 598,965 sq. ft. 13.750 acres M10 M2 (2) MS (2) PM (3) CC (2) PM (3) PB (3) BA (2) VW (3) JE (3) VW (2) JE (3) VW (2) JE (3) VW (3) JE (2) VW (5) BA PROPOSED WATER QUALITY / DETENTION POND REALIGNED SWALE BLACK VINYL CLAD CHAIN LINK FENCE (TYP) REPAIR ALL DISTURBED AREAS WITH NATIVE SEED MIX PROTECT EXISTING TREES IN PLACE SEE DETAIL ON L1.1 (TYP) EXISTING TRANSFORT BUILDING PROPOSED GARAGE ADDITION TRANSPLANTED TREES SEE NOTES ON SHEET L1.1(TYP) CONCRETE DETENTION BOTTOM SEED MIX MODERATE HYDROZONE SIDESLOPE DETENTION MIX MODERATE HYDROZONE BRT STATION TURF REINFORCEMENT MAT (TYP) NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE ROCK MULCH BETWEEN FENCE AND NATIVE SEED WOOD MULCH UNDER TREES ROCK MULCH BETWEEN TREES LOW HYDROZONE MODERATE HYDROZONE (1472 SF) NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE RECONTOURED BERMS TO PROVIDE SCREENING FROM ADJACENT PROPERTY OWNERS WOOD MULCH UNDER TREES ROCK MULCH BETWEEN TREES 20' EMERGENCY ACCESS ALIGNMENT DRINAGE ALIGNMENT 6' UTILITY EASEMENT NATIVE SEED MIX VERY LOW HYDROZONE LOT1 598,965 sq. ft. 13.750 acres (11) PS-T (2) GI PL.LAM. Plastic Laminate P.T. Pressure-Treated P.TL. Paper Towel Dispenser PLYWD. Plywood PNT. Paint R.D. Roof Drain R.O. Rough Opening R.T.U. Roof - Top Unit REINF. Reinforce or Reinforcing RESIL. Resilient (flooring or base) REQ'D Required RLG. Rolling RND. Round RW. Redwood S.AC.TL. Suspended Acoustical Tile S.C. Solid Core (wood) S.D. Soap Dispenser S.S. Stainless Steel SAIL.CRS. Sailor Course (masonry) STL. Steel T.P. Toilet Paper Dispenser TEMP. Tempered (glass) T.O. Top Of T.S. Tube Steel TYP. Typical U.N.O. Unless Noted Otherwise V.C.T. Vinyl Composition Tile V. Vent VERT. Vertical V.T.R. Vent Thru Roof V.WC. Vinyl Wallcovering W/ With W/O Without WD. Wood A1 1 Property Line Existing Contour New Contour Easement / Setback Sanitary Sewer Water Line Gas Line Storm Drain Window Type Drawing Title Drawing Number Sheet Number Scale Room Name Room Number 10 10 SS W G SD Datum Spot Elevation ? A 1111 AAAA1111 DWGTTL DWG TTL 1/4" =1'-0" ROOM NAME 1 A1 Wall Elevation Detail 1 A1 Building Section 1 A1 Wall Section Grid Line A Batt Insulation Granular Fill Wood Blocking Precast Concrete Finish Wood Dimensional Wood Plywood Brick Stone Concrete Masonry Cast in Place Conc. Steel Rigid Insulation Gypsum Board Earth ALA PROJECT NO. FILE NAME: 712 WHALERS WAY SUITE, B-100 FORT COLLINS, CO 80525 (970) 223-1820 www.aller-lingle-massey.com ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS MATERIALS VICINITY MAP DRAWING INDEX LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: CONTACT: CIVIL ENGINEER: CONTACT: 8/8/2012 11:06:53 AM 6570 Portner Road, Fort Collins, CO 80525 TRANSFORT FACILITY EXPANSION CITY OF FORT COLLINS C ALLER-LINGLE-MASSEY 2012 0843.10 0843.10−Transfort.rvt GENERAL C0.0 COVER SHEET C0.1 GENERAL NOTES C1.0 EXISTING & DEMOLITION PLAN C2.0 OVERALL UTILITY PLAN C3.0 HORIZONTAL CONTROL PLAN C3.1 CHASSIS WASH C4.0 GRADING & EROSION CONTROL PLAN C5.0 SITE DETAILS CIVIL ARCHITECTURAL S0.1 GENERAL NOTES S1.1 CHASSIS WASH EXP. S1.2 GARAGE ADDITION FOUNDATION PLAN S1.3 GARAGE ADDITION SLAB PLAN S1.4 GARAGE ADDITION FRAMING PLAN S5.1 FOUNDATION DETAILS S5.2 FRAMING DETAILS S5.3 FRAMING DETAILS STRUCTURAL M1.0 MECHANICAL SITE PLAN M1.1 CHASSIS WASH/SERVICE PIT MECHANICAL PLAN M1.2 GARAGE ADDITION MECHANICAL PLAN M2.1 LEGEND, SCHEDULE & DETAILS MECHANICAL E1.0 DETAILS E2.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN E3.0 ONE-LINE DIAGRAM E4.0 GARAGE ADDITION ELECTRICAL PLAN E5.0 CHASSIS WASH/ MAINTENANCE ELECTRICAL PLAN ELECTRICAL A1.1 CHASSIS WASH/ SERVICE PIT FLOOR PLAN A1.2 GARAGE ADDITION A2.1 ROOF PLANS A4.1 ELEVATIONS A5.1 CHASSIS WASH BUILDING SECTIONS A5.2 GARAGE SECTIONS A6.1 WALL SECTIONS A7.1 DETAILS, DOOR SCHEDULE & TYPES A7.2 DETAILS A7.3 VEHICLE GATES G0.1 REFERENCE PLAN NORTH G0.2 CODE PLAN Ron Kechter City of Fort Collins, Operations Services 117 N. Mason Fort Collins, CO 80522-0580 (970) 221-6227 D1.1 DEMOLITION PLAN Pete Loris Loris and Associates 2585 Trail Ridge Drive East Lafayette, CO 80026 (303) 444-2073 Roger Abrahamson Abrahamson Engineering 3101 Kintzley Court, Unit D LaPorte, CO 80535 (970)221-2569 Kate Hodgson Electrical Systems Consultants 3540 JFK Parkway Fort Collins, CO 80525 (970)224-9100 Jim Sell Jim Sell Design 153 W. Mountain Avenue Fort Collins, CO 80524 (970)484-1921 100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AUGUST 6, 2012 ALM PROJECT # 0843.10 Jason Claeys JVA, Incorporated 25 Old Town Square, Suite 200 Fort Collins, CO 80524 (970) 225-9099 LANDSCAPE L1.0 LANDSCAPE PLAN L1.1 TREE MITIGATION PLAN SP1.0 SITE PLAN 1 SURVEY/ PLAT Total Flow (cfs) Tailwater Elevation (ft) I-1 4,941.10 4,939.10 Absolute 4,939.52 4,939.52 4,939.67 4,939.67 1.27 1.27 P-1 18 inch 1 4,939.10 4,938.00 75.00 0.014667 4,939.52 4,938.75 4,939.67 4,938.78 1.27 O-1 4,939.50 4,938.00 4,938.75 4,938.75 4,938.75 4,938.75 1.27 4,938.75 ( 10 ) 28 . 5 t c I P + = Page 7 of 7 AREA (acres) LENGTH (ft) SLOPE (ft/ft) ti (min) LENGTH Table RO-2 (ft) SUB-BASIN DATA INITIAL/OVERLAND TIME (ti) () 0 . 33 0 . 395 1 . 1 5 S C L ti − = t c = t i + t t 0 . 5 VCvS = w 10 180 = + tc L V tt 60 L = Page 6 of 7 28 . 5 t c I P + = Page 4 of 7 tc Urban Check Final tc (min) tc=t i+tt SLOPE (min) (ft/ft) VEL (ft/s) tt (min) () 0 . 33 0 . 395 1 . 1 5 S C L ti − = t c = t i + t t 0 . 5 VCvS = w 10 180 = + tc L V tt 60 L = Page 3 of 7 o D A 576 = 2598 PondCalcs.xls - Outlet Orifice Plate Sizing Page 7 of 7 Jim Sell Design, Inc. POND 2 5 2 3 H V Q CLH C H ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎝ = + ⎛ 2598 PondCalcs.xls - Spillway Page 5 of 7 Jim Sell Design, Inc. 655 0.14 9,243 0.51 0.14 5,375 3,869 655 0.49 40,175 0.51 0.65 25,509 14,666 680 0.14 9,322 0.51 0.14 5,575 3,746 680 0.48 40,515 0.51 0.65 26,461 14,054 705 0.13 9,397 0.51 0.14 5,776 3,621 705 0.46 40,845 0.51 0.65 27,414 13,431 730 0.13 9,471 0.51 0.14 5,977 3,494 730 0.45 41,165 0.51 0.65 28,366 12,799 755 0.13 9,543 0.51 0.14 6,177 3,365 755 0.44 41,476 0.51 0.65 29,319 12,158 780 0.12 9,613 0.51 0.14 6,378 3,234 780 0.43 41,779 0.51 0.65 30,271 11,508 805 0.12 9,680 0.51 0.14 6,579 3,102 805 0.42 42,074 0.51 0.65 31,224 10,851 830 0.12 9,747 0.51 0.14 6,779 2,967 830 0.41 42,362 0.51 0.65 32,176 10,186 855 0.11 9,811 0.51 0.14 6,980 2,831 855 0.40 42,643 0.51 0.65 33,129 9,514 880 0.11 9,874 0.51 0.14 7,181 2,693 880 0.39 42,917 0.51 0.65 34,081 8,836 905 0.11 9,936 0.51 0.14 7,382 2,554 905 0.38 43,185 0.51 0.65 35,034 8,151 930 0.11 9,996 0.51 0.14 7,582 2,414 930 0.37 43,447 0.51 0.64 35,986 7,460 955 0.10 10,055 0.51 0.14 7,783 2,272 955 0.37 43,703 0.51 0.64 36,939 6,764 980 0.10 10,113 0.51 0.14 7,984 2,129 980 0.36 43,954 0.51 0.64 37,891 6,062 1005 0.10 10,169 0.51 0.14 8,184 1,985 1005 0.35 44,199 0.51 0.64 38,844 5,355 1030 0.10 10,225 0.51 0.14 8,385 1,840 1030 0.35 44,440 0.51 0.64 39,796 4,643 1055 0.10 10,279 0.51 0.14 8,586 1,693 1055 0.34 44,676 0.51 0.64 40,749 3,927 1080 0.10 10,332 0.51 0.14 8,786 1,546 1080 0.33 44,907 0.51 0.64 41,702 3,206 1105 0.09 10,384 0.51 0.14 8,987 1,397 1105 0.33 45,134 0.51 0.64 42,654 2,480 1130 0.09 10,436 0.51 0.14 9,188 1,248 1130 0.32 45,357 0.51 0.64 43,607 1,751 1155 0.09 10,486 0.51 0.14 9,388 1,098 1155 0.32 45,577 0.51 0.64 44,559 1,017 1180 0.09 10,536 0.51 0.14 9,589 947 1180 0.31 45,792 0.51 0.64 45,512 280 1205 0.09 10,584 0.51 0.14 9,790 795 1205 0.31 46,003 0.51 0.64 46,464 -461 1230 0.09 10,632 0.51 0.14 9,991 642 1230 0.30 46,211 0.51 0.64 47,417 -1,205 1255 0.08 10,679 0.51 0.14 10,191 488 1255 0.30 46,416 0.51 0.64 48,369 -1,953 1280 0.08 10,726 0.51 0.14 10,392 334 1280 0.29 46,617 0.51 0.64 49,322 -2,704 1305 0.08 10,771 0.51 0.14 10,593 179 1305 0.29 46,816 0.51 0.64 50,274 -3,459 1330 0.08 10,816 0.51 0.14 10,793 23 1330 0.28 47,011 0.51 0.64 51,227 -4,216 1355 0.08 10,860 0.51 0.14 10,994 -134 1355 0.28 47,203 0.51 0.64 52,179 -4,976 1380 0.08 10,904 0.51 0.14 11,195 -291 1380 0.27 47,393 0.51 0.64 53,132 -5,739 1405 0.08 10,947 0.51 0.14 11,395 -448 1405 0.27 47,579 0.51 0.64 54,084 -6,505 1430 0.08 10,989 0.51 0.14 11,596 -607 1430 0.27 47,763 0.51 0.64 55,037 -7,274 1455 0.08 11,031 0.50 0.14 11,797 -766 1455 0.26 47,945 0.50 0.64 55,989 -8,045 1480 0.07 11,072 0.50 0.14 11,997 -925 1480 0.26 48,124 0.50 0.64 56,942 -8,818 1505 0.07 11,113 0.50 0.14 12,198 -1,085 1505 0.26 48,300 0.50 0.64 57,894 -9,594 Mod. FAA Minor Storage Volume (cubic ft.) = 5,273 Mod. FAA Major Storage Volume (cubic ft.) = 22,202 Mod. FAA Minor Storage Volume (acre-ft.) = 0.1211 Mod. FAA Major Storage Volume (acre-ft.) = 0.5097 DETENTION VOLUME BY THE MODIFIED FAA METHOD (See USDCM Volume 2 Storage Chapter for description of method) Transfort Facility Expansion Determination of MAJOR Detention Volume Using Modified FAA Method (For catchments less than 160 acres only. For larger catchments, use hydrograph routing method) (NOTE: for catchments larger than 90 acres, CUHP hydrograph and routing are recommended) UDFCD DETENTION VOLUME ESTIMATING WORKBOOK Version 2.2, Released January 2010 Determination of MINOR Detention Volume Using Modified FAA Method 2598 UD_Detention_2.2.xls, Modified FAA 9/15/2010, 7:53 AM + = 47 0.96 1.64 3.36 0.97 -0.01 1.66 -0.02 3.39 -0.03 48 0.95 1.62 3.31 0.96 -0.01 1.64 -0.02 3.34 -0.03 49 0.94 1.60 3.27 0.95 -0.01 1.61 -0.01 3.30 -0.03 50 0.92 1.58 3.23 0.93 -0.01 1.59 -0.01 3.25 -0.02 51 0.91 1.56 3.18 0.92 -0.01 1.57 -0.01 3.21 -0.03 52 0.90 1.54 3.14 0.91 -0.01 1.55 -0.01 3.17 -0.03 53 0.89 1.52 3.10 0.90 -0.01 1.53 -0.01 3.13 -0.03 54 0.88 1.50 3.07 0.89 -0.01 1.51 -0.01 3.09 -0.02 55 0.87 1.48 3.03 0.88 -0.01 1.50 -0.02 3.06 -0.03 56 0.86 1.47 2.99 0.87 -0.01 1.48 -0.01 3.02 -0.03 57 0.85 1.45 2.96 0.86 -0.01 1.46 -0.01 2.98 -0.02 58 0.84 1.43 2.92 0.85 -0.01 1.44 -0.01 2.95 -0.03 59 0.83 1.42 2.89 0.84 -0.01 1.43 -0.01 2.92 -0.03 60 0.82 1.40 2.86 0.83 -0.01 1.41 -0.01 2.88 -0.02 0.00 0.02 0.00 C 3 2 1 1 ( C t c ) I C P + = Conservation Service Web Soil Survey National Cooperative Soil Survey 7/11/2010 Page 1 of 4 Section 05120 Structural Steel 05200 Steel Joists and Joist Girders 05300 Metal Decking 05999 Miscellaneous Metals DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 06160 Exterior Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing 06200 Finish Carpentry DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07220 Roof and Deck Insulation 07221 Tapered Rigid Insulation 07536 Thermoplastic Sheet Roofing – Fully- Adhered 07621 Galvanized Metal Flashing and Trim 07710 Prefabricated Roof Specialties 07810 Skylights 07900 Sealants and Joint Fillers DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08110 Standard Steel Doors and Frames 08331 Steel Sectional Overhead Doors 08700 Finish Hardware DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09900 Painting DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10210 Metal Wall Louvers 10430 Signage 10520 Fire Protection Specialties DIVISIONS 11-14 Not used. non- competitive award None None unless non- competitiv e award None None unless non- competitive award II Non State Grantees a. Contracts below SAT ($100,000) b. Contracts above $100,000/Capital Projects Yes3 Yes3 Those imposed on non-state Grantee pass thru to Contractor Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Sources of Authority: 1 49 USC 5325 (a) 2 49 CFR 633.17 3 18 CFR 18.36 (i)